Today’s News 27th March 2023

  • Germany To Expel 30 Russian Diplomats As Spying Fears Ratchet
    Germany To Expel 30 Russian Diplomats As Spying Fears Ratchet

    Russia’s diplomatic links to Europe continue to collapse at a moment nuclear rhetoric is increasing and growing more dangerous. Simple communication among governments also continues to grow worse, making conflict de-escalation among major powers all the more difficult.

    Germany announced Saturday that it is planning to expel more than 30 Russian diplomats from Berlin. German Federal Minister for Foreign Affairs Annalena Baerbock indicated to local media plans for the new wave of expulsions Saturday.

    Russian embassy in Berlin, Germany, via AP

    A German media source cited officials as saying “More decisive action must be taken against Moscow’s spies.”

    Allegations of spying have driven large-scale expulsions at various times over the past two years, put have picked up in frequency and scale particularly after the Feb.24, 2022 Russian invasion of Ukraine.

    Germany has claimed that the presence of Russian intelligence agents and officials in Berlin has greatly increased of late, with German officials asserting the embassy is now staffed even better than during the Cold War.

    Other countries which are backers of Ukraine have also continued to take punitive measures against Russian diplomats. 

    Number of Russian diplomats expelled worldwide from 2000 to 2022, by country”:

    figures as of late January 2023.

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    “Last month, Estonia expelled 21 Russian embassy staffers, saying it would host only eight diplomatic officials on its territory — matching the size of Tallinn’s team in Moscow,” Politico reports over the weekend. “The Kremlin responded by kicking Estonian Ambassador Margus Laidre out of Russia — the first ambassadorial expulsion from the country in the year since Russia launched its full-scale invasion of Ukraine,” the publication added. “Tallinn then ended Russian Ambassador Vladimir Lipayev’s tenure on Pikk Street.”

    This and other Russian embassies and consulates in Europe have faced accusations of acting as ‘spy hubs’ – far beyond what’s considered the ‘normal’ presence of intel agents and officials. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 03/27/2023 – 02:45

  • Zelensky Admits Ukraine Already Ran Out Of Ammo
    Zelensky Admits Ukraine Already Ran Out Of Ammo

    Authored by Andrew Korybko via TheAutomaticEarth.com,

    The US-led West’s Mainstream Media (MSM) began reporting more accurately on the military-strategic dynamics of the NATO-Russian proxy war in Ukraine since the start of the year, but the true test of their comparatively improved integrity will be whether they raise awareness about Zelensky’s latest damning admission. In an interview with Japanese newspaper Yomiuri Shimbun, he candidly told his interlocutors that “We do not have ammunition. For us the situation in the East is not good.”

    This is a major revelation for several reasons.

    • First, it proves that Russia is winning NATO’s self-declared “race of logistics in the sense that its armed forces still have ammo to continue fighting while the West’s Ukrainian proxies already ran out of that which their patrons provided over the past year.

    • Second, the aforesaid aid that was already extended to this crumbling former Soviet Republic exceeds $100 billion, which makes Russia’s leading position in this “race of logistics” all the more impressive.

    • Third, Zelensky’s admission adds credence to what the Washington Post recently reported regarding how poorly Kiev’s forces are faring in this conflict, especially its “severe ammunition shortages” that one of its sources spoke about. Fourth, the preceding points drastically decrease the chances that Kiev’s upcoming counteroffensive will achieve much of anything and actually make it increasingly likely that such a move would be an epic mistake that could ultimately lead to a decisive Russian breakthrough.

    • And finally, it can therefore be expected that Zelensky and his agents of influence across the West will beg for even more aid, arguing that the failure to pay up would risking making their prior investments in this proxy war all for naught if Kiev ends up losing to Russia. The problem, however, is that no amount of money can make ammunition appear out of thin air since it requires a lot of time to scale production accordingly to meet these newfound exorbitant needs.

    The very fact that Ukraine is out of ammunition proves that the West’s defeat in its self-declared “race of logistics” with Russia might already be a fait accompli by this point since it’s clear that Kiev can’t keep pace with its opponent despite being backed by all of NATO’s military-industrial capacity. Zelensky almost certainly didn’t realize that his candid admission essentially amounted to this, but it’s presently unclear whether the MSM will inform their audience about this or not.

    On the one hand, doing so could contribute to his forthcoming begging campaign, but it could also backfire if taxpayers start asking whether it’s worth ponying up even more money if Ukraine already ran out of ammo despite the over $100 billion in aid that it’s received thus far. After all, if that astronomical sum wasn’t enough to keep their guns firing, then there’s no telling how much will be needed for Kiev to reconquer more of its lost territory like it intends to do.

    Not only that, but as was earlier explained, no amount of money can make ammunition appear out of thin air. Quite clearly, fundamental changes in the Ukrainian Armed Forces are needed in order to indefinitely perpetuate this conflict like the US is plotting to do, but its fighters can’t immediately transition to using exclusively Western equipment when they’re used to operating Soviet-era wares. This poses a dilemma since Russia keeps moving further ahead in this “race of logistics” as each day goes by.

    Objectively speaking, the military-strategic dynamics are trending in the Kremlin’s favor, which would ordinarily compel Kiev to seriously consider China’s peace plan if it wasn’t for its American overlords preventing it from doing so. The longer that Zelensky remains resistant to the very thought of a ceasefire, the greater the chances are that Russia will transform its growing advantage in its “race of logistics” with NATO into a decisive victory that could result in Ukraine losing even more territory.

    *  *  *

    Support the Automatic Earth via Patreon.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 03/27/2023 – 02:00

  • It's Getting Ugly Out There
    It’s Getting Ugly Out There

    Authored by Brendan O’Neill via The Spectator,

    The shameful persecution of Posie Parker in New Zealand

    This is what it must have been like when women were marched to the stake.

    Yesterday in Auckland the British women’s rights campaigner Posie Parker found herself surrounded by a deranged, heaving mob.

    She had tomato soup and placards thrown in her face. She was doused with water. Huge men screamed insults and expletives in her face. The shoving of the crowd became so intense that Parker feared for her life. ‘I genuinely thought that if I fell to the floor I would never get up again’, she said. ‘My children would lose their mother and my husband would lose his wife.’

    It was a truly chilling spectacle. The mobs’ faces were twisted into masks of feral hatred. They ranted in frenzy as the diminutive Parker, her bottle-blonde hair stained orange from the soup that had been dumped on her, desperately tried to make her way to the safety of a police car. It was a ritualistic shaming of a witch, a violent purging of a heretic.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Next time you’re reading a history book and find yourself wondering how Salem came to be consumed by such swirling hysteria, watch the clips of Posie’s persecution in New Zealand. This is how it happens. This is how the fear of witches can overrule reason and unleash the darkest, most punitive passions of the mob.

    And what is Parker’s crime?

    What did this witch do?

    She said, ‘A woman is an adult human female’.

    That’s it.

    Parker, whose real name is Kellie-Jay Keen-Minshull, is well known for her criticism of the ideology of transgenderism. She thinks a man never becomes a woman, no matter how many hormones he takes or surgeries he undergoes. She thinks if you were born male, you will die male, and in the time in between you have no right whatsoever to enter any women-only space.

    This is heresy.

    Dissenting from the gospel of gender ideology is to the 21st century what dissenting from the actual gospels was to the 15th. And so Parker must be punished. It was a modern-day stoning, so mercifully they only threw soup and water and planks of cardboard at the blasphemer.

    Parker organises public events called ‘Let Women Speak’. She has done it across the UK, in parts of the US, and for the past couple of weeks she’s been doing it in Australia and New Zealand.

    It’s a genius initiative. She knows these gatherings of women who merely want to give voice to their profane belief that sex can never be changed will draw out crowds of intolerant trans activists and their allies. She knows the ‘Be Kind’ mob will do everything in its power to stop women from speaking. And she knows it will all brilliantly illustrate her core belief: that trans activism is misogyny in disguise, misogyny in drag, if you like, and that it has devoted itself to silencing women who believe in biology.

    Australia and New Zealand played their parts brilliantly in Parker’s clever scheme. From Melbourne to Canberra, Hobart to Auckland, huge crowds of the right-on turned up to drown out the voices of the pesky women who dare to call men ‘men’. ‘Let women speak’, Parker says. ‘No’, says the mob. She incites them to confess their misogyny and intolerance in full public view. And they do. 

    Auckland was the worst. At Albert park in the centre of the city yesterday, the mob could not hide its vengeful loathing of the uppity women who disagree with its ideologies. Parker is a new kind of witch, one who willingly submits herself to a witch-trial, so that the rest of us might see just how dogmatic and unforgiving the new witch-hunters are. I am full of admiration for her. Her courage is shining a light on the visceral intolerance that advances under the banner of identity politics.

    The events in Auckland should be a wake-up call for liberals everywhere. We glimpsed the iron fist of authoritarianism that lurks in the velvet glove of ‘Be Kind’. The misogynistic streak in trans extremism is undeniable now. Watch enraged men kicking down metal barriers so that they might get closer to the witch Posie and tell me this isn’t sexism masquerading as radicalism. Witness the crowing of men who are delighted that the mob made the ‘coward TERF’ run away and tell me this isn’t chauvinism on steroids. Behold the use of megaphones and expletive-laden chants and physical menace to silence a woman and tell me this isn’t a sexist, censorious crusade against women’s freedom of speech.

    That mob in Auckland did not emerge out of thin air. No, it was a brutish manifestation of a regressive idea that has been taking hold for some years. Namely, that it should be forbidden to dissent from gender ideology. That it is bigotry to state biological facts. That it ought to be a punishable offence – whether that punishment is being No Platformed or sacked or having objects thrown in your face – to say men are men and women are women.

    To see where censorship ends up, just look at those grimacing agitators in Auckland, hatred spreading like a current through their number, as they fight with every fibre of their being to prevent the expression of a critical idea. Censorship begets bigotry. It begets violence itself. For the more we tell people that certain words will hurt them, the more we witlessly incite people to hurt those who dare to utter certain words.

    That mob was drunk on sanctimony. This is what happens when we tell people their identity is the most important thing in the world and that anything that so much as grazes their self-esteem is an outrage that must be crushed.

    We nurture a generation of navel-gazing Torquemadas.

    Posie has exposed them, yet again, and for that she deserves our thanks. This time round, the witches might just win. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 23:30

  • How Much Does A Bottle Of Water Cost?
    How Much Does A Bottle Of Water Cost?

    Buying bottled water is a luxury that not everyone in the world can afford.

    Statista’s Anna Fleck reports that a 1.5-liter bottle of water from a local brand costs an average of $0.70 globally, according to 92 countries analyzed in September 2022 by the website GlobalProductPrices.com.

    Infographic: How Much Does a Bottle of Water Cost? | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Australia and the Philippines are the markets where bottled water is the most expensive, at US$2.02 per bottle.

    Singapore, Uruguay, Puerto Rico and Norway also have some of the highest prices, with between US$1.59 and US$1.74 per 1.5 liters of bottled water.

    On the other hand, countries such as Egypt and Tunisia have the lowest prices, at $0.14 and $0.20, respectively.

    In Iran and Bangladesh, a bottle of water is also available for less than $0.25.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 23:00

  • Prosecutor Admits DC Police Officers Acted As Provocateurs At US Capitol On Jan. 6
    Prosecutor Admits DC Police Officers Acted As Provocateurs At US Capitol On Jan. 6

    Authored by Joseph M. Hanneman via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A federal prosecutor admitted in court papers that three D.C. Metropolitan Police Department undercover officers acted as provocateurs at the northwest steps of the U.S. Capitol on Jan. 6, 2021.

    Two members of the Metropolitan Police Department’s Electronic Surveillance Unit approach the northwest side of the Capitol on Jan. 6, 2021. (Metropolitan Police Department/Screenshot via The Epoch Times)

    The admission came in a March 24 filing before U.S. District Judge Rudolph Contreras that seeks to keep video footage shot by the officers under court seal.

    Prosecutors accused the case defendant—William Pope of Topeka, Kansas—of an “illegitimate” attempt to unmask the video as part of his alleged strategy to try the case in the news media. Pope filed a motion to remove the court seal on Feb. 21.

    The defendant is not entitled to ‘undesignate’ these videos to share them with unlimited third parties,” said Assistant U.S. Attorney Kelly Moran. “His desire to try his case in the media rather than in a court of law is illegitimate, and the government has met its burden to show the necessity of the protective order.”

    Videos long hidden under court seal have become a major topic, especially with prosecutors disclosing in a number of high-profile Jan. 6 cases the involvement of multiple FBI informants.

    Pope is seeking to lift the court seal on the undercover video as part of his drive to obtain full access to video evidence held by the government. Pope is representing himself in the criminal case being prosecuted against him. At a hearing on March 3, Judge Contreras seemed sympathetic to Pope’s motion to unmask the videos.

    “Officer 1,” a member of the D.C. Metropolitan Police Department’s Electronic Surveillance Unit, shot video while he shouted at protesters to climb the northwest steps to the Capitol on Jan. 6, 2021. (Metropolitan Police Department/Screenshot via The Epoch Times)

    “The officer clearly incited that area, and we still don’t have video from all other undercover MPD,” Pope told The Epoch Times. “And as the numerous informants in the Proud Boys trial demonstrates, we are only just beginning to scratch the surface on FBI involvement.”

    The undercover video—a portion of which posted on Rumble on March 24—shows three members of the MPD’s Electronic Surveillance Unit approach the Capitol’s northwest steps. One of the men, while surveying the crowd, stated, “Someone’s going to get shot.”

    Officer 2 replied, “They’re not going to shoot anybody.”

    Along the edge of the Capitol property, Officer 2 encouraged one protester to go up to the building. “Go join ‘em then,” he said. The man replied, “No, I’ve got my bike to guard.”

    The men engaged in banter on the walk across the west Capitol lawn.

    ‘Never Seen Anything Like This’

    “This is amazing,” Officer 2 said. Officer 1, who was shooting the GoPro video, replied, “Yeah, I’ve never seen anything like this.”

    Nearly 30 members of the Electronic Surveillance Unit were assigned to duty on Jan. 6, some of whom were gathering evidence on crowd activity. Members wore special bands on their left wrists to identify themselves as part of the Electronic Surveillance Unit, according to the MPD’s 96-page Jan. 6 action plan.

    Officer 1 repeatedly joined in chants of “Drain the swamp!” and “Our house! Our house! Our house!”

    A little closer to the Capitol, the video captures a protester shouting, “Joe Biden! We wanna hear you speak, you [expletive] pedophile satanist [expletive]!”

    A short time later, Officer 1 joined the crowd in a “USA!” chant, repeating the phrase five times.

    At the foot of the northwest stairs, someone leaned part of a bicycle rack against the balustrade. As a protester climbed up the makeshift ladder, Officer 1 shouted, “C’mon, man, let’s go! Leave that sh*t.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 22:30

  • "This Is What Armageddon Would Look Like For The US"
    “This Is What Armageddon Would Look Like For The US”

    Biggie:

    “We get guaranteed bank deposits when there’s a bank run,” Barked Biggie Too.

    “We get energy rebates when there’s a war,” continued the Chief Global Strategist for one of Wall Street’s Too-Big-To-Fail affairs.

    “And we got stimmy checks when we had Covid,” bellowed Biggie.

    “What are we gonna get when unemployment starts heading higher?”

    And of course, you never interrupt Biggie when he’s on a roll, so I just nodded.

    Bank activity, commercial real estate, it’s all contracting. Why couldn’t we have a big, nasty recession in the 2nd half?” asked Biggie.

    “If investors start losing faith in US gov’t credibility over the debt ceiling and the poor handling of this banking crisis, and we get the progressives screaming for stimmy checks at the first hint of rising unemployment, then we got a real problem,” said Biggie.

    “They start talking about UBI and it’s over,” he said, dropping to a whisper.

    “And let me tell you what Armageddon is. It’s a -200k non-farm payrolls report that leads to a 50bp rise in long-term bond yields. And that’s where the people running policy are leading us. To be an emerging market.”

     

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 22:00

  • Sunday Satire: 11 Great Reasons To Stay In California
    Sunday Satire: 11 Great Reasons To Stay In California

    Via Babylon Bee,

    According to reports, hundreds of thousands of people have fled California in recent years, citing minor annoyances like aggressive homeless people, increased violent crime, and crippling taxes.

    Some experts believe that by 2030, the only person left in California will be Gavin Newsom – and he’ll spend half his time on his ranch in Montana.

    But all these concerns citizens have may be overblown.

    There’s still a lot to love about the Golden State.

    Here are 11 great reasons to stick around:

    1. Zillow estimates your cardboard box house will be worth $3 million in just a few years – Hoooold – HOOOOOLD!!!

    2. If you identify as black you have a decent chance of scoring millions in reparations soon – Pull a Rachel Dolezal and you can be cashing in big time any day now.

    3. There are beautiful natural sights like the warm glow of forest fires lighting up the skies – We call them “the golden lights,” and they’re magnificent.

    4. Everyone will be gone soon and then there will be no lines at Disneyland – You’ll have to push the button to start up the tea cups yourself, but no more waiting!

    5. Everything at CVS is free – Even better than no waiting – no paying for anything!

    6. When you pay your massive state tax bill, you get a sense of satisfaction that you’re supporting some hobo’s fentanyl addiction – No amount of money saved can make up for that feeling.

    7. Law-abiding citizens don’t have guns, so there is never any crime – It’s science.

    8. There’s great weather outside of fire season, drought season, and deadly mudslide season – There are three days in April without fires, droughts, or mudslides. Enjoy them.

    9. You can ski and surf on the same day, even though you haven’t done either in years – But you can be smug in the knowledge that you could if you really wanted to. (But you don’t). (But you could).

    10. You can go camping right on the sidewalk – No permit required.

    11. Best of all, the government will make all your decisions for you – This is maybe the best reason to stick around: you won’t be burdened with pesky concepts like “liberty” and “personal responsibility.” Good ol’ Gavin will take care of ya.

    Well, that’s all we can think of.

    If these didn’t convince you, then move to Texas and enjoy your lame “freedom” and “guns.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 21:00

  • US "Strongly Urges" Compromise As Massive Protests Erupt Across Israel After Anti-Judicial-Reform Minister Fired
    US “Strongly Urges” Compromise As Massive Protests Erupt Across Israel After Anti-Judicial-Reform Minister Fired

    Update (2045ET): Massive protests have erupted across Israel tonight after PM Netanyhau fired his Defense Minister, a day after he called on the Israeli leader to halt a planned judicial overhaul that has fiercely divided the country.

    As a reminder, Netanyahu and his allies say the plan will restore a balance between the judicial and executive branches and rein in what they see as an interventionist court with liberal sympathies. But critics say the constellation of laws will remove the checks and balances in Israel’s democratic system and concentrate power in the hands of the governing coalition.

    Gallant’s dismissal signaled that Netanyahu will move ahead this week with the overhaul plan, which has sparked mass protests, angered military and business leaders and raised concerns among Israel’s allies.

    “The country is facing the greatest danger since the Yom Kippur War,” writes former Israeli Prime Minister Naftali Bennett.

    “I call on the prime minister to withdraw Galant’s dismissal letter, suspend the reform and begin negotiations until after the Day of Independence.

    Israel’s Consul General has resigned…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Bibi later tweeted “we must all stand strong against refusal.”

    Hundreds of thousands of Israelis took to the streets… in Tel Aviv…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    … and Haifa…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Not everybody is protesting…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Haaretz reports that amid the unprecedented protests that erupted in Israel on Sunday night, several Likud lawmakers and ministers call to stop the highly controversial legislative process of Netanyahu’s judicial reform.

    Additionally, as Nadav Eyal notes, for the first time in history, Israel’s main union, as well as leaders from the banks and the entire business sector, are about to declare a general strike demanding that the government stop the plan to overhaul the judicial system.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Finally, and more ominously, amid chatter across social media of the same, Iran has dropped the c-word:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The situation is definitely escalating, as Joyce Karam summarizes…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Ratcheting up the pressure on Netanyahu, Washington has chimed in:

    We are deeply concerned by today’s developments out of Israel, which further underscore the urgent need for compromise.

    As the President recently discussed with Prime Minister Netanyahu, democratic values have always been, and must remain, a hallmark of the U.S.- Israel relationship.

    Democratic societies are strengthened by checks and balances, and fundamental changes to a democratic system should be pursued with the broadest possible base of popular support.

    We continue to strongly urge Israeli leaders to find a compromise as soon as possible.

    We believe that is the best path forward for Israel and all of its citizens. U.S. support for Israel’s security and democracy remains ironclad.

    Which follows a report earlier in the month of the U.S. State Department has been funding a left-wing organization in Israel that is helping to promote anti-government protest aimed at bringing down Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu and his judicial reforms. The Washington Free Beacon reported Monday that U.S. taxpayer funds have been granted to the Movement for Quality Government (MQG), which has participated in the protests that have rocked Israel for weeks. The protests began after Netanyahu, whose right-wing coalition won a commanding majority in recent elections, began tackling the decades-old problem of the judicial usurpation of power from the legislature.

    And finally, as the crisis is worsening tonight, Bibi has called the leaders of the ruling coalition parties to an emergency meeting on Monday morning.

    *  *  *

    Update (1415ET): In perhaps the least surprising geopolitical move of the day, Israeli PM Benjamin Netanyahu fired his defense minister on Sunday, a day after Yoav Gallant called for a halt to the planned overhaul of Israel’s judiciary that has divided the country.

    Netanyahu’s office did not provide further details.

    As we detailed below, Gallant, a senior member of Netanyahu’s Likud party, became the first to break ranks late Saturday by calling for the legislation to be frozen.

    *  *  *

    In a major development, Israeli defense minister Yoav Gallant on Saturday called for Benjamin Netanyahu’s government to halt its planned judicial reforms, which have prompted enormous protests and are starting to disrupt the country’s military. 

    I see the source of our strength eroding…The rift within our society is widening and penetrating the Israel Defense Forces,said Gallant in a televised evening speech“This is a clear and immediate and tangible danger to the security of the state. I shall not be a party to this.”

    In addition to calling for a suspension of the reforms, Gallant also implored Israelis to stop their enormous protests, which raged even as he spoke. 

    Israeli defense minister Yoav Gallant delivering his remarks on Saturday evening (Defense Ministry photo)

    The coming week could bring high drama and even more upheaval, as the Knesset is expected to hold its final vote on the first aspect of the judicial overhaul: a measure giving the government more power over Supreme Court appointments.  

    Other reforms would allow the Knesset — Israel’s unicameral legislature — to override Supreme Court decisions with a simple majority vote. Others would end the court’s practice of applying a “reasonableness” test when evaluating laws and government actions.

    Critics characterize the scheme as a step deeper into authoritarianism. Some say the moves are in part designed to help Netanyahu terminate his ongoing prosecution on corruption charges. 

    The past ten weeks have seen major public protests all across Israel. Saturday night’s crowds were reportedly the largest yet, estimated in the hundreds of thousands. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Gallant said the Israeli Defense Forces (IDF) are feeling the effects: “The events happening in Israeli society are not staying out of the military. Feelings of rage, disappointment and fear have reached heights we have never seen before,” said Gallant. 

    More pressingly, a growing coalition of Israeli service members — calling themselves Brothers in Arms — are committing to stop showing up for duty in protest of the measures.

    Some say they’ll stay home if the judicial reform passes, but others aren’t waiting — particularly among Israel’s reserve forces. On Friday, two hundred Israeli Air Force reserve pilots signed a letter saying they will not report for two weeks. Reservists are an essential part of Israel’s military, and especially its air force, which has been active in bombing targets across Syria, including the Damascus airport.  

    IDF chief of staff Lt. Gen. Herzi Halevi has already sounded an internal alarm, saying the dip in reservists reporting for duty is now so large that the the military is on the verge of curtailing some operations, according to The New York Times, which quoted three anonymous Israeli officials. Two of those officials are bracing for resignations from full-time service members. 

    Palestinians would surely welcome the curtailing of IDF operations

    Underscoring the divisions caused by the judicial proposal, far-right national security minister Itamar Ben-Gvir lashed out at his fellow cabinet member, urging Netanyahu to fire Gallant, whom he condemned for “succumbing to the pressure of those [IDF members] who threatened to refuse [to report for duty] and are trying to stop the important reform.” 

    Similarly, Israel’s communications minister accused Gallant, a former navy commando, of “giving wind to a military coup.”  

    However, just minutes after Gallant concluded his remarks, two of his fellow Likud party lawmakers endorsed his plea, Haaretz reports. One is the chair of the Knesset’s security and foreign affairs committee, and the other is a person who rarely criticizes Netanyahu.  

    Israel’s agriculture minister and another Likud member reportedly favor a freeze as well. If they went as far as to become “no” votes, that quartet would be sufficient to impede the legislation.  

    On Friday — the day before Gallant’s speech — Netanyahu told reporters:

    “Surrendering to [IDF] refusal is a terrible danger to the state of Israel…The country cannot exist without the IDF. There will not be a nation, it’s very simple. All red lines have been crossed. People who were responsible for the security of the country suddenly adopted this cynicism.” 

    Gallant said he had privately shared his views with Netanyahu, who asked him to delay going public with them. Gallant cancelled plans to speak out on Thursday, but said he now felt compelled to take his message to all Israelis. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

     

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 20:57

  • Morgan Stanley Asks When Will Central Banks Worry More About Financial Stability Than Inflation
    Morgan Stanley Asks When Will Central Banks Worry More About Financial Stability Than Inflation

    By Seth Carpenter, Morgan Stanley chief global economist

    It Ain’t Over ‘Til It’s Over

    Major central banks have hiked rates despite volatility in markets. They collectively said that inflation clearly means it is too soon to conclude that the hiking cycle is over. The banking sector developments haven’t stopped the hiking, and indeed, I have noted that the idea of focusing on financial stability at the expense of inflation is a false dichotomy. Central banks are deliberately tightening financial conditions in order to slow their respective economies and thereby bring inflation down…while hopefully avoiding an unnecessarily painful recession. What the banks disruption does, however, is make it harder to
    calibrate the correct degree of tightening.

    Inflation is clearly the priority for central banks. On March 16, the ECB noted that it projects inflation to stay “too high for too long.” Chair Powell was similarly blunt, saying that “inflation remains too high.” And even though the BoE expects inflation to fall significantly in 2Q23, it worried that a strong labor market and an improving growth outlook could reinforce the persistence of inflation. So, what’s a poor central bank to do?

    Central banks’ main tool is the policy rate. Higher rates tighten financial conditions, which slows economic growth. That chain of causality becomes more important in the current circumstances, because while policy has tightened financial conditions, so too have disruptions in the banking sector. Ideally, central banks would separate the issues, using different tools to deal with macroeconomic issues versus financial stability, but they know an interaction exists. So, they are watching developments in the banking sector to see if continued rate hikes have an outsized or nonlinear effect on financial conditions. To date, their conclusion has been “no.”

    The ECB did not see volatility in financial markets as a reason to pause or to do a smaller hike. Nevertheless, the ECB did not provide particularly strong guidance about what the next policy move would be. It wants more tightening of financial conditions, but it also wants to understand what is in train. Similarly, the Fed followed through on its rate hike as we anticipated, and Chair Powell was explicit that credit market tightening works in the same direction as policy tightening. According to Powell, the banking sector disruption provides restraint akin to one or two more rate hikes. Thus, the dot plot did not show more hikes than in December, despite stronger incoming economic data. Instead of focusing on one objective versus another, central banks are keeping their eyes on inflation while trying to adjust to changing financial conditions.

    When would central banks worry more about financial stability than inflation? When inflation is no longer an issue, because in response to instability, the financial markets would deal such a blow to the real economy that we would experience a severe recession. If anything, the Fed told us that it was willing to absorb even more economic pain to reduce inflation than it had in the past. Not only is the Fed projecting three years of below-potential growth (2022, 2023, and 2024) to bring inflation down (almost) to target at the end of 2025, it also reduced its forecast for growth this year and next, along with a slightly higher path for policy.

    So how does it end?

    If disruption in the banking sector delays an extension of policy tightening, then a soft landing is still possible. Our banking analysts see higher funding costs and rising deposit betas combined with tighter lending standards restricting loan growth. This view is consonant with Powell’s. But the downside risks have gotten bigger. A broader, more persistent contraction in credit would cause a recession given that growth will be near zero in the best version of the world. And central banks will be ruling out the upper tail of possible outcomes. The ECB is clearly focused on inflation, so growth can be sacrificed, and upside surprises like last week’s PMIs will add to its resolve.

    January’s strong data in the US initially led Powell to re-open the door to 50bp rate hikes. The other lesson from the past two weeks is that the “no landing” notion never made any sense.

    Central banks were always going to force a landing, one way or another; the banking sector may hold the key to which kind.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 20:30

  • Autism On The Rise: CDC Data
    Autism On The Rise: CDC Data

    Autism rates in US children have jumped from one in 150 in 2002 to one in 36 in 2020, or 2.8%, according to a new study published by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC).

    Photo via Kimberly Paynter/WHYY.org

    The findings come from the CDC-funded ‘Autism and Developmental Disabilities Monitoring Network,’ launched in 2000 “to collect data to better understand the number and characteristics of children with autism spectrum disorder and other developmental disabilities living in different areas of the United States.”

    The program spans 11 states, including Arkansas, Maryland and Tennessee.

    Autism, also known as autism spectrum disorder, is a wide-ranging developmental disability that manifests in various ways – but which typically includes trouble with communication and social interactions.

    The study also found that boys were far more likely to have autism than girls.

    That said, the report also notes that the communities included in the program “are not representative of the entire United States,” while other federal autism programs are meant to be nationally representative. As the Epoch Times notes, the last nationwide autism estimate for children aged 3 through 17 was 2.9%, in-line with the latest figures from this study.

    Another new paper published by the CDC’s Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report found that more 4-year-olds were being diagnosed with autism from 2016 through early 2020 vs. the previous four years.

    One explanation: “Our best guess, consistent with the general rise in autism prevalence rates, is that it is more equitable access to evaluations and diagnoses,” according to Kelly Shaw, a CDC epidemiologist and one of the researchers, in a comment to Today.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 20:00

  • 'The Real Question Is How Many': James O'Keefe Suggests He Has Multiple Insiders In Manhattan DA Case Against Trump
    ‘The Real Question Is How Many’: James O’Keefe Suggests He Has Multiple Insiders In Manhattan DA Case Against Trump

    James O’Keefe, the founder and former head of undercover reporting and whistleblower organization Project Veritas, has suggested that he has multiple insiders in the Manhattan DA’s case against former President Donald Trump – either on the grand jury, or otherwise familiar with (or involved in) the case.

    “NY DA Bragg likely hid exculpatory evidence from the Trump Grand Jury as their meetings have been postponed,” said political influencer Ryan Cunningham, adding “The real question is has @JamesOKeefeIII got to someone on the inside?

    To which O’Keefe replied “The real question is how many do we have on the inside? Stay tuned.”

    Trump is being investigated by the Manhattan DA over a payment made to former adult film star Stormy Daniels (real name Stephanie Clifford).

    More on O’Keefe’s new venture via The Epoch Times;

    O’Keefe founded Project Veritas in 2010. He departed the group in February after the board of directors suspended him amid an investigation into alleged financial malfeasance. His new project is called O’Keefe Media Group, or OMG.

    O’Keefe said that the new group has been sending cameras out, “which means the OMG army of exposers will soon be holding those in power accountable.”

    O’Keefe warned people who are planning wrongdoing, adding: “You’re being watched. We’re coming after you. The next time you try and take advantage of honest Americans, the person sitting next to you might have a microphone or a camera. You see, the world is watching. And if you’re lying, cheating, stealing, or scamming, you might be the next unwilling star of the internet.”

    OMG’s first story will be released on March 27, O’Keefe said.

    At least one Project Veritas staffer has followed O’Keefe to the new project. R.C. Maxwell, a former Project Veritas employee, was in O’Keefe’s new video.

    O’Keefe said in another Twitter post he’d just spent one day this week in three states.

    “Just wrapped a 20 hour day. Three states, multiple investigations fueled by so many citizens,” he wrote.

    New Model

    OMG is based on the concept of collecting funds from supporters, buying cameras, and sending them to “citizen journalists” who will capture newsworthy moments.

    News outlets “can’t hire everybody,” O’Keefe told The Epoch Times on March 16. “But what if there was a way to empower and mobilize journalists, citizen journalists, and decentralized journalism? In the same way that Uber did that for the taxi, if there was a way to do that for thousands and thousands of people? And you might say, well, that’s impossible, that’s too difficult. Well, that’s the mission that I’m embarking on.”

    People have already approached OMG, asking for cameras to record school meetings and other events, O’Keefe said.

    Asked whether the citizen journalists would be paid, O’Keefe said he wasn’t sure.

    Most people want to do this for free,” he said.

    I don’t know exactly how it’s going to work, we’re going to figure it out,” he added later.

    O’Keefe said being ousted from Project Veritas has turned out to be a “blessing in disguise” because it let him start the new group.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 19:00

  • Will You Play It Fast And Loose?
    Will You Play It Fast And Loose?

    Authored by MN Gordon via EconomicPrism.com,

    “How should I play that one, Bert?  Play it safe?  That’s the way you always told me to play it: safe… play the percentage.  Well, here we go: fast and loose.  One ball, corner pocket.  Yeah, percentage players die broke, too, don’t they, Bert?”

    – Fast Eddie Felson, The Hustler

    QT2 Master Plan

    Stopping the excess is always much harder than starting it.  But sometimes it must be done.  And done all the way.  Half measures avail nothing.

    On June 1, 2022, Fed Chair Jay Powell commenced Quantitative Tightening (QT) Part 2.  “Brace yourself,” was the advice of JPMorgan Chase CEO, Jamie Dimon.  Were his banker cohorts listening?

    The master plan for QT2 was for the Fed to reduce its holdings of Treasury notes and mortgage-backed securities by a combined $47.5 billion per month for the first three months (July thru August 2022).  Then, by September 2022, the Fed would start reducing its balance sheet by a total amount of $95 billion a month (i.e., $60 billion in Treasuries notes and $35 billion in mortgage-backed securities).

    Wells Fargo Investment Institute took the Fed at its word and even projected that its balance sheet could shrink by almost $1.5 trillion by the end of 2023.  Taking it down to around $7.5 trillion.

    To anyone with a memory that extends back longer than two years, it was obvious that there wasn’t a snowball’s chance in hell the Fed would contract its balance sheet to $7.5 trillion by the end of 2023.  At the time, we remarked“We’ll bet dollars to doughnuts this never happens.”

    Our certainty was not based on any special insight about the future.  It was merely the recognition that QT1 flamed out early.

    Specifically, it took 24 months for the Fed to reduce its balance sheet by $800 billion between October 2017 and September 2019 (in the wake of a $3.5 trillion expansion).  That was before QT1 abruptly ended in repo-madness.

    QT2 Fail

    Like all plans of central planners, the QT2 plan laid out by the Fed to extinguish nearly double the ‘assets’ in 19 months that were terminated in 24 months during QT1 was nothing but a pipe dream.  Clearly, something was bound to break well in advance of the Fed hitting a balance sheet of $7.5 trillion.

    By now we all know what broke.  Silicon Valley Bank broke.  As did Signature Bank, First Republic Bank, and Credit Suisse.  More banks could fail too, even in the face of mega bailouts being engineered by activist central banks.

    With respect to the Fed’s balance sheet, after peaking at over $8.9 trillion in April 2022, it fell roughly $626 billion through the end of February 2023.  As of March 15, 2023, the Fed’s balance sheet had jumped $300 billion.  And by the time you’re reading this, or shortly after, we’ll know how many more hundreds of billions in credit the Fed has created out of thin air to liquify the financial system.

    In short, QT2 was a complete and utter failure.  Of the $626 billion reduction that occurred, $300 billion was added back – in a matter of days.  This massive increase marks the return of Quantitative Easing (QE).  It also surfaces an important question.

    How much Fed credit creation – out of thin air – will be needed to stem the banking crisis?

    One trillion dollars, $5 trillion, $10 trillion?

    Your guess is as good as ours.  In matters like this, however, it is always best to think in big, round numbers.  So, don’t be surprised when the Fed’s balance sheet eclipses $20 trillion over the next several years.

    Inflation Deflation

    Inflation of the money supply is inflation in the truest sense.  It’s what comes first.  Asset price inflation and consumer price inflation then follow in wild and unpredictable ways.

    Are these massive new additions to the Fed’s balance sheet inflationary?

    By definition, yes.  As the inflation of the Fed’s balance sheet supplies additional credit to the financial system.  But how will this inflation impact asset and consumer prices?

    This is to be determined.

    The immediate concern is credit contraction and debt deflation.  The forces causing banks to go belly up are relentless.  As TradeSmith recently noted, the money supply (M2) is contracting for the first time in the modern era.  Liquidity has disappeared from the marketplace.

    For example, for investors holding the $17 billion of Credit Suisse’s additional tier 1 (AT1) bonds, the banking crisis is deflationary.  This includes retail investors in Asia, PIMCO, Invesco, and Legg Mason, among others.  Their investment – principal, interest, the whole nine yards – has been written down to diddly-squat.

    But what about for SVB depositors, including those with accounts above and beyond FDIC insurance limits?  Is the BTFP bailout inflationary when depositors are merely being made whole?

    Make of it what you will.  The moral hazard of it all, which rewards bankers for going hog-wild speculating with customer deposits, is a disaster.

    What is clearly inflationary, and what is explicitly driving consumer prices higher, is the massive amount of deficit spending being racked up by Washington.  The federal government has already spent $723 billion more than it collected in revenue in fiscal year 2023.  Yet the fiscal year hasn’t even reached the mid-point.

    According to the Congressional Budget Office, the FY 2023 deficit is projected to hit $1.4 trillion.  This is on top of the $1.38 trillion deficit accumulated in FY 2022.  Thus, as the credit market contracts, and banks fail, consumer prices will remain elevated.

    Will You Play It Fast And Loose?

    With consumer price inflation just off its highest levels in over 40 years, we suppose the massive deficit spending combined with the broadening scope of the bank bailouts will be a tailwind for rising consumer prices.  This is especially true as shameful opportunists like Senator Elizabeth Warren use the politics of the bank crisis to justify creative ways to inject printing press money into the economy.

    But at the moment, we expect the real action will be in asset prices.  And there’s great uncertainty in how it will all play out.

    Those expecting Fed liquidity to pump up the stock market should moderate their enthusiasm.  That time will come.  But first, there’s plenty of wreckage in the debt market that needs to reconciled, written off, or bailed out.

    This week Fed Chair Powell, following the federal open market committee meeting, hiked the federal funds rate 25 basis points to a range of 4.75 to 5 percent.  This, no doubt, is deflationary for the debt market.  It furthers the negative carry problem that banks foolishly got themselves in.

    Still, what could Powell do?  Inflation is out of control.  It must be restrained.  Shortsighted decisions made during the COVID Panic must be corrected.  Moreover, with Washington spending like drunken sailors, Powell must hold the line as long as politically feasible.

    Ultimately, it’s a losing cause.  Interest payments on the national debt during the current fiscal year are up 29 percent year over year.  Soon enough, the Fed will have to cut rates to bail out Washington – inflation be damned.

    In the interim, a hardcore stock market panic is in store.  We expect this will be one for the history books.  We also expect it will provide buying opportunities of a lifetime, which most people will miss out on.  Are you psychologically prepared to buy when the time is right?

    At the point of maximum fear, when the sky is falling, the world is ending, and shares of Bank of America trade below $8, what will you do?

    Will you play it safe?  Or will you play it fast and loose?

    *  *  *

    As the financial system falls apart and the economy slips into a recession, a great distraction will be needed to control the masses.  In this regard, is Washington secretly provoking China to attack Taiwan?  Are your finances prepared for such madness?  Answers to these important questions can be found in a unique Special Report.  It’s called, “War in the Strait of Taiwan?  How to Exploit the Trend of Escalating Conflict.”  You can access a copy for less than a penny.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 18:30

  • Which Countries Hold The Most US Debt?
    Which Countries Hold The Most US Debt?

    Today, America owes foreign investors of its national debt $7.3 trillion.

    These are in the form of Treasury securities, some of the most liquid assets worldwide. Central banks use them for foreign exchange reserves and private investors flock to them during flights to safety thanks to their perceived low default risk.

    Beyond these reasons, foreign investors may buy Treasuries as a store of value. They are often used as collateral during certain international trade transactions, or countries can use them to help manage exchange rate policy. For example, countries may buy Treasuries to protect their currency’s exchange rate from speculation.

    In the graphic below, Visual Capitalist’s Dorothy Neufeld and Joyce Ma show the foreign holders of the U.S. national debt using data from the U.S. Department of the Treasury.

    Top Foreign Holders of U.S. Debt

    With $1.1 trillion in Treasury holdings, Japan is the largest foreign holder of U.S. debt.

    Japan surpassed China as the top holder in 2019 as China shed over $250 billion, or 30% of its holdings in four years.

    This bond offloading by China is the one way the country can manage the yuan’s exchange rate. This is because if it sells dollars, it can buy the yuan when the currency falls. At the same time, China doesn’t solely use the dollar to manage its currency—it now uses a basket of currencies.

    Here are the countries that hold the most U.S. debt:

    Rank Country U.S. Treasury Holdings Share of Total
    1 🇯🇵 Japan $1,076B 14.7%
    2 🇨🇳 China $867B 11.9%
    3 🇬🇧 United Kingdom $655B 8.9%
    4 🇧🇪 Belgium $354B 4.8%
    5 🇱🇺 Luxembourg $329B 4.5%
    6 🇰🇾 Cayman Islands $284B 3.9%
    7 🇨🇭 Switzerland $270B 3.7%
    8 🇮🇪 Ireland $255B 3.5%
    9 🇹🇼 Taiwan $226B 3.1%
    10 🇮🇳 India $224B 3.1%
    11 🇭🇰 Hong Kong $221B 3.0%
    12 🇧🇷 Brazil $217B 3.0%
    13 🇨🇦 Canada $215B 2.9%
    14 🇫🇷 France $189B 2.6%
    15 🇸🇬 Singapore $179B 2.4%
    16 🇸🇦 Saudi Arabia $120B 1.6%
    17 🇰🇷 South Korea $103B 1.4%
    18 🇩🇪 Germany $101B 1.4%
    19 🇳🇴 Norway $92B 1.3%
    20 🇧🇲 Bermuda $82B 1.1%
    21 🇳🇱 Netherlands $67B 0.9%
    22 🇲🇽 Mexico $59B 0.8%
    23 🇦🇪 UAE $59B 0.8%
    24 🇦🇺 Australia $57B 0.8%
    25 🇰🇼 Kuwait $49B 0.7%
    26 🇵🇭 Philippines $48B 0.7%
    27 🇮🇱 Israel $48B 0.7%
    28 🇧🇸 Bahamas $46B 0.6%
    29 🇹🇭 Thailand $46B 0.6%
    30 🇸🇪 Sweden $42B 0.6%
    31 🇮🇶 Iraq $41B 0.6%
    32 🇨🇴 Colombia $40B 0.5%
    33 🇮🇹 Italy $39B 0.5%
    34 🇵🇱 Poland $38B 0.5%
    35 🇪🇸 Spain $37B 0.5%
    36 🇻🇳 Vietnam $37B 0.5%
    37 🇨🇱 Chile $34B 0.5%
    38 🇵🇪 Peru $32B 0.4%
      All Other $439B 6.0%

    As the above table shows, the United Kingdom is the third highest holder, at over $655 billion in Treasuries. Across Europe, 13 countries are notable holders of these securities, the highest in any region, followed by Asia-Pacific at 11 different holders.

    A handful of small nations own a surprising amount of U.S. debt. With a population of 70,000, the Cayman Islands own a towering amount of Treasury bonds to the tune of $284 billion. There are more hedge funds domiciled in the Cayman Islands per capita than any other nation worldwide.

    In fact, the four smallest nations in the visualization above—Cayman Islands, Bermuda, Bahamas, and Luxembourg—have a combined population of just 1.2 million people, but own a staggering $741 billion in Treasuries.

    Interest Rates and Treasury Market Dynamics

    Over 2022, foreign demand for Treasuries sank 6% as higher interest rates and a strong U.S. dollar made owning these bonds less profitable.

    This is because rising interest rates on U.S. debt makes the present value of their future income payments lower. Meanwhile, their prices also fall.

    As the chart below shows, this drop in demand is a sharp reversal from 2018-2020, when demand jumped as interest rates hovered at historic lows. A similar trend took place in the decade after the 2008-09 financial crisis when U.S. debt holdings effectively tripled from $2 to $6 trillion.

    Driving this trend was China’s rapid purchase of Treasuries, which ballooned from $100 billion in 2002 to a peak of $1.3 trillion in 2013. As the country’s exports and output expanded, it sold yuan and bought dollars to help alleviate exchange rate pressure on its currency.

    Fast-forward to today, and global interest-rate uncertainty—which in turn can impact national currency valuations and therefore demand for Treasuries—continues to be a factor impacting the future direction of foreign U.S. debt holdings.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 18:00

  • Panic In Philly As Chemical Spill Sends Residents Scrambling For Bottled Water
    Panic In Philly As Chemical Spill Sends Residents Scrambling For Bottled Water

    Update (2135 ET): Philadelphia officials have rescinded their recommendation that residents only drink bottled water. Saying testing has found no contamination at the intake site for the city water system, the officials assured the tap water should be considered safe…through at least 11:59 pm on Monday. 

    In the wake of shoppers lining up all over the city to buy water, officials attempted to dissuade Philly residents from hoarding, encouraging them to use containers to stock up on two days of tap water just in case the assessment of the water’s safety changes.  

    “I want to reiterate there was never any contamination in Philadelphia Water Department’s system,” said Mike Carroll, deputy managing director for Philadelphia’s Office of Transportation, at a 5pm briefing. “There was contamination in the Delaware River, but we shut off the intake to the River and we’re operating off of water that was not contaminated.”

    * * *

    Philadelphia officials warned area residents on Sunday to drink only bottled water “out of caution” following the spill of a latex product along a tributary of the Delaware River.

    City of Phila recommends using bottled drinking water from 2PM 3/26/2023 until further notice for all Phila Water Department customers,” reads a text message from city officials which was sent to area residents and reported by CNN. “Contaminants have not been found in the system at this time but this is out of caution due to a spill in the Delaware River.”

     Following the notice, long lines formed at ShopRite, Target and other area stores, with ShopRite limiting customers to three bottles each.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js“As has been reported, on Friday night a chemical spill occurred in Bristol Township, Bucks County which released contaminants into the Delaware River,” said Mike Carroll, the city’s deputy managing director for transportation, infrastructure and sustainability. “The Philadelphia Water Department (PWD) became aware of this through the Delaware Valley Early Warning System (EWS) and has been evaluating the situation since that time to understand potential impacts to the public. Although early indications have not revealed contamination, we are still monitoring the situation and conducting testing.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to the Philadelphia Water Department’s website, it provides water to over “2 million people in Philadelphia, Montgomery, Delaware, and Bucks counties.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 17:00

  • New Documents Expose Government Censorship Efforts At Facebook And WhatsApp
    New Documents Expose Government Censorship Efforts At Facebook And WhatsApp

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    New emails uncovered in the ongoing Missouri v. Biden litigation reportedly show that the Biden Administration’s censorship efforts extended to Facebook to censor private communications on its WhatsApp messaging service.

    In recent months, the Twitter Files revealed an extensive and secret effort by the FBI and other agencies to censor citizens on social media. I testified on that effort. Democratic members oppose efforts to investigate the full scope of this effort and even denounced those calling for greater transparency as “Putin lovers” and apologists for insurrectionists and racists. Yet, the evidence of an extensive censorship and blacklisting effort by the Administration continues to mount.

    Facebook (now known as Meta) is accused of working with the government to target citizens with dissenting views on Covid and the pandemic.

    According to emails obtained through discoveryBiden’s Director of Digital Strategy Rob Flaherty pressed Facebook executives to be more aggressive with censorship. Flaherty reportedly objected that “I care mostly about what actions and changes you’re making to ensure you’re not making our country’s vaccine hesitancy problem worse…I still don’t have a good, empirical answer on how effective you’ve been at reducing the spread of vaccine-skeptical content and misinformation to vaccine fence sitters.”

    Just a few weeks ago, I wrote that the congressionally created, federally funded National Endowment for Democracy (NED) had supported blacklisting efforts at the British-based Global Disinformation Index (GDI). The index was widely ridiculed for targeting ten conservative and libertarian sites as the most dangerous sources of disinformation; it sought to persuade advertisers to withdraw support for those sites, while listing their most liberal counterparts as among the most trustworthy.

    At the time, I noted that the Biden administration had played us for chumps. As we celebrated the demise of the infamous Disinformation Governing Board with its “Disinformation Nanny,” the Biden administration never disclosed a larger censorship program.

    Shortly after my column posted in The Hill, the NED wrote to me to say that it was discontinuing support for the GDI. 

    Microsoft also was forced into retreat after it was shown to be pushing the GDI’s biased blacklist.

    Then we learned of additional funding going through the State Department’s Global Engagement Center (GEC).

    We also know of backchannel communications with the CDC and other agencies.

    It is assumed that the comprehensive effort to censor was not limited to Twitter. This is another indication of such efforts with Facebook. However, the Democratic leadership has opposed such an investigation for years. They have even refused to accept the email evidence. When I testified on the Twitter Files, Rep. Debbie Wasserman Schultz (D-Fla.) criticized me for offering “legal opinions” without actually working at Twitter. As I have noted, it is like saying that a witness should not discuss the contents of the Pentagon Papers unless he worked at the Pentagon. It was particularly bizarre because I was asked about the content of the Twitter Files.  The content — like the content of the Pentagon Papers — are “facts.” The implication of those facts are opinions.

    Members like Wasserman Schultz will likely continue to refuse to acknowledge these new emails. However, the public has repeatedly shown in polls that they want transparency on the censorship efforts. The House may be able to guarantee that transparency as its need continues to rise with new evidence of the government’s efforts to silence dissenting views on social media.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 16:30

  • WTF Headline Of The Day
    WTF Headline Of The Day

    Nobody likes getting punched in the balls… especially if you’re a woman…

    Image Source: NYPost

    A transgender woman has called for the dismantling of airport TSA screenings after she claimed an agent punched her in the testicles and “yelled at me for having a penis”.

    The flyer posted a since-deleted selfie showing her sobbing in a bathroom stall following the episode, complaining that her “balls still hurt so bad”.

    “I don’t want the TSA agent that hurt me fired,” she said in a separate post.

    “I want her educated and the entirety of TSA abolished altogether.”

    The Daily Mail reports that after the accusations were posted to social media, the airport said they were investigating the incident.

    “We apologize again for your experience,” it said in response on Twitter.

    “Your comments have been noted and shared.”

    We here at ZeroHedge stand alongside our trans women friends – no one should have to suffer getting punched in the balls just to get through security at airports.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 16:00

  • 'Go, Go, Go! Help Them Up! Push Them Up': New Leaked J6 Footage 'Shows DC Metro Cop Encouraging People To Go Towards The Capitol'
    ‘Go, Go, Go! Help Them Up! Push Them Up’: New Leaked J6 Footage ‘Shows DC Metro Cop Encouraging People To Go Towards The Capitol’

    Authored by Chris Menahan via Information Liberation,

    Newly leaked footage from January 6th shows undercover DC Metropolitan Police officers pushing protesters to move towards the US Capitol and helping them climb the scaffolding outside the Capitol building.

    The full video was leaked Saturday on Rumble by an anonymous account named OverwatchJ6:

    From The Epoch Times, “Prosecutor Admits DC Police Officers Acted as Provocateurs at US Capitol on Jan. 6”:

    A federal prosecutor admitted in court papers that three D.C. Metropolitan Police Department undercover officers acted as provocateurs at the northwest steps of the U.S. Capitol on Jan. 6, 2021.

    The admission came in a March 24 filing before U.S. District Judge Rudolph Contreras that seeks to keep video footage shot by the officers under court seal.

    Prosecutors accused the case defendant—William Pope of Topeka, Kansas—of an “illegitimate” attempt to unmask the video as part of his alleged strategy to try the case in the news media. Pope filed a motion to remove the court seal on Feb. 21.

    “The defendant is not entitled to ‘undesignate’ these videos to share them with unlimited third parties,” said Assistant U.S. Attorney Kelly Moran. “His desire to try his case in the media rather than in a court of law is illegitimate, and the government has met its burden to show the necessity of the protective order.”

    The feds worked together with the media to smear everyone involved in this protest for two years straight and bias the already biased DC juries against them but their victims are not allowed to share this footage to defend themselves?

    The fact these cases are even being tried in DC is an absolute disgrace. J6 protesters are blatantly being denied their right to a fair trial on top of being held indefinitely in pre-trial detention and tortured in prison.

    Videos long hidden under court seal have become a major topic, especially with prosecutors disclosing in a number of high-profile Jan. 6 cases the involvement of multiple FBI informants.

    Pope is seeking to lift the court seal on the undercover video as part of his drive to obtain full access to video evidence held by the government. Pope is representing himself in the criminal case being prosecuted against him. At a hearing on March 3, Judge Contreras seemed sympathetic to Pope’s motion to unmask the videos.

    “The officer clearly incited that area, and we still don’t have video from all other undercover MPD,” Pope told The Epoch Times. “And as the numerous informants in the Proud Boys trial demonstrates, we are only just beginning to scratch the surface on FBI involvement.”

    […] “This video clearly evidences undercover law enforcement officers urging the crowds to advance up the stairs and scaffolding towards the Capitol on January 6,” Pope wrote in an earlier case filing. “The government may claim that incidents like this did not happen, but the facts show they did.”

    Prosecutor Moran acknowledges such in a motion filed on March 24.

    “The specific footage, GoPro video recorded by an MPD police officer who was stationed at the Capitol in an evidence-gathering capacity, captures the officer shouting words to the effect of, “Go! Go! Go!” Moran wrote.

    “At other times in these videos, the officer and the two other plainclothes officers with him appear to join the crowd around them in various chants, including “drain the swamp,” “U.S.A.! U.S.A.! U.S.A.!”, and “Whose house? Our house!”

    Moran also argued against unsealing large amounts of closed-circuit television (CCTV) security video, which she said could put officers at risk.

    “There are very specific and highly worrisome risks associated with the specific videos the defendant seeks to share en masse,” she wrote.

    “Given the highly volatile nature of the discourse surrounding these cases, releasing the identities of the officers depicted in these videos—officers the defendant now claims to have instigated the entire attack on the U.S. Capitol—would surely put the lives of those officers at risk.”

    Pope told The Epoch Times that he never made such a claim. He has not yet filed a response to the government’s memorandum.

    Another video Pope discovered in his research shows Officer 2 and Officer 3 walking behind the late Ashli Babbitt on the northwest steps. About an hour later, Babbitt was shot at the entry of the Speaker’s Lobby by Capitol Police Lt. Michael Byrd. She died a half-hour later.

    The only “risk” involved in releasing this footage and more from J6 is the police and feds being caught helping provocateur the event.

    House Speaker Kevin McCarthy and Tucker Carlson need to get on with it already and release the 40,000 hours of footage they have to the public.

    Follow InformationLiberation on Twitter, Facebook, Gab, Minds and Telegram.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 15:30

  • NYPD Overtime Budget On Pace For Record As Cop Shortage Worsens
    NYPD Overtime Budget On Pace For Record As Cop Shortage Worsens

    The New York City Police Department is experiencing its biggest officer exodus in twenty years, leading to a shortage of personnel. As a result, officers are now increasing their hours on patrols, causing the overtime budget to swell, on track to hit the highest level in a decade this year, according to Bloomberg

    New York City Comptroller Brad Lander published a new report outlining that the NYPD has exceeded its budget by $98 million, spending $472 million on overtime through February. Lander’s office said the department is on track to spend more than $740 million, which would be the highest in a decade. The NYPD’s fiscal year ends on June 30. 

    While newly-elected Mayor Eric Adams has pledged to reduce NYPD overtime spending, the department is suffering a severe staffing crisis following the protests and riots of 2020 that were sparked by George Floyd’s death. Then defunding the police movement swept in as progressive lawmakers demanded a reduction in police budgets. 

    On top of all of that, left-leaning media outlets demonized officers and led to a further exodus that continues to this day. Data from NYC Police Pension Fund found that 1,955 officers retired in 2022, and another 1,746 quit, indicating a total of 3,701 left the force just last year — the largest exodus since 2002, following the 9/11 attacks. 

    So what’s clear is that the soaring overtime budget results from officers working longer hours because of a shortage of personnel. NYPD has lowered its standards for new officers in an attempt to boost numbers on the streets. 

    Meanwhile, robberies, burglaries, felony assaults, and grand larceny are surging. How can New Yorkers rest assured that they will be protected as a cop shortage plagues the metro area?

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 15:00

  • Mattresses, Social Media, Smart Phones, & Failure Of The Fed
    Mattresses, Social Media, Smart Phones, & Failure Of The Fed

    Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk.com,

    The Fed is looking for scapegoats. It got some assistance from the Wall Street Journal…

    Silicon Valley Bank Scapegoats

    Please consider The Economy Changed, Regulators Didn’t

    On March 8, Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank were both, according to public disclosures, “well capitalized,” the optimal level of health by federal regulatory standards. Days later, both failed. 

    “The question we were all asking ourselves over that first week was, ‘How did this happen?’” Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell said Wednesday.

    Banking regulators will spend months, if not years, getting to the bottom of what happened.

    What none of the regulators or bankers anticipated was how fast depositors could flee, which appears to be a new reality in the age of smartphone apps and social media.

    “The speed of the run…is very different from what we’ve seen in the past,” Mr. Powell said Wednesday. “And it does kind of suggest that there’s a need for possible regulatory and supervisory changes, just because supervision and regulation need to keep up with what’s happening in the world.”

    FDIC officials are discussing how to manage public confidence as social media expands people’s ability to “electronically panic,” a person familiar with the talks said.

    “The speed of the run…is very different from what we’ve seen in the past,” Mr. Powell said Wednesday. “And it does kind of suggest that there’s a need for possible regulatory and supervisory changes, just because supervision and regulation need to keep up with what’s happening in the world.”

    Scapegoat Nonsense

    The idea that the economy changed (it’s always changing), and smart phones and social media are largely responsible for the failure of Silicon Valley Bank is a bunch of scapegoat nonsense.  

    OK, social media increased the speed at which SVB failed, but that has nothing to do with the cause of the failure. 

    Social media did increase the speed of the failure, but smart phones played no role at all. To initiate a wire from bank A to bank B requires an account at both banks. Whether this was done by computer, a regular land line, or a smart phone makes no difference in speed.    

    Banking regulators will spend months, if not years, getting to the bottom of what happened.

    What a hoot, yet I have no doubt it’s true.

    In Fed Q&A Jerome Powell Wonders “How Did Bank Failures Happen?”

    The question we are asking ourselves the first weekend is how did this all happen.”

    There is no need for a study. I outlined twelve reasons for the bank failures, none of which had anything to do with smart phones or the changing economy.

    Please consider In Fed Q&A Jerome Powell Wonders “How Did Bank Failures Happen?”

    How Did This Happen?

    1. The Fed held interest rates too low too long, once again.

    2. The Fed even wanted to make up for lack of prior inflation, initially welcoming the pickup of inflation.

    3. The Fed failed to understand how $9 trillion in QE would fan asset bubbles.

    4. The Fed failed to understand how three rounds of fiscal stimulus, the largest in history, would fan inflation.

    5. The Fed presidents believe in economic models such as inflation expectations that its own studies prove do not work.

    6. When inflation did pick up, the Fed kept insisting that inflation was transitory.

    7. Even when the Fed finally realized inflation was not transitory, it kept QE going until the bitter end, not wanting to disturb prior forward guidance.

    8. The San Francisco Fed, whose job it was to monitor Silicon Valley Bank (SVB) was asleep at the wheel.

    9. The Fed considers treasuries a risk-free asset, ignoring duration risk.

    10. The Fed ignored a record concentration of long-term treasury and mortgage assets at SVB despite understanding the interest rate risk of those assets.

    11. The Fed’s forward guidance has been a disaster. It openly encouraged speculation.

    12. The Fed reduced reserve requirements on deposits to ZERO. 

    If you are looking for one item and one item only look at point 12. The reserve requirement on deposits is ZERO

    The discussion triggered a bunch of silly responses on Twitter but this one takes the cake for financial illiteracy. 

    Mattress Solution

    Anyone in the U.S. can set up a 100% reserve account tomorrow if they want. By a big safe and stuff it with large denomination bills, gold, silver, whatever they want. But, why require everyone to have what nearly no one wants?

    Wow!

    Try making a $1 million payroll out of a safe or a mattress. 

    Heck, try paying for anything with $10,000 in cash. You will have a quick knock on the door wondering where you got the money and more than likely it will be confiscated as drug money.

    As for “But, why require everyone to have what nearly no one wants,” it seems to me that there was a run on SVB to the tune of hundreds of billions of dollars because there was amazing demand for a safekeeping bank. 

    FDIC only covers $250,000. The bank run happened precisely because there was no safekeeping by the bank. 

    Not Designed for Speed

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Not Designed for Speed

    Here’s another hoot from the same article.

    The supervisory process has not evolved for rapid decision making. It is focused on consistency over speed. In a fast-moving situation, the system is not as well-designed to force change quickly.”

    Again, this has nothing to do with speed. It has everything to do with a zero reserve requirement on deposits plus a Fed that crammed about $9 trillion in deposits down banks throats while ignoring duration mismatch of bank investments of those funds.

    We do have consistency, that’s for sure. We have consistency of doubling down on failed policies and not learning from past mistakes.

    Fed Policy: It’s Not Fractional Reserve Banking, It’s ZERO Reserve Banking

    If you think we have fractional reserve banking, we don’t. We have zero reserve banking.

    For further discussion, please see Fed Policy: It’s Not Fractional Reserve Banking, It’s ZERO Reserve Banking

    Part of my proposal is admittedly controversial. I propose a 100% gold-backed dollar. But we do not even have a 100% dollar-backed dollar.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    All SVB or any bank had to do to maintain 100% liquidity was park deposits at the Fed or in extremely short duration US Treasuries. 

    Reader Question

    My posts also triggered this question. “Are you proposing that banks stop making loans from their deposits?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The fact of the matter is loans create deposits. And so did QE to the tune of nearly $9 trillion.

    Fictional Reserve Lending 

    If anyone thinks I am a johnny-come-after-the-fact-lately I have written about the problem many times, at least once in 2009 an again in 2020. 

    Please consider my March 2020 article Fictional Reserve Lending Is the New Official Policy

    Official policy finally caught up with reality. Reserves are fictional.

    With little fanfare or media coverage, the Fed made this Announcement on Reserves: “On March 15, 2020, the Board reduced reserve requirement ratios to zero percent effective March 26, 2020. This action eliminated reserve requirements for all depository institutions.

    What’s Changed Regarding Lending?

    Essentially, nothing.

    The announcement just officially admitted the denominator on reserves is zero.

    There are no reserve lending constraints (but practically speaking, there never were).

    When Do Banks Make Loans?

    1. They meet capital requirements

    2. They believe they have a creditworthy borrower

    3. Creditworthy borrowers want to borrow

    BIS Working Papers No 292 Unconventional Monetary

    In 2009, I referred to BIS Working Papers No 292 Unconventional Monetary

    The article addresses two fallacies

    Proposition #1: an expansion of bank reserves endows banks with additional resources to extend loans

    Proposition #2: There is something uniquely inflationary about bank reserves financing

    From the BIS

    The underlying premise of the first proposition is that bank reserves are needed for banks to make loans. An extreme version of this view is the text-book notion of a stable money multiplier. 

    In fact, the level of reserves hardly figures in banks’ lending decisions. The amount of credit outstanding is determined by banks’ willingness to supply loans, based on perceived risk-return trade-offs, and by the demand for those loans

    The main exogenous constraint on the expansion of credit is minimum capital requirements.

    The central bank has a monopoly over interest rate policy, but not over balance sheet policy. This raises tricky questions about coordination, operational independence and division of responsibilities

    Balance sheet policies can have a significant impact on the financial risks absorbed by the central bank. The extent depends on their characteristics and on how much they are relied upon. This, too, raises questions about operational autonomy and credibility, largely reflecting the impact of losses on the financial position of the central bank. 

    Read those points over and over until they sink in. I discussed that article in 2009 and again in 2020. 

    Three Key Points 

    1. Deposits result from loans and QE policy.

    2. The central bank has a monopoly over interest rate policy, but not over balance sheet policy. The FDIC is supposed to address the latter. And in the case of SVB, the San Francisco Fed was also asleep at the wheel.

    3. Social media, smart phones, and the WSJ notion “The Economy Changed, Regulators Didn’t” are scapegoats to a problem I addressed in 2009. 

    What to Expect

    Banking regulators will spend months, if not years, getting to the bottom of what happened.

    They will conclude the problems are social media, smart phones, and the WSJ notion that the economy changed but regulators failed to keep up. 

    *  *  *

    Please Subscribe to MishTalk Email Alerts.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 03/26/2023 – 14:30

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 26th March 2023

  • Johnstone: US Officials Really, Really Want You To Know The US Is The World's "Leader"
    Johnstone: US Officials Really, Really Want You To Know The US Is The World’s “Leader”

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    In response to questions he received during a press conference on Monday about Xi Jinping and Vladimir Putin cementing a “new era” in strategic partnership between China and Russia, the White House National Security Council’s John Kirby made no fewer than seven assertions that the US is the “leader” of the world.

    Here are excerpts from his comments:

    • “The two countries have grown closer. But they are both countries that chafe and bristle at U.S. leadership around the world.”

    • “And in China’s case in particular, they certainly would like to challenge U.S. leadership around the world.

    • “But these are not two countries that have, you know, decades-long experience working together and full trust and confidence. It’s a burgeoning of late based on America’s increasing leadership around the world and trying to check that.”

    • “Peter, these are two countries that have long chafed, as I said to Jeff — long chafed at U.S. leadership around the world and the network of alliances and partnerships that we have.”

    • “And we work on those relationships one at a time, because every country on the continent is different, has different needs and different expectations of American leadership.”

    • “That’s the power of American convening leadership. And you don’t see that power out of either Russia or China.”

    • “But one of the reasons why you’re seeing that tightening relationship is because they recognize that they don’t have that strong foundation of international support for what they’re trying to do, which is basically challenge American leadership around the world.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The illusory truth effect is a cognitive bias which causes people to mistake something they have heard many times for an established fact, because the way the human brain receives and interprets information tends to draw little or no distinction between repetition and truth. Propagandists and empire managers often take advantage of this glitch in our wetware, which is what’s happening when you see them repeating key phrases over and over again that they want people to believe.

    We saw another repetition of this line recently at an online conference hosted by the US Chamber of Commerce, in which the US ambassador to China asserted that Beijing must accept the US as the “leader” of the region China happens to occupy.

    US empire managers are of course getting very assertive about the narrative that they are the world’s “leader” because that self-appointed “leadership” is being challenged by China, and the nations which support it with increasing openness like Russia. Most of the major international news stories of our day are either directly or indirectly related to this dynamic, wherein the US is struggling to secure unipolar planetary domination by thwarting China’s rise and undermining its partners.

    The message they’re putting out is, “This is our world. We’re in charge. Anyone who claims otherwise is freakish and abnormal, and must be opposed.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Why do they say the US is the “leader” of the world instead of its “ruler”, anyway? I’m unclear on the difference as practically applied. Is it meant to give us the impression that the US rules the world by democratic vote? That this is something the rest of the world consented to? Because I sure as hell don’t remember voting for it, and we’ve all seen what happens to governments which don’t comply with US “leadership”.

    I’m not one of those who believe a multipolar world will be a wonderful thing, I just recognize that it beats the hell out of the alternative, that being increasingly reckless nuclear brinkmanship to maintain global control. The US has been in charge long enough to make it clear that the world order it dominates can only be maintained by nonstop violence and aggression, with more and more of that violence and aggression being directed toward major nuclear-armed powers. The facts are in and the case is closed: US unipolar hegemony is unsustainable.

    The problem is that the US empire itself does not know this. This horrifying trajectory we’re on toward an Atomic Age world war is the result of the empire’s doctrine that it must maintain unipolar control at all costs crashing into the rise of a multipolar world order.

    It doesn’t need to be this way. There’s no valid reason why the US needs to remain in charge of the world and can’t just let different people in different regions sort out their own affairs like they always did before. There’s no valid reason why governments need to be brandishing armageddon weapons at each other instead of collaborating peacefully in the interest of all humankind. We’re being pushed toward disaster to preserve “American leadership around the world,” and I for one do not consent to this.

    * * *

    My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, throwing some money into my tip jar on PatreonPaypal, or Substack, buying an issue of my monthly zine, and following me on FacebookTwitterSoundcloud or YouTube. If you want to read more you can buy my books. The best way to make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for at my website or on Substack, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. All works co-authored with my husband Tim Foley.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 23:30

  • Asian Voters Abandoning Woke Democrats As Crime Rises In Cities
    Asian Voters Abandoning Woke Democrats As Crime Rises In Cities

    You might have heard the recent story of a CNN news crew that had their car broken into while they were filming a segment on crime in San Francisco, CA.  While the irony of this is amusing to many of us, one group of people that is not laughing is Asian-Americans in the Bay Area who are growing weary of the overall damage done by leftist social justice policies.  That CNN crew was, in fact, shooting a story on the very issue of Asian voters who say they are moving away from progressive Democratic leadership and seeking out more moderate candidates, as well as Republican candidates.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The reasons for this shift are many. 

    • First, it has long been the assumption among leftist elitists that they own American minorities as a voting block and that “only whites” are conservative.  The arrogance of this thinking aside, Democrats often find themselves confounded by the percentage of minorities that are in fact moderate or conservative in their voting habits.  While many minorities might feel compelled by social pressure and propaganda to vote Democrat, the damage that is hitting their pocket books and making their streets unsafe cannot be hidden forever. 

    • Second, while leftists often claim that anti-Asian hate crimes are caused by “racist white conservatives”, a cursory glance at video footage and the prosecution records of the majority of the perpetrators of these attacks shows this is not the case.  In New York City in 2020 during the onset of the media hype on anti-Asian hate, only 2 out of 20 people arrested in connection with Asian attacks were white.   

    • Third, it has been social justice politics in places like San Francisco that have encouraged police defunding efforts while enabling criminals.  When the worst elements of society see leftist organizations like BLM and Antifa rioting in the streets and setting neighborhoods ablaze while being applauded by city politicians, they tend to feel empowered to act on their darkest impulses. 

    In every single metropolis where woke politicians take control, the city starts to collapse.  From LA to New York, from San Francisco to Austin, from Portland to Seattle, the results are always the same, and now it’s not just conservatives pointing out the root problem.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 23:00

  • No, We Don't Need More Nuclear Weapons
    No, We Don’t Need More Nuclear Weapons

    Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    Republicans and Democrats may quibble over how federal tax dollars might be spent on various social welfare programs like Medicaid and food stamps. But alongside Social Security, there is one area of federal spending that everyone can apparently agree on: military spending. Last year, the Biden administration requested one of the largest peacetime budgets ever, at $813 billion. Congress wanted even more spending and ended up approving a budget of $858 billion. In inflation-adjusted terms, that was well in excess of the military spending we saw during the Cold War under Ronald Reagan. This year, Joe Biden is asking for even more money, with a new budget request that starts at $886 billion. Included in that gargantuan amount—which doesn’t even include veterans spending—is billions for new missile systems for deploying nuclear arms, plus other programs for “modernizing” the United States’ nuclear arsenal.

    Indeed, over the past year, the memo has gone out among the usual advocates of endless military spending that the US needs to spend much more on nuclear arms. This is a perennial position at the Heritage Foundation, of course, which has never met a military pork program it didn’t like. Moreover, in recent months, the Wall Street Journal has run several articles demanding more nuclear arms. The New York Post was pushing the same line late last year. Much of the rhetoric centers on the idea that Beijing is increasing its own spending on nuclear arms and thus the United States must “keep up.” For instance, last month, Patty-Jane Geller insisted that the US is in an “arms race” with China. Meanwhile, writers at the foreign-policy site 1945 claimed Congress must “save” the American nuclear arsenal.

    Congress will surely be happy to cooperate. Such spending is an enormous cash cow for weapons manufacturers, although it has little to do with actual military defense. The US nuclear arsenal is huge, and China’s efforts to expand its own arsenal will have no effect on the already substantial deterrent effects of the US’s existing nuclear arsenal. Although the 1945 article insists that China soon “will field a peer or superior arsenal to the United States,” it’s difficult to see by what metric this is actually true.

    Contrary to claims that the US nuclear arsenal needs to be “saved” or it will soon be eclipsed by the Chinese arsenal, the US remains well in the lead of every single nuclear power except Russia. Even if Beijing increases its arsenal to one thousand warheads, as the New York Post breathlessly predicts, the Chinese arsenal will remain well behind that of the US.

    This is true even if we remove all the retired US warheads from the equation. In that case, Moscow retains the global lead with more than forty-four hundred weapons, and the US comes in second with more than thirty-seven hundred. Presently, Beijing has approximately 350 of these weapons, France has 290, and the rest of the world is well behind that.

    Source: Data from Our World in Data, “Inventories of Nuclear Weapons.

    Like Moscow, Washington has a full-blown and well-developed nuclear triad, complete with a fleet of nuclear subs that can launch up to twenty missiles—each containing multiple independently targeted warheads—land-based missile silos, and bombers. Each option provides ways to deliver hundreds of warheads. The submarine fleet, of course, is constantly mobile, ensuring first-strike survivability.

    The Nonexistent Missile Gap

    This won’t stop advocates of more spending from calling for more. They’ll always have reasons why there is some sort of missile gap. Lately, the obsession is with hypersonic missiles and having various forms of delivery, as well as the claim that the current gap between the US arsenal and rival arsenal is not sufficiently large.

    There’s a reason US advocates of an aggressive nuclear posture invented the “missile gap” myth during the Cold War. It sows doubt about US security and ensures a certain level of paranoia about US nuclear capability. Nowadays, it’s acknowledged that the missile gap was always a myth, but this was much less known in the days when debates over US rocket technology were a frequent cause for alarm and debate. Nonetheless, the nonfactual basis of the “gap” was known at least as early as the 1960s, and then defense secretary Robert McNamara noted to John F. Kennedy:

    There was created a myth in the country that did great harm to the nation. It was created by, I would say, emotionally guided but nonetheless patriotic individuals in the Pentagon. There are still people of that kind in the Pentagon. I wouldn’t give them any foundation for creating another myth.

    How Much Do Numbers Matter?

    The myth persists, however, and Geller claims: “Given the hundreds of new Chinese missile launchers and other new weapons, the U.S. will need more nuclear weapons to hold these targets at risk. In nuclear deterrence, numbers matter.”

    How much do numbers really matter? Yes, in matters of deterrence, ten is certainly better than zero. But is three thousand better than one thousand, or even one hundred? That logic often works with conventional arms, but it makes little sense with nuclear arms, a single unit of which can destroy an entire city. As John Isaacs noted last year in the National Interest:

    In the nuclear age, a country that deployed 1,000 nuclear weapons rather than an adversary’s 500 is not twice as powerful since a handful of weapons could devastate both countries. But the Pentagon and political leaders did not learn this critical lesson. This is a numbers game that may have been relevant for tanks and battleships before [the invention of nuclear weapons] but is not today.

    What is key in nuclear deterrence is not simply numbers. Nuclear strategist Albert Wohlstetter identified this problem in the early 1960s and concluded that “the criterion for matching the Russians plane for plane, or exceeding them is, in the strict sense, irrelevant to the problem of deterrence.” Rather the key, Wohlstetter went on, is creating a force that is “survivable” to ensure the possibility of a retaliatory “second strike.” This is what establishes deterrence.

    Wohlstetter certainly wasn’t the only one to come to this conclusion. In a 1990 essay titled “Nuclear Myths and Political Realities,” Kenneth Waltz—perhaps the most influential scholar of international relations of the past fifty years—concludes that the total number of missiles in these enormous arsenals is of little importance for nations that are already well above the threshold for achieving nuclear deterrence.

    What really matters is the perception that the other side has second-strike capability, and this certainly exists in both US-Russia and US-China relations. Once each regime knows that the other regime has second-strike capability, the competition is over. Deterrence is established. Waltz notes:

    So long as two or more countries have second-strike forces, to compare them is pointless. If no state can launch a disarming attack with high confidence, force comparisons become irrelevant. . . . Within very wide ranges, a nuclear balance is insensitive to variation in numbers and size of warheads.

    The focus on second-strike capability is key because pro-arms-race policy makers are quick to note that if a regime’s first strike is able to destroy an enemy’s ability to retaliate in kind, then a nuclear war can be “won.”

    Second-Strike Capability Evens the Score

    But, as shown by Michael Gerson in “No First Use: The Next Step for U.S. Nuclear Policy” (2010) establishing second-strike capability—or, more importantly, the perception of it—is not as difficult as many suppose. Gerson writes:

    A successful first strike would require near-perfect intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance (ISR) to detect, identify, and track all of the adversary’s nuclear forces; recent events surrounding U.S. assessments of Iraq’s suspected WMD [weapons of mass destruction] capabilities forcefully demonstrate the challenges of reliable, accurate, and unbiased information. Intelligence regarding where an adversary’s nuclear weapons are located and if the state is actually planning to attack could be wrong or incomplete, and an attempted first strike based on inaccurate or incomplete information could have far-reaching negative consequences.

    The threat of a successful first strike can be countered through a variety of methods, including secrecy and the ability to shift weapons delivery channels. This is why the US, Russian, and Chinese regimes have long been so enthusiastic about the so-called nuclear triad. It is assumed that if nuclear weapons can be delivered by submarine, aircraft, and land, then it is impossible for an opposing regime to destroy all three at once and achieve first-strike victory.

    But even in the absence of a triad, an opposing regime that seeks a total first-strike victory has few grounds for much confidence. As Waltz shows, “nuclear weapons are small and light; they are easy to move, easy to hide, and easy to deliver in a variety of ways.” That is, if a regime manages to hide even a small number of planes, subs, or trucks, this could spell disaster for the regime attempting a successful first strike. Gerson explains:

    A nuclear first strike is fraught with risk and uncertainty. Could a U.S. president, the only person with the power to authorize nuclear use and a political official concerned with re-election, his or her political party, and their historical legacy, ever be entirely confident that the mission would be a complete success? What if the strike failed to destroy all of the weapons, or what if weapons were hidden in unknown areas, and the remaining weapons were used in retaliation?

    Nor must it be assumed that a large number of warheads is necessary to achieve deterrence. Waltz recalls that Desmond Ball—who advised the US on escalation strategies—convincingly asserted that nuclear deterrence could be achieved with as few as fifty warheads.

    Proceeding on the assumption that an enemy has no warheads left following a first strike requires an extremely high level of confidence because the cost of miscalculation is so high. If a regime strikes and misses only a few of the enemy’s missiles, this could lead to devastating retaliation both in terms of human life and in terms of the first-strike regime’s political prospects.

    This is why a rudimentary nuclear force can achieve deterrence even with a small but plausible chance of second-strike capability. A small nuclear strike is nonetheless disastrous for the target, and thus “second-strike forces have to be seen in absolute terms.” Waltz correctly insists that calculating an arsenal’s relative dominance is a waste of time: “the question of dominance is pointless because one second-strike force cannot dominate another.”

    The US Is Already Far beyond the Deterrence Threshold

    One could certainly debate how much the US nuclear stockpile could be cut without sacrificing deterrence. Given the enormous size of the stockpile, however, the answer is that “most of it” could be cut. Indeed, the US arsenal could be cut by 90 percent and still have hundreds of warheads available for silos, submarines, and bombers.

    Moreover, reductions in the arsenal are prudent for reasons of avoiding unintended nuclear war. As Wohlstetter noted, a prudent policy also requires “strategic nuclear forces to be not only capable of riding out and operating coherently after an actual preemptive attack against them; but also completely controllable in times of peace, crisis, and war—and especially in the face of ambiguous warning—so as to avoid unauthorized operations, accidents, and war by mistake.” Having large numbers of nuclear warheads actually is imprudent because it creates more potential for accidents, mistakes, and unauthorized use. Maintenance remains expensive and risky.

    In spite of all this, it remains popular among some to keep arguing for more nuclear expansion year after year. Surely, some of these advocates are true believers, but there is also a lot of money at stake for government contractors. Thus, in one form or another, the myth of the missile gap – and its modern variants – endures.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 22:30

  • Ford's "Blue Oval City" Aims To Open In 2025, Produce 500,000 Next Gen Electric Trucks A Year
    Ford’s “Blue Oval City” Aims To Open In 2025, Produce 500,000 Next Gen Electric Trucks A Year

    Ford is getting close to unveiling its next generation electric pickup plan at its BlueOval city mega-campus in West Tennessee.

    An update from the company this week said that the new plant – which is designed to be radically efficient and carbon neutral – is “taking shape and preparing to build Ford’s next-gen electric truck, code named Project T3, in 2025”. 

    The Project T3 is being called by the company “a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity to revolutionize America’s truck” as Ford, along with other legacy auto manufacturers continue to shift their business models from an ICE base to an EV base. 

    Slated to start production in 2025, the plant will be capable of producing 500,000 EV trucks a year at full production – and most notably the next generation of Ford’s electric truck. Here’s a sneak preview of what the second gen pickup will look like:

    Bill Ford, Ford’s executive chair said: “BlueOval City is the blueprint for Ford’s electric future around the world. We will build revolutionary electric vehicles at an advanced manufacturing site that works in harmony with the planet, aligning business growth and innovation with environmental progress.”

    “Project T3 is a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity to revolutionize America’s truck. We are melding 100 years of Ford truck know-how with world-class electric vehicle, software and aerodynamics talent. It will be a platform for endless innovation and capability,” said Jim Farley, Ford president and CEO.

    Ford’s PR reads:

    Project T3 is short for “Trust The Truck” – a code name that stuck after the development team made it their rallying cry. The team’s single guiding principle has been to create a truck people can trust in the digital age – one that’s fully updatable, constantly improving, and supports towing, hauling, exportable power and endless new innovations owners will want.

    The assembly plant will use carbon-free electricity from the day it opens. For the first time in 120 years, Ford also is using recovered energy from the site’s utility infrastructure and geothermal system to provide carbon-free heat for the assembly plant – saving about 300 million cubic feet of natural gas typically needed each year to heat similarly sized vehicle assembly plants.

    Here’s the video stream of Ford’s update on the campus:

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 22:00

  • Military Officials: Diversity Training Makes Soldiers Feel "Included"
    Military Officials: Diversity Training Makes Soldiers Feel “Included”

    Authored by Eric Lundrum via AmGreatness.com,

    Top military officials in the Biden Administration recently attempted to defend far-left “diversity” training in the military, claiming that such sessions make all soldiers feel more “included.”

    As the Washington Free Beacon reports, Air Force Chief of Staff General C.Q. Brown gave an interview for Defense One defending the practice of diversity training, claiming that “when people join our military, they want to look around and see somebody who looks like them.”

    “They want to be part of a team, and feel like they’re included,” Brown added.

    Brown praised the practice for its alleged efforts to build “cohesive” teams for all service members, “no matter their background.”

    Similarly, General David Berger, Commandant of the Marine Corps, claimed that he has seen “zero evidence” of any negative impact from such left-wing policies when it comes to the end result of making stronger Marines.

    House Republicans are currently attempting to cut funding for such far-left practices in the military; other examples include a program in the Army for training soldiers on how to use “gender pronouns,” and a similar training video for the Navy discussing pronouns and “safe spaces.”

    Senator Roger Wicker (R-Miss.) declared that the Biden Administration’s efforts to force politics into the military are “shaping the Department of Defense into an institution that is spearheading toxic social policies instead of restoring military strength.”

    “On the House Armed Services Committee, we are laser-focused on the threats we face and the capabilities we need to defeat them,” said Congressman Mike Rogers (R-Ala.), chairman of the Armed Services Committee.

    The fight over the politicization of the military comes as most branches struggle with reaching the appropriate levels of recruitment numbers in recent years. Last year, the U.S. Army missed its minimum recruitment goal by 15,000.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 21:30

  • North Korea Touts 'Radioactive Tsunami' Weapon Test At Sea
    North Korea Touts ‘Radioactive Tsunami’ Weapon Test At Sea

    North Korea claimed Friday to have tested a nuclear-capable underwater drone designed to generate a gigantic “radioactive tsunami” that would destroy naval strike groups and entire ports. Analysts were skeptical that the device presents a major new threat, but the test underlines the North’s commitment to raising nuclear threats.

    But according to The Associated Press, analysts in the West are deeply skeptical of the claims or that the weapon presents a major new threat, at a moment the Pentagon has expanded its activity on the Korean peninsula.

    Via 7 News Boston

    State-run Korean Central News Agency (KCNA) described that the drone is designed to “stealthily infiltrate into operational waters and make a super-scale radioactive tsunami through an underwater explosion” – and that it can either be deployed directly from the coast or towed by ships.

    KCNA said that North Korea is responding to this month’s joint US-South Korea drills, which it considers a huge provocation. The state media report described an ongoing “nuclear crisis” due to Washington’s “intentional, persistent and provocative war drills.”

    Kim Jong Un has also promised to make his rivals “plunge into despair” if North Korea continues to be threatened. This week the North Korean government launched a major new recruiting drive, hosting events across the country while conducting near daily test launches of projectiles – including a test last Sunday which included a ‘mock nuclear warhead’ as a warning to Seoul and Washington.

    State media described that “youth college students from universities in various places as well as high-end middle school students from all over the country” expressed their determination “to join forces in the fight…”

    The KCNA report additionally cited citizens’ willingness “mercilessly wipe out the war maniacs” – in what’s also clearly a propaganda blitz and bit of signaling aimed at the south and at the west. At the same time, Pyongyang is apparently seeking to impress its enemies and the world by rolling out new high-tech weapons.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 21:00

  • Taibbi: People Can Win
    Taibbi: People Can Win

    Authored by Matt Taibbi via Racket News (emphasis ours),

    Earlier today Susan Schmidt and I published an article about a series of changes at the Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency (CISA), a creepy sub-division of the Department of Homleand Security. It turns out that CISA, which just a week or so ago was busted for scrubbing embarrasing text from its website by the Foundation for Freedom Online, quietly eliminated its so-called “MDM” or “Misinformation, Disinformation, and Malinformation” subcommittee.

    Just a year ago, the Department of Homeland Security was going all-in on the fight against “MDM.” The notion that America is fatally infected with “Misinformation, Disinformation, and Malinformation” was in fact the animating idea begind the asinine plan the Biden administration announced last April to institute a “Disinformation Governance Board,” which was to be headed by Nina Jankowicz, a self-styled Mary Poppins of digital rectitude:

    America took one look at Jankowicz and at most a few fleeting moments considering the “Disinformation Governance Board” plan before concluding, correctly, that it was a beyond-loathsome expression of aristocratic arrogance that needed shutting down before the first Jankowicz presser. Characteristically, the press lied about the public reaction, claiming that the only displeasure was heard from the “GOP.” In fact, all sane people across the spectrum were instantly nauseated, their distress loud enough that the DHS hit “pause” on Jankowicz and the batty MinTruth plan after just three weeks.

    Even that might not have been fast enough, as was discovered by my co-author Sue Schmidt, who’s formerly of the Washington Post but joined Racket this month for a special report a team of us are preparing on what fellow #TwitterFiles reporter Michael Shellenberger calls the “Censorship-Industrial Complex.” (More on that later). Looking through the minutes of CISA’s subcommittee meetings last year, Sue found that the DHS’s little team of self-appointed information guardians was deeply worried about the “rollout” of their war against MDM, worrying repeatedly about how to “socialize” or “pre-socialize” various parties to the idea of a federal truth squad, realizing that just presenting the actual plan to a sentient person without lots of sweeteners wouldn’t go well.

    One subcommittee member, whose name in the spirit of our times is of course redacted, seemed to realize the concept was too hot to discuss in public. She “suggested removing mention of MDM” — this, from a member of the “MDM subcommittee”! — and “framing” the subcommitee’s efforts more in terms of “directing people to clear information about elections procedures.” Another member recommended CISA “point more to state officials and state laws to make the authoritative source of information less controversial. In other words: “Let’s make it sound like someone other than the hated us is running this thing!”

    Even two years ago, nobody was paying attention to this world and the public, if it cared at all, was probably inclined to welcome more “election procedures” (as CISA would later call them), not fewer. So the DHS, sensibly one must conclude, dissolved its incorrectly named “Countering Foreign Influence Task Force” — the group spent most of 2020 zapping domestic election posts — renamed it the MDM subcommittee, and began meeting and posting about the need to build “national resistance” to “domestic threat actors.” As Sue just reported, these folks saw “MDM” everywhere here at home, insisting “CISA should consider MD across the information ecosystem,” which included talk radio, cable news, mainstream media, and “hyper-partisan media.”

    The architects of this plan not only genuinely believed themselves above such temptations, but saw nothing wrong with asking for massive sums of money — Joe Biden’s first economic proposal sought $690 million for CISA — to captain an open-ended war on American badthink, as defined by [names redacted]. Here again, take note of Jankowicz’s lyrics:

    It’s like when Rudy Giuliani shared bad intel from Ukraine

    Or when TikTok influencers said COVID can’t cause pain

    They’re laundering disinfo and we really should take note

    And not support their lies, with our wallet, voice or vote!

    This was a group of self-described experts in an utterly fictitious “anti-disinformation” discipline who were so sure it was okay for them to tell you whom not to vote for, one of them sang about it. This, despite the fact that of the ones whose names we know, like Jankowicz, many were open swallowers of the dumbest Russiagate hokum, like the Alfa-Server story.

    I spent a long time covering the 2008 Wall Street crash, which meant devoting large amounts of energy to some of the world’s most unredeeming people. These were swindlers who sold snake-oil mortgage products that put millions out of their homes and wiped out retirement funds of people who spent decades working as toll operators, firefighters, teachers. Such predators were awful, amoral people, but all the same, I occasionally found myself writing with something like admiration. These crooks were creators of truly ingenious schemes who did what they did out of lust, greed, jealousy, and other (at least identifiably human) forms of depravity.

    These [name redacted] would-be censors are different. They have no sense of humor, no imagination, and exactly one distinguishing characteristic: they know what’s best for you. Anti-disinfo work suits them because they all have a Poppins streak that quietly gets off on binning your digital dirty bits (after the voyeuristic thrill of logging on to watch them in secret, with special credentials, which they rub with pleasure in evenings). They’re the vilest kind of snobs, and when they finally were forced to show their real selves to the public — and here I feel safe in thanking Elon Musk for making that possible, via the #TwitterFiles — the public rightfully recoiled from these arrogant power-worshipping mediocrities.

    The Governance Board was already dead, and now the whole MDM mission is being wound down, which feels like a win. Perhaps they’re just publicly retreating from the concept for now, but at this point, I’ll take that. Moreover there are signs everywhere that people are losing their fear of departing from the orthodoxy such types would like to impose, and pushing for a return to normalcy, which for the first time in ages feels within reach.

    There was a ridiculous scene at Stanford law school recently, in which a conservative judge was muffled by a gaggle of future lawyers who’d been led by an assistant Dean in a characteristically moronic shouting-down exercise. The current strain of Junior Anti-Sex League-type protesters who fill campuses from coast to coast now sure do love their “heckler’s veto…”

    The Stanford Law School Dean Jenny Martinez was brilliant in response. Instead of doing what the heads of organizations have been doing for years in such situations, instead of doing, frankly, what I did during my own cancelation episode — frantically over-apologizing to people who have no use for or interest in apologies — Martinez sternly called the students out as clowns, reminding them in a long, serious, punishing letter that if they ever become officers of the court, they will be held to a higher standard than “lay people,” swearing to conduct themselves “at all times with dignity, courtesy and integrity.”

    Martinez went further, saying that on her watch, the school would not be doing the usual and committing itself to starter slates of political positions out of fear of reproach. “Our commitment to diversity, equity, and inclusion is not going to take the form of having the school administration announce institutional positions on a wide range of current social and political issues,” she wrote. The age of just giving in to mobs instead of insisting on our right to have different opinions and beliefs seems to be receding. It is beginning to dawn on sane, tolerant people everywhere that there are more of us than there are of them, and this still matters in a democracy.

    There’s a reason why these people are so focused on technocratic solutions, from magic AI schemes to control information to deploying packs of Boston Dynamics robot-dogs, who’ll patrol suburban neighborhoods and peer in windows for visual confirmation of Alexa-overheard transgressions. General Mark Milley just said on a podcast that armies may be fully robotic in 15 years, arousing general neoliberal giddiness (Milley quoted Dylan). These people need tech, because you know what they don’t have? Friends. Organic support. Or, ways to win them, like art, music, literature, or comedy.

    I have a theory about what happened to America in this regard. After 9/11, people were scared, and they fell for a succession of propaganda campaigns convincing them that the hole in Fortress America, the chink in our national armor, was our system of democratic rights.

    The “MDM subcommittee” members think the same way: there’s a section in one of last year’s meetings in which a former Secretary of Washington State notes that the bad countries, “such as Russia, use the First Amendment effectively.” Moreover, in general, “our adversaries… use our Constitution effectively.” They’ve been telling us this stuff ever since the Towers came down. We were told our enemies will use even our open system of justice against us, so forget the admirable streak of America never having had an in-camera criminal trial. Let’s clear the court even for deportation hearings of suspected terrorists, they said. Let’s not even tell the public the names of the deported!

    The era that dawned on September 11th, and the war against terrorism that has pervaded the sinews of our national life since that day, are reflected in thousands of ways” the Third Circuit Court wrote in 2002, adding: “Since the primary national policy must be self-preservation,it seems elementary that, to the extent open deportation hearings might impair national security, that security is implicated.”

    It was the same with torture, rendition, watch lists, drones, whatever. To respond to terrorism, we were told, we needed to be more “nimble” than old-school democracy allowed. We couldn’t wait for congress to declare wars, or build probable cause, or afford the right to face one’s accusers. The stakes were too high for such luxuries. Even giving “enemy combatants” Geneva convention rights would confer legitimacy to the opposition it didn’t deserve, and we couldn’t afford to give that legitimacy. Our grip on safety was that tenunous.

    No: the new era of a West infected with a borderless evil returned from the 8th century needed a bureaucracy of super-empowered minders, who’d do torturing if it needed doing, and quietly make lists of who gets to fly or open a bank account. Most of all, these minders would make those terrible decisions about who gets to live and die in a drone-patrolled world. The Imitation Game from 2014, starring Benedict Cumberbatch and telling the awful tale of Alan Turing’s quest to crack the Enigma code, was a great movie, but perhaps also the ultimate portrait of the Obama-era political class, whose members all saw themselves as misunderstood geniuses quietly saving civilization through endless mathematical murder, committed from afar, by remote control, without fanfare or appreciation.

    America balked some at George W. Bush as “The Decider,” but was more than happy to let the Community Organizer head up those secret decisions. With the genial and patient-sounding Obama in office, the deciders assumed a new brand of business-casual cruelty. I vividly remember going to a ballgame with a longtime Justice source in those years, someone I liked, who casually told me in between bites of a hot dog that of course we should just drone Julian Assange, because he was a “terrorist,” and the “reality is, you just have to kill them.”

    Each year, more and more of government became classified, and we had less and less access to information about where tax dollars were being spent, or what was going on at places like the Federal Reserve. We let it happen, abandoning the democratic responsibility to govern ourselves, in the process willing the world’s smuggest aristocracy into existence. It wasn’t the worst time — a lot of good TV was made in those years — but while we were napping, these people were turning America into a secret administrative state committed to endless war, mass surveillance, social credit scoring, censorship, and other horrors, a system that’s only just now beginning to show itself.

    The managerial state was held in place for over a decade by a kind of magic spell, which works thanks to the public’s faith in the competence of our minders. That spell held by default for an extra four years while Trump was in office, but it’s been broken now, in part thanks to refuseniks like Musk (who caused all kinds of havoc by opting out of an airtight information-control cartel), but mainly because we’ve now had enough opportunities to examine up close the loathsome nanny-staters to whom we surrendered all those years ago. Whatever hold these people had on us, and it was real — I spent years worrying about regaining the favor of people who were denouncing me as a Russian asset even as they demanded my vote — it’s gone now, and we can start thinking about moving on to something better.

    This is what I choose to think, this weekend evening. We don’t have to concede to a future of always being at war somewhere abroad, and with each other at home. We don’t have to put up with a government that doesn’t tell us anything. Most of all, we can go back to enjoying life, on our own terms, without stressing over an endless succession of panics invented by politically insecure losers. We can do so much better, and we will, because this place is ours to run, a fact the singing censors should never have let us remember.

    Subscribe to Racket News

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 20:30

  • Denver Suburb Caps Number Of Gas Stations To 'Promote Electric Vehicles'
    Denver Suburb Caps Number Of Gas Stations To ‘Promote Electric Vehicles’

    A suburb of Denver, Colorado has voted to ban the construction of new gas stations in order to address ‘environmental concerns with the continued use of gasoline powered vehicles and equipment.’

    The Louisville City Council voted unanimously on Tuesday in support of a 2022 ordinance limiting the number of gas stations to six – with an exception carved out for one more (for a total of seven) if big box stores such as Costco or Sam’s Club build a store that’s 80,000 feet or larger and includes a gas station.

    The limitation includes existing gas stations.

    A 79-page report of the ordinance issued by the City Council on the day of the vote in part states such caps on gas stations “is a growing trend for local municipalities due to health and environmental concerns with the continued use of gasoline powered vehicles and equipment.”

    The reports also states gas station “bans may also be seen as promoting the use of electric vehicles.”Just the News

    The report acknowledges that gasoline is still required for non-electric vehicles.

    “The proposal for a cap but not a full ban on new gasoline and automobile service stations is in recognition that there will continue to be some demand for gasoline and automobile service stations as more EVs enter the market and gasoline vehicles are transitioned out of the market over time,” it reads.

    The proposal included letters from the community in support of the ordinance.

    I strongly support and encourage you to not allow the further construction of fossil fuel refueling stations (gas) in our community. All of us, not just the citizens of our community, need to move quickly away from fossil fuel consumption,” reads one letter from resident Channah Horst.

    “If you are a climate denier then my plea falls on deaf ears. If you acknowledge the peril our planet is in then it is your responsibility to do what you can to help us make changes in the way we live. In other words–do not make it easier for me and my fellow residents to keep using gasoline.

    Eric Lund, Executive Director of the Louisville Chamber of Commerce opposed the move, writing “If you limit the number of gas stations then competition could become an issue as our local residents will likely have to pay higher prices if open market competition is blocked by an ordinance of this type,” adding “I am not sure that there is a benefit by limiting the number of gas stations which typically also include retail stores and would be interested to understand the thought behind how this ordinance helps to support local businesses and our residents in the area.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 20:00

  • US State Department Lifts 'Assignment Restrictions' Used To Discourage Foreign Recruiting
    US State Department Lifts ‘Assignment Restrictions’ Used To Discourage Foreign Recruiting

    The US State Department has lifted so-called ‘assignment restrictions’ which prevented employees – some of whom would hold top-secret clearances – from serving in countries they had immigrated from, or have family or financial relationship with, after Democratic lawmakers said it was discriminatory – particularly against Chinese and Pacific Islander employees.

    The move follows a 2021 bill introduced by Reps. Ted Lieu (D-CA), Joaquin Castro (D-TX), Andy Kim (D-NJ) and Chrissy Houlahan (D-PA), who have discarded national security concerns to end a practice that “disproportionately impacts federal employees who can’t trace their heritage to the Mayflower and directly undermines the department’s goal of promoting diversity and inclusion,” Politico reports.

    State Department data reveals that around 1,800 employees are subject to assignment restrictions – with the top four countries being China (196), Russia (184), Taiwan (84) and Israel (70).

    According to Secretary of State Antony Blinken, the change came after he lifted more than half of the restrictions during his first year in office, which opened “new possible assignments” for hundreds of US diplomats.

    “Today, I’m pleased to share that after a rigorous review, I have decided that, moving forward, the Department will end its practice of issuing new assignment restrictions as a condition placed on a security clearance.”

    Those currently subject to assignment restrictions will be allowed to go through a new review and appeal process. That said, some restrictions will remain in place, such as those related to a situation “in which a foreign country may consider an employee to be one of their own nationals,” or when there are “assignments to posts rated critical for human intelligence threats.”

    Perhaps all those millions of dollars which flowed from CCP-linked individuals to the Biden family are once again paying off?

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 19:00

  • As We Sell Off Our Strategic Oil Reserves, Ponder This
    As We Sell Off Our Strategic Oil Reserves, Ponder This

    Authored by Bruce Wilds via Advancing Time blog,

    One of Biden’s answers to combating higher gas prices has been to tap into America’s oil reserves. While I was never a fan of the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve (SPR) program, it does have a place in our toolbox of weapons. We can use the reserve to keep the country running if outside oil supplies are cut off. Still, considering how out of touch with reality Washington has become, we can only imagine the insane types of services it would deem essential next time an oil shortage occurs.

    Sadly, some of these reserves found their way into the export market and ended up in China. We now have proof that the President’s son Hunter had a Chinese Communist Party member as his assistant while dealing with the Chinese. Apparently, he played a role in the shipping of American natural gas to China in 2017. It seems the Biden family was promising business associates that they would be rewarded once Biden became president. Biden’s actions could be viewed as those of a traitor or at least disqualify him from being President.

    The following information was contained in a letter from House Oversight Committee ranking member James Comer, R-Ky. to Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen dated Sept. 20. 

    “The President has not only misled the American public about his past foreign business transactions, but he also failed to disclose that he played a critical role in arranging a business deal to sell American natural resources to the Chinese while planning to run for President.”

    Joe Biden, Comer said, was a business partner in the arrangement and had office space to work on the deal, and a firm he managed received millions from his Chinese partners ahead of the anticipated venture. While part of what Comer stated had previously been reported in the news, the letter, cited whistleblower testimonies, as well as emails, a corporate PowerPoint presentation, and a screenshot of encrypted messages. These as well as  bank documents that committee Republicans obtained suggest Biden’s knowledge and involvement in the plan dated back to at least 2017.

    The big point here is;

    • The Strategic Petroleum Reserve, which was established in 1975 due to the 1973 oil embargo, is now at its lowest level since December 1983.

    In December 1975, with memories of gas lines fresh on the minds of Americans following the 1973 OPEC oil embargo, Congress established the Strategic Petroleum Reserve (SPR). It was designed “to reduce the impact of severe energy supply interruptions.” What are the implications of depleting the SPR and is it still important?

    The U.S. government began to fill the reserve and it hit its high point in 2010 at around 726.6 million barrels. Since December 1984, this is the first time the level has been lower than 450 million barrels. Draining the SPR has been a powerful tool for the administration in its effort to tame the price of gasoline. It also signaled a “new era” of intervention on the part of the White House. 

    This brings front-and-center questions concerning the motivation of those behind this action. One of the implications of Biden’s war on high oil prices is that it has short-circuited the fossil investment/supply development process.  Capital expenditures among the five largest oil and gas companies have fallen as the price of oil has come under fire. The current under-investment in this sector is one of the reasons oil prices are likely to take a big jump in a few years. Production from existing wells is expected to rapidly fall.

    The Supply Of Oil Is Far More Constant And Inelastic Than Demand

    It is important to remember when it comes to oil, the supply is far more constant and inelastic than the demand. This means that it takes time and investment to bring new wells online while demand can rapidly change. This happened during the pandemic when countries locked down and told their populations and told them to stay at home. This resulted in the price of oil temporarily going negative because there was nowhere to store it.

    Draining oil from the strategic reserve is a short-sighted and dangerous choice that will impact America’s energy security at times of global uncertainty. In an effort to halt inflationary forces, Biden released a huge amount of crude oil from the SPR to artificially suppress fuel prices ahead of the midterm elections. 

    To date, Biden has dumped more SPR on the market than all previous presidents combined reducing the reserves to levels not seen since the early 1980s. In spite of how I feel about the inefficiencies of this program, it does serve a vital role. It is difficult to underestimate the importance of a country’s ability to rapidly increase its domestic flow of oil. This defensive action protects its economy and adds to its resilience. 

    Biden’s actions have put the whole country at risk. Critics of his policy pointed out the Strategic Petroleum Reserve was designed for use in an emergency not as a tool to manipulate elections. Another one of Biden’s goals may be to bring about higher oil prices to reduce its use and accelerate the use of high-cost green energy.

    Either way, Biden’s war on oil has not made America’s energy policies more efficient or the country stronger.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 18:30

  • US Weighs Expanding Fed's Emergency Liquidity Program To Stabilize First Republic, Other Regional Banks
    US Weighs Expanding Fed’s Emergency Liquidity Program To Stabilize First Republic, Other Regional Banks

    One day after a lengthy meeting on the growing bank crisis by the Financial Stability Oversight Council (chaired by Janet Yellen who five years ago vowed there would be “no financial crises in her lifetime“) on the last day of a week which started with the collapse of Credit Suisse and culminated with US regional banks nursing historic losses amid speculation that First Republic Bank could keel over any moment and drag down countless other names with it, even though the FSOC assured Americans that “while some institutions have come under stress, the U.S. banking system remains sound and resilient”, Bloomberg reports that in their attempt to rescue the most trouble of regionals, authorities are considering expanding the recently introduced emergency lending facility for banks – the BTFP – in order to give First Republic Bank more time to shore up its balance sheet.

    Or they may not: after all this has been a crisis has been marked by at times puzzling second-guessing, miscommunication and lack of conviction on the part of regulators, whose actions not only precipitated the contagion from the collapse of Silicon Valley Bank when they blocked potential buyers from acquiring the bank and avoiding a complete wipeout of shareholders, but where Janet Yellen has actively sought to destabilize the regional banks by explicitly refuting what Fed chair Powell was stating, the most vivid example being last Wednesday’s market crunch when stocks stabilized after the dovish FOMC only to puke after Yellen inexplicably said that US regulators were not even contemplating uniform deposit insurance.

    And sure enough, the BBG report adds that “officials have yet to decide on what support they could provide First Republic, if any, and an expansion of the Federal Reserve’s offering is one of several options being weighed at this early stage.” Meanwhile, regulators continue to grapple with two other failed lenders — Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank — that require more immediate attention… attention they wouldn’t need if regulators had intervened more competently in the beginning and not waited until almost a trillion in deposits had been pulled from small banks as confidence cratered.

    Bizarrely, even without of a step, watchdogs see First Republic as stable enough to operate without any immediate intervention as the company and its advisers try to work out a deal to shore up its balance sheet, the people said, asking not to be named discussing confidential talks.

    Officials have yet to decide on what support they could provide First Republic, if any, and an expansion of the Federal Reserve’s offering is one of several options being weighed at this early stage. Regulators continue to grapple with two other failed lenders — Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank — that require more immediate attention.

    Even short of expanding the BTFP, regulators reportedly “see First Republic as stable enough to operate without any immediate intervention as the company and its advisers try to work out a deal to shore up its balance sheet”; maybe those regulators should also see the stock price of FRC which has lost more than 90% of its value, and which is far less confident about the bank’s ability to evade the same forces that recently caused a trio of US banks to collapse. But while those banks toppled when rapid customer withdrawals forced them to lock in losses on depreciated assets, First Republic has remained open and independent.

    And while the BBG reporting suggests that regulators are once again indecisive at best, and may either help the bank… or not, the only actionable news here is that US officials “have concluded the bank’s deposits are stabilizing and that it isn’t susceptible to the kind of sudden, severe run that prompted regulators to seize Silicon Valley Bank within just a few days, the people said.” This confirms what we first reported on Friday in “Finally Some Good News On The Bank Crisis.”

    One way First Republic is different from other banks is that it managed to obtain enough cash to meet client needs while it explores solutions, courtesy of $30 billion in cash deposited by the nation’s largest banks this month… which of course is merely cash that was recycled after it was pulled from banks such as First Republic in the first place.

    Bloomberg also notes that a potential adjustment to the Fed’s emergency lending program is among options authorities have weighed in recent days. Of course, such an expansion of the Fed’s liquidity offerings would merely be another incremental step to institutionalizing moral hazard as it would apply to all eligible users, in keeping with banking law that says remedies must be broadly based, rather than aimed at helping a particular bank. But the change could be made in a way to ensure that First Republic benefits.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 18:00

  • The Disinformation-Industrial Complex Vs Domestic Terror
    The Disinformation-Industrial Complex Vs Domestic Terror

    Authored by Ben Weingarten via RealClearInvestigations.com,

    Combating disinformation has been elevated to a national security imperative under the Biden administration, as codified in its first-of-its-kind National Strategy for Countering Domestic Terrorism, published in June 2021.  

    That document calls for confronting long-term contributors to domestic terrorism.

    In connection therewith, it cites as a key priority “addressing the extreme polarization, fueled by a crisis of disinformation and misinformation often channeled through social media platforms, which can tear Americans apart and lead some to violence.” 

    Media literacy specifically is seen as integral to this effort. The strategy adds that: “the Department of Homeland Security and others are either currently funding and implementing or planning evidence–based digital programming, including enhancing media literacy and critical thinking skills, as a mechanism for strengthening user resilience to disinformation and misinformation online for domestic audiences.” 

    Previously, the Senate Intelligence Committee suggested, in its report on “Russian Active Measures Campaigns and Interference in the 2016 Election” that a “public initiative—propelled by Federal funding but led in large part by state and local education institutions—focused on building media literacy from an early age would help build long-term resilience to foreign manipulation of our democracy.” 

    In June 2022, Democrat Senator Amy Klobuchar introduced the Digital Citizenship and Media Literacy Act, which – citing the Senate Intelligence Committee’s report – would fund a media literacy grant program for state and local education agencies, among other entities. 

    NAMLE and Media Literacy Now, both recipients of State Department largesse, endorsed the bill. 

    Acknowledging explicitly the link between this federal counter-disinformation push, and the media literacy education push, Media Literacy Now wrote in its latest annual report that … 

    the federal government is paying greater attention to the national security consequences of media illiteracy.

    The Department of Homeland Security is offering grants to organizations to improve media literacy education in communities across the country. Meanwhile, the Department of Defense is incorporating media literacy into standard troop training, and the State Department is funding media literacy efforts abroad.

    These trends are important for advocates to be aware of as potential sources of funding as well as for supporting arguments around integrating media literacy into K-12 classrooms. 

    When presented with notable examples of narratives corporate media promoted around Trump-Russia collusion, and COVID-19, to justify this counter-disinformation campaign, Media Literacy Now president Erin McNeill said: “These examples are disappointing.”

    The antidote, in her view is, “media literacy education because it helps people not only recognize the bias in their news sources and seek out other sources, but also to demand and support better-quality journalism.” (Emphasis McNeill’s)

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 17:30

  • "I'm A Woman": Left Wing Host Ana Kasparian Triggers Woke Mob Over "Trans-Exclusionary" Language
    “I’m A Woman”: Left Wing Host Ana Kasparian Triggers Woke Mob Over “Trans-Exclusionary” Language

    Ana Kasparian, of the left wing hosts of The Young Turks, was put on blast this week on Twitter for “using trans-exclusionary language” when she Tweeted out the obvious: that she was a woman.

    “I’m a woman. Please don’t ever refer to me as a person with a uterus, birthing person, or person who menstruates. How do people not realize how degrading this is?” she wrote on Twitter on Tuesday of last week.

    “You can support the transgender community without doing this shit,” Kasparian added. “I’m sure a lot of women don’t want to be minimized to a bodily function or body part,” she said in a later Tweet.

    As was predicted by many in the responses, Kasparian was roasted by many “trans-allies”.

    “Those words are meant for AFAB [assigned female at birth] people as a category, not individual people. Get a grip,” transgender journalist Katelyn Burns responded to Kasparian. 

    “Who called you that? I’ve only ever heard that used when referring to a population, not an individual person,” another user wrote. “Obviously, those terms are meant to be precise to include all people who meet one of those characteristics, when needing to discuss a relevant topic.”

    “I respect you a lot, but this notion that the mere existence of trans-inclusive terms (rarely used in casual convos) somehow degrades women comes right out of the right’s anti-trans ‘war on women’ playbook,” added Mike Figueredo of The Humanist Report. 

    “I have zero problem with inclusion. None. But there’s gotta be a better way than boiling it down to a body part, no? Especially in the context of having reproductive rights taken away from people who just see woman as a baby-making vessel. That’s all I’m saying,” Kasparian said in response.

    “Your comment section has turned into a lunatic asylum. Some people just can’t accept your remarks,” Ian Miles Cheong concluded. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 17:00

  • 'Surgical Removal' Of Crypto Will Only Weaken USD Dominance
    ‘Surgical Removal’ Of Crypto Will Only Weaken USD Dominance

    Authored by Jesse Coghlan via CoinTelegraph.com,

    A day after Coinbase received a Wells notice from the Securities and Exchange Commission, industry commentators weighed in on what recent regulatory actions mean for America’s crypto future…

    The United States’ crackdown on cryptocurrencies and crypto firms will only serve to stifle crypto-related innovation and “weaken” the country, industry pundits say in the wake of Coinbase’s recent Wells notice from the Securities and Exchange Commission.

    On March 22, the crypto exchange became the latest crypto firm to receive a “legal threat” — a Wells notice — just a month after stablecoin-issuer Paxos received its own in February. Some suggest there could be more to come.

    Mati Greenspan, the chief of crypto research firm Quantum Economics, said he believes U.S. regulators have been unfriendly to crypto “since the beginning.”

    The recent collapses of crypto and startup-friendly banks, including Silvergate, Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank, have been viewed by some as being part of a scheme by regulators to un-bank the crypto sector, dubbed “Operation Choke Point 2.0.”

    Meanwhile, a March 20 economic report from the White House turned into a scathing review of the merits of crypto assets, with the paper spending almost an entire chapter debunking crypto’s “touted” benefits.

    Greenspan told Cointelegraph that the rumored action could be underway as crypto is seen as a “threat” to the U.S. dollar’s dominance in global trade — a significant and long-standing benefit to the U.S.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    However, as more are beginning to use crypto for cross-border remittances globally, he warned a crackdown on crypto in the U.S. could actually have the opposite effect on the dollar:

    “The surgical removal of cryptocurrencies from the U.S. banking system will only isolate the United States further and weaken the dollar’s position as the global reserve currency.”

    Adrian Przelozny, CEO of Australian crypto exchange Independent Reserve, told Cointelegraph that the recent banking sector woes were not due to “any failure in crypto” but caused by banks managing their risks in an “irresponsible way.”

    “The White House would be better served to review the practices in the banking industry,” he added.

    Speaking about the most recent action against Coinbase, Przelozny said the “adversarial environment for the crypto industry” in the U.S. would push the related “jobs, investment and future innovation” offshore.

    “Singapore, Hong Kong and potentially Australia” — who are eyeing the benefits of the crypto industry — may prove a better home for it, and those countries “will reap the economic benefits,” Przelozny said.

    The exact reasons the regulator is targeting Coinbase are still unclear. The SEC has declined to comment on the matter.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Michael Bacina, a lawyer and partner at Piper Alderman, agreed that a “regulation by enforcement model” would “drive crypto-asset innovation offshore,” adding:

    “This is a strange position to adopt given the losses many faced in the last 12 months arose from collapses involving unregulated offshore structures.”

    Bacina said for years, the industry has asked for clarity on how to comply. He pointed to the recent “telling” comments made by the judge in Voyager Digital’s bankruptcy case that “observed that there is no clear guidance from regulators.”

    He added that offshore jurisdictions would continue harboring crypto firms until governments lay out the path to regulatory compliance, “which will cost jobs and raise the risk for consumers and investors.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 16:30

  • Another California Storm Is Coming
    Another California Storm Is Coming

    California has been relentlessly battered by an endless series of atmospheric river storms in the past three months. After being struck by yet another storm last week, the state now braces for the possibility of another one arriving in just a few days.

    For more on the forecast timing and impacts of the upcoming storm, meteorologist Armando Salvadore shared this report with clients: 

    In the last 30 days, the entire state of California with the exception of far southern Ca (Riverside and Imperial county) are above average to well above in terms of precipitation and even those aforementioned are just about near average. We’ve seen a substantial amount of condensed water over this winter, and there’s no signs of this letting up as we roll into yet another active week next week!

    Below, a potent upper-level low will look to drop southward and “bowl” itself into northern/central California. Such a mid-level disturbance will allow for a surface cyclone to manifest, and crash somewhere north of Sacramento come Tuesday midday.

    However, impacts will be felt later Monday because of a potent low level jet out ahead of the disturbance with strong moisture advection and forcing for ascent that transpires ahead of the impending mid/upper level low. A 40+ knot low level jet will propagate ahead of the disturbance, causing both warm air and moisture advection off the Pacific ocean allowing for rain to make landfall across northern California before the main axis shifts southward toward the Bay Area. By later Tuesday into Wednesday, the slug of rain will push further south toward Los Angeles. Along with low elevation heavy rain, heavy snow will also occur for Sierra Nevada Mountains, which by the way is already in the running for the most snowiest winter ever (currently sitting 2nd place with more than 56 feet that has fallen this winter!).

    In terms of moisture in the form of water vapor readily available to be condensed, we’re looking at signals of at least 0.5 – 1 standard deviation above climatology within the warm sector of the cyclone, and unsurprisingly coincides with a potent low level jet.

    Here we can see how the surface is represented with a mature cyclone making way toward northern/central California and heavy rain overspreading from north to south along with heavy snow impacting the higher terrain.

    While there still may be some discrepancy in where the heaviest rain totals occur, there’s a growing consensus for a widespread swath of at least over an inch. The only positive aspect of this system is that this falls over the course of a day, so flash flooding won’t necessarily be an issue; however, it’s areas already prone to flooding from previous events that could allow for excess runoff to nearby lower elevations or surrounding locations.

    While many Californians might have storm fatigue, the good news is that Gov. Gavin Newsom ended some of the state’s water restrictions last week as drought conditions dissipated

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 16:00

  • Stanford Law School Suspends Diversity Dean After She Doubles-Down On Duncan Debacle
    Stanford Law School Suspends Diversity Dean After She Doubles-Down On Duncan Debacle

    Tirien Steinbach, the diversity administrator at Stanford Law School who stoked a disruptive protest of Fifth Circuit appellate judge Kyle Duncan, is “currently on leave,” according to a memo on the protest reviewed by the Washington Free Beacon.

    Jenny Martinez, the law school’s dean, said in a Wednesday morning memo to all law students that administrators “should not insert themselves into debate with their own criticism of the speaker’s views.” At future talks, the role of administrators will be to “ensure that university rules on disruption of events will be followed,” Martinez said.

    Martinez gave no additional details on the terms of Steinbach’s leave, stating that the “university does not comment publicly on pending personnel matters.” She also ruled out disciplining any of the students who shouted down Duncan – in part, she said, because administrators sent “conflicting signals about whether what was happening was acceptable or not.”

    Instead, the law school will require all students to attend a training on “freedom of speech and the norms of the legal profession,” which will discuss, among other things, how “vulgar personal insults” can harm students’ “professional reputations.”

    That warning appears to be in reference to protesters who hurled sexual invective at Duncan, with one allegedly telling him, “We hope your daughters get raped.”

    It comes amid calls from Sen. Ted Cruz (R., Texas) and others for state bar associations to investigate the hecklers, which could potentially hold up their legal licenses.

    As Jonathan Turley details below, this “leave” comes after Steinbach publicly responded and appears to be doubling down on her actions in a Wall Street Journal opinion column.

     

    First a short recap of how we got here.

     

    The Stanford Federalist Society invited Judge Duncan of the United States Court of Appeals for the Fifth Circuit to speak on campus. However, liberal students, including members from the National Lawyer’s Guild, decided that allowing a conservative judge to speak on campus is intolerable and set about to “deplatform” him by shouting him down.

    In this event, Duncan was planning to speak on the topic:  “The Fifth Circuit in Conversation with the Supreme Court: Covid, Guns, and Twitter.” A video shows that the students prevented Duncan from speaking from the very beginning. Many called him a racist while others hurled insults like one yelling “We hope your daughters get raped.”

    Duncan was unable to continue and asked for an administrator to assist him.

    Dean Steinbach then took the stage and criticized the judge for seeking to be heard despite such objections.

    Steinbach explained “I had to write something down because I am so uncomfortable up here. And I don’t say that for sympathy, I just say that I am deeply, deeply uncomfortable.” While reaffirming her belief in free speech and insisting that the judge should not be cancelled, she proceeded to attack the judge for the content of his views.

    Steinbach declared “It’s uncomfortable to say that for many people here, you’re work has caused harm.” After a perfunctory nod to free speech, Steinbach proceeded to eviscerate it. She continued “again I still ask, is the juice worth the squeeze?” Is it worth the pain that this causes, the division that this causes? Do you have something so incredibly important to say about Twitter and guns and Covid that that is worth this impact on the division of these people.”

    Dean Martinez later apologized and then released a letter with Stanford President Marc Tessier-Lavigne that reaffirmed the commitment to free speech, but did not commit to holding the students accountable for their disruption. (The students with the National Lawyer’s Guild later complained about their names being mentioned in an article despite a campaign to name and shame conservative students).

    Dean Martinez then issued another letter with a strong defense of free speech and declared that all students (including the victims of the disruption) would be required to attend a free speech appreciation session. However, she declined any action against the students responsible for the disruption. That is a familiar pattern at universities.

    That brings us to Steinbach’s column.

    The Wall Street Journal was correct in running her account and it contains an important perspective to consider, even for some of us who were highly critical of Steinbach’s remarks.

    First, Dean Steinbach rightfully points out that she tried to get the students to allow the event to proceed. At one point, she suggested that students walk out in protest over Judge Duncan’s views. She also insists that she opposed efforts to cancel the event before it was held and continues to oppose such attempts to limit speech. She reaffirms the classical liberal view that the solution to bad speech is good speech, not less speech. That is all to her credit.

    However, the column has elements that are, frankly, less compelling or commendable.

    Steinbach appears to be responding to this admonishment by Martinez:

    In this instance, however, the failure by administrators in the room to timely administer clear and specific warnings and instead to send conflicting signals about whether what was happening was acceptable or not (and indeed at one point to seemingly endorse the disruptions that had occurred up to that point by saying “I look out and say I’m glad this is going on here”) is part of what created the problem in the room and renders disciplinary sanction in these particular circumstances problematic.

    Steinbach insists that she was simply using her training at “deescalation” and that she was asked to attend the event by the Federalist Society for that reason:

    I stepped up to the podium to deploy the de-escalation techniques in which I have been trained, which include getting the parties to look past conflict and see each other as people. My intention wasn’t to confront Judge Duncan or the protesters but to give voice to the students so that they could stop shouting and engage in respectful dialogue. I wanted Judge Duncan to understand why some students were protesting his presence on campus and for the students to understand why it was important that the judge be not only allowed but welcomed to speak.

    The problem with the column, in my view, is two-fold.

    First, in her remarks, Steinbach goes out of the way to show her agreement with the mob and indicates that she knew that they were going to stop the event. She soft pedals the attacks on Duncan and seems to blame both sides. She does not mention how the students prevented him from speaking, yelled about his being a racist, or called for the rape of his daughters. Instead, she describes how  “a verbal sparring match began to take place between the judge and the protesters. By the time Judge Duncan asked for an administrator to intervene, tempers in the room were heated on both sides.” That sounds a lot like blaming the victim. If the mob had not prevented the judge from speaking, there would have been “sparring” before the event was opened up for questions.

    She is not alone in such spins. Some like Slate’s Mark Stern suggested that Judge Duncan manufactured the controversy. Democratic members like Rep. Elissa Slotkin (D-MI) mocked Duncan as a “fragile flower.” Others at sites like Above the Law insisted, again, that silencing people like Judge Duncan is free speech.  Senior Editor Joe Patrice rejected the effort to “recast ‘free speech’ as the right of a powerful person to speak at the silent and unprivileged.” (In this case, “the silent and unprivileged” are Stanford students at an elite law school, who were invited to ask questions but asked not to prevent others from hearing from Judge Duncan).

    Second, Steinbach still chastises Duncan for his divisive viewpoints and clearly blames him in part for the controversy by refusing to yield to the sensibilities of the students — presumably by remaining silent.

    At one point during the event, I asked Judge Duncan, “Is the juice worth the squeeze?” I was referring to the responsibility that comes with freedom of speech: to consider not only the benefit of our words but also the consequences. It isn’t a rhetorical question. I believe that we would be better served by leaders who ask themselves, “Is the juice (what we are doing) worth the squeeze (the intended and unintended consequences and costs)?”

    Steinbach appears utterly clueless about why this question is so offensive to free speech values. She continues to intentionally obscure her obvious desire for speakers like Duncan to curtail their speech by stating that we would “be better served” by speakers asking if their speech is worth “the intended and unintended consequences and costs.”

    Avoiding “the squeeze” means being silent on points that have such consequences. Thus, to avoid angering these radical students, Duncan is expected to be silent on certain points or, in this case, any points that he might want to share. It is an invitation for self-censorship that would apply to any conservative jurist or speaker. While supporting free speech, Steinbach is condemning the exercise of speech when it could cause “pain” and “division.” Of course, such pain and division would not arise with a liberal jurist espousing the opposite viewpoints. Accordingly, liberal jurists would be free to speak without the sense of culpability while conservatives are expected to remain silent.

    In the end, Steinbach did not “defuse” the situation but fueled the rage with her comments. To this day, she cannot understand why Duncan would persist in speaking when some take such great offense at his views. She asks “Is there a way that we can stop blaming and start to talk and listen to each other?” Yet, her answer appears to be for speakers like Duncan to recognize that their views are simply too hurtful for some and should not be voiced to avoid “the squeeze” of free speech.

    The result is the type of doublespeak that is common on our campuses. Steinbach claims fealty to free speech while denouncing its exercise. She laments “how polarized our society has become,” but added to that polarization by expressing her own concerns over the “harm” that Duncan’s speech has brought for many at the school. She asked “how do we listen and talk to each other as people” while maintaining that, by stating his jurisprudential views, Duncan might not be worth the harm (or “squeeze”) to others.

    Anti-free speech advocates often try to portray the exercise of free speech as a complex challenge. It is not. The Duncan controversy shows how the issue is stark and simple. Judge Duncan had a right to speak and others had a right to hear him. Those who disagree with him had a right to protest outside of the event and to ask tough questions inside the event. The only thing that they could not do is disrupt the event itself; to prevent others from hearing from Judge Duncan.

    [ZH: We note that Judge Duncan, a Trump appointee, delivered a speech at the University of Notre Dame last night (March 24), telling listeners that there’s a “vital tradition of free speech in this country” and that students have the right to protest him.

    “It’s a great country, where you can harshly criticize federal judges and nothing bad will happen to you. You might even get praised or promoted,” he said.

    “But make no mistake. What went on in that classroom on March the ninth had nothing to do with our proud American tradition of free speech. It was rather a parody of it.”]

    The solution is also stark and simple, though it has, once again, been ignored by an administration.

    Students who cancel events or classes on campus are taking a position that is not just antithetical to principles of free speech but of higher education. They should be suspended or, in extreme or repeated cases, expelled.

    Otherwise, the law school is not achieving any greater clarity than this column. It is professing an absolute commitment to free speech while declining to enforce that commitment.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 15:30

  • 2-Mile Line Of Cars Forms Outside Trump Kick-Off Rally As City Of Waco Predicts 15,000+
    2-Mile Line Of Cars Forms Outside Trump Kick-Off Rally As City Of Waco Predicts 15,000+

    The city of Waco is estimating at least 15,000 attendees for Donald Trump’s 2024 presidential campaign kickoff rally at Waco regional airport on Saturday. While the venue is relatively small as far as airports go, the location was chosen because it’s the most geographically central point in Texas relative to large population centers.

    But this didn’t stop mainstream media from making incredibly superficial comparisons to the Branch Davidians while claiming “Waco is hugely symbolic on the far right.” The Trump campaign supposedly has a “secret agenda” – USA Today tries to claim in an absurd hit-piece based purely on speculation and zero sourcing. Meanwhile, a large pre-dawn line was already evident Saturday morning to get into the rally…

    via Jason Miller, Twitter

    Saturday in Waco marks first full-fledged rally of Trump’s 2024 campaign and it’s attracting national attention especially given the arrest warrant hanging over him, unprecedented for any ex-President.

    Trump grabbed headlines Friday by writing the following on his social media site: “What kind of person can charge another person, in this case a former President of the United States … and leading candidate (by far!) for the Republican Party nomination, with a Crime, when it is known by all that NO Crime has been committed, & also known that potential death & destruction in such a false charge could be catastrophic for our Country?”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Glimpse of the early morning lines…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    There are local reports that the line of cars to get into the airport venue stretched to two-miles long ahead of the event fully opening.

    Texas native Ted Nugent announced, “I will unleash a fire-breathing Star-Spangled Banner” at the Waco rally today.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And other big GOP names are expected to be at the rally…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    LIVE FEED outside the venue:

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 15:00

  • Stockman: Raiding The Taxpayer Piggy-Bank
    Stockman: Raiding The Taxpayer Piggy-Bank

    Authored by David Stockman via LewRockwell.com,

    Janet Yellen is one continuous anti-prosperity horror show and the reason is obvious enough. She got her indoctrination at Yale from the granddaddy of Professor Keynes’ US disciples, James Tobin, in the late 1960s and has spent most of her years since then pontificating in academia or dictating from the Fed.

    So now with the arrival of screaming evidence that the banking system desperately needs the disciplining effect of depositor flight, she comes out four-square for euthanizing the $9 trillion of still uninsured deposits in the US banking system.

    But let’s cut to the chase. Banks not disciplined by their depositors and not at risk for deposit flight are dangerous institutions. They leave bank executives free to swing for the fences on the asset-side of their balance sheets without fear that attentive depositors will move their money to safer pastures.

    For crying out loud. It was bad enough during the last several years when deposits were dirt cheap and knuckleheads like those who ran SVB decided to load up their balance sheets with 10-30 year duration assets against overnight demand deposits, most of which were uninsured.

    For the moment that allowed them to book outsized profits and reap the consequent benefit of soaring stock options, but these “profits” were phony as a two-dollar bill. That’s because they were being generated off long-term fixed income assets, the prices of which had nowhere to go except down.

    For want of doubt, here is the inflation-adjusted yield on the 10-year UST through the beginning of the Fed’s belated anti-inflation campaign in March 2022. No one in their right mind should have believed these deeply underwater yields were sustainable; and no banker capable of running even a credit union in Podunk Iowa would have matched up overnight deposits with these long-duration securities—investments which were absolutely heading for a nose-dive in value.

    Indeed, at the March 2022 bottom, the real 10-year UST yield stood at -6.4%, the lowest level in the 60-years shown in the chart, and undoubtedly the lowest rate ever—since prior to that time the nation’s central bank actually believed in sound money, zero inflation and market-based interest rates.

    In a word, anybody who bought long-term treasuries or agency securities at the bottom of the purple line in the chart below should have had their head examined. And most certainly they shouldn’t have been running a multi-billion bank.

    Inflation-Adjusted Yield On 10-Year UST, 1962 to March 2022

    Nonetheless, Janet Yellen and her fellow Washington clowns got themselves warmed-up last week by bailing-out $155 billion of uninsured deposits at SVB—deposits that had been wantonly put in harm’s way by reckless management on a stock-pumping joy ride.

    To wit, between 2020 and 2021 SVB’s assets nearly doubled from $115 billion to $211 billion, while the HTM (securities held to maturity) portion of that balance sheet literally exploded from $17 billion to $98 billion. And more than 95% of this massive HTM book had maturities of 10-years or more!

    Here’s the thing. These fools massively mismatched their book even without the safeguard of deposit insurance. What in the world is going to happen when deposits are 100% insured?

    More importantly, there is no substitute for career-destroying penalties when they result from the towering incompetence embodied in the blow-up of banks like SVB. Yet in that very regard it turns out that one of the senior financial officers at SVB had apparently gotten his financial training at, well, Lehman and Enron!

    So if nothing else, we need deposit flight and bank failures to purge the bad actors, incompetents and reckless cowboys from the banking industry. Yet the de facto policy is now that no depositor can loose money, no bank can fail and no one’s resume should be besmirched.

    Whatever that is, it’s not market-based capitalism. And its going to lead to massive waste and malinvestment, not bank-fueled prosperity.

    In any event, the chart below shows that the banking system is already extremely dangerous, and that compounding the risk via 100% deposit insurance would amount to lighting the match.

    In a word, over the last decade especially the Fed has flooded the financial markets with so much liquidity that the banking system has been literally drowned in excess deposits and reserves. As shown below, banking system deposits have historically been about 40% of GDP, but since the turn of the century that ratio has gone vertical, rising to more than 70% of GDP during the most intense periods of money-printing during 2020-2021.

    The flooding of the zone with deposits has been especially acute since the pre-crisis peak in November 2007. During the 15 years since then, total bank deposits have soared from $6.6 trillion to $17.6 trillion or by 6.2% per annum. And in the period since March 2020, that growth rate has accelerated to nearly 10% per annum.

    By contrast, since Q4 2007 nominal GDP has expanded by just 3.8% per annum. Yet all thing equal, savings and the resulting bank deposits would have grown at the same rate as GDP. They actually grew at almost double the GDP rate, of course, because the Fed was running the printing presses so red hot that much of the new money never left the financial system, backing up into the banking system, instead.

    Bank Deposits As A Percent Of GDP, 1962 to 2022

    Needless to say, all of these deposits had to be put to work, and aggressive managements quickly figured out the new banking ball-game. To wit, under the post Dodd-Frank regulatory regime the banking system was switched from one which was constrained by cash reserves (to meet a surge in depositor withdrawals) to one which was purportedly capital-driven based on the standards fashioned by the Bank for International Settlements.

    Had the regulators been content to go with plain vanilla capital ratios, the new regime might not have been a total disaster. But naturally the bank lobbies got their hands on the rule-writing process and determined that a spade was not a spade.

    That is, not all assets were treated as equal when it came to computing capital ratios. In fact, government debt was determined to be risk-free, requiring no capital backing whatsoever. So banks did what regulators implied they should do—they loaded up with government and agency debt because it required dramatically less capital backing.

    In turn, this “capital-light” regime was great for stock prices and executive stock options. Instead of plowing a goodly portion of earnings into capital for growth they allocated it to dividends and stock buybacks, instead. The gamblers in the stock markets were thrilled.

    For instance, from JPMorgan’s $258 billion of net income posted over 2015-2022 about $189 billion or 73% was paid out to shareholders in the form of stock buybacks ($102 billion) and dividends ($87 billion). During the same period, however, JPM’s total assets grew from $2.352 trillion in 2015 to $3.666 trillion in 2022.

    Since the Fed was fueling asset inflation and repressing money market interest rates during that same period, this 56% growth of total assets was the equivalent of a printing press. The bank’s net interest margin soared, causing its net income to flourish and its market cap to surge from $225 billion in 2015 to a peak of $500 billion in late 2021.

    But all that shareholder magic was not just because Jamie Dimon is some-kind of latter day financial Einstein. JPM’s half trillion dollar market cap was partially thanks to the capital-light regulatory regime.

    Thus, in 2015 JPM’s ratio of book equity to total assets had stood at 10.50%, which would be minimally safe in a world without “too -big-to-fail”. But as it happened, by 2022 its equity ratio had actually fallen to just 7.97% as the bank loaded up on capital-free government securities.

    The implication of that is straight forward. To maintain its 2015 equity ratio JPM would have needed $385 billion of book equity by 2022, not the $292 billion it actually reported. So to actually accomplish the robust asset growth that fueled its fulsome earnings gains it would have needed to retain $93 billion more of its net income over the period.

    That is to say, its payouts to Wall Street in the form of stock-buybacks and dividend would have been cut in half! The gamblers would not have been so pleased.

    Needless to say, based on this illustration it is easy to see why banks went whole hog buying long-duration governments. It drastically conserved capital, permitting fulsome payouts of dividends and stock buybacks.

    On the other hand, the Fed’s ostensible reason for flooding the financial system with cheap credit was to goose bank lending levels, and thereby allegedly fuel stronger economic growth. But again in the case of JPM it is evident that didn’t happen.

    In 2015 its loan book stood at $824 billion, which accounted for 64.4% of its $1.28 trillion of deposits. By 2022, however, its loan book at grown only modestly to $1.11 trillion, but that amounted to just 47.7% of deposits, which had soared to $2.34 trillion.

    In short, even if it was a good idea to artificially stimulate more loans, which it is not, that didn’t happen despite all of the Fed’s reckless money-printing. Instead, the new money flooded into banks, which bought government bonds and thereby aided the Congressional borrow-and-spend contingent, while at the same time enabling reckless bank managements to take on massive amounts of long-term Treasury and Agency securities at the rock-bottom of an interest rate cycle that will not be seen again for decades to come, if ever.

    Yet notwithstanding these realities Yellen last Sunday afternoon launched a campaign to drastically further weaken the banking system by essentially abolishing the last vestiges of depositor scrutiny and discipline. We are referring to the abominable bailout of all depositors at SVB and Signature Bank, but especially the so-called Bank Term Facility Program (BTFP). The latter was bad enough, since it allowed banks to borrow 100 cents on the dollar against 30-year bonds which lost 40% of the market value last year.

    But now Yellen’s gone full retard, suggesting outright guarantees of all deposits, regardless of size:

    “The steps we took were not focused on aiding specific banks or classes of banks. Our intervention was necessary to protect the broader U.S. banking system,” Yellen said. 

    “And similar actions could be warranted if smaller institutions suffer deposit runs that pose the risk of contagion.”

    As the Wall Street Journal noted this AM “the sound and fury of demands for universal deposit insurance are growing”. For instance, the chronic Wall Street whiner and entitled brat, Bill Ackman, is demanding his bacon be saved via 100% deposit insurance. But so is the usually sensible (on public policy, that is) Elon Musk.

    As the financial press breathlessly reported this AM, the Treasury Department staff is reviewing whether federal regulators have enough emergency authority to temporarily insure deposits greater than the current $250,000 cap on most accounts without formal consent from a deeply divided Congress, according to people with knowledge of the talks.

    The bolded phrase tells you all you need to know. How in the world after at least 40-years of Congress’ refusal to insure bank deposits at 100% regardless of size, can you have a legitimate decision to take on a $9 trillion liability in behalf of the taxpayers by executive decree?

    Indeed, if that isn’t a decision for the representatives of the people to make, we don’t know what is—if you want to even pretend we have a democracy.

    After all, 100% deposit insurance would mean that the $125 billion FDIC fund would be guaranteeing $18 trillion of deposits. They can say that the necessary funds—which might rise into the hundreds of billions or even trillions under certain loss scenarios—would come out of FDIC insurance premiums, but c’mon. That would be a giant tax by any other name because all 108 million US households with bank accounts would ultimately pay the premium in the form of lower rates on their deposits.

    Not surprisingly, of course, the Washington lobbies have already gotten involved big time in attempting to force thru this profoundly anti-democratic action. To wit, the Mid-Size Bank Coalition of America, which includes banks with assets of as much as $100 billion, urged regulators to lift the current cap on deposit insurance, according to a March 17 letter reviewed by Bloomberg. The organization expressed concern that, if another regional lender fails, more depositors will move their money to the nation’s largest banks, regardless of the underlying health of their smaller competitors.

    So what!

    Perhaps these virtuous small bankers should have been thinking about the risk of deposit flight when they loaded up their balance sheets with higher yielding assets bearing both interest rate and/or credit risks. Absent these factors, in fact, there is no reason why a conservative bank would be at risk of deposit flight or be unable to weather a temporary flight by borrowing at the Fed’s discount window.

    That’s exactly what happened in the last week. The weekly change in discount window borrowings soared to $138 billion, nearly on par with the $180 billion gain during the traumatic first week of October 2008.

    Weekly Change In Fed Discount Window Borrowings, 1980 to 2023

    Of course, the crybabies in the small and mid -sized bankers brigade don’t like the discount window because there is allegedly a stigma attached to it, and because the current discount rate is 4.75%—well above their average deposit costs. In short, they want some cheap money from Uncle Sam so they can run a asset/liability mismatch, book fulsome earnings and laugh all the way to the bank account for their stock options.

    At the end of the day, we are truly getting to the end of the road with this form of crony capitalism and socialization of losses for the big guys wearing the long-pants.

    While the usual bipartisan suspects are now busy fixing to pass legislation raising the deposit insurance limit to way above $250,000, at least the House Freedom Caucus has figured out what is at stake and has come out solidly against a 100% guarantee.

    Since they won an option to call for Speaker McCarthy’s removal at the time of his election to the job, let’s hope they are ready, willing and able to use it when any semblance of the 100% deposit insurance legislation is brought to the House floor. That’s how much is really at stake.

    Any universal guarantee on all bank deposits, whether implicit or explicit, enshrines a dangerous precedent that simply encourages future irresponsible behavior to be paid for by those not involved who followed the rules,” the House Freedom Caucus said in a statement.

    *  *  *

    Reprinted with permission from David Stockman’s Contra Corner.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 14:30

  • Russia To Station Tactical Nukes In Belarus By July, Putin Says On State TV
    Russia To Station Tactical Nukes In Belarus By July, Putin Says On State TV

    Russia has reportedly struck a deal with neighboring Belarus to station tactical nuclear weapons on its territory, Tass news agency quoted Russian President Vladimir Putin as saying on Saturday.

    Belarusian President Alexander Lukashenko has long raised the issue of stationing tactical nuclear weapons in Belarus, which borders Poland, Putin said in comments broadcast on state TV Saturday..

    “We agreed with Lukashenko that we would place tactical nuclear weapons in Belarus without violating the nonproliferation regime,” Tass quoted Putin as saying.

    Russia’s tactical nuclear weapons might arrive to Belarus as early as this summer, Putin said.

    Moscow is finishing the construction of a specialized storage for such arms amid repeated calls by Minsk to deploy tactical nuclear weapons on the Belarusian territory, he added.

    The storage in Belarus will be ready on July 1, Putin told Russia 24 TV.

    Putin also said that Moscow does not plan to hand over control over any tactical nuclear weapons to Minsk but would only deploy its own arms to the Belarusian territory.

    He did not specify when exactly the weapons would be transported to the new storage.

    Bloomberg reports that Russia has already stationed 10 aircraft in Belarus capable of carrying tactical nuclear weapons, with Putin noting that Iskander short-range missiles – capable of carrying nuclear warheads – had also been sent to Belarus, and training for crews would begin there on April 3.

    There has been no response from Washington yet to Putin’s statement, but we note that Putin claimed such a move would not violate nuclear nonproliferation agreements, pointing out that the US has “long deployed their tactical nuclear weapons on the territory of their allied countries,”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 03/25/2023 – 13:59

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 25th March 2023

  • Homeland Security Reorganizes, Appearing To Scrap Last Remnants Of Ill-Fated "Disinformation Governance Board"
    Homeland Security Reorganizes, Appearing To Scrap Last Remnants Of Ill-Fated “Disinformation Governance Board”

    Authored by Matt Taibbi and Susan Schmidt via Racket News,

    The Department of Homeland Security’s efforts to present a less Orwellian exterior to the public took a big step forward this week, as it disbanded a key subcommittee linked to the Department’s ill-fated Disinformation Governance Board, announced last year and quickly “paused” amid public outcry.

    Jen Easterly, head of the DHS’s cyber division — the Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency, or CISA — this week convened the agency’s influential Cybersecurity Advisory Committee (CSAC), which is made up of senior executives from organizations like Twitter, Amazon, and the Stanford Internet Observatory. The agency announced an expanded roster, adding 13 new members to CSAC, including chief cybersecurity officer for General Motors Kevin Tierney and Cathy Lanier, the chief security officer for the NFL. The full CSAC now contains 34 members.

    However, amid the additions, CISA also shuffled responsibilities, making a key change. In particular, its “MDM” advisory subcommittee, for “Misinformation, Disinformation and Malinformation,” was scrapped.

    The subcommittee’s leaders, including chairperson Kate Starbird of the University of Washington’s Center for an Informed Public (CIP), and Vijaya Gadde, a former top Twitter executive who was fired last year when Elon Musk took over the company, were shifted to other advisory roles.

    A spokesman for the agency said the change appeared in an unpublicized summary of a Dec. 6 advisory board meeting. The summary provided to Racket states Easterly decided late last year that the subcommittee had fulfilled its tasks and would “stand down”:

    But that notice appears to have only been posted on the agency website recently (the Wayback Machine captured a first image of it in late February). CISA’s unique approach to website maintenance has drawn attention of late. Last week, Mike Benz of the Foundation for Freedom Online reported that CISA scrubbed key sections of its web page about its campaign against “Misinformation, Disinformation, and Malinformation.” Crucially, the agency appeared to remove references to “domestic threat actors” as purveyors of “MDM.”

    CISA’s MDM guidance now, and before

    The updated page now refers to foreign actors only, and no longer makes reference to other domestic-facing programs, like an “MDM planning and incident response guide for election officials.”

    The changes come amid months of embarrassing #TwitterFiles disclosures about formal DHS involvement in the content moderation procedures of Twitter and other platforms. Two weeks ago, Michael Shellenberger of Public and the co-author of this article told a House Subcommittee about the “Censorship Industrial Complex,” among other things criticizing the “misinformation, disinformation, and malinformation” concept.

    “MDM” was once central to CISA’s mission. In fact, it appeared to be the inspiration for the infamous Governance Board, which was designed to be a centralized hub uniting various public and private “anti-disinformation” initiatives. As reported by Lee Fang and Ken Klippenstein of The Intercept last October, Easterly in February of 2022 texted a former CISA official, saying she was “trying to get us in a place where Fed can work with platforms to better understand mis/dis trends so relevant agencies can try to prebunk/debunk as useful.”

    Easterly’s February, 2022 text

    It later came out that the DHS approved the creation of the Disinformation Governance Board on February 24, 2022. The charter for the new organization, which was announced to the public by DHS chief Alejandro Mayorkas on April 27, 2022 and slated to be headed by singing censor Nina Jankowicz, spoke to the agency’s growing obsession with stopping “MDM” at home:

    DHS Disinformation Governance Board Charter

    Section1. Purpose. The purpose of the Board is to support the Department’s efforts to address mis-, dis-, and mal-information (MDM), that threatens Homeland Security. Departmental components will lead on operational responses to MDM in their relevant mission spaces.

    All of this came out after news of the Governance Board inspired a public flip-out, leading Republican Senators Chuck Grassley of Iowa and Josh Hawley of Missouri to send the DHS formal demands for information. The documents the DHS produced showed CISA envisioned a deepening of its partnership with Twitter. On April 28, the day after the Governance Board was announced, DHS Undersecretary Robert Silvers was scheduled to meet with Twitter Head of Policy Nick Pickles and Trust and Safety chief Yoel Roth.

    A briefing memo prepared for Silvers by Jankowicz advised him to discuss “operationalizing public-private partnerships between DHS and Twitter.” Silvers was to line up Twitter’s coordination with the new board, and ask it to “become involved in Disinformation Governance Board Analytic Exchanges”:

    The creation of the Disinformation Governance Board represented a remarkable shift in focus, away from foreign threats and toward the domestic population.

    The MDM subcommittee had actually once been called the Countering Foreign Influence Task Force (CFITF). Throughout the period of the 2020 Election, Twitter received large quantities of flags about tweets from the CFITF, notices which appear in abundance in the #TwitterFiles. These letters often originated from a regional American agency, like the Secretary of State’s office in Colorado or Connecticut.

    This was odd behavior for an agency devoted to countering “foreign” threats. The subcommittee subsequently changed its name and — briefly — adopted a more openly domestic focus.

    Last June, the advisory board recommended that CISA should work with and provide support to external partners “who identify emergent informational threats,” and find ways to mitigate “false and misleading narratives.”

    It also said CISA should fund and collaborate with partners to measure the impact of disinformation and mitigation, and do “proactive” work like “pre-bunking” emerging rumors. In a five-page memo of recommendations, the board listed a slew of aggressive ideas for combating “MD” at home (i.e. “mis- and disinformation”) that included “reducing engagement” by offenders:

    The tasks were enormous, advisors said. “CISA should consider MD across the information ecosystem,” including talk radio, cable news, mainstream media, and “hyper-partisan media.”

    Easterly’s response to the June recommendations focused on foreign threats. She narrowed the scope of a recommendation from the MDM subcommittee that the agency should combat mis- and disinformation that “undermines critical functions of American society and undermines response to emergencies.”

    Easterly responded by saying CISA will continue to work on ways to counter “foreign influence operations and disinformation that threatens the integrity of the election infrastructure.” She seemed to agree that the agency should work with academic researchers to measure the impact of their efforts.

    Meeting minutes from last year also show the public furor over the DHS announcement of a “Disinformation Governance Board” had MDM subcommittee members worried. They discussed delaying and toning down their June quarterly recommendations to the full CISA advisory board, with one passage suggesting members find a way to “pre-socialize” the existence of the subcommittee for key decision-makers:

    [Redacted] suggested contacting Director Easterly in preparation for the rollout during the CSAC June Quarterly Meeting, to solicit her feedback on how to pre-socialize the existence of the subcommittee with key members of congress or outside validators.

    Part of the subcommittee’s worry seemed to be that not many people knew what they were up to, or that they even existed — not in Congress or even at DHS. The group worried about how to “strategically approach MDM in the government in the current discourse.”

    The “current discourse” was a reference to the furor over the Disinformation Governance Board, which by then was being likened to an Orwellian “Ministry of Truth.” After an outcry, Mayorkas had to “pause” its work and asked two top Washington lawyers, former DHS Secretary Mike Chertoff and former Deputy Attorney General Jamie Gorelick to weigh in on the legitimacy of the board. Within weeks the lawyers issued an urgent interim finding: It’s not needed.

    They then issued a final report in August, affirming the Disinformation Board should be abolished. The report said government should limit its involvement with social media companies. DHS, they concluded, can bring disinformation to the attention of social media companies, but “it is for the platforms, alone, to determine whether any action is appropriate under their policies.”

    Given the controversy over the Disinformation Governance Board, subcommittee members decided it would be better to jettison altogether a planned recommendation on “privacy and social listening,” which appeared to refer to the use of software that can proactively search out particular words or language. They worried this “most sensitive recommendation” could “overshadow other recommendations posed by the committee.”

    The decision this week by CISA to scrap the MDM subcommittee, like last year’s “pause” of the governance board, reflects political sensitivity to growing public concern over social media censorship. What changes would more press attention bring?

    Subscribe to Racket News

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 03/24/2023 – 23:40

  • "City Killer" Apollo-Class Asteroid To Buzz Earth, Visible Via Telescope
    “City Killer” Apollo-Class Asteroid To Buzz Earth, Visible Via Telescope

    The Associated Press reported that a “city-killer” asteroid, known as 2023 DZ2, is set to pass between Earth and the Moon’s orbit on Saturday. Discovered merely three weeks ago, the asteroid’s 17,000 mph flyby of Earth will be observable through telescopes or accessible via a live stream. 

    023 DZ2 is an Apollo-class asteroid measuring approximately 140-310 feet in diameter. This classification signifies that its orbit intersects Earth’s orbit around the Sun. Apollo asteroids are also classified as “near-Earth objects” because they can be “potentially hazardous.” The good news is the asteroid will pass Earth by about 110,000 miles, about half the distance to the Moon.

    The Virtual Telescope Project will provide a live stream Saturday evening around 7:30 pm EST for the flyby.

    Anyone with a six-inch telescope in the Northern Hemisphere might be able to observe the asteroid as it passes by Earth.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 03/24/2023 – 23:20

  • GOP Bill To Expand Tax-Free Health Savings Accounts To All Americans
    GOP Bill To Expand Tax-Free Health Savings Accounts To All Americans

    Authored by Joseph Lord via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    ​​House Rules Committee member Rep. Chip Roy (R-Texas) said during the panel’s four-hour Jan. 30 meeting that ending the federal healthcare worker vaccination mandate is “part of a bigger discussion that we should have regarding deference to the executive [branch] and to the bureaucratic state.” (Win McNamee/Getty Images)

    Rep. Chip Roy (R-Texas) has introduced a bill that would make tax-free Health Savings Accounts (HSAs) available to all Americans.

    Currently, most Americans cannot use HSAs due to the stringent rules that govern their use: only those who pay an abnormally high insurance deductible can take advantage of the pre-tax program. In practice, this means that 90 percent of Americans are not eligible for HSAs.

    Roy’s bill, dubbed the Healthcare Freedom Act, would change the rules to make all Americans eligible for HSA accounts.

    To do this, the bill would de-link eligibility for an HSA, renamed a “Health Freedom Account” by the legislation, from health insurance requirements.

    Many patients who pay high-deductible policies—which have grown more popular among employers over the past two decades—never meet their annual deductible, meaning any money they paid on the policy was effectively wasted. Because of the increased prevalence of high-deductible health insurance policies, many Americans have had to rely on savings to cover their day-to-day medical expenses.

    Additionally, the bill would increase the maximum annual contribution to HSAs from $3,650 to $12,000, or to $24,000 for a joint contribution.

    In effect, this would allow American families to pay less in taxes annually and direct more money to HSAs.

    The bill would also expand permitted expenses under an HSA, allowing contributors to make tax-free withdrawals to pay for health insurance and associated costs, direct primary care arrangements, prescription and over-the-counter medications, and others.

    Roy told The Epoch Times in a statement on the legislation that his bill would be a win for patient choice.

    “Patients and their doctors should be driving our health care system—not politicians, and not government or corporate bureaucrats,” Roy said.

    He added that collusion between government and health care insurers against HSAs had led to increased medical costs for Americans.

    “The American people are absolutely fed up with Big Health care, government bureaucrats, and Congress destroying affordable access to the greatest medical care in the world,” Roy said. “It’s time to cut through the knot of government-corporate collusion and put power back in the hands of those who actually provide it and those who actually receive it.”

    Roy concluded, “I refuse to sit back and watch our government completely decimate health care freedom, and the Healthcare Freedom Act is a crucial step forward to saving it.”

    The legislation, which Roy also introduced during the 117th Congress, has won the praise of Americans for Prosperity, a free market non-profit.

    Tax-free Health Savings Accounts save people money and give them more control over their health care by putting them in charge of their health care dollars,” said Dean Clancy, senior health policy fellow at Americans for Prosperity. “The fact that 90 percent of Americans can’t have an HSA is a major injustice that must be addressed if we truly want to reduce health care costs and make the health system more responsive to patients. Expanding access to HSAs is key to creating more personalized options in health care, and we applaud Rep. Roy for including this solution in his Healthcare Freedom Act.”

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 03/24/2023 – 23:00

  • "Significant" Amount Of Toxic Waste From Ohio Train Derailment Heads To Baltimore
    “Significant” Amount Of Toxic Waste From Ohio Train Derailment Heads To Baltimore

    The decision to transport a “significant” amount of toxic wastewater from the East Palestine, Ohio train derailment by rail to a wastewater treatment plant located east of Baltimore City, and eventually discharge it into the local water system, might spark outrage among residents.

    Local media outlet WYPR obtained a letter from Contractor Clean Harbors of Baltimore Inc., which described itself as the “optimal wastewater treatment site to treat and discharge the wastewater collected from rainwater, collected water and stream water above and below the cleanup site of the Norfolk Southern Railroad derailment.” 

    Once the contractor obtains approval, the Back River Wastewater Treatment Plant in Baltimore County is set to receive over 675,000 gallons of toxic water via rail transport (if you can believe it – by rail) — a fact that may concern Baltimore residents. The approval is expected to be granted imminently.

    “The water would be pre-treated by a contractor then dumped into the city-controlled wastewater system then cleaned with the city’s Back River Wastewater Treatment Plant in Dundalk,” WYPR said. 

    Baltimore City Mayor Brandon Scott voiced concerns about the plan to treat the toxic water. 

    “Both the county executive and I have grave concerns about the waste from this derailment coming into our facilities and being discharged into our system.” 

    Scott added he wants additional testing to be conducted before the water is released from the plant and into the water system. 

    And we wonder what water system is near the plant. Perhaps it’s the Chesapeake Bay… 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 03/24/2023 – 22:40

  • Don’t Believe The Hype: Woke Is Real And It’s Dangerous
    Don’t Believe The Hype: Woke Is Real And It’s Dangerous

    Authored by J. Peder Zane via RealClear Politics,

    He’s woke. She’s woke. So are they, them, ey, ze, and xeir.

    Know what I mean?

    Of course, you do. The dominant flashpoint word in today’s political lexicon – woke is here, there, everywhere. From Whoopi’s lips to your ears. I say it all the time – way too much, according to my wife – but never once has anybody asked: what the heck are you talking about?

    The word is becoming a problem for woke-noscenti because the more people know about the alphabet soup movement – DEI, CRT, ESG, QIA+, etc. – the less they like it. What to do? Deny, deflect, and demonize, of course. Seizing on a conservative writer’s halting efforts to define the term during an interview, they are arguing that woke is a made-up, meaningless slurbrandished by the right to oppress minorities. Seeking to shut down all discussion of their movement, Touré outlawed it as the new “n-word.”

    Never mind that all language is made up – words are just symbols we create so we can talk about things and ideas – and that the term “woke” was coined by African Americans to describe the road-to-Damascus moment when the scales fall from one’s eyes and society’s allegedly oppressive structures become clear.

    Still, it can seem hard to precisely define this hydra-headed beast which seeks to redefine every aspect of human relations and understanding, from race, gender, and science, to politics, culture, family, and identity. Its tentacles are so far-reaching that even some writers who are critical of the movement are throwing up their lexicographic hands.

    Honestly, it’s probably enough to apply Justice Potter Stewart’s understanding of pornography: “I shall not today attempt further to define the kinds of material … but I know it when I see it.”

    The current insistence that woke isn’t even a word, however, provides giving-up-the-game clarity. At root, wokism hinges on the power to command perception and language. That word you know and discuss all the time, it doesn’t exist. Full stop. The consequential policy debates that consume our attention – e.g., battles over critical race theory or gender affirming care for children – are mere skirmishes in the far broader effort to control thought; once that’s accomplished, anything is possible. Hence its core demand: are you going to believe me or your lying eyes?

    To paraphrase Raymond Carver, what are we talking about when we talk about woke?

    Woke describes the ongoing cultural revolution which defines reality by its usefulness in achieving left-wing goals.

    The main weapon of the woke, who dominate society’s privileged channels of communication – academia, publishing, entertainment, and the media – is the article of faith that almost all reality is socially constructed, a creation of humanity rather than nature, to enable those in power to subjugate “the other.” Truth is not the goal of a never-ending quest to describe what is, but simply whatever they proclaim it to be. When there is no hard and fast truth, anything is possible. Facts are not stubborn things, but malleable building blocks which gain or lose authority based on their usefulness for constructing preferred narratives.

    Thus, the woke incessantly offer versions of events that are at odds with the known record. They told us that the summer of 2020 riots were “mostly peaceful;” that antifa was only an idea; that the nation is overrun by white supremacists and Christian nationalists. They insist that women earn a fraction of the pay men get for performing the same work; that unarmed blacks are shot by the police at much higher rates than other Americans; that all disparities between blacks and whites in wealth, health, and education are completely due to racism. And they assert that critical race theory is only taught in some law school classes, that mathematics is racist and sexist, men can menstruate, climate change is an existential threat, and Gov. DeSantis wants to prevent teachers in Florida from saying the word “gay.”

    The crucial dynamic is not just the assertion of fraught claims but the continued advancement of them after they have been debunked. The New York Times, for example, didn’t just declare in its “1619 Project” that the American Revolution was fought to preserve slavery, it pooh-poohed complaints from leading historians that this was false.

    As TV’s Dr. House observed, “everybody lies.” But woke lies have a larger purpose beyond gaining a temporary advantage. They are a strategy aimed at defining reality. Yes, people have always argued over truth, but history shows that societies governed by rigid, facts-be-damned ideology crush freedom, human dignity, and progress in order to coerce submission.

    This soul-crushing dynamic is inevitable because people aren’t blind – they can see they are being lied to. This is the chief reason why American politics has become so angry and divisive. The woke left is trying to impose a false world view. When people push back, they are silenced, demonized, and canceled. Dissent is not an option because the entire woke project depends on acceptance of their worldview.

    Woke isn’t just a word, it’s a revolution.

    J. Peder Zane is an editor for RealClearInvestigations and a columnist for RealClearPolitics.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 03/24/2023 – 22:20

  • Off-Duty Pilot Enters Southwest Cockpit To Help After Pilot Suffers Medical Emergency
    Off-Duty Pilot Enters Southwest Cockpit To Help After Pilot Suffers Medical Emergency

    An off-duty pilot on a Southwest Airlines flight from Las Vegas to Columbus, Ohio entered the cockpit to help after one of the on-duty pilots suffered a medical emergency mid-flight.

    “The captain became incapacitated while enroute. He’s in the back of the aircraft right now with a flight attendant, but we need to get him on an ambulance immediately,” said a crew member in a communication to air traffic control, according to LiveATC.net.

    “A credentialed Pilot from another airline, who was on board, entered the Flight Deck and assisted with radio communication while our Southwest Pilot flew the aircraft,” said a airline spokesman Chris Perry, CNN reports. “We greatly appreciate their support and assistance.”

    A nurse who happened to also be onboard helped care for the pilot, the airline said, adding “It’s standard procedure for our Flight Crews to request assistance from traveling medical personnel during in-flight medical events involving Customers, this situation just so happened to involve one of our Employees.”

    According to FlightAware.com, the plane was in the air for around one hour and 17 minutes. After returning to the Las Vegas airport, a backup crew boarded the plane and continued to Columbus as planned.

    The FAA is investigating the incident.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 03/24/2023 – 22:00

  • Pentagon Leaders Say New Budget Will Help Prepare For War With China
    Pentagon Leaders Say New Budget Will Help Prepare For War With China

    Via The Libertarian Institute, 

    Secretary of Defense Lloyd Austin and Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Gen. Mark Milley told Congress at a Thursday hearing that the Pentagon’s 2024 budget request will help the country prepare for a future war with China.

    Milley insisted the Pentagon’s massive $842 billion budget request is meant to deter war but said it will also prepare the US military to fight one. He told the House Appropriations subcommittee on defense that deterring and preparing for a conflict “is extraordinarily expensive, but it’s not as expensive as fighting a war. And this budget prevents war and prepares us to fight it if necessary.”

    The Pentagon identified China as the “most comprehensive and serious challenge to US national security strategy” in the 2022 National Defense Strategy, and lately, US military leaders have been speaking more explicitly about how they’re preparing for a direct war with China despite the risk of nuclear war. President Biden has also vowed to defend Taiwan in the event of a Chinese attack.

    Milley said China’s actions “are moving it down the path toward confrontation and potential conflict with its neighbors and possibly the United States,” echoing similar warnings made by Chinese officials.

    Chinese Foreign Minister Qin Gang warned earlier this month that if the US doesn’t change course on its military buildup in the Asia Pacific and other policies aimed at China, it will lead to “conflict and confrontation.” The Pentagon’s budget request will further expand the US military footprint in the region by funding a buildup plan known as the Pacific Deterrence Initiative.

    “This budget includes a 40 percent increase over last year’s for the Pacific Deterrence Initiative to an all-time high of $9.1 billion,” Austin said at the hearing.

    “That will fund a stronger force posture, better defenses for Hawaii and Guam, and deeper cooperation with our allies and partners,” the top general added.

    For China hawks in Congress, what the Pentagon has asked to spend in 2024 is not enough. Including funding for other agencies, President Biden’s military spending request totals $886.4 billion. Congress is expected to add tens of billions more as it did with Biden’s 2022 and 2023 requests.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 03/24/2023 – 21:40

  • Ray Epps Hires Lawyer With Ties To FBI-Linked Perkins Coie, Threatens Tucker Carlson
    Ray Epps Hires Lawyer With Ties To FBI-Linked Perkins Coie, Threatens Tucker Carlson

    Authored by Mark Pellin via Headline USA,

    Ray Epps’s new attorney, who is demanding on behalf of his client a public apology from Tucker Carlson under threat of a defamation lawsuit, is the director of a radical anti-Trump organization, a close associate of Media Matters Democrat attack dog David Brock and a former employee of Perkins Coie, the lawfare firm behind Russiagate and the Steele dossier.

    Ray Epps, right, conducting an improv interview. / IMAGE: RT via YouTube.

    Epps’s attorney, Michael Teter, sent a letter on Thursday to Carlson, demanding the Fox News host retract what Teter called “false and defamatory statements” that Epps was a J6 government plant.

    Carlson and myriad media outlets have reported on Epps’s suspect actions connected to the J6 uprising, his dubious testimony to the J6 Inquisition and his connections to federal agents.

    Teter — Epps’s new lawyer — is a former employee of Perkins Coie, the firm notorious for the grunt work and disinformation campaigns it ran for Hillary Clinton’s presidential campaign.

    The Democrat-connected law firm helped hatch the Steele dossier and actively collaborated with the FBI to push the bogus Russia collusion narrative. In the run-up to the 2016 tilt, Perkins Coie had furnished the FBI with office space.

    “We have learned that since March 2012, the FBI approved and facilitated a Secure Work Environment at Perkins Coie’s Washington, D.C. office, which continues to be operational,” lawmakers wrote to FBI chief Christopher Wray.

    And now one of Perkins Coie’s alumni is helping Ray Epps shut down Tucker Carlson.

    After leaving Perkins Coie, Ray Epps’ new attorney hooked up with Media Matters founder and TDS fabulist David Brock. While not threatening Tucker Carlson with lawsuits on behalf of suspected J6 fed plant Ray Epps, Teter manages The 65 Project, where Brock is a senior advisor.

    The 65 Project was launched to punish lawyers who supported President Trump and to dissuade future attempts to overturn elections on illegitimate grounds.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 03/24/2023 – 21:00

  • Iran-Backed & US Occupation Forces Currently Battling In Eastern Syria, Reports Of Casualties
    Iran-Backed & US Occupation Forces Currently Battling In Eastern Syria, Reports Of Casualties

    Update(20:00ET): US forces occupying Syria’s northeast are in a high state of alert, and there are reports of ongoing gunbattles with Iran-backed militias into the night hours. It’s being widely acknowledged as the most serious fighting involving American forces there since 2019, with some of the latest rocket launches targeting Omar oil field, which has long been held by US and Kurdish forces.

    “The conflict in northeast Syria escalated on Friday as Iran-backed militias launched a volley of rocket and drone attacks against coalition bases after American reprisals for a drone attack that killed a U.S. contractor and injured six other Americans,” The New York Times reports late in the day Friday.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Pentagon claims the flare-up in fighting began the prior night with a drone attack which detonated at a US base. US officials called the self-destructive drone of “Iranian origin” – which resulted in rare American casualties.

    The White House then authorized a series of major airstrikes utilizing its aircraft out of Qatar. There were reports of fatalities and casualties among Syrian Army as well as allied Iranian troops as well.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Biden addressed the fighting while visiting PM Justin Trudeau in Ottawa. “Make no mistake, the United States does not, does not, I emphasize, seek conflict with Iran.” He added: “But be prepared for us to act forcefully to protect our people. That’s exactly what happened last night.”

    US officials have acknowledge to the Times that there was some kind of failure in the base’s anti-air systems: 

    Two U.S. officials said the main air defense system at the base was “not fully operational” at the time, raising questions about whether the attackers had detected that vulnerability and exploited it, or just happened to send the drone at that time, according to people who spoke on condition of anonymity to discuss the investigation.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As for the raging overnight fight currently said to be unfolding, few details have emerged as to potential casualties on either side. The timing is interesting politically given the Saudi-Iran rapprochement, as well a recent failed push by Congress members to force the Biden White House to pull troops out of Syria.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * *

    The United States struck Iranian-linked groups in Syria on Thursday after a US contractor was killed and five military service members and another US contractor were wounded in a purported drone strike. 

    The Pentagon said the US casualties were suffered on a base near Hasakah in the northeast part of the country, when a “one-way, unmanned, aerial vehicle” hit a maintenance facility at 1:38 pm local time. The statement said intelligence assessed the drone to be “of Iranian origin.” 

    Three service members and the surviving U.S. contractor were medically evacuated to military medical facilities in Iraq. Two service members were treated at the base. No details were provided about which military branches the service members were affiliated with, nor the identity of the contractors. 

    Syria’s Hasakah province is south of Turkey and west of Iraq 

    “At the direction of President Biden, I authorized U.S. Central Command forces to conduct precision airstrikes tonight in eastern Syria against facilities used by groups affiliated with Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guards Corps (IRGC),” said Secretary of Defense Lloyd J. Austin III in a statement. “The airstrikes were conducted in response to today’s attack as well as a series of recent attacks against Coalition forces in Syria by groups affiliated with the IRGC.”

    The violence came on the same day as reports that Syria and Saudi Arabia are on the brink of fully restoring diplomatic relations — to include reopening embassies. As we wrote just yesterday: 

    It seems the Gulf has been willing to recognize that the Syrian government won the decade-long war and move on, but not Washington. The US has continued its military occupation of northern Syria, and Israel has extended its bombing campaign, even this week with strikes on Aleppo international airport.

    The violence also comes alongside a Chinese-brokered rapprochement between Saudi Arabia and Iran, which will see the long-time archrivals restore full diplomacy. An aide to Israeli Prime Minister Netanyahu, disappointed over the prospect of more peaceful relations between Saudi Arabia and Iran, said it was the result of American “weakness.” 

    US troops near the Suwaydiyah oil fields in the Hasakah province in 2021 (Delil Souleiman/AFP via Getty Images and Axios)

    In August of last year, US helicopters attacked Iranian-linked militants in Syria after rockets were fired at US bases. 

    In separate statement on Thursday’s events, US Central Command said, “Our troops remain in Syria to ensure the enduring defeat of ISIS, which benefits the security and stability of not only Syria, but the entire region.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Officially, about 900 US service members are deployed in Syria, against the wishes of the Syrian government. The presence dates back to 2015, with successive administrations claiming the deployments are legal under the aging 2001 and 2002 Authorizations for Use of Military Force (AUMFs). The first authorized force against the perpetrators of 9/11, and the second authorized the disastrous invasion of Iraq.  

    Earlier this month, the House rejected a resolution that would have directed President Biden to withdraw U.S. troops within 180 days. Introduced by Florida Republican Rep. Matt Gaetz, it failed in a 103-321 vote. Both the yea and nay votes were highly bipartisan; 56 Democrats joined 47 Republicans in calling for troops to leave. 

    In a 9-86 vote on Wednesday, the Senate killed an amendment offered by Sen. Rand Paul that would have put a six-month sunset on the 2001 AUMF.  ​​​​​“No one in Congress in 2001 believed they were voting for a decades-long war fought in at least 19 countries,” wrote Paul at Responsible Statecraft, noting that the six-month window would give Congress time to debate “where and how to authorize force.” 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 03/24/2023 – 20:45

  • Think Of The Zoomers! Democrat Activists Worry TikTok Ban Would Be 'Slap In The Face' To Young Voters
    Think Of The Zoomers! Democrat Activists Worry TikTok Ban Would Be ‘Slap In The Face’ To Young Voters

    After a Thursday grilling of TikTok CEO Shou Zi Chew at a congressional hearing over concerns about user data and Chinese spying, Democrats have found an odd way of defending the app which may place data into the hands of the CCP…

    …banning the app – which doesn’t actually exist in China – will be a “slap in the face” to zoomers, aka GenZ.

    Screenshot, NBC News

    “I’m not defending TikTok as a company, I’m defending my entire generation,” said 19-year-old Harvard freshman, Aidan Kohn-Murphy, who founded a group in 2020 called TikTok for Biden (now called Gen Z for Change, having been formally incorporated as a political nonprofit).

    “If they went ahead with banning TikTok, it would feel like a slap in the face to a lot of young Americans,” he added. “Democrats don’t understand the political consequences this would have.”

    As the Biden administration considers banning the Chinese-owned short-form video platform with some 150 million U.S. users, young progressive activists and the older Democratic strategists trying to reach them are worried that the officials making the decision — very few of whom likely regularly use TikTok — have no idea how central the platform is to the lives of many in a generation that is just coming of age politically.

    Gen Z — the teens and 20-somethings born after 1996 — skew overwhelmingly liberal and Democratic. Their stronger-than-expected turnout in the 2022 midterms was partially credited with salvaging what otherwise might have been a disastrous election for the Democratic Party. -NBC News

    According to a recent poll, a majority of GenZ voters (53%) opposed a ban on TikTok vs. 34% who supported it. 49% of millennials support the ban vs. 34% who are similarly against it.

    “No doubt, Gen Z loves TikTok — it’s a source of entertainment, advice and revenue for influencers,” said pollster, John Della Volpe. “Banning it without a clear presentation of facts would be jarring; but what this survey shows is that two thirds of young Americans are concerned about Chinese threats to national security — and Gen Z is more pragmatic that many initially thought.”

    Who else defended TikTok? The Washington Post’s Drew Harwell, who banged out a multi-tweet screed arguing that “TikTok might downplay its ownership by a China-based company because members of Congress keep saying it’s a secret Chinese spying machine owned by the Chinese Communist Party with zero evidence.”

    Except…

    Hilarity ensues;

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 03/24/2023 – 20:40

  • Many CDC Blunders Exaggerated Severity Of COVID-19: Study
    Many CDC Blunders Exaggerated Severity Of COVID-19: Study

    Authored by Zachary Stieber via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) made at least 25 statistical or numerical errors during the COVID-19 pandemic, and the overwhelming majority exaggerated the severity of the pandemic, according to a new study.

    Researchers who have been tracking CDC errors compiled 25 instances where the agency offered demonstrably false information. For each instance, they analyzed whether the error exaggerated or downplayed the severity of COVID-19.

    Of the 25 instances, 20 exaggerated the severity, the researchers reported in the study, which was published ahead of peer review on March 23.

    The CDC has expressed significant concern about COVID-19 misinformation. In order for the CDC to be a credible source of information, they must improve the accuracy of the data they provide,” the authors wrote.

    The CDC did not respond to a request for comment.

    Most Errors Involved Children

    Most of the errors were about COVID-19’s impact on children.

    In mid-2021, for instance, the CDC claimed that 4 percent of the deaths attributed to COVID-19 were kids. The actual percentage was 0.04 percent. The CDC eventually corrected the misinformation, months after being alerted to the issue.

    CDC Director Dr. Rochelle Walensky falsely told a White House press briefing in October 2021 that there had been 745 COVID-19 deaths in children, but the actual number, based on CDC death certificate analysis, was 558.

    Walensky and other CDC officials also falsely said in 2022 that COVID-19 was a top five cause of death for children, citing a study that gathered CDC data instead of looking at the data directly. The officials have not corrected the false claims.

    Other errors include the CDC claiming in 2022 that pediatric COVID-19 hospitalizations were “increasing again” when they’d actually peaked two weeks earlier; CDC officials in 2023 including deaths among infants younger than 6 months old when reporting COVID-19 deaths among children; and Walensky on Feb. 9, 2023, exaggerating the pediatric death toll before Congress.

    “These errors suggest the CDC consistently exaggerates the impact of COVID-19 on children,” the authors of the study said.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 03/24/2023 – 20:20

  • Miami Prepares For "Lawlessness And Carnage" Weekend As Mayor Vows To End Spring Break
    Miami Prepares For “Lawlessness And Carnage” Weekend As Mayor Vows To End Spring Break

    With spring breakers causing chaos across the South Florida area, Miami Beach is bracing for another wave of mayhem. According to the New York Post, business owners are preparing for three days of “lawlessness and carnage.” 

    “These people [spring breakers] have zero respect for any property, for anybody. Drugs, prostitution, you name it we’ve seen it.

    “You walk on the street on a daily basis and you’ve got guys coming up to you, [asking] if you want coke, if you want marijuana.

    “The people that come to Miami Beach in the last couple of years are no spring breakers… They’re adults. They’re troublemakers,” said Sebastian Labno, who co-owns several restaurants in the area.

    Miami Beach is already reeling from last weekend’s riots, shocking execution-style murders, and a number of smash-and-grabs. The violence was so bad that Miami Beach declared a state of emergency and implemented a curfew last Sunday into early Monday. 

    The identity of the spring breakers causing chaos can be seen in videos posted on Twitter.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And maybe Miami Beach Mayor Dan Gelber has reached a breaking point. He told Bloomberg:

    “It’s time Miami Beach gets rid of spring break.

    “Spring break is not a driver for the kind of economy we want.”

    Gelber’s potential move to end spring beak is probably due to the ultra-rich who moved to South Florida during the pandemic. 

    Officials in Miami Beach have expressed interest in ending spring break over the past several years due to the weeks of chaos that occur annually in March. However, despite enforcing temporary curfews, no permanent action has been taken to address the worsening violence. 

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/24/2023 – 20:00

    1. Rickards: Why The Fed Keeps Getting It Wrong
      Rickards: Why The Fed Keeps Getting It Wrong

      Authored by James Rickards via DailyReckoning.com,

      The market’s in a highly unstable state right now. These violent swings show the inadequacy of the standard models that the Fed and other mainstream analysts use.

      The Fed assumes so many things about markets that are simply false, like that markets are always efficient, for example. They’re not. Under volatile conditions like these they gap up and down — they don’t move in rational, predictable increments like the “efficient-market hypothesis” supposes.

      The problem is that the Fed’s models are empirically false.

      Studies have proven how faulty their models are. The Fed has the worst forecasting record in the world. It’s basically been wrong every year since 2009.

      Equilibrium models like the Fed uses basically say the world runs like a clock and occasionally it gets knocked out of equilibrium. And all you have to do is tweak policy or manipulate some variable to push it back into equilibrium.

      It’s like resetting a clock. That’s a shorthand way of describing what an equilibrium model is. They treat markets like they’re some kind of machine. It’s a 19th-century, mechanistic approach.

      But traditional approaches that rely on static models bear little relationship to reality.

      Twenty-first-century markets aren’t machines and they don’t work in this clockwork fashion.

      The Fed uses equilibrium models to understand an economy that is not an equilibrium system; it’s a complex dynamic system.

      The Fed uses the Phillips curve to understand the relationship between unemployment and inflation when 50 years of data say there is no fixed relationship. The Fed uses what’s called value-at-risk modeling based on normally distributed events when the evidence is clear that the degree distribution of risk events is a power curve, not a normal or bell curve.

      As a result of these defective models, the Fed printed trillions of new money beginning in 2008 to ‘stimulate’ the economy, only to produce the weakest recovery in history. Need proof? Every year, the Federal Reserve forecasts economic growth on a one-year forward basis.

      And it’s been wrong every year for the better part of a decade. When I say ‘wrong’, I mean by orders of magnitude. If the Fed forecast 3.5% growth and actual growth was 3.3%, I would consider that to be awesome.

      But the Fed would forecast 3.5% growth and it would come in at 2.2%. That’s not even close, considering that growth is confined to plus or minus 4% in the vast majority of years.

      Right now the economy faces severe headwinds in the form of geopolitical instability, inflation and ongoing supply chain disruptions. The chances of recession are very high.

      The Fed needs interest rates to be between 4% and 5% to fight recession. That’s how much “dry powder” the Fed needs going into a recession. In September 2007, the fed funds rate was at 4.75%, toward the high end of the range. That gave the Fed plenty of room to cut, which it certainly did. Between 2008 and 2015, rates were essentially at zero.

      The good news, if you can call it that, is that the current fed funds target rate is between 4.75%-5%. That’s what today’s rate hike brought it up to. So, if we have a recession this year the Fed has the dry powder to fight it. But then the cycle just starts all over again.

      Here’s the deeper problem with all the Fed’s manipulations…

      The problem with any kind of market manipulation (what central bankers call “policy”) is that there’s no way to end it without unintended and usually negative consequences. Once you start down the path of manipulation, it requires more and more manipulation to keep the game going.

      Finally it no longer becomes possible to turn back without crashing the system.

      Of course, manipulation by government agencies and central banks always starts out with good intentions. They are trying to “save” the banks or “save” the market from extreme outcomes or crashes.

      But this desire to save something ignores the fact that bank failures and market crashes are sometimes necessary and healthy to clear out prior excesses and dysfunctions. A crash can clean out the rot, put losses where they belong and allow the system to start over with a clean balance sheet and a strong lesson in prudence.

      Instead, the central bankers ride to the rescue of corrupt or mismanaged banks (hello, SVB!). This saves the wrong people (incompetent and corrupt bank managers and investors) and hurts the everyday investor or worker who watches his portfolio implode while the incompetent bank managers get to keep their jobs and big bonuses.

      All it does is set the stage for a bigger crisis down the road. It certainly hasn’t helped the economy.

      In my 2014 book, The Death of Money, I wrote, “The United States is Japan on a larger scale.” That was nine years ago. Japan started its “lost decade” in the 1990s. Now their lost decade has dragged into over three lost decades. The U.S. began its first lost decade in 2009 and is now in its second lost decade with no end in sight.

      The economic damage from the lockdowns certainly didn’t help.

      What I referred to in 2014 is that central bank policy in both countries has been completely ineffective at restoring long-term trend growth or solving the steady accumulation of unsustainable debt.

      In Japan this problem began in the 1990s, and in the U.S. the problem began in 2009, but it’s the same problem with no clear solution. The irony is that in the early 2000s, former Fed Chair Ben Bernanke routinely criticized the Japanese for their inability to escape from recession, deflation and slow growth.

      When the U.S. recession began during the global financial crisis of 2008, Bernanke promised that he would not make the same mistakes the Japanese made in the 1990s. Instead, he made every mistake the Japanese made, and the U.S. is stuck in the same place and will remain there until the Fed wakes up to its problems.

      Bernanke thought that low interest rates and massive money printing would lead to lending and spending that would restore trend growth to 3.2% or higher. But he ignored the role of velocity (speed of money turnover) and the unwillingness of banks to lend or individuals to borrow.

      When that happens, the Fed is pushing on a string — printing money with no result except asset bubbles.

      That’s where we are today.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/24/2023 – 19:40

    2. Defunded Austin Cops Take So Long To Respond To DUI That Driver Sobers Up, Walks Free
      Defunded Austin Cops Take So Long To Respond To DUI That Driver Sobers Up, Walks Free

      Police in Austin, Texas took so long to respond to a drunk driving incident that the driver was able to sober up and avoid charges, Fox News reports.

      Lacey Purciful and her family waited 2.5 hours for Austin police to arrive to the scene of a DUI. (Purciful Family via Fox News)

      Lacey Purciful told the outlet that she was driving with her husband Dustin and two children in North Austin around 4 p.m. on March 18, when a drunk driver cut across two lanes of traffic and hit them head-on.

      Head on, didn’t hit the brakes, airbags deployed, screaming kids, smoke, adrenaline, we started screaming, and got the kids out of the car,” she said, adding that they quickly determined that the driver – a man in his 70s – was intoxicated. According to Purciful, the “first thing” a bus driver on the scene told her was that the other driver “smells of alcohol” and was “refusing to get out of the car.”

      @ladybug3660 Head on collision by a drunk driver. City of Austin TX police department has yet to arrive…2 Hours Later!!!!##drunkdriver##austintx##caraccident##wheresthecops ♬ original sound – Lacey Purciful

      https://www.tiktok.com/embed.js

      “He sat in the car for over 30 minutes and then when he got out of the car he fell to the ground and was making weird noises and just acting weird,” she said.

      More than 2.5 hours later, a police officer responded to the scene, telling them that only five officers were working that area. The suspect was given a sobriety test, and was let go.

      “Everyone could smell alcohol on this man,” said Purciful. “He openly admitted what he was drinking. He told my husband he was drinking High Noons. It isn’t just me making accusations he was just straight-up coming out and telling us and there was no remorse.”

      The Purciful family suffered injuries as a result of the crash. (Purciful family via Fox News)

      “He never asked if our children were OK. He never apologized. I have a video of him smiling at me as I’m calling him a drunk driver. He’s just standing there smiling at me,” she told the outlet.

      The couple has retained personal injury attorney Adam Loewy who told Fox News Digital that his understanding is typically around 25 officers would be in the area if it had been fully staffed. The 2.5-hour lag allowed the driver to avoid criminal charges by sobering up, he claimed.

      “I’ve heard this again and again where officers are telling me, look, we don’t have enough people working and so when that’s the scenario, these men and women go to different calls and there’s more calls that come in and what happens is you just wait and that’s just how it is,” Loewy said. -Fox News

      As Fox News notes, the Austin City Council slashed their police budget in 2020 in the wake of the George Floyd riots across the country, while low morale and a recent move by the council to abandon a recently agreed upon contract with the PD has sparked a wave of retirements from the force.

      Democratic Mayor Kirk Watson recently assured the public that the PD would be “fully staffed” during the March 18th SXSW festival, when the Purcifuls were struck.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/24/2023 – 19:20

    3. FDA Notice: Common Stroke Medication Recalled Over Cancer-Causing Chemical
      FDA Notice: Common Stroke Medication Recalled Over Cancer-Causing Chemical

      Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) announced the recall of a commonly used stroke medication after the company discovered the presence of a potentially cancer-causing impurity.

      In an FDA-issued recall notice on March 22, Ascend Laboratories LLC said it is recalling Dabigatran Etcxilate Capsules at the consumer level after nitrosamine, a carcinogenic substance, was found about the “acceptable daily intake level.” The company said it hasn’t received any reports of adverse events or health problems in connection to the recall.

      Nitrosamines are common in water and foods, including cured and grilled meats, dairy products, and vegetables. Everyone is exposed to some level of nitrosamines. These impurities may increase the risk of cancer if people are exposed to them above acceptable levels over long periods of time,” the FDA said. “The product is used as an oral anticoagulant to lower the risk of stroke and blood clots.”

      Dabigatran etexilate is a prescription medication that is used to lower the risk of stroke and blood clots in some individuals, according to the National Libraries of Medicine. Specifically, the drug is used to treat deep vein thrombosis, to prevent strokes or serious blood clots in individuals with atrial fibrillation, and pulmonary embolism in both children and adults.

      The company said that the recalled medication was distributed around the United States between June 2022 and October 2022. Lot numbers and other information about the recalled product are available on the FDA’s website.

      Patients who have received impacted lots of Dabigatran Etexilate Capsules, USP 75 mg and 150 mg are advised to continue taking their medication and contact their physician for advice regarding an alternative treatment,” the notice said. “Consumers with questions regarding this recall can contact Ascend Laboratories LLC. using the below information.”

      But consumers should contact their doctor if they’ve experienced any adverse health events associated with the medication, the notice said.

      Other Recalls

      In October, Aurobindo Pharma USA announced the voluntary recall of two lots of blood pressure medication because of high levels of nitrosamine, according to an FDA notice. Two months later, Lupin Pharmaceuticals Inc. stated that it is voluntarily recalling four lots of Quinapril tablets due to the presence of nitrosamine.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/24/2023 – 19:00

    4. Florida NAACP Seeks National Advisory Against Black Travel To Sunshine State
      Florida NAACP Seeks National Advisory Against Black Travel To Sunshine State

      The Florida chapter of the NAACP is asking its national organization to issue a travel advisory urging black people not to visit or move to the Sunshine State. 

      The proposal was put forth at the chapter’s state conference on Saturday, and members voted unanimously in favor of it. 

      The move is seen as a response to Gov. Ron DeSantis’s education policies, including his having pressured The College Board to remove critical race theory tenets from its advanced placement (AP) African American studies course.  

      “We are going to educate the people about Florida and what Florida is doing to black peoples, that no black person should want to voluntarily come and be subjected to,” said James Muwakkil president of Lee County’s NAACP chapter. “Don’t come into racism. Stay away from it.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      “What a joke,” said Gov. Ron DeSantis. “Just remember, during COVID, these people would be on CNN, all this stuff, slamming Florida, saying we were so bad, don’t go to Florida. And then they would end up being spotted on the beach somewhere vacationing in Florida.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      “We are an organization that protects people’s civil rights, and this is a first step to doing that,” Hillsborough County NAACP President Yvette Lewis told the Tampa Bay Times. “People are seeing what’s happening in Florida. They’re paying attention, and I hope that help is coming.”

      Lewis said Florida’s efforts to strip blacks of their rights goes beyond education policy, and pointed to voting fraud arrests and redistricting that has split black voting blocks. She said the travel-advisory vote also reflected anger over proposed abortion limits and legislation narrowing the use of preferred pronouns in Florida schools. 

      It’s worth noting that, scouring the many interviews of Florida NAACP leaders, ZeroHedge found no indication that any of them actually plan to flee the purported bastion of racism.  

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Tourism contributed $102 billion to Florida’s economy in 2021 — however, as even the Miami Herald recently noted, not all black travel in Florida is a net positive. After the latest vandalism and two more murders amidst spring break partying, the Herald editorial staff called for Miami to “drive a stake through spring break’s heart,” noting that “complicating matters is that many of the spring breakers are black.”

      Interestingly, that editorial no longer appears in searches of the Herald website, but is still visible where it was republished at Yahoo

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/24/2023 – 18:40

    5. GOP Can Target Suburban Swing Voters And Keep Their Base
      GOP Can Target Suburban Swing Voters And Keep Their Base

      Authored by Guy Ciarrocchi via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      In recent election cycles, the Philadelphia suburbs have been moving further into the Democratic column. To add to the challenge for Pennsylvania Republicans, more areas are resembling these communities as the state becomes more suburban. It’s a common trend in Rust Belt and East Coast states.

      Some analysts have argued that the answer for Republicans is to run “moderate” candidates. Admittedly, this approach is preferable to some others – either ignoring the suburban trend altogether or trying to compensate by building up super-majorities in rural Pennsylvania. Still, a moderate strategy may be too simplistic, and even misguided.

      My personal observations as a congressional candidate and former chief of staff, and as CEO of the Chester County Chamber of Business & Industry, have led me to conclude that a more important factor for Republican candidates is whether they strike the right tone and have the right temperament – and if they focus on kitchen-table issues, the ones that matter most to voters.

      Is a candidate seen as a “fighter,” for instance, as opposed to being perceived as “angry” or confrontational? There is a difference. It matters what the candidate fights for and against.

      In the suburbs, swing-voters’ default setting currently is to vote for Democrats. Fairly or not, Republicans are perceived as angry or confrontational.

      The suburbs are the most politically, culturally, and ideologically diverse segment of American society. Even in Chester County – Pennsylvanias wealthiest county, with the most college graduates – its not easy to strike a balance. There are Whole Foods and gun clubs, hot-yoga studios and pro-life prayer vigils. And all these exist among registered Republicans and Independents, without even taking Democrats into account. 

      Moving too close to the center poses as many risks for Republicans as moving too far right; being too bland is as risky as it is to be too fiery. On Election Day 2022, shaking hands outside at a polling place in Chester County for over 13 hours, I was challenged by multiple moderate to right-of-center voters on a variety of issues. They were testing me to see if I would stand up for them. I didn’t for a moment think that any of them were going to vote for my Democratic opponent, an incumbent who had voted with Speaker Nancy Pelosi 100% of the time. But it was clear that many were considering whether they should bother voting at all.

      That’s the challenge for Republicans, who are already outnumbered and usually outspent by their Democratic opponents. If the GOP nominee is perceived as too far out on the fringe or too angry, swing voters will vote for the Democrat. If the nominee is perceived as too moderate or lacking conviction – lacking “fight” – some voters who are now part of the GOP base will not vote in that race.

      Let’s address the elephant in the room, on the heels of the Supreme Court’s Dobbs decision. There is little doubt that a GOP candidate who bases his/her campaign on abortion will likely fall short. But abortion as an issue – and being “pro-life” – is more complicated than that. Pro-life candidates have had relative success in the suburbs, such as former U.S. Senator Pat Toomey and former Reps. Jim Gerlach and Patrick Meehan; Rep. Brian Fitzpatrick, who rates an 80% from the National Right to Life Committee, continues to win. Candidates who are pro-life have had relative success in suburban communities in purple and blue states like New Hampshire, New York, Virginia, and Florida. And then there are Govs. Glenn Youngkin and Ron DeSantis, of Virginia and Florida, respectively. Not only did they win; so did their colleagues on the GOP tickets.

      This is why I believe tone, temperament, and priorities are more important for success than being “moderate.” Yes, Youngkin seemed at home in his sweater-vest, looking like a dad at a soccer game. But he talked passionately about school choice, parents’ rights, and common sense. He jumped into issues that many in the GOP would have seen as politically radioactive. In Virginia’s Loudon County, which resembles our Chester County, Youngkin lost by only 11 points. This is an impressive performance compared with that of the prior Republican candidate for governor, who lost by 20 points, and Donald Trump, who lost by 25 points in 2020. 

      Gov. DeSantis found success with an edgier tone. He has not shied away from campaigning against mask and vaccine mandates, critical race theory, and even the Disney corporation. His nearly 20% reelection victory margin included success in the suburbs and in minority communities, too.

      Both Youngkin and DeSantis made progress in the suburbs. Neither are considered moderate. Both have confronted hot-button battles of today. They are fighters, yes – but their fights have been on behalf of kids, parents, and the quality of day-to-day life.

      Most swing voters are looking for a clear, positive message. GOP candidates must build a coalition: they need to reach out to voters who want a candidate who shares their priorities and opposes radical “woke” policies. This is especially true among first- and second-generation Asian and Hispanic voters. Swing voters will tolerate and even applaud a “fighting” tone in a candidate if they sense that it’s genuine and policy-driven. If, by contrast, they perceive it as mean-spirited or reflexively partisan, they will look elsewhere.                                                                                          

      Put all those voters together, and that makes a pretty strong coalition and partnership. There’s a path forward to electoral success for Republicans. The choice is ours.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/24/2023 – 18:20

    6. Earth Hit By "Strongest Geomagnetic Storm In Six Years" As Dazzling Auroras Spotted Across US
      Earth Hit By “Strongest Geomagnetic Storm In Six Years” As Dazzling Auroras Spotted Across US

      The coronal mass ejection we warned readers about days ago just blasted the Earth with solar plasma from the sun, unleashing one of the most intense geomagnetic storms in years. 

      According to the National Weather Service’s Space Weather Prediction Center, the CME pounded Earth’s atmosphere last night with solar plasma in a G4 (Severe) geomagnetic storm. A G3 Warning was in effect until early Friday morning. 

      “A severe disturbance in the Earth’s magnetic field,” an SWPC warned, calling the solar storm “severe.” This caused stunning auroras in the US as far south as the Midwest. 

      People shared stunning photos of the auroras on Twitter. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Geomagnetic storm news blog Space Weather said the severe G4 storm was the “most intense in nearly six years.” 

      This solar cycle, Solar Cycle 25, has already been active, exceeding the past cycle. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Even though auroras look stunning, these CMEs have a tremendous impact on modern society

      Recall the federal government started to prepare the nation for a space weather disaster in 2016 with the executive order signed by the Obama administration titled Coordinating Efforts to Prepare the Nation for Space Weather Events.”  

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/24/2023 – 18:00

    7. How They Convinced Trump To Lock Down
      How They Convinced Trump To Lock Down

      Authored by Jeffrey A. Tucker via Brownstone Institute,

      An enduring mystery for three years is how Donald Trump came to be the president who shut down American society for what turned out to be a manageable respiratory virus, setting off an unspeakable crisis with waves of destructive fallout that continue to this day. 

      Let’s review the timeline and offer some well-founded speculations about what happened. 

      On March 9, 2020, Trump was still of the opinion that the virus could be handled by normal means. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Two days later, he changed his tune. He was ready to use the full power of the federal government in a war on the virus. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      What changed? Deborah Birx reports in her book that Trump had a friend die in a New York hospital and this is what shifted his opinion. Jared Kushner reports that he simply listened to reason. Mike Pence says he was persuaded that his staff would respect him more. No question (and based on all existing reports) that he found himself surrounded by “trusted advisors” amounting to about 5 or so people (including Mike Pence and Pfizer board member Scott Gottlieb)

      It was only a week later when Trump issued the edict to close all “indoor and outdoor venues where people congregate,” initiating the biggest regime change in US history that flew in the face of all rights and liberties Americans had previously taken for granted. It was the ultimate in political triangulation: as John F. Kennedy cut taxes, Nixon opened China, and Clinton reformed welfare, Trump shut down the economy he promised to revive. This action confounded critics on all sides. 

      A month later, Trump said his decision to have “turned off” the economy saved millions of lives, later even claiming to have saved billions. He has yet to admit error. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Even as late as June 23rd of that year, Trump was demanding credit for having followed all of Fauci’s recommendations. Why do they love him and hate me, he wanted to know. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Something about this story has never really added up. How could one person have been so persuaded by a handful of others such as Fauci, Birx, Pence, and Kushner and his friends? He surely had other sources of information – some other scenario or intelligence – that fed into his disastrous decision. 

      In one version of events, his advisors simply pointed to the supposed success of Xi Jinping in enacting lockdowns in Wuhan, which the World Health Organization claimed had stopped infections and brought the virus under control. Perhaps his advisors flattered Trump with the observation that he is at least as great as the president of China so he should be bold and enact the same policies here. 

      One problem with this scenario is timing. The Oval Office meetings that preceded his March 16, 2020, edict took place the weekend of the 14th and 15th, Friday and Saturday. It was already clear by the 11th that Trump was ready for lockdowns. This was the same day as Fauci’s deliberately misleading testimony to the House Oversight Committee in which he rattled the room with predictions of Hollywood-style carnage. 

      On the 12th, Trump shut all travel from Europe, the UK, and Australia, causing huge human pile-ups at international airports. On the 13th, the Department of Health and Human Services issued a classified document that transferred control of pandemic policy from the CDC to the National Security Council and eventually the Department of Homeland Security. By the time that Trump met with Fauci and Birx in that legendary weekend, the country was already under quasi-martial law. 

      Isolating the date in the trajectory here, it is apparent that whatever happened to change Trump occurred on March 10, 2020, the day after his Tweet saying there should be no shutdowns and one day before Fauci’s testimony. 

      That something very likely revolves around the most substantial discovery we’ve made in three years of investigations. It was Debbie Lerman who first cracked the code: Covid policy was forged not by the public-health bureaucracies but by the national-security sector of the administrative state. She has further explained that this occurred because of two critical features of the response: 1) the belief that this virus came from a lab leak, and 2) the vaccine was the biosecurity countermeasure pushed by the same people as the fix. 

      Knowing this, we gain greater insight into 1) why Trump changed his mind, 2) why he has never explained this momentous decision and otherwise completely avoids the topic, and 3) why it has been so unbearably difficult to find out any information about these mysterious few days other than the pablum served up in books designed to earn royalties for authors like Birx, Pence, and Kushner. 

      Based on a number of second-hand reports, all available clues we have assembled, and the context of the times, the following scenario seems most likely. On March 10, and in response to Trump’s dismissive tweet the day before, some trusted sources within and around the National Security Council (Matthew Pottinger and Michael Callahan, for example), and probably involving some from military command and others, came to Trump to let him know a highly classified secret. 

      Imagine a scene from Get Smart with the Cone of Silence, for example. These are the events in the life of statecraft that infuse powerful people with a sense of their personal awesomeness. The fate of all of society rests on their shoulders and the decisions they make at this point. Of course they are sworn to intense secrecy following the great reveal. 

      The revelation was that the virus was not a textbook virus but something far more threatening and terrible. It came from a research lab in Wuhan. It might in fact be a bioweapon. This is why Xi had to do extreme things to protect his people. The US should do the same, they said, and there is a fix available too and it is being carefully guarded by the military. 

      It seems that the virus had already been mapped in order to make a vaccine to protect the population. Thanks to 20 years of research on mRNA platforms, they told him,  this vaccine can be rolled out in months, not years. That means that Trump can lock down and distribute vaccines to save everyone from the China virus, all in time for the election. Doing this would not only assure his reelection but guarantee that he would go down in history as one of the greatest US presidents of all time. 

      This meeting might only have lasted an hour or two – and might have included a parade of people with the highest-level security clearances – but it was enough to convince Trump. After all, he had battled China for two previous years, imposing tariffs and making all sorts of threats. It was easy to believe at that point that China might have initiated biological warfare as retaliation. That’s why he made the decision to use all the power of the presidency to push a lockdown under emergency rule. 

      To be sure, the Constitution does not allow him to override the discretion of the states but with the weight of the office complete with enough funding and persuasion, he could make it happen. And thus did he make the fateful decision that not only wrecked his presidency but the country too, imposing harms that will last a generation. 

      It only took a few weeks for Trump to become suspicious about what happened. For weeks and months, he toggled between believing that he was tricked and believing that he did the right thing. He had already approved another 30 days of lockdowns and even inveighed against Georgia and later Florida for opening. He went so far as to claim that no state could open without his approval. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      He did not fully change his mind until August, when Scott Atlas revealed the whole con to him. 

      There is another fascinating feature to this entirely plausible scenario. Even as Trump’s advisors were telling him that this could be a bioweapon leaked from the lab in China, we had Anthony Fauci and his cronies going to great lengths to deny it was a lab leak (even if they believed that it was). This created an interesting situation. The NIH and those surrounding Fauci were publicly insisting that the virus was of zoonotic origin, even as Trump’s circle was telling the president that it should be regarded as a bioweapon. 

      Fauci belonged to both camps, which suggests that Trump very likely knew of Fauci’s deception all along: the “noble lie” to protect the public from knowing the truth. Trump had to be fine with that. 

      Gradually following the lockdown edicts and the takeover by the Department of Homeland Security, in cooperation with a very hostile CDC, Trump lost power and influence over his own government, which is why his later Tweets urging a reopening fell on deaf ears. To top it off, the vaccine failed to arrive in time for the election. This is because Fauci himself delayed the rollout until after the election, claiming that the trials were not racially diverse enough. Thus Trump’s gambit completely failed, despite all the promises of those around him that it was a guaranteed way to win reelection.

      To be sure, this scenario cannot be proven because the entire event – certainly the most dramatic political move in at least a generation and one with unspeakable costs for the country – remains cloaked in secrecy. Not even Senator Rand Paul can get the information he needs because it remains classified. If anyone thinks the Biden approval of releasing documents will show what we need, that person is naive. Still, the above scenario fits all available facts and it is confirmed by second-hand reports from inside the White House. 

      It’s enough for a great movie or a play of Shakespearean levels of tragedy. And to this day, none of the main players are speaking openly about it. 

      Jeffrey A. Tucker is Founder and President of the Brownstone Institute. He is also Senior Economics Columnist for Epoch Times, author of 10 books, including Liberty or Lockdown, and thousands of articles in the scholarly and popular press. He speaks widely on topics of economics, technology, social philosophy, and culture.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/24/2023 – 17:40

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 24th March 2023

    • Do Norwegian Muslims 'Suffer' The Most During Ramadan?
      Do Norwegian Muslims ‘Suffer’ The Most During Ramadan?

      Ramadan started yesterday, Thursday, March 23.

      The date was determined as the first moon of a new lunar cycle was unable to be seen in Mecca Tuesday, determining Thursday as the start of the Muslim fasting month.

      While the length of Ramadan is the same for all Muslims observing it, as Statista’s Katharina Buchholz details below, the length of the daily fast certainly is not.

      Because Muslims vow to abstain from eating and drinking during daylight hours, those living further north have to go without food and drink for much longer than their counterparts living closer to the equator or even in the Southern hemisphere which is celebrating Ramadan during winter.

      Infographic: How Long Do Muslims Fast For Ramadan Around the World? | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      Muslims fasting for Ramadan in Oslo theoretically have to do so for almost 16.5 hours, according to website islamicfinder.com. 

      Muslims in Jakarta, Indonesia, fast only for approximately 13 hours and 10 minutes. Finally, Melbourne in the Southern Hemisphere has just under 13 daylight hours depending on the exact day of the Ramadan month.

      Some Muslims in Northern countries seem to feel unfairly treated by the lunar forces that govern Ramadan and found alternative solutions. According to reporting by Der Spiegel, the town of Tromsø in the very north of Norway has adopted the fasting hours of Mecca (just under 14 hours in 2023).

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/24/2023 – 02:45

    • US Offers Slovakia Helicopters For Sending MiG-29s To Ukraine
      US Offers Slovakia Helicopters For Sending MiG-29s To Ukraine

      Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

      The US has offered Slovakia attack helicopters and Hellfire missiles as a reward for sending Ukraine Soviet-made MiG-29 fighter jets.

      Slovak Defense Minister Jaroslav Nad said the deal would be for 12 Bell AH-1Z attack choppers, 500 AGM-114 Hellfire II missiles, and training. The sale is worth about $1 billion, and under the offer, the US would provide $660 million in financing, and Slovakia would pay $340 million.

      Slovak Air Force MiG 29s

      Separately, the EU will compensate Slovakia with $213 million for providing Ukraine with the MiG-29s. Nad said the offer was still being considered but added acquiring the helicopters would “significantly increase the defense capability of Slovakia.”

      Without its MiG-29s, Slovakia doesn’t have an air force, and Poland and the Czech Republic are now monitoring the land-locked country’s airspace. Slovakia signed a deal in 2018 to purchase 14 US-made F-16 fighter jets, but they aren’t expected to be delivered until 2024.

      The US offer means that Washington must have been involved in Slovakia’s decision to send its 13 MiG-29s to Ukraine, which came after Poland announced it would provide Kyiv with the Soviet-made jets.

      The move makes Poland and Slovakia the first NATO members to arm Ukraine with fighter jets.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      In March 2022, the Pentagon ruled out sending Polish MiG-29s to Ukraine over concerns that it could escalate the war. NATO officials believed the provision of fighter jets could be viewed in Moscow as the alliance directly entering the war. But one year later, the escalation concerns waned.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/24/2023 – 02:00

    • Seymour Hersh: CIA Planted Nord Stream Cover-Up Story
      Seymour Hersh: CIA Planted Nord Stream Cover-Up Story

      Authored by Dave DeCamp via Antiwar.com,

      Investigative journalist Seymour Hersh published an article on Substack on Wednesday that said the CIA was instructed to come up with a cover story for the Nord Stream bombings that was fed to The New York Times and the German newspaper Die Zeit.

      The cover-up story was created to shift blame from the US after Hersh’s bombshell report published on February 8 that said President Biden ordered the attack on the Nord Stream natural gas pipelines, which connect Russia to Germany. “It was a total fabrication by American intelligence that was passed along to the Germans, and aimed at discrediting your story,” Hersh was told by a source within the American intelligence community.

      Image source: AP

      Hersh said that the CIA was ordered to come up with a cover story after President Biden met with German Chancellor Olaf Scholz in Washington on March 3. Scholz’s visit was very brief and did not include the routine joint press briefing that usually follows a meeting between the president and another world leader. Hersh was told that his report detailing how the US took out Nord Stream was discussed by Biden and Scholz.

      Hersh writes: “I was told by someone with access to diplomatic intelligence that there was a discussion of the pipeline exposé and, as a result, certain elements in the Central Intelligence Agency were asked to prepare a cover story in collaboration with German intelligence that would provide the American and German press with an alternative version for the destruction of Nord Stream 2.”

      The result of the CIA’s work was published in The New York Times and Die Zeit on March 7. The New York Times report was very vague and said US officials are now claiming the Nord Stream bombings might have been carried out by a “pro-Ukrainian group.”

      The Die Zeit report claimed German investigators believe it was carried out by six people using a yacht rented in Poland that was owned by two Ukrainians. Other Western media outlets published similar articles reinforcing the cover story in the following days.

      Hersh said the information The New York Times received “originated with a group of CIA experts in deception and propaganda whose mission was to feed the newspaper a cover story—and to protect a president who made an unwise decision and is now lying about it.”

      The cover story offers a radically different narrative than what Hersh’s February 8 report alleges. Using anonymous sourcing, Hersh reported that the Nord Stream pipelines were destroyed by explosives planted by US Navy divers in June 2022 under the cover of NATO drills in the Baltic Sea. The operation was done in coordination with Norway, and a Norwegian spy plane detonated the explosives by dropping a sonar buoy on September 26, 2022.

      The last time Scholz visited Washington was on February 7, 2022. Biden vowed during a press conference that day that if Russia invaded Ukraine, he would “bring an end” to the Nord Stream 2 pipeline. According to Hersh, the plot to destroy the pipelines was already underway at that time, and the plotters took Biden’s comment as a blatant threat.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      On Scholz’s possible complicity in the operation, Hersh said in his new article: “At this point, it must be noted that Chancellor Scholz, whether or not he was alerted of the destruction of the pipeline in advance—still an open question—has clearly been complicit since last fall in support of the Biden Administration’s cover-up of its operation in the Baltic Sea.”

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 23:40

    • US Firms No Longer Safe In Mexico? Army Commandeers US-Owned Marine Terminal
      US Firms No Longer Safe In Mexico? Army Commandeers US-Owned Marine Terminal

      We’ve heard many heartbreaking stories of American tourists venturing into Mexico only to be kidnapped or, worse, killed in crazy cartel drug war battles. It appears these days, no one is safe across the southern border, not even US-owned companies. 

      Bloomberg reported that Mexican marines and police officers seized US construction firm Vulcan Materials’ port terminal near Playa del Carmen in southern Mexico.

      Footage from the seizure showed a long line of police and military units entering the property last Tuesday. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      In a statement, Vulcan Materials claimed that Mexican officials did not possess any legal documentation to warrant the seizure of the terminal.

      “It should be clear that the rule of law is no longer assured for foreign companies in Mexico,” the Alabama-based company said in a statement. “This invasion, unsupported by legal warrants, violates Vulcan’s commercial and property rights.”

      AP News pointed out that President Andrés Manuel López Obrador and the company have been in a multi-year dispute: 

      López Obrador needs the dock to get cement, crushed stone and other materials into the area to finish his pet project, a tourist train known as the Train Maya. The president shut down Vulcan’s stone quarries last May, arguing the company had extracted or exported stone without approval.

      US lawmakers, including Republican Senator Bill Hagerty of Tennessee, voiced concern about the forced takeover of the terminal. He said this “adds to the trend of misguided and counterproductive behavior” by the Mexican president. 

      This presents a significant concern for US companies considering relocating production from China to Mexico – how can they be sure their businesses will be safe from government seizure?

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 23:20

    • The Road To A More Global Yuan Runs Through Moscow
      The Road To A More Global Yuan Runs Through Moscow

      By George Lei, Bloomberg Markets Live reporter and analyst

      Chinese President Xi Jinping concluded his Russian visit on Wednesday without much progress on peace in Ukraine. China, however, has pushed for deeper trade and investment links with its northern neighbor using its own currency. That suggests the path of least resistance for yuan internationalization now runs through Moscow instead of London or Singapore.  

      China and Russia are committed to “significantly” increasing trade volumes by 2030 and pledged to steadily boost the proportion of local currency settlement, according to a joint statement released Tuesday. That might sound like cheap political talk, though a closer look at developments since the war in Ukraine shows the Chinese currency is already making major inroads in all walks of Russian financial life.

      The share of yuan in Russian export payments surged 32-fold in 2022 to 16% by year-end, according to the Bank of Russia. Its use in Russian imports also jumped to 23% from 4%. Yuan savings accounted for 11% of Russia’s total FX deposits as of January, compared with practically zero when the war broke out. The Chinese currency has also overtaken the dollar and euro as the most traded FX on the Moscow Exchange.

      Never before has the yuan — which is not fully convertible — been so widely used for trade, private savings and FX transactions in a trillion-dollar economy that regularly ranks among the world’s biggest. “Market logic mostly prevails over geopolitics until one day it does not,” wrote Alexander Gabuev, a senior fellow at the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace.

      Western sanctions that sharply curtailed Russia’s dollar and euro access acted as a push factor, while booming trade with China served as a pull. Russia overtook Saudi Arabia to become China’s biggest oil supplier in February while Beijing’s total energy purchases ballooned to $88b over the past 12 months, surging more than 50% from the period ending February 2022. Chinese businesses have also expanded in its northern neighbor, filling the void left by departing Western brands.

      Russia is now the 5th biggest user of the Chinese currency, with 2.3% of global yuan payments, behind Hong Kong, the UK, Singapore and the US, according to SWIFT. A year ago, the country didn’t even make the cut for the top 15: Its share in worldwide yuan payments was less than 0.3%. At this speed, Russia is poised to become the biggest yuan user outside Hong Kong in the next couple years.

      This week, the Russian central bank made it more costly for commercial lender to have liabilities in dollar and euro by raising the mandatory reserve requirements on “unfriendly” currencies. The longer the war and sanctions drag on, the more entrenched yuan gets in Moscow’s financial ecosystem. Should the current trajectory persist, Russia will probably become the first major economy where the Chinese currency has an equal standing with its American and European counterparts.

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 23:08

    • How COVID Lockdowns Primed The Current Financial Crisis
      How COVID Lockdowns Primed The Current Financial Crisis

      Authored by Christian Parenti via TheGrayZone.com,

      The lockdowns and the stimulus required to keep the economy alive helped drive inflation. Then the Fed jacked up interest rates. And all hell broke loose…

      On Friday March 10th, 2023, Silicon Valley Bank (SVB) died of Covid. Alright, it’s a little more complicated than that, but Covid lockdowns followed by massive government stimulus were a critical – and massively under-acknowledged – factor in propelling the bank’s demise.

      At the heart of the crisis is the gigantic pile of low-interest debt that was issued during the height of the pandemic. While private-sector pandemic-era debt like corporate bonds also soared, US government debt like Treasury bonds piled up.

      In a nutshell, during the pandemic the government issued enormous amounts of extremely low interest government debt — about $4.2 trillion of it. But now interest rates, including on government debt, are higher than they have been in 15 years and investors are dumping their old low-interest debt. As they dump, the resale price of the old debt goes down. The more it declines, the more investors want to dump. And thus, a panic is born. 

      To understand the problem fully, the question of US government debt has to be put into its larger context, which is: the pandemic response as a whole.

      When news of the Covid virus first broke in December 2019, the 2 Year Treasury bond was being offered at 1.64% interest; the 10 year was at about 1.80%, and the resale value of such bonds on secondary markets was strong. Then, in March 2020, as Covid cases and deaths spiked, the US began to shutter its economy with panicked lockdowns that were supposed to “flatten the curve” or slow the spread of the virus and thus protect the hospitals. But Covid was politicized and the lockdowns were extended.  

      As the lockdowns dragged on, the US economy began to collapse, shrinking at a record-shattering annualized rate of 31.4% during the second quarter of fiscal year 2020.

      To avoid total economic devastation, the federal government began massive debt-financed spending. In March 2020, Trump signed into law the $2.2 trillion economic stimulus bill the CARES Act, or Coronavirus Aid, Relief, and Economic Security. Then, in March 2021, Biden signed the American Rescue Plan Act which contained $1.9 trillion more in Covid relief. Finally, in April 2021, another trillion or so of Covid relief arrived in the Consolidated Appropriations Act. 

      Thanks to these laws, every industry and most people received public money. There was increased and extended unemployment payments, as well as the so-called “stimmy checks” or stimulus payments to everyone earning under $75,000 a year (about half the population). The Paycheck Protection Program spent almost a trillion dollars. The Provider Relief Fund doled out $178 billion to the healthcare system. 

      All this debt spending kept millions of people in their homes, and helped feed, employ, and care for millions more. The measures allowed hundreds of thousands of businesses to stay afloat even as many thousands of others went under. The impact of the spending on Americans’ well-being was generally positive. For a moment, the US child poverty rate was cut in half, falling to 5.2%. 

      But the economically destructive lockdowns were not necessary and did not work. Covid fanatics maintain that the lockdowns were unavoidable because the virus is so deadly. That, however, is uninformed. Last year I explained in detail how the Lockdown Left got the Covid crisis wrong. Not a single critic has challenged any of the facts I presented so there is little point in rehashing them all here. 

      Those who advocated an alternative to ham-fisted lockdowns, like the authors of the Great Barrington Declaration, which called for “focused protection” of vulnerable groups like the elderly, were viciously targeted in a reputation destruction campaign covertly orchestrated by former NIH director Francis Collins and de facto Covid czar Anthony Fauci. Never mind that the document’s authors were three eminently qualified scientists: Sunetra Gupta, professor of Theoretical Epidemiology at Oxford University; Jay Bhattacharya, professor of medicine at Stanford; and Martin Kulldorff, formerly a professor of medicine and biostatistics at Harvard. They were portrayed as far-right cranks who were almost eager to see millions die. But now, they have been vindicated.

      Ultimately, the federal government spent $4.2 trillion propping up the economy that it was simultaneously choking to death with lockdowns. These two contradictory pressures laid the groundwork for the recent bank failures. Government mandated lockdowns hit the economy like a body blow. Factories closed, small businesses went under, ports and logistic hubs reduced operations, and about 2 million mostly older workers simply resigned. But at the same time, the federal government injected vast amounts of purchasing power into the economy, thus boosting consumption.

      These two, contradictory government moves imposed almost unbearable pressure on supply chains. As shortages mounted, prices began to surge. Put simply: lockdowns plus stimulus equaled inflation.

      Consider just one of the most important bottlenecks in the whole economy. During lockdown, many commercial driving license schools were closed. This helped create a shortage of about 80,000 truckers. If trucks do not roll supplies run low and prices go up.

      At first, the official line on inflation – parroted by the Lockdown Left – maintained that inflation was “transitory.” But it was not. Inflation peaked at 9.1% in June 2022 while wage growth lagged at about 5%. In April 2020 during the worst of the lockdown, the Federal Reserve’s Federal Funds Rate sank to 0.5%. By February 2022, it had only risen to 0.8%.  

      Meanwhile, inflation was surging. By February 2022, inflation had reached 7.9%. Only then did the Fed, in an effort to tamp down prices, begin raising interest rates at the fastest pace rate in its history. The federal Funds rate was around 4.57% when SVB went under. Perhaps a massive wave of taxation could have soaked up enough liquidity to have helped cool prices, but that was a political impossibility. The more politically palatable response in Washington was for the Federal Reserve to raise interest rates. 

      Herein lies the problem. During the height of the lockdowns, banks bought up enormous amounts of government debt. As the Wall Street Journal put it: “U.S. banks are suffering the aftereffects of a Covid-era deposit boom that left them awash in cash that they needed to put to work. Domestic deposits at federally insured banks rose 38% from the end of 2019 to the end of 2021, FDIC data show. Over the same period, total loans rose 7%, leaving many institutions with large amounts of cash to deploy in securities as interest rates were near record lows.” Awash in deposits with not enough demand for loans, the banks bought US government securities. Their purchases surged 53% between 2019 and the end of 2021, to a total of $4.58 trillion, according to Fed data reported by the Wall Street Journal.

      Because so much debt was being issued, it carried super-low interest rates. For example, on July 27, 2020, the 10 Year Treasury was offered at an annual interest rate of only 0.55%. This is fine if you are the borrower of money, but if you are the lender (that is to say, a bank giving the federal government money in exchange for a Treasury bond), it means your income stream will be reduced to a mere trickle. If inflation rises, it essentially disappears. 

      As the yield on new government debt reached toward 5% and inflation hung stubbornly at around 6.4%, all of that old, low-interest, pandemic-era debt started to look like garbage and banks began unloading it. The more that banks dumped old debt, the less value that debt had on resale markets. The lower its resale value, the more the banks wanted to dump it. SVB lost almost $2 billion selling off Government securities. And when they announced the loss, their stock price plunged by 60%. 

      At the same time, many of SVB’s clients were withdrawing money. This was in part because rising interest rates made borrowing new money more expensive and thus incentivized the use of savings in day-to-day business operations. Also, higher inflation and higher interest rates made low-earning bank deposits less attractive and compelled depositors to redeploy their surplus capital towards higher-earning investments. So, just as SVB needed cash, deposits were evaporating.

      By the end of the week of March 10, the four biggest banks in the United States had lost $51 billion because of their panicked dumping of pandemic-era debt. Right after SVB was taken under government control, state regulators closed the New York-based Signature Bank. Before the weekend was over the Federal Reserve announced the creation of a new lending facility that would ensure that “banks have the ability to meet the needs of all their depositors.” Furthermore, the Fed said it was “prepared to address any liquidity pressures that may arise.”

      It would seem that the federal government is ready to execute another de facto partial nationalization of US banking, just as they did in 2008 via emergency “cash injections” and then the Troubled Assets Relief Program (TARP). In this current crisis, banks can avoid losses on their low-interest debt if they do not sell it before its maturity. For that to happen, the banks need money. The Fed has said it will pour enormous amounts of money into the banks while all of the relevant officials have proclaimed that the banking system will somehow pay for this. All of this will almost certainly mean even more government debt will be issued. 

      Already, interest payments on the federal debt are one of the largest single items in the US budget – set to reach $400 billion this year. That is almost half as much as the grotesquely overdeveloped military budget. By comparison, federal spending on housing is only $78 billion.

      Shoring up the banking system is necessary because if it collapses, the whole economy goes with it. At least in the short term, Americans are hostages of the US financial system. But government intervention without any new regulations and taxes upon the financial sector will likely mean more inflation and a bigger financial bubble. By refusing to properly tax the top 1%, the federal government also commits itself to more austerity for the many and more welfare for the rich, because rising government debt means a rising portion of our taxes must go toward interest payments. 

      This system of crisis-prone, hyper-financialized capitalism seems ever more like a junkie. If it doesn’t get its regular fix of public sector help, it will simply collapse and die. 

      Even if the federal government can stanch the current crisis, the pandemic debt story is global and very likely to cause trouble for some time to come. As a 2021 report by the World Bank put it: “The debt buildup during the pandemic-induced global recession of 2020 was the largest in several decades. This was true for all types of debt—total, government, and private debt; and advanced-economy and EMDE [emerging market and developing economy] debt; external and domestic debt. In 2020, total global debt reached 263 percent of GDP and global government debt 99 percent of GDP, their highest levels in half a century.” 

      The US intelligentsia and its media elites are finally beginning to reckon with the impact of misguided and authoritarian lockdowns on student learning and the psychological and physical health of millions. But in all the discussion of the current bank runs, the pivotal role of lockdowns in priming the crisis remains overlooked.

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 23:00

    • 'Times Have Changed': Saudi Arabia To Reopen Embassy In Syria, Angering US
      ‘Times Have Changed’: Saudi Arabia To Reopen Embassy In Syria, Angering US

      Syria’s President Bashar al-Assad continues to be brought “in from the cold” and back into the Arab regional fold at rapid pace, with Reuters confirming on Thursday the prior rumors that Saudi Arabia and Syria were on the brink of fully restoring diplomatic ties. They will now reopen embassies – a huge step. Is a return to the Arab League next?

      “Syria and Saudi Arabia have agreed to reopen their embassies after cutting diplomatic ties more than a decade ago, three sources with knowledge of the matter said, a step that would mark a leap forward in Damascus’s return to the Arab fold,” Reuters reports.

      Source: AFP

      The mutual embassy openings reportedly are the result of talks between the Saudis and a senior Syrian intelligence official. A source told Reuters they “preparing to reopen embassies after Eid al-Fitr,” in reference to a Muslim holiday in late April.

      Most recently, the United Arab Emirates hosted Assad and his wife in an official visit – the first in well over a decade. 

      The US and Israel have not been happy at these developments, and the Syria-Gulf rapprochement also comes in the context of Iran and Saudi Arabia normalizing relations. One source told Al Jazeera:

      “The prevailing attitude can be defined as, ‘times have changed, the Arab Spring is history and the region is transitioning towards a new future, with new geopolitical characteristics,'” the official, who himself recently reconciled with Damascus after defecting to the Syrian opposition in the summer of 2011, added.

      It seems the Gulf has been willing to recognize that the Syrian government won the decade-long war and move on, but not Washington. The US has continued its military occupation of northern Syria, and Israel has extended its bombing campaign, even this week with strikes on Aleppo international airport.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Far-reaching US sanctions are also still on. But regional leaders have been reaching out to Assad after the deadly earthquake which rocked Turkey and Syria, killing tens of thousands of people. 

      Saudi Arabia and allies like Qatar and the UAE had helped the US spearhead regime change efforts in Damascus. Russia and Iran came to the aid of Syria, however, in a war that took hundreds of thousands of lives and left much of the country in rubble.

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 22:40

    • Defense Attorneys In Jan. 6 Case Allege FBI Informant Spied On Legal Team
      Defense Attorneys In Jan. 6 Case Allege FBI Informant Spied On Legal Team

      Authored by Joseph M. Hanneman via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      Defense attorneys in the Proud Boys seditious-conspiracy trial in Washington D.C. learned late March 22 that one of their own defense witnesses who was about to testify had worked as an FBI informant for at least 22 months.

      Members of the Proud Boys join supporters of U.S. President Donald Trump as they demonstrate in Washington D.C. on Dec. 12, 2020. (JOSE LUIS MAGANA/AFP via Getty Images)

      They asked for an emergency hearing before U.S. District Judge Timothy Kelly and filed a motion to compel the U.S. Department of Justice to disclose if the witness has been spying on the defense team.

      Judge Kelly suspended the trial until March 24 and converted March 23 from a day of testimony into a motions hearing.

      Zachary Rehl, one of five Proud Boys defendants, filed a motion on behalf of his co-defendants seeking a court order to compel prosecutors to disclose any recordings or reports made by confidential human sources (CHS)—informants—about the defendants and their attorneys.

      Defense attorney Carmen Hernandez said the information given to the defense team on March 22 raises “serious and substantiated allegations of governmental misconduct surrounding the surreptitious invasion and interference of the defense team by the government through a confidential human source, at the government’s behest.”

      Judge Kelly ordered prosecutors to file a response to the motion by 1 p.m. EDT on March 23. A hearing on the matter will begin at 3 p.m.

      The trial began Dec. 19, 2022, in U.S. District Court. Prosecutors wrapped up their case on March 17.

      Defense Witness was Prosecution Informant

      After the close of testimony on March 22, prosecutors disclosed that a witness on the defense list who was due in court on March 23 had worked as an FBI informant from April 2021 through to at least January 2023.

      “During this period of time, the CHS [informant] has been in contact via telephone, text messaging, and other electronic means, with one or more of the counsel for the defense and at least one defendant,” the motion said.

      “The CHS also participated in prayer meetings with members of one or more of the defendants’ families. The CHS also engaged in discussions with one of the defendant’s family members about replacing one of the defense counsel.”

      Attorney Steven Metcalf (2nd L), representing defendant Dominic Pezzola for his alleged role in the Jan. 6, 2021, Capitol breach, arrives at the E. Barrett Prettyman United States Courthouse on Dec. 19, 2022. (Win McNamee/Getty Images)

      Defendants in the trial include Rehl, former Proud Boys chairman Enrique Tarrio, Joseph Biggs, Ethan Nordean, and Dominic Pezzola.

      The men are accused of seditious conspiracy, conspiracy to obstruct official proceedings, obstruction of official proceedings, and conspiracy to prevent certain federal officers from performing their duties at the U.S. Capitol on Jan. 6, 2021. Tarrio, Rehl, Nordean, and Biggs face nine criminal counts, while Pezzola is charged with 10.

      Disclosure of the FBI informant demonstrates “that there are reasons to doubt the veracity of the government’s explanation and justification for withholding information about the CHSs [informants] who have been involved in the case,” Hernandez wrote.

      It was the second time in March that privileged attorney-client communication became the center of controversy.

      On March 8, FBI Special Agent Nicole Miller disclosed that investigators had been monitoring communications between Rehl and his now-former attorney, and discussing his trial strategy among themselves.

      Defense attorneys also discovered a hidden tab in an FBI evidence spreadsheet containing some of Miller’s emails, “in which the FBI agent admitted fabricating evidence and following orders to destroy hundreds of items of evidence,” according to a March 9 court filing (pdf).

      The defense motion called the discovery “a clear and flagrant Sixth Amendment violation” that “screams for a dismissal.”

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 22:20

    • OpenAI CEO Sam Altman And 'Father Of China's Great Firewall' Sound Alarm Over Artificial Intelligence
      OpenAI CEO Sam Altman And ‘Father Of China’s Great Firewall’ Sound Alarm Over Artificial Intelligence

      OpenAI CEO Sam Altman and Fang Bingxing – considered the ‘father of China’s Great Firewall’, are joining OpenAI co-founder Elon Musk in raising concerns regarding the dangers of artificial intelligence (AI).

      “We’ve got to be careful here,” the 37-year-old Altman told ABC News last week, adding “I think people should be happy that we are a little bit scared of this.”

      “I’m particularly worried that these models could be used for large-scale disinformation … Now that they’re getting better at writing computer code, [they] could be used for offensive cyber-attacks.”

      That said, Altman also thinks it could be “the greatest technology humanity has yet developed.”

      OpenAI is the company behind Chat GPT, which launched “GPT-4” less than two weeks ago. The highly sophisticated chatbot can reach almost perfect scores on SAT math tests, and achieve a 90% on the US bar exam.

      And it has competitors…

      Other AI-based startups are making surprising advancements in the field as well. RAD AI recently launched the first AI marketing platform built to understand emotion, and some of the largest companies on the planet are already using it.

      GenesisAI is a startup building a marketplace to allow for any business to integrate AI and automation into their business. Meaning soon AI might be just as much of an integral part of a business as employees themselves. –Benzinga

      According to Altman, however, ChatGPT-4 uses deductive reasoning vs. memorization, which can lead to inaccurate results.

      “The thing that I try to caution people the most is what we call the ‘hallucinations problem’” Altman told ABC News. “The model will confidently state things as if they were facts (but they) are entirely made up.”

      Altman thinks there is a need for regulation of AI in general.

      “There will be other people who don’t put some of the safety limits that we put on,” he said. “Society, I think, has a limited amount of time to figure out how to react to that, how to regulate that, how to handle it.”

      Also concerned over GPT-4 and similar AI is Fang Bingxing, the father of China’s so-called Great Firewall.

      According to Fang, such chatbots can lead to an “information cocoon” (as opposed to the free flow of information in China?)

      “People’s perspectives can be manipulated as they seek all kinds of answers from AI,” he told Red Star News, a media affiliate to state-backed Chengdu Economic Daily, as reported by SCMP.

      Fang, a computer scientist and former government official, is widely considered the chief designer of China’s notorious internet censorship and surveillance system. He played a key role in creating and developing the Great Firewall, a sophisticated system of internet filters and blocks that allows the Chinese government to control what its citizens can access online.

      The Great Firewall has been fortified over the past decade, blocking Chinese netizens’ access to a wide range of foreign websites and online services including Facebook, Twitter and Google. -SCMP

      Fang also warned that when AI evolves further, it could pose a threat to humanity.

      “Now it’s simply software used in an online chat-like scenario. If it’s incorporated into robots and cars, we need to stay vigilant for the potential harm they could do to humans.”

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 22:00

    • US Rejects Chinese Claim It Drove Away Destroyer Over "Illegal" Incursion
      US Rejects Chinese Claim It Drove Away Destroyer Over “Illegal” Incursion

      Early in the day Thursday China’s military said it monitored and then drove away a US warship which had “illegally” entered China-claimed waters of the South China Sea.

      The Southern Theatre Command of the Chinese People’s Liberation Army (PLA) charged that the guided missile destroyer USS Milius entered waters of the disputed Paracel Islands before being warned and driven away. Washington and its allies have long rejected that these are territorial waters of China, after Beijing embarked years ago on the militarization of multiple island chains in the region. 

      Paracel islands, file image

      China presented that it had forced the US destroyer to exit the area, however, the US Navy’s 7th fleet is rejecting the claims.

      Calling it a routine operation in international waters, the US Navy’s Lt. j.g. Luka Bakic responded by saying, “USS Milius is conducting routine operations in the South China Sea and was not expelled,” and that “The United States will continue to fly, sail and operate wherever international law allows.”

      But a Chinese military spokesman is still calling it an “illegal incursion into Chinese territorial waters … without permission from the Chinese government, harming peace and stability” in the region.

      “The theatre forces will maintain a high state of alert at all times and take all necessary measures to resolutely safeguard national sovereignty and security and peace and stability in the South China Sea,” the PLA spokesman added. 

      The Paracels are claimed by US allies Vietnam and Taiwan, making encounters among rival vessels turn into tense standoffs going back years.

      The US side in the past has presented these as ‘innocent passages’ – asserting that it is the right of all vessels under international marine law as reflected in the Convention on the Law of the Sea, which means is that permission is not required to transit. But China will continue to challenge this interpretation.

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 21:20

    • USA Today Again Picks Biological Man As 'Woman Of The Year'
      USA Today Again Picks Biological Man As ‘Woman Of The Year’

      Authored by Steve Watson via Summit News,

      USA Today has picked a trans-identified male as it’s ‘woman of the year’ for a second time running, and this time it’s someone who advocates for child sex changes.

      The media outlet has chosen Leigh Finke as its ‘woman of the year’ for Minnesota. Finke was the first transgender legislator to be appointed to the Minnesota House of Representatives in November.

      USA Today says the awards are a way of highlighting “local and national heroines who make a positive impact in their communities every day.”

      Finke has made it a priority to ensure children are allowed to have access to gender altering surgery, recently sponsoring a bill to make Minnesota a “trans refuge state.”

      As we highlighted last week, the Democrat Governor and lieutenant governor of the state are on an executive mission to force state agencies to push “gender-affirming” health care.

      Elon Musk Hits Back At ‘Protect Trans Kids’ Democrat Lieutenant Governor

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–
      !function(c,d){"use strict";var e=!1,n=!1;if(d.querySelector)if(c.addEventListener)e=!0;if(c.wp=c.wp||{},!c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage)if(c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage=function(e){var t=e.data;if(t)if(t.secret||t.message||t.value)if(!/[^a-zA-Z0-9]/.test(t.secret)){for(var r,a,i,s=d.querySelectorAll('iframe[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),n=d.querySelectorAll('blockquote[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),o=0;o<n.length;o++)n[o].style.display="none";for(o=0;o<s.length;o++)if(r=s[o],e.source===r.contentWindow){if(r.removeAttribute("style"),"height"===t.message){if(1e3<(i=parseInt(t.value,10)))i=1e3;else if(~~i<200)i=200;r.height=i}if("link"===t.message)if(a=d.createElement("a"),i=d.createElement("a"),a.href=r.getAttribute("src"),i.href=t.value,i.host===a.host)if(d.activeElement===r)c.top.location.href=t.value}}},e)c.addEventListener("message",c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage,!1),d.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded",t,!1),c.addEventListener("load",t,!1);function t(){if(!n){n=!0;for(var e,t,r=-1!==navigator.appVersion.indexOf("MSIE 10"),a=!!navigator.userAgent.match(/Trident.*rv:11\./),i=d.querySelectorAll("iframe.wp-embedded-content"),s=0;s

      //–>

      //–>

      //–>

      Governor Tim Walz has labeled efforts to halt trans surgery on children as “persecution,” vowing to “make sure that Minnesota’s place as a welcoming, loving, neighborly state where you are welcome and will be free of persecution or anything else that we’re trying to see in some other states.”

      Minnesota is also one of the states where shocking trans and gay porn books have been placed into school libraries, seemingly unbeknownst to school officials.

      Video: Mother Reads Shocking Gay Porn Material Found In Minnesota School Direct To Board Members

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–
      !function(c,d){"use strict";var e=!1,n=!1;if(d.querySelector)if(c.addEventListener)e=!0;if(c.wp=c.wp||{},!c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage)if(c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage=function(e){var t=e.data;if(t)if(t.secret||t.message||t.value)if(!/[^a-zA-Z0-9]/.test(t.secret)){for(var r,a,i,s=d.querySelectorAll('iframe[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),n=d.querySelectorAll('blockquote[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),o=0;o<n.length;o++)n[o].style.display="none";for(o=0;o<s.length;o++)if(r=s[o],e.source===r.contentWindow){if(r.removeAttribute("style"),"height"===t.message){if(1e3<(i=parseInt(t.value,10)))i=1e3;else if(~~i<200)i=200;r.height=i}if("link"===t.message)if(a=d.createElement("a"),i=d.createElement("a"),a.href=r.getAttribute("src"),i.href=t.value,i.host===a.host)if(d.activeElement===r)c.top.location.href=t.value}}},e)c.addEventListener("message",c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage,!1),d.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded",t,!1),c.addEventListener("load",t,!1);function t(){if(!n){n=!0;for(var e,t,r=-1!==navigator.appVersion.indexOf("MSIE 10"),a=!!navigator.userAgent.match(/Trident.*rv:11\./),i=d.querySelectorAll("iframe.wp-embedded-content"),s=0;s

      //–>

      //–>

      //–>

      USA Today now has a habit of picking biological men as ‘woman of the year’, having last year decided that Biden assistant secretary of health and human services Rachel Levine was worthy of the award.

      Babylon Bee Suspended by Twitter Over Parody Article About Rachel Levine

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–
      !function(c,d){"use strict";var e=!1,n=!1;if(d.querySelector)if(c.addEventListener)e=!0;if(c.wp=c.wp||{},!c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage)if(c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage=function(e){var t=e.data;if(t)if(t.secret||t.message||t.value)if(!/[^a-zA-Z0-9]/.test(t.secret)){for(var r,a,i,s=d.querySelectorAll('iframe[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),n=d.querySelectorAll('blockquote[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),o=0;o<n.length;o++)n[o].style.display="none";for(o=0;o<s.length;o++)if(r=s[o],e.source===r.contentWindow){if(r.removeAttribute("style"),"height"===t.message){if(1e3<(i=parseInt(t.value,10)))i=1e3;else if(~~i<200)i=200;r.height=i}if("link"===t.message)if(a=d.createElement("a"),i=d.createElement("a"),a.href=r.getAttribute("src"),i.href=t.value,i.host===a.host)if(d.activeElement===r)c.top.location.href=t.value}}},e)c.addEventListener("message",c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage,!1),d.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded",t,!1),c.addEventListener("load",t,!1);function t(){if(!n){n=!0;for(var e,t,r=-1!==navigator.appVersion.indexOf("MSIE 10"),a=!!navigator.userAgent.match(/Trident.*rv:11\./),i=d.querySelectorAll("iframe.wp-embedded-content"),s=0;s

      //–>

      //–>

      //–>

      There is a pattern developing here:

      Figures: White House Gives International Women Day of Courage Award To A Biological Male

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–
      !function(c,d){"use strict";var e=!1,n=!1;if(d.querySelector)if(c.addEventListener)e=!0;if(c.wp=c.wp||{},!c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage)if(c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage=function(e){var t=e.data;if(t)if(t.secret||t.message||t.value)if(!/[^a-zA-Z0-9]/.test(t.secret)){for(var r,a,i,s=d.querySelectorAll('iframe[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),n=d.querySelectorAll('blockquote[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),o=0;o<n.length;o++)n[o].style.display="none";for(o=0;o<s.length;o++)if(r=s[o],e.source===r.contentWindow){if(r.removeAttribute("style"),"height"===t.message){if(1e3<(i=parseInt(t.value,10)))i=1e3;else if(~~i<200)i=200;r.height=i}if("link"===t.message)if(a=d.createElement("a"),i=d.createElement("a"),a.href=r.getAttribute("src"),i.href=t.value,i.host===a.host)if(d.activeElement===r)c.top.location.href=t.value}}},e)c.addEventListener("message",c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage,!1),d.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded",t,!1),c.addEventListener("load",t,!1);function t(){if(!n){n=!0;for(var e,t,r=-1!==navigator.appVersion.indexOf("MSIE 10"),a=!!navigator.userAgent.match(/Trident.*rv:11\./),i=d.querySelectorAll("iframe.wp-embedded-content"),s=0;s

      //–>

      //–>

      //–>

      *  *  *

      Brand new merch now available! Get it at https://www.pjwshop.com/

      In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. We need you to sign up for our free newsletter here. Support our sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown. Also, we urgently need your financial support here.

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 21:00

    • Muscle Car Uncertainty: Chevy Kills Camaro In 2024
      Muscle Car Uncertainty: Chevy Kills Camaro In 2024

      Chevrolet announced Wednesday, “the sixth generation Chevrolet Camaro will retire at the conclusion of the model year 2024,” indicating the last of these iconic muscle cars will leave the production line at the Lansing Grand River Assembly Plant in Michigan in January. 

      “As we prepare to say goodbye to the current generation Camaro, it is difficult to overstate our gratitude to every Camaro customer, Camaro assembly line employee and race fan,” Scott Bell, vice president of Global Chevrolet, said in a statement. He did not say what would replace the muscle car but added, “this is not the end of Camaro’s story.”

      The current sixth-generation Camaro has been at dealerships since the 2016 model year and has seen a sales slump. 

      When the current generation Camaro came out in 2016, Chevrolet sold 72,705 of them.

      But by the end of 2021 that number fell almost 70% to 21,893. –NYPost 

      Chevrolet spokesman Trevor Thompkins provided Detroit Free Press with insight on what could be next for Camaros. 

      “Chevrolet made the decision now as a part of continuously evaluating our portfolio offerings for progress toward our EV future and sales demand.”

      And what this could mean is an EV Camaro-style muscle car could be next. Chevrolet has previously teased this image. 

      It remains uncertain whether Chevy muscle car enthusiasts will embrace an electric vehicle future. We doubt many won’t. 

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 20:40

    • Markets To Yellen: 'F**k Off'
      Markets To Yellen: ‘F**k Off’

      “Where’s Janet!?”

      Remember this…

      The Treasury Secretary tried to fix her faux pas from yesterday, editing some text from her prepared remarks

      Deleted paragraph from March 22:

      “As I said last week, the US banking system is sound. The federal government’s recent actions have demonstrated our resolute commitment to take the necessary steps to ensure that depositors’ savings remain safe.”

      New paragraph on March 23:

      “As I have said, we have used important tools to act quickly to prevent contagion. And they are tools we could use again. The strong actions we have taken ensure that Americans’ deposits are safe. Certainly, we would be prepared to take additional actions if warranted.

      But she removed the “US banking system is sound”, sparking total chaos. (Bear in mind, as we detailed earlier, that ‘the math just doesn’t work’ for any industry-wide deposit insurance scheme, so what is she going to say?)

      Banks saw some hope-filled pre-market gains battered lower with regional banks suffering most. Yellen’s changed remarks sparked a brief recovery, but that didn’t last long as bank stocks tumbled back towards their lows…

      FFWM (First Foundation), PACW, ZION, KEY and FRC dominated the downturn (with Yellen’s attempt to save the day failed)…

      European bank CDS (5Y) have generally narrowed somewhat since the CS debacle, we do note that short-dated CDS (more used for counterparty risk management among derivatives traders) have not declined with Deutsche Bank remaining extremely high…

      Source: Bloomberg

      What started off as a relief-rally overnight, with multiple CNBC anchors sighing comfortably that the ‘worst must be over and that the ‘market just needed time to digest how dovish Powell was’; ended an utter shit-show.

      Nasdaq, S&P and The Dow all ramped after the US cash open, erasing the post-Powell losses. But that was all she wrote and as Europe closed, everything everywhere went just a little bit turbo as stocks collapsed below yesterday’s lows. The last 30 mins saw a bounce as 0DTE traders unwound earlier negative delta flows at a profit and the S&P bounced off technical support, but overall, all the US majors remain lower than pre-Powell/Yellen levels (Nasdaq the least ugly horse in the glue factory while Small Caps ended below yesterday’s lows)…

      It seems pretty clear the market wants to test Yellen and Powell to see if they will step up and bailout the next bank that goes boom in the night.

      S&P broke back below its 100- and 200-DMA (after trying to tag its 50-DMA on the morning ramp), then bounced off its 200DMA, back up to its 100DMA… a very technical day…

      CRE/Office REITs were hammered again today (‘Big Short 3.0 doing well since we issued on March 9th)…

      Source: Bloomberg

      Credit markets were ugly today with HYG getting hit hard…

      Source: Bloomberg

      Treasuries were more mixed today with the long-end notably underperforming and short-end ripping lower in yield. After Yellen’s remarks, yields extended lower (30Y +1bps, 2Y -17bps). On the week, all yields are lower now except 30Y…

      Source: Bloomberg

      2Y Yields tumbled back below 4.00%…

      Source: Bloomberg

      The yield curve saw a major steepening today with 5s30s uninverting…

      Source: Bloomberg

      Overall, STIRs drifted dovishly with December now pricing in rates 90bps below current levels…

      Source: Bloomberg

      The odds of a 25bps hike in May have tumbled to 26%…

      Source: Bloomberg

      Which leaves the Fed’s expected rate-trajectory dramatically more dovish than the ECB’s…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      And the market’s expectation dramatically more dovish than The Fed’s DotPlots…

      The dollar fell for the 6th straight day (10 of the last 11 days), bouncing a little intraday off 7-week lows…

      Source: Bloomberg

      Bitcoin ripped back up towards $29,000, erasing all of yesterday’s losses, but then faded back after Yellen’s revised remarks…

      Source: Bloomberg

      Gold surged back above $2000…

      Source: Bloomberg

      Oil prices rollercoastered again today, with WTI rallying above $71 into the European close and then dumping back down to a $69 handle…

      Finally, we note it is the three-year anniversary of the COVID lockdown lows today. Bitcoin is the biggest gainer since that date, bonds are the ugliest of all with the dollar basically unchanged and gold and stocks up handsomely…

      Source: Bloomberg

      Additionally, it appears alternative currencies are gaining favor since the global financial system started showing cracks again…

      Gold has soared over the last two weeks…

      Source: Bloomberg

      And Bitcoin has dominated everything…

      Source: Bloomberg

      No wonder the Dems have made crypto the new ‘boogeyman’.

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 20:35

    • Clinton Meme Trial Could Chill Free Speech for All Americans, Attorney Says
      Clinton Meme Trial Could Chill Free Speech for All Americans, Attorney Says

      Authored by Beth Brelje via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      The Department of Justice (DOJ) is being accused of using obscure conspiracy laws to target conservatives.

      A general view of the Department of Justice building in Washington, on April 18, 2019. (Amr Alfiky/Reuters)

      For example, violations of the Freedom of Access to Clinic Entrances (FACE) Act ordinarily would bring a year in prison. But in the last year, a host of sidewalk counselors at abortion facilities have been charged with both FACE violations and Conspiracy to Violate Civil Rights for posting to Facebook about where they would gather.

      The conspiracy charge adds a potential 10-years in federal prison.

      Douglass Mackey, 31, is on federal trial this week in the Eastern District of New York for posting a satirical meme under the Twitter handle “Ricky Vaughn” in 2016, advising voters they could vote for Hillary Clinton for president via text message or social media.

      Twitter profile page of Douglass Mackey (“Ricky Vaughn”). This account was used by Mackey between Nov. 3, 2016, to Nove. 14, 2016, according to the Department of Justices’s court filing. (The Epoch Times/ Screenshot via Internet Archives)

      The DOJ charged him five years later, in 2021, with Conspiracy Against Rights ( 18 U.S. Code § 241), which carries up to 10-years in prison.

      “This is a law that was passed in the aftermath of the Civil War, designed to protect the rights of newly freed slaves in the post-civil war South to vote,” James Lawrence, attorney for the Douglass Mackey Defense Fund told The Epoch Times. “Understandably, there were threats to the physical safety of those people with respect to the Ku Klux Klan, and that’s why this is a provision from the Ku Klux Klan Act.”

      Passed in 1871, the Conspiracy Against Rights code within the Ku Klux Klan Act has two parts:

      If two or more persons conspire to injure, oppress, threaten, or intimidate any person in the free exercise or enjoyment of any right or privilege secured to him by the Constitution—
      Or
      If two or more persons go in disguise on the highway, or on the premises of another, with intent to prevent or hinder his free exercise or enjoyment of any right or privilege so secured—

      They shall be fined or imprisoned not more than ten years, or both; and if death results from the acts committed in violation of this section or if such acts include kidnapping or an attempt to kidnap, aggravated sexual abuse or an attempt to commit aggravated sexual abuse, or an attempt to kill, they shall be fined under this title or imprisoned for any term of years or for life, or both, or may be sentenced to death.

      Intent to Interfere

      There is no mention in the act of posting political memes.

      But the DOJ said in its indictment that Mackey, “together with others, conspired to injure, oppress, threaten and intimidate one or more persons in the free exercise and enjoyment of a right and privilege secured to them by the Constitution and laws of the United States”—that is, the right to vote.

      It is a statute that has been used historically to go after conduct that is identified in the statute, which is conspiring to physically interfere with someone’s constitutional rights.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 20:20

    • The Big Apple Is The World's Most Expensive City For Business Travelers
      The Big Apple Is The World’s Most Expensive City For Business Travelers

      New York City has the highest per-day cost for a typical business trip among all destinations in the world, according to the consulting firm ECA International, which tracks expenses for accommodation at four-star hotels, meals, transportation via taxis, beverages, and other miscellaneous costs.

      ECA said business travelers in 2022 spent, on average, $796 per day in The Big Apple, increasing 8% from the prior year. Rising inflation from hotel rates to food to transportation was the primary divers in soaring costs. 

      After New York City was Geneva at $700 per day, then Washington, D.C., at around $658, Zurich at $641, and San Francisco at around $600.

      “Climbing inflation rates were a major factor in the increase in travel costs, while a pandemic-fueled drop in demand led to more affordable rates in places like China,” Bloomberg pointed out. 

      Paris was the least expensive, with average daily costs of $557 per day. 

      The good news for companies that are cost-cutting and reducing headcount to weather the inflation storm and economic downturn spurred by the Federal Reserve’s most aggressive interest rates hikes in a generation that has already sparked a regional banking crisis is the continued move towards Zoom calls rather than travel.

      In a separate report, the Global Business Travel Organization said one in five travel managers said their companies have begun to limit business travel due to rising costs. 

      Avoid travel. Take a Zoom call. Cathie Wood would appreciate that. 

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 20:00

    • Bipartisan Senators Push To Ban China From Buying US Farmland
      Bipartisan Senators Push To Ban China From Buying US Farmland

      Authored by Terri Wu via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      A group of bipartisan U.S. senators introduced a bill on Wednesday to ban the purchase of U.S. farmland by Chinese persons and entities.

      Sprinklers watering a lettuce field in Holtville, Calif., on Feb. 9, 2023. (Sandy Huffaker/AFP via Getty Images)

      In a press release, Sens. Mike Braun (R-Ind.), John Tester (D-Mont.), Marco Rubio (R-Fla.), and Tommy Tuberville (R-Ala.) stated their collective objective for the bill: to address national security concerns—food security and China’s threat to America’s military and economic power—over Chinese farmland ownership in the United States.

      If enacted, the ban would also apply to agricultural land leases, regardless of the lease duration. The legislation’s farmland purchase prohibition covers a person or entity “owned by, controlled by, or subject to the jurisdiction or direction of a foreign adversary,” defined as Iran, North Korea, China, or Russia. The ban excludes U.S. citizens or green card holders.

      Braun, who filed paperwork in November to run for Indiana governor in 2024, sounded the alarm about the exponential increase in Chinese ownership of American farmland: “Chinese ownership of American farmland increased more than 20-fold in the past decade,” he said in his press release. “We cannot allow our top foreign adversaries to buy up American farmland and compromise our agricultural supply chains.”

      As of Dec. 31, 2020, China owned 325,686 acres of U.S. agricultural land, according to the Department of Agriculture. While the acreage under Chinese ownership is slightly less than 1 percent of all foreign-held agricultural land, it represents a 20-fold leap from 13,720 acres in 2010.

      Foreign adversaries, including the Chinese Communist Party, should never be allowed to control Americans’ agricultural lands or our food supply,” echoed Rubio in the same press release. “We cannot allow these regimes to continue exploiting the openness of our system. This bipartisan legislation is an important step to protect our national security interests,” he added.

      The new bill also specifies land for ranching purposes as agricultural land, in addition to land used for “agricultural, forestry, or timber production purposes” as defined by the Agricultural Foreign Investment Disclosure Act (AFIDA) of 1978.

      Sen. Mike Braun (R-Ind.) speaks during a Senate Budget Committee hearing in the Hart Senate Office building in Washington on Feb. 17, 2022. (Anna Moneymaker/Getty Images)

      Protecting US Farmland

      In recent years, China buying U.S. farmland has become a major concern in many states.

      In Virginia, a bill that bans foreign adversaries, including China, from buying agricultural land in the commonwealth has passed both chambers of the state legislature and is ready for the governor’s signature by March 27.

      In Texas and Florida, state legislators are pushing for similar bills to pass.

      The language in Braun’s bill will enable the federal government to address deals similar to two recent high-profile cases, both cleared by the Committee on Foreign Investment in the United States (CFIUS), a cross-departmental panel that reviews foreign acquisitions for national security risks.

      Fufeng USA, the U.S. subsidiary of Fufeng Group, purchased 370 acres of farmland in the fall of 2021 for a corn mill project in Grand Forks, North Dakota. The proposed site is within 15 miles of the Grand Forks Air Force Base, which houses sensitive drone, satellite, and surveillance technology. In December 2022, CFIUS decided that it didn’t have jurisdiction to probe the land purchase. Before that, the project had prompted significant pushback from Republican lawmakers and locals who said it threatened both national and economic security.

      At the end of January, the U.S. Air Force warned that the project poses a “significant threat to national security.” In early February, Grand Forks City Council voted unanimously to abandon the project approved in July 2022.

      In 2016, a Chinese billionaire and former military official bought about 140,000 acres of land in Val Verde County, Texas, and planned to build a wind farm on the property. The purchased land included several ranches within 80 miles of the Laughlin Air Force Base and within some of the base’s pilot training zones.

      The project was halted by a new Texas law that came into effect in June 2021. The Lone Star Infrastructure Protection Act bans Texas businesses and governments from doing business with foreign entities from China, Russia, North Korea, and Iran if these transactions would provide the foreign enterprises remote access or control of critical infrastructure.

      Braun and company are but one group out of many federal legislators who want to tackle the China threat on U.S. farmland.

      Earlier this month, Sen. Josh Hawley (R-Mo.) unveiled a bill that would bar corporations and individuals linked to the Chinese regime from buying or leasing U.S. agricultural land. At the same time, existing owners must divest their interests under the bill or face fines and criminal consequences. Last month, Sens. Mike Rounds (R-S.D.) and Tester introduced a bill to ban China, Russia, Iran, and North Korea from buying or leasing U.S. farmland and agricultural businesses.

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 19:40

    • Strong Winds Topple Huge Ship Once Owned By Paul Allen, 33 Injured
      Strong Winds Topple Huge Ship Once Owned By Paul Allen, 33 Injured

      A large research vessel, once owned by the late Microsoft co-founder Paul Allen, was overturned in dry dock during strong winds on Wednesday in Scotland, leading to injuries of nearly three dozen dockworkers. 

      The Telegraph reported the 250-foot research vessel, RV Petrel, was dislodged from dry dock braces by strong winds. The 3,000-ton ship tipped on its side with 50 workers on the vessel.

      Images posted on Twitter show RV Petrel tilting at a 45-degree angle.  

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      NHS Lothian said 23 workers were admitted to a hospital, some with serious injuries, while the Scottish Ambulance Service treated 12 others on scene at Imperial Dock in Leith, Edinburgh. 

      The ambulance service sent 12 ambulances, an air ambulance, three trauma teams and other resources to the scene, while the fire service also attended.

      NHS Lothian received 21 patients, with 17 being admitted to Edinburgh Royal Infirmary (ERI) for treatment and four to the Western General Hospital (WGH) in the city. A further two were taken by ambulance to the Victoria Hospital in Kirkcaldy, Fife.

      The health board said it was forced to cancel outpatient appointments, endoscopies and planned operations to support accident and emergency staff and free up surgeons for the influx. -The Telegraph

      The ship’s previous owner, Allen, converted it into a deep submergence research vessel in 2017 — one year before he died of complications due to lymphoma cancer. 

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 19:20

    • Victor Davis Hanson: Questions Without Answers About Ukraine
      Victor Davis Hanson: Questions Without Answers About Ukraine

      Authored by Victor Davis Hanson,

      Ukrainians, and many Europeans and Americans, are defining an envisioned Ukrainian victory as the complete expulsion of all Russians from its 2013 borders.

      Or, as a Ukrainian national security chief put it, the war ends with Ukrainian tanks in Red Square.

      But mysteries remain about such ambitious agendas.

      What would that goal entail?

      Giving Ukraine American F-16s to strike bases and depots in Mother Russia? The gifting of 1,000 M1 Abrams tanks? Using American Harpoon missiles to sink the Russian Black Sea fleet?

      A huge arsenal that would guarantee total victory rather than not losing?

      Russia’s cruel strategy is to grind down Ukraine and turn its eastern regions into a Verdun-like deathscape.

      So is a brave Ukraine really winning the war when it loses about 0.6 soldiers for every Russian it kills?

      Russia plans to leverage its extra 100 million people, its 10-times larger economy, and its 30-times larger territory to pulverize Ukraine and tire its Western patrons — whatever the costs to Russia.

      Yet why were only a few in past administrations calling for a joint Western effort to expel Putin’s forces from the borderlands and Crimea captured in 2014?

      Why are Putin’s 2014 invasions now seen as urgent rectifiable crimes of aggression in 2022, but were not regarded as reparable during the prior eight years?

      Is the United States economically capable or politically unified or socially stable enough to wage a huge proxy war on the frontiers of a nuclear Russia?

      During the last comparable multibillion-dollar military efforts — the First Gulf War in 1990-1991 and the 2003 invasion of Iraq — the ratio of American debt to GDP was respectively 40 and 50 percent.

      Today it hovers at nearly three times that figure at 129%, given some $33 trillion in accumulated debt.

      Currently, the American economy is entering a stagflationary crisis. Banking, real estate, and financial sectors seem on the brink of imploding, especially after the near-record multibillion-dollar collapse of Sam Bankman-Fried’s FTX, and the meltdowns of the Silicon Valley and Signature banks.

      Around 7 million illegal entries have occurred across the southern border since January 2021 alone. Millions of new impoverished foreign nationals tax social services, spike crime, and strain relations with an increasingly antagonistic Mexican President Andres Manuel Lopez Obrador.

      An emboldened Lopez Obrador now brags that 40 million of his countrymen have cumulatively crossed the border, many illegally. He urges them to vote for Democratic candidates to ensure more open borders.

      Last year, over 100,000 Americans died of opiate overdoses. Most of the deaths were attributable to Mexican cartels’ brazen export of fentanyl across an open border.

      Nearly a million Americans have likely died of such overdoses since 2000 — more than double the number of fatalities in World War II.

      Given its shell-shocked inner cities and toxic downtowns, America is beginning to resemble mid-19th-century England that sent forces all over its global empire while novelist Charles Dickens chronicled the misery and poverty at the imperial core in London.

      Is the Ukrainian war also creating the most dangerous anti-American alliance since World War II?

      China is buying cheap Russian oil, while stealthily supplying its weapons.

      India, normally a rock-solid democratic ally, keeps buying both banned Russian oil and armaments.

      Most of the major countries in South America have not joined the sanctions.

      Clients like nuclear North Korea and soon to be nuclear Iran are empowered by overt help from Russia.

      NATO member Turkey and once-allied Saudi Arabia appear now friendlier to Iran, friendlier to China, and friendlier to Russia, than they are to America.

      In terms of combined oil reserves, nukes, population, area, and GDP, this new loose coalition of apparent anti-Americans seems more powerful than the U.S. and its squabbling friends in Europe.

      Why were those now calling for a veritable blank check for Ukraine formerly quiet when the U.S. fled in humiliation from Afghanistan?

      Why were they mostly silent when an appeasing President Joe Biden begged Russian President Vladimir Putin at least to spare some U.S. targets on his otherwise extensive anti-American cyberwar hit list?

      Or why were they indifferent when Biden said he would have fewer objections if Putin’s anticipated attack on Ukraine would be “minor”?

      Or why were they not so eager for confrontation when Putin earlier acquired the Eastern Ukrainian borderlands and Crimea in 2014 in the first place?

      Or why so subdued when the U.S. in 2015-16 refused to sell Ukrainian offensive weapons?

      Why does the U.S. discount the serial and ascending nuclear threats from Russia, but we remain careful not to antagonize China?

      After all, China sent a spy balloon brazenly across the U.S. to surveil and spy on American strategic locations.

      And why is the administration so quiet about a likely leak of an engineered deadly COVID-19 virus from a Chinese virology lab that killed 1 million Americans?

      These are Ukrainian war-related questions that never seem to be answered — but should be as the carnage rises and the nuclear threshold falls.

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 19:00

    • Musk Says Some Next-Gen Starlink Satellites Will Be "Deorbited" Due To Glitch
      Musk Says Some Next-Gen Starlink Satellites Will Be “Deorbited” Due To Glitch

      Elon Musk’s SpaceX recently launched the first batch of its next-generation Starlink internet satellites that already appear to be in trouble. 

      In a Wednesday tweet, Musk said there were “some issues” with “V2 Mini” satellites that were blasted into orbit last month. 

      “Lot of new technology in Starlink V2, so we’re experiencing some issues, as expected,” Musk wrote.

      The billionaire was responding to a Twitter conversation with some users pointing out “significant” altitude changes of some of the V2 Minis. 

      Musk said, “Some sats will be deorbited, others will be tested thoroughly before raising altitude above Space Station.” 

      Here’s the thread. 

      In a separate tweet, Starlink Insider tweeted a graph showing the decline in altitudes of some of the satellites. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The Feb. 27 launch of 21 next-generation Starlink satellites was on top of a Falcon 9 rocket. The V2 Minis are intended to expand network capacity as Starlink crossed 1,000,000 active subscribers in December, and some customers complain of slow speeds. 

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 18:40

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 23rd March 2023

    • Circus Politics Are Intended To Distract Us. Don't Be Distracted
      Circus Politics Are Intended To Distract Us. Don’t Be Distracted

      Authored by John and Nisha Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

      “There is nothing more dangerous than a government of the many controlled by the few.”

      – Lawrence Lessig, Harvard law professor

      It is easy to be distracted right now by the bread and circus politics that have dominated the news headlines lately, but don’t be distracted.

      Don’t be fooled, not even a little.

      We’re being subjected to the oldest con game in the books, the magician’s sleight of hand that keeps you focused on the shell game in front of you while your wallet is being picked clean by ruffians in your midst.

      This is how tyranny rises and freedom falls.

      What characterizes American government today is not so much dysfunctional politics as it is ruthlessly contrived governance carried out behind the entertaining, distracting and disingenuous curtain of political theater. And what political theater it is, diabolically Shakespearean at times, full of sound and fury, yet in the end, signifying nothing.

      We are being ruled by a government of scoundrels, spies, thugs, thieves, gangsters, ruffians, rapists, extortionists, bounty hunters, battle-ready warriors and cold-blooded killers who communicate using a language of force and oppression.

      The U.S. government now poses the greatest threat to our freedoms.

      More than terrorism, more than domestic extremism, more than gun violence and organized crime, even more than the perceived threat posed by any single politician, the U.S. government remains a greater menace to the life, liberty and property of its citizens than any of the so-called dangers from which the government claims to protect us.

      No matter who has occupied the White House in recent years, the Deep State has succeeded in keeping the citizenry divided and at each other’s throats.

      After all, as long as we’re busy fighting each other, we’ll never manage to present a unified front against tyranny in any form.

      Unfortunately, what we are facing is tyranny in every form.

      The facts speak for themselves.

      We’re being robbed blind by a government of thieves. Americans no longer have any real protection against government agents empowered to seize private property at will. For instance, police agencies under the guise of asset forfeiture laws are taking Americans’ personal property based on little more than a suspicion of criminal activity and keeping it for their own profit and gain. In one case, police seized more than $17,000 in cash from two sisters who were trying to start a dog breeding business. Despite finding no evidence of wrongdoing, police held onto the money for months. Homeowners are losing their homes over unpaid property taxes (as little as $2300 owed) that amount to a fraction of what they have invested in their homes. And then there’s the Drug Enforcement Agency, which has been searching train and airline passengers and pocketing their cash, without ever charging them with a crime.

      We’re being taken advantage of by a government of scoundrels, idiots and cowards. Journalist H.L. Mencken calculated that “Congress consists of one-third, more or less, scoundrels; two-thirds, more or less, idiots; and three-thirds, more or less, poltroons.” By and large, Americans seem to agree. When you’ve got government representatives who spend a large chunk of their work hours fundraising, being feted by lobbyists, shuffling through a lucrative revolving door between public service and lobbying, and making themselves available to anyone with enough money to secure access to a congressional office, you’re in the clutches of a corrupt oligarchy. Mind you, these same elected officials rarely read the legislation they’re enacting, nor do they seem capable of enacting much legislation that actually helps the plight of the American citizen. More often than not, the legislation lands the citizenry in worse straits.

      We’re being locked up by a government of greedy jailers. We have become a carceral state, spending three times more on our prisons than on our schools and imprisoning close to a quarter of the world’s prisoners, despite the fact that crime is at an all-time low and the U.S. makes up only 5% of the world’s population. The rise of overcriminalization and profit-driven private prisons provides even greater incentives for locking up American citizens for such non-violent “crimes” as having an overgrown lawn. As the Boston Review points out, “America’s contemporary system of policing, courts, imprisonment, and parole … makes money through asset forfeiture, lucrative public contracts from private service providers, and by directly extracting revenue and unpaid labor from populations of color and the poor. In states and municipalities throughout the country, the criminal justice system defrays costs by forcing prisoners and their families to pay for punishment. It also allows private service providers to charge outrageous fees for everyday needs such as telephone calls. As a result people facing even minor criminal charges can easily find themselves trapped in a self-perpetuating cycle of debt, criminalization, and incarceration.”

      We’re being spied on by a government of Peeping Toms. The government, along with its corporate partners, is watching everything you do, reading everything you write, listening to everything you say, and monitoring everything you spend. Omnipresent surveillance is paving the way for government programs that profile citizens, document their behavior and attempt to predict what they might do in the future, whether it’s what they might buy, what politician they might support, or what kinds of crimes they might commit. The impact of this far-reaching surveillance, according to Psychology Today, is “reduced trust, increased conformity, and even diminished civic participation.” As technology analyst Jillian C. York concludes, “Mass surveillance without due process—whether undertaken by the government of Bahrain, Russia, the US, or anywhere in between—threatens to stifle and smother that dissent, leaving in its wake a populace cowed by fear.”

      We’re being ravaged by a government of ruffians, rapists and killers. It’s not just the police shootings of unarmed citizens that are worrisome. It’s the SWAT team raids gone wrongmore than 80,000 annually—that are leaving innocent citizens wounded, children terrorized and family pets killed. It’s the roadside strip searches—in some cases, cavity searches of men and women alike carried out in full view of the public—in pursuit of drugs that are never found. It’s the potentially lethal—and unwarranted—use of so-called “nonlethal” weapons such as tasers on children for “mouthing off to a police officer. For trying to run from the principal’s office. For, at the age of 12, getting into a fight with another girl.”

      We’re being forced to surrender our freedoms—and those of our children—to a government of extortionists, money launderers and professional pirates. The American people have repeatedly been sold a bill of goods about how the government needs more money, more expansive powers, and more secrecy (secret courts, secret budgets, secret military campaigns, secret surveillance) in order to keep us safe. Under the guise of fighting its wars on terror, drugs and now domestic extremism, the government has spent billions in taxpayer dollars on endless wars that have not ended terrorism but merely sown the seeds of blowback, surveillance programs that have caught few terrorists while subjecting all Americans to a surveillance society, and militarized police that have done little to decrease crime while turning communities into warzones. Not surprisingly, the primary ones to benefit from these government exercises in legal money laundering have been the corporations, lobbyists and politicians who inflict them on a trusting public.

      We’re being held at gunpoint by a government of soldiers: a standing army. As if it weren’t enough that the American military empire stretches around the globe (and continues to leech much-needed resources from the American economy), the U.S. government is creating its own standing army of militarized police and teams of weaponized, federal bureaucrats. These civilian employees are being armed to the hilt with guns, ammunition and military-style equipment; authorized to make arrests; and trained in military tactics. Among the agencies being supplied with night-vision equipment, body armor, hollow-point bullets, shotguns, drones, assault rifles and LP gas cannons are the Smithsonian, U.S. Mint, Health and Human Services, IRS, FDA, Small Business Administration, Social Security Administration, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, Education Department, Energy Department, Bureau of Engraving and Printing and an assortment of public universities. There are now reportedly more bureaucratic (non-military) government civilians armed with high-tech, deadly weapons than U.S. Marines. That doesn’t even begin to touch on the government’s arsenal, the transformation of local police into extensions of the military, and the speed with which the nation could be locked down under martial law depending on the circumstances.

      Whatever else it may be—a danger, a menace, a threat—the U.S. government is certainly no friend to freedom.

      To our detriment, the criminal class that Mark Twain mockingly referred to as Congress has since expanded to include every government agency that feeds off the carcass of our once-constitutional republic.

      The government and its cohorts have conspired to ensure that the only real recourse the American people have to hold the government accountable or express their displeasure with the government is through voting, which is no real recourse at all.

      Consider it: the penalties for civil disobedience, whistleblowing and rebellion are severe. If you refuse to pay taxes for government programs you believe to be immoral or illegal, you will go to jail. If you attempt to overthrow the government—or any agency thereof—because you believe it has overstepped its reach, you will go to jail. If you attempt to blow the whistle on government misconduct, you will go to jail. In some circumstances, if you even attempt to approach your elected representative to voice your discontent, you can be arrested and jailed.

      You cannot have a republican form of government—nor a democratic one, for that matter—when the government views itself as superior to the citizenry, when it no longer operates for the benefit of the people, when the people are no longer able to peacefully reform their government, when government officials cease to act like public servants, when elected officials no longer represent the will of the people, when the government routinely violates the rights of the people and perpetrates more violence against the citizenry than the criminal class, when government spending is unaccountable and unaccounted for, when the judiciary act as courts of order rather than justice, and when the government is no longer bound by the laws of the Constitution.

      We no longer have a government “of the people, by the people and for the people.”

      Rather, what we have is a government of wolves.

      For too long, the American people have obeyed the government’s dictates, no matter now unjust.

      We have paid its taxes, penalties and fines, no matter how outrageous. We have tolerated its indignities, insults and abuses, no matter how egregious. We have turned a blind eye to its indiscretions and incompetence, no matter how imprudent. We have held our silence in the face of its lawlessness, licentiousness and corruption, no matter how illicit.

      How long we will continue to suffer depends on how much we’re willing to give up for the sake of freedom.

      For the moment, the American people seem content to sit back and watch the reality TV programming that passes for politics today. It’s the modern-day equivalent of bread and circuses, a carefully calibrated exercise in how to manipulate, polarize, propagandize and control a population.

      As French philosopher Etienne de La Boétie observed half a millennium ago:

      “Plays, farces, spectacles, gladiators, strange beasts, medals, pictures, and other such opiates, these were for ancient peoples the bait toward slavery, the price of their liberty, the instruments of tyranny. By these practices and enticements the ancient dictators so successfully lulled their subjects under the yoke, that the stupefied peoples, fascinated by the pastimes and vain pleasures flashed before their eyes, learned subservience as naively, but not so creditably, as little children learn to read by looking at bright picture books.”

      The bait towards slavery. The price of liberty. The instruments of tyranny.

      Yes, that sounds about right.

      As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, “We the people” have learned only too well how to be slaves.

      Tyler Durden
      Thu, 03/23/2023 – 00:00

    • Why Hypersonic Weapons Change Everything
      Why Hypersonic Weapons Change Everything

      Authored by Alex Krainer via TrendCompass,

      When it comes to all matters military, I have been following a handful of analysts among whom Croatian Admiral Davorin Domazet (retired) emerged as perhaps my favorite. He has deep and detailed command of technical matters (like Andreiy Martyanov he insists that you can’t prevail in modern warfare without deep knowledge of of advanced mathematics and probability). More importantly, he has perhaps the clearest understanding of the broad historical context of today’s clash between Russia and the western powers.

      Unfortunately, Admiral Domazet does not give many interviews and none in English, but I thought that his last one was important enough to share more broadly in this article.

      If you happen to speak Croatian/Serbian languages, you can find the interview, published on 17 March 2023 at this link. It runs over 2 hours.

      The context is everything

      Domazet is the only military analyst that I know of, who takes into account the history of western financial oligarchy, their Venetian roots, migration to Amsterdam where they formed the Dutch Empire, and subsequent move to London which, to this day remains the ideological and spiritual headquarters of the undead British Empire.

      He has correctly labelled humanity’s enemy as the “western occult oligarchy,” and has even called the war in Ukraine as the clash between Christ and anti-Christ, underlining that the anti-Christ is in the west. Mind you Croatia is a NATO member state and is, like Poland, a catholic Slavic nation, sharing even some of its cultural Russophobia (though it may not be quite as rabid in Croatia as it is in Poland).

      About Russia’s hypersonic weapons

      However, the part of Domazet’s last interview that I found particularly worth sharing wass what he laid out about Russia’s hypersonic weapons.

      It was in 2018 that Vladimir Putin took the stage to present Russia’s new hypersonic weapons. The term “hypersonic” refers to missiles that fly at speeds of 5 mach and higher. At the time, many in the west dismissed Putin’s claims and thought it was a bluff. We now know that he wasn’t bluffing. Russia is the only country in the world that has deployment-ready hypersonic missiles – not one but three types: Zircons, Kinzhals and Avantguards. 

      Domazet explained why these weapons are radical game changers in warfare. Namely, in World War 1, tanks were the game changing military technology; since World War 2, it’s been the air-force. Aircraft carrier strike groups have been an irresistible force wherever they travelled, dominating the seas ever since. But hypersonic precision missiles have rendered that force obsolete overnight.

      The main military front in today’s global conflict, according to Domazet, are the Anti-Ballistic (ABM) batteries which the US has set up on the Poland-Romania axis, and the Russians on the North Pole-Kaliningrad-Crimea-Syria axis. These are defensive systems, conceived to intercept incoming nuclear missiles. However, today’s ABM systems are only effective against missiles flying at speeds up to mach 3.5 (3.5 x the speed of sound).

      The Kinzhal turns mighty aircraft carrier strike groups into sitting ducks

      Russia’s new Kinzhal missile flies at speeds of mach 12 to mach 15 and nothing in western defensive arsenals can stop its strike. During the war in Ukraine, Russia a stunning demonstration of its power. The first Kinzhal strike, delivered one month after the beginning of hostilities in Ukraine, was perhaps the most significant: Russian forces targeted a large weapons depot in Ukraine which had been built to withstand a nuclear strike. It was buried 170 meters (over 500 ft) underground and protected by several layers of armored concrete.

      The Kinzhal flies at altitudes of between 20 and 40 km, with a maximum range of 2,000 km. When above target, it dives perpendicularly and accelerates to 15 mach, gathering enormous kinetic energy in addition to its explosive payload. That first strike with a single Kinzhal missile destroyed Ukraine’s nuke-proof underground weapons depot. This was a message for the west. 

      Moscow calling: we can sink ALL your carriers

      The Kinzhal was developed with the express purpose of destroying aircraft carrier strike groups. If it could destroy a warehouse built to withstand a nuclear strike, it can cut through an aircraft carrier like a hot knife through butter.

      According to Admiral Domazet, neither the western powers nor China are anywhere near having weapons like that. He explained that the critical issue with hypersonic weapons are the extreme temperatures reached during hypersonic flights on the surface of missiles, which can cause the missiles to break apart mid-flight. Russia is the only nation that has developed special materials that enable the missiles to withstand this stress, so their flight can be controlled throughout its trajectory and delivered with pinpoint accuracy.

      Western intelligence estimated that Russia had some 50 Kinzhals at the start of the war in Ukraine, and thus far it has used only 9 of them. Last week, they fired six Kinzhals in a single salvo. That too, was a message. Here’s how Domazet explained it: United States have 11 aircraft carrier strike groups. Of these, fewer than half will be active at any one time (while others are in dock for maintenance, or in preparation). Firing six Kinzhals in one go is military-speak for, “we have the capability to sink ALL of your aircraft carriers in at once.”

      Russia will run out of ammunitions any minute now, (experts say)…

      Russia has the capacity to build about 200 of them per year and now has means of delivering them anywhere from aircraft, ships and submarines. In addition to destroying aircraft carriers, they can destroy NATOs ABM missile sites also. In a nutshell, Russia has – for now – won the arms race.

      It could take the western powers 10 years or longer to catch up and until then, the only way to avoid losing the war is to either concede defeat and accept Russia’s security demands, or to escalate the conflict to nuclear exchange.

      A conservative estimate suggests that at least a billion people would perish in such a conflict and nobody would win. Who would do such a thing? The idea of using nuclear weapons is, in fact, so repugnant that we can be assured that our leaders will never chose the path of escalation. Surely, nobody’s that evil, are they?

      Alex Krainer – @NakedHedgie is the creator of I-System Trend Following and publisher of daily TrendCompass reports. For US investors, we propose an inflation/recession resilient portfolio covering a basket of 30+ financial and commodities markets; in 2022, we significantly outperformed the S&P 500 as well as the 60/40 death trap investment model. For more information, you can drop me a comment or an email to xela.reniark@gmail.com

      Alex Krainer’s TrendCompass is a reader-supported publication. To receive new posts and support my work, consider becoming a free or paid subscriber.

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 23:00

    • "Totally Exculpatory": Purported Cohen Letter To FEC Could Hobble Manhattan DA's Trump Case
      “Totally Exculpatory”: Purported Cohen Letter To FEC Could Hobble Manhattan DA’s Trump Case

      A letter purported to be from Michael Cohen’s attorney says that Cohen acted alone when he paid Stormy Daniels in 2016 – a revelation which could undercut Manhattan DA Alvin Bragg’s case against Donald Trump.

      “In a private transaction in 2016, before the U.S. presidential election, Mr. Cohen used his own personal funds to facilitate a payment of $130,000 to Ms. Stephanie Clifford [Stormy Daniels],” reads the 2018 letter from Cohen attorney Stephen Ryan to the Federal Election Commission, which asserts that Trump was not involved in the hush payment to the former porn star.

      “Neither the Trump Organization nor the Trump campaign was a party to the transaction with Ms. Clifford, and neither reimbursed Mr. Cohen for the payment directly or indirectly.”

      Trump posted the letter on Truth Social on Wednesday evening, saying “Wow, look what was just found—A Letter from Cohen’s Lawyer to the Federal Election Commission,” adding “This is totally exculpatory, and must end the Manhattan District Attorney’s Witch Hunt, immediately.

      Cohen admits that he did it himself. The D.A. should get on with prosecuting violent criminals, so people can walk down the sidewalks of New York without being murdered!”

      As Just the News notes,

      If authentic, the document could indeed be exculpatory for Trump. A potential charge legal experts have floated hinges on Trump falsifying his business records to hide a potential campaign finance violation.

      Trump’s alleged falsification stems from his listing of a payment to Cohen as a legal fee, which some have suggested was a reimbursement for Cohen’s payment to Daniels. Trump’s lawyer, Joe Tacopina, denies the record’s inaccuracy and has contended that “[t]he payments were made to a lawyer, not to Stormy Daniels. The payments were made to Donald Trump’s lawyer, which would be considered legal fees.”

      In short:

       

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 22:55

    • Coronal Hole '30 Times Earth's Size' Hurls Solar Plasma Towards Earth
      Coronal Hole ’30 Times Earth’s Size’ Hurls Solar Plasma Towards Earth

      NASA’s Solar Dynamics Observatory released a photo showing a massive coronal hole forming in the sun’s atmosphere, ejecting a stream of fast-moving solar winds toward Earth. 

      “The current coronal hole, the big one right now, is about 300,000 to 400,000 kilometers across,” Alex Young, the associate director for science at NASA Goddard’s Heliophysics Science Division, told Bussiness Insider. He said, “that’s about 20-30 Earths lined up back-to-back.” 

      Young said coronal holes unleash solar winds that can travel between 500-800 km per second. He explained the coronal mass ejection would reach Earth by Friday. 

      “We will probably start seeing the effects of the high-speed wind on March 24.

      “When the high-speed wind reaches Earth, the particles and the magnetic field it carries will interact with Earth’s magnetic field, effectively rattling it or like ringing a bell,” he said. 

      Space Weather website SolarHam said when the solar winds hit Earth, it will produce a moderate (G2) geomagnetic storm. 

      Here’s a visual of the CME’s impacts on modern society

      In addition to this week’s geomagnetic storm risk, Sunspot Cycle 25 has already started and is anticipated to be active. This could spell trouble for the digital economy, as disruptions caused by solar flares may lead to economic harm.

      Last year, Elon Musk’s satellite internet service Starlink lost 40 satellites after a geomagnetic storm knocked them out of orbit. 

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 22:40

    • A Headline Few Saw Coming: "Barney Frank Was Right About Signature Bank"
      A Headline Few Saw Coming: “Barney Frank Was Right About Signature Bank”

      Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk.com,

      The FDIC all but confirms Signature was closed to send a message about crypto…

      Barney Frank Was Right About Signature Bank

      The Wall Street Journal comments Barney Frank Was Right About Signature Bank

      We never thought we’d write that headline. But on Sunday the Federal Deposit Insurance Corp. announced that New York Community Bancorp’s Flagstar Bank will assume all of Signature Bank’s cash deposits except for those of crypto companies. This confirms Mr. Frank’s suspicions—and ours—that Signature’s seizure was motivated by regulators’ hostility toward crypto.

      Mr. Frank alleged last week that regulators seized Signature, whose board he served on, “to send a message to get people away from crypto.” 

      CoinDesk reported last week that crypto firms were looking for bank accounts off-shore such as at FV Bank in Puerto Rico, Jewel Bank in Bermuda, and Tether and FTX-tied Deltec in the Bahamas. Moving dollar deposits of U.S. crypto companies and their customers offshore will make them less safe and potentially more vulnerable to money laundering.

      In other words, regulators are undermining their ostensible goals. As usual, financial regulators shoot first, and make others pay later.

      Everything But Crypto

      PYMNTS reports Everything But the Crypto: Flagstar Scoops Up Failed Signature Bank

      While the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) denied reports that any buyer of Signature Bank would need to divest its crypto business, the buyer, New York Community Bancorp-owned Flagstar Bank, did anyway.

      This, as the FDIC noted in a press release announcing the sale, that Flagstar Bank’s bid for Signature Bank did not include around $4 billion of deposits tied to the failed institution’s digital banking business.

      “The FDIC will provide these deposits directly to customers whose accounts are associated with the digital banking business,” the agency said in a Sunday (March 19) announcement.

      The shuttering of both Silvergate Bank, which voluntarily liquidated, and Signature Bank, which failed, has made it increasingly difficult for crypto platforms and investors to transfer traditional currencies by closing two critical banking on-ramps for the digital asset industry. 

      FDIC Statement 

      Depositors of Signature Bridge Bank, N.A., other than cash depositors related to the digital-asset banking businesses, will automatically become depositors of the assuming institution. All deposits assumed by Flagstar Bank, N.A., will continue to be insured by the FDIC up to the insurance limit. 

      Flagstar Bank’s bid did not include approximately $4 billion of deposits related to the former Signature Bank’s digital-assets banking business. The FDIC will provide these deposits directly to customers whose accounts are associated with the digital-asset banking businesses. Questions may be directed to (866) 744-5463.

      The FDIC estimates the cost of the failure of Signature Bank to its Deposit Insurance Fund to be approximately $2.5 billion. The exact cost will be determined when the FDIC terminates the receivership.

      FDIC Statement Translated

      The FDI made a Statement on Signature Bank. Here is my translation: 

      To punish crypto, we are willing to lose $2.5 billion, even though our solution will require offshore funding, which in turn will make the deposits less safe and more vulnerable to money laundering.

      Zero Reserve Banking

      Meanwhile, please note Fed Policy: It’s Not Fractional Reserve Banking, It’s ZERO Reserve Banking

      If you think I am joking, I am not. 

      We are in a banking crisis precisely because of Fed actions coupled with zero reserve requirements on deposits.

      *  *  *

      Please Subscribe to MishTalk Email Alerts.

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 22:20

    • China Backs Russia's Draft UN Resolution On Nord Stream Probe
      China Backs Russia’s Draft UN Resolution On Nord Stream Probe

      China is backing Russian efforts to get to the bottom of the Nord Stream pipeline sabotage attacks, with state-run Xinhua on Wednesday announcing the foreign ministry’s support for a UN Security Council (UNSC) draft resolution.

      Russia has gotten more vocal about alleging that Washington was behind it, following the publication of legendary journalist Seymour Hersh’s report which detailed a CIA and US Navy covert op in coordination with Norway’s intelligence services. 

      Anadolu Agency/Getty Images

      Citing a foreign ministry spokesperson, Xinhua reported “Wang made the remarks at a regular press briefing in response to a media query on Russia’s draft resolution at the UNSC in February calling for an international independent investigation commission on the gas pipeline incident.”

      “Russia is said to have started the silence procedure on the draft, but the United States and some other Western members of the UNSC broke silence and objected to such a commission.”

      Moscow and Beijing have taken Washington’s resistance to its resolution as a sign of guilt, while also suggesting Western allies are obfuscating

      Wang said China has also noticed the attitude of some Western members of the UNSC and hopes they will truly abandon geopolitical selfish interest, earnestly fulfill the obligations and responsibilities of UNSC members, and constructively participate in the consultations of the draft to make positive efforts for an early consensus on the resolution. 

      The Kremlin has also lately highlighted that the latest mainstream media narrative out of the West is meant to distract and divert the spotlight off Washington.

      The theory that’s gained prominence is that rogue Ukrainian partisans blew up the natural gas pipelines on September 26. However, Russian officials have laughed this off, stressing that the bombing would have been of such difficulty as to require the resources of a government and military/intelligence apparatus. 

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 22:00

    • Detransitioned Teen Girl Sues Kaiser Permanente Over Gender Transition Gone Wrong
      Detransitioned Teen Girl Sues Kaiser Permanente Over Gender Transition Gone Wrong

      Authored by Elizabeth Dowell via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      A detransitioned teen is suing Kaiser Permanente hospital because doctors removed her breasts during her transgender procedure.

      A Kaiser Permanente hospital in Anaheim, Calif., on March 24, 2021. (John Fredricks/The Epoch Times)

      Layla Jane is an 18-year-old woman who began to identify as transgender at age 11. Jane, at the time, wanted to transition to a male. Initially, doctors at Kaiser denied her any transition hormones, saying she could take them after turning 16. However, doctors changed their minds, approved her request, and performed a double mastectomy when she was 13.

      Jane wrote on Twitter, “Mind boggling to me that a doctor signed off on a double mastectomy for me before I took a sex ed course. I barely started 8th grade, I was 13.”

      Chloe Cole participates in a demonstration in Anaheim, Calif., on Oct. 8, 2022. (Brad Jones/The Epoch Times)

      In the letter of intent to sue (pdf), her attorneys at LiMandri and Jonna LLP accused the doctors of approving the breast-removal surgery “without performing an adequate evaluation and treatment of Layla’s extensive mental health co-morbidities.”

      According to the letter, Jane suffers from anxiety, depression, pubertal struggles, body dysmorphia, and serious self-image concerns.

      These doctors also pushed Layla and her parents down this transition path engaging in intentional, malicious, and oppressive concealment of important information and false representations,” the letter states.

      The lawsuit demands unspecified amounts of pay for damages related to her health issues during her transition period from ages 12 to 17. The case listed Jane as suffering from permanent, irreversible mutilation, an induced state of endocrine disease, an increased risk of being infertile, and the fact that she would never be able to breastfeed a child.

      During an appearance on Fox News with her attorney, Harmeet Dhillon, Jane said, “I don’t think I’m better off for the experience, and I think transition just completely added fuel to the fire that was my pre-existing conditions.”

      In a statement to DailyMail, Kaiser said that its doctors “practice compassionate, evidence-based medicine founded on sound research and best medical practices.”

      When adolescent patients, with parental support, seek gender-affirming care, the patient’s care team carefully evaluates their treatment options,” Kaiser spokesman Marc Brown said. “The care decisions always rest with the patient and their parents, and, in every case, we respect the patients and their families’ informed decisions about their personal health.”

      The Epoch Times reached out to Kaiser for comment.

      Chloe Cole, 18, is another young woman who detransitioned and filed a lawsuit against the hospital giant.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 21:40

    • "We Are Headed For Another Train Wreck": Bill Ackman Blames Janet Yellen For Restarting The Bank Run
      “We Are Headed For Another Train Wreck”: Bill Ackman Blames Janet Yellen For Restarting The Bank Run

      Yesterday morning we joked that every time Janet Yellen opens her mouth, stocks dump.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Well, it wasn’t a joke, and as we repeatedly noted today, while Jerome Powell was busting his ass to prevent a violent market reaction – in either direction – to his “most important Fed decision and presser of 2023”, the Treasury Secretary, with all the grace of a senile 76-year-old elephant in a China market, uttered the phrase…

      • YELLEN: NOT CONSIDERING BROAD INCREASE IN DEPOSIT INSURANCE

      … and the rest was silence… or rather selling.

      Commenting on our chart, Bloomberg’s Mark Cudmore noted it was Yellen who was “to blame for the stock slump”, pointing out that “the pessimistic turn in US stocks began within a minute of Janet Yellen starting to speak.”

      The S&P 500 rose almost 1% in the first 47 minutes after the Fed decision. Powell wasn’t the problem either: the index was 0.6% higher in the first 17 minutes after his press conference started.

      Why am I picking that exact timing of 2:47pm NY time? Because that is the minute Yellen started speaking at the Senate panel hearing. The high for the S&P 500 was 2:48pm NY time and it fell more than 2.5% over the subsequent 72 minutes. Good effort.

      Picking up on this, Bloomberg’s Mark Cranfield writes that banking stocks globally are set to underperform for longer after Janet Yellen pushed back against giving deposit insurance without working with lawmakers. He adds that “to an aggressive trader this sounds like an invitation to keep shorting bank stocks — at least until the tone changes into broader support and is less focused on specific bank situations.” Earlier, we addressed that too:

      Looking ahead, Cranfield warns that US financials are likely to be the most vulnerable as they are the epicenter of the debate. Although European or Asian banking names may outperform US peers, that won’t be much consolation for investors as most financial sector indexes may be on a downward path.

      The KBW bank index has tumbled from its highs seen in early February, but still has a way to go before it reaches the pandemic-nadir in 2020. Traders smell an opening for a big trade and that will fuel more downside. Probably until Yellen blinks.

      And if Bill Ackman is right, she will be doing a whole lot of blinking in days if not hours.

      Ackman crying in public

      While we generally make fun of Ackman’s self-serving hot takes on twitter, today he was right when he accused Yellen of effectively restarting the small bank depositor run which according to JPMorgan has already seen $1.1 trillion in assets withdrawn from “vulnerable” banks. This is what Ackman tweeted:

      Yesterday, @SecYellen  made reassuring comments that led the market and depositors to believe that all deposits were now implicitly guaranteed. That coupled with a leak suggesting that @USTreasury, @FDICgov and @SecYellen  were looking for a way to guarantee all deposits reassured the banking sector and depositors.

      This afternoon, @SecYellen walked back yesterday’s implicit support for small banks and depositors, while making it explicit that systemwide deposit guarantees were not being considered.

      We have gone from implicit support for depositors to @SecYellen explicit statement today that no guarantee is being considered with rates now being raised to 5%. 5% is a threshold that makes bank deposits that much less attractive. I would be surprised if deposit outflows don’t accelerate effective immediately.

      Ackman concluded by repeating his ask: a comprehensive deposit guarantee on America’s $18 trillion in assets…

      A temporary systemwide deposit guarantee is needed to stop the bleeding. The longer the uncertainty continues, the more permanent the damage is to the smaller banks, and the more difficult it will be to bring their customers back.

      … but as we noted previously pointing out, you know, the math…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      … absent bipartisan Congressional intervention – which is very much unlikely until the bank crisis gets much, much worse – this won’t happen and instead the Fed will continue putting out bank fire after bank fire – even as it keeps hiking to overcompensate for its “transitory inflation” idiocy from 2021, until the entire system burns down, something which Ackman’s follow-up tweet was also right about:

      Consider recent events impact on the long-term cost of equity capital for non-systemically important banks where you can wake up one day as a shareholder or bondholder and your investment instantly goes to zero. When combined with the higher cost of debt and deposits due to rising rates, consider what the impact will be on lending rates and our economy.

      The longer this banking crisis is allowed to continue, the greater the damage to smaller banks and their ability to access low-cost capital.

      Trust and confidence are earned over many years, but can be wiped out in a few days. I fear we are heading for another a train wreck. Hopefully, our regulators will get this right.

      Narrator: no, they won’t.

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 21:20

    • How Fauci's Wife Used NIH Position To Backstop Her Husband’s Pandemic Health Directives
      How Fauci’s Wife Used NIH Position To Backstop Her Husband’s Pandemic Health Directives

      Authored by Adam Andrzejewski via OpenTheBooks,

      It’s the Washington, D.C. power couple that cost taxpayers nearly $1 million per year.

      While Dr. Anthony Fauci gave the nation its pandemic public policy prescriptions, his wife, Dr. Christine Grady, the Chief Bioethicist at Fauci’s employer, the National Institutes of Health (NIH) provided the moral framework.

      The Faucis are important to the center-left, because they represent the pinnacle moment of the administrative state – top-down public policy run by an elite group of government scientists.

      Conversely, to the center-right, the Faucis represent “the fatal conceit of the elites.” As Noble Laureate economist Friedrich Hayek theorized, the elites are no match for billions of free people acting in their own best interests.

      MEET THE FAUCIS

      While Tony Fauci was the top paid federal bureaucrat and out-earned the U.S. President at $480,654 per year, Christine Grady, as the chief bioethicist at NIH out-earned the U.S. Vice President ($243,749). When adding 35-percent in benefits, the couple cost taxpayers an estimated nearly $1 million per year.

      CHART: Tracking the Fauci household net worth which increased from $7.6 million to $12.6 million between the start of 2020 and the end of 2021. Source: OpenTheBooks.com lawsuit production from NIH on Fauci’s financial disclosures.

      It’s difficult to know where Anthony Fauci ends and Christine Grady begins. Here’s how Tony Fauci described Grady’s influence on his public policy decisions:

      I’ve benefited greatly from this partnership of overlapping interest and common interest. So, a lot of the things that I do with regard to the development of vaccines, the development of therapies, being involved with outbreaks and pandemics, have ethical overtones to them. I can say that I am very blessed to be living with someone who is very likely, most people think, one of the most outstanding ethicists in the world. To have her in the house — you know, as a consultant on ethical issues—is pretty advantageous.

      So, the Faucis lived a conflict of interest at the breakfast table, the office, and back home around the dinner table. However, NIH has never acknowledged this.

      In fact, NIH forced our organization to file two federal lawsuits with the public-interest law firm Judicial Watch as our lawyers to finally bring transparency to the Fauci/Grady job descriptions, conflict of interest documents, financial and ethics disclosures, contracts, and other documents.

      Then, NIH slow-walked thousands of pages of production. Yet, no nepotism waivers were produced, no acknowledgement of conflicting interests, and no records documenting violations of federal ethics policy.

      Slide developed by Dr. Anthony S. Fauci and presented by Dr. Christine Grady during her NIH presentation COVID Vaccines: Approaches to Vaccine Trial Design November 4 2020. Many of the prescriptions on this slide showed little efficacy in after-action studies. Source: FOIA

      While Grady’s work during the pandemic was described as “invaluable” by then-NIH director Francis Collins, the general public knows little about her day-to-day responsibilities. 

      An open records request for Grady’s job description reveals she, too, is meant to use her position to influence policy.

      Screenshot from Christine Grady’s job description, received. Source: FOIA

      Advocating Lockdowns

      Dr. Fauci knew that his “draconian policies” on social isolation and economic lockdowns would have “collateral negative consequences,” and admitted Christine Grady was a driving force behind his hardline approach.

      In a November 2021 interview with the couple, Fauci said that he gained strength from his wife’s support saying, “background and her experience in really core ethical principles [helped] me to really feel much more comfortable in what I was saying.”

      In the interview, Christine Grady described how she mind-mapped national policy with her husband:

      “But we’ve had conversations about the sort of consequences of telling people to stay home and what it would do for the economy. And there were a lot of people in those days that, and still who said, it’s ruining the economy. It’s much more important to just keep things going and not worry about transmitting virus…I said, that one of the messages should be, how many lives are you willing to sacrifice? And that message would be pretty stark and pretty brutal, but that’s really what the trade-off was…And so we’ve had that kind of conversation over dinner more than once, actually.”

      Fauci replied that these conversations “sharpened [his] resolve” to move forward with lockdown policies.

      Social isolation was one of the individual sacrifices Grady and Fauci thought were necessary to make on behalf of “public health.”

      Vaccine Development & Public Safety

      Like her husband, Grady exclusively focused her attention and remarks on vaccine development rather than other potential ways to treat and combat the spread of COVID-19.

      One major paper she co-authored in 2020 advocated for vaccines to be distributed under emergency use authorization (EUA), which is how the federal government ultimately proceeded.

      In this paper, Grady’s advocacy for vaccines came with a troubling acknowledgement:

       “even with mandated safety monitoring after EUA distribution, it would be difficult or impossible to ascertain vaccine-induced adverse events.”

      However, during most of her public presentations, she asserted that vaccines were developed in a fast, but “safe and rigorous” manner. Just one of many examples can be found here.

      By November 2021, she said the risk of unknown long-term effects were “not zero” but that “there is a balance between benefiting the public health now versus waiting for all the information we might get.”

      Despite these admissions, Grady often said she was “disturbed” by vaccine hesitancy, implying that safety concerns were somehow unreasonable.

      Vaccine Mandates

      Grady’s stance on vaccine mandates changed radically throughout the pandemic.

      In June 2020, a presentation she gave suggested “immunity passports” could cause “discrimination without much overall gain.” A passport system would allow businesses to limit or deny access to those who remained unvaccinated.

      Six months later, in January 2021, Grady said, “I do believe that healthcare providers, like everyone else, should have the choice” whether to take the vaccine or not.

      But by early October 2021, Grady had decided the choice facing health care workers was a drastically different one: whether to get the vaccine or lose their jobs.

      Later that month, she also flipped her position on vaccine passports. What once was a potential source of discrimination was recast as a way to access “social benefits” like restaurants and movie theaters.

      It’s a disturbing way to describe Americans free association of movement.   

      Grady went on to co-author a March 2022 report approving of social ostracization for the vaccine-hesitant and encouraging employers to pressure their workers:

      “While some employers might understandably feel hesitant to pressure employees to get vaccinated, our analysis suggests that it is often ethically acceptable to inform, encourage, strongly encourage, incentivize, and subtly pressure unvaccinated people to benefit them, the organization, and other employees.”

      In fewer than two years, Grady had completely altered her assessment of vaccine mandates and widespread restrictions on the behavior of unvaccinated Americans. Gone were concerns about discrimination and freedom of choice.

      As Dr. Fauci pushed and pressured the public to get vaccinated for the sake of their neighbors and family members, Grady began considering it ethical to fire workers who did not comply.

      Likewise, it became a “social benefit” to get a vaccine passport that would allow people to avoid government restrictions on their free movements.

      Screenshot of Tweet – Dr. Fauci and Dr. Grady maskless at the Washington National baseball game in summer 2020 after Fauci threw out the first pitch.

      Mask Mandates

      While her husband advocated masking and double masking—even when “fully vaccinated”—Dr. Grady consistently backed his position.

      In July 2020, during an InStyle interview, Grady answered questions about masking:

      Interviewer: Let me ask you, Chris, as a bioethicist, what do you make of this moment we’re in, when even a mask has become more of a divisive issue?

      Grady: Well, I would say that masks shouldn’t be divisive. It’s a relatively easy way to protect one’s self and others. And so for public health reasons, I think everybody should do it. From an ethical perspective there is always this tension between what you ask people to do that feels like a restriction of their liberty and what is required for public health. And in this case, it seems like a slam dunk. It’s not restricting liberty much, and it’s very helpful for public health.

      Grady was consistent and in November 2021 spoke to the ethical balancing test of public safety versus individual freedom and never viewed mask wearing to be much of an infringement on individual rights:

      “There’s a classic tension between public health, and individual interests and freedoms. Where there seems to be this conflict to the things that we do to protect the public health, and to protect the population for the common good. Sometimes they are perceived to be, and sometimes they do in small ways, infringe on people’s freedoms. There are principles of public health ethics that help you sort out the kinds of interventions that we should use: Things that are effective, that are proportional, where the benefits outweigh the risks that are necessary, that are least infringement possible, that are transparent, that we can publicly justify.

      …What’s striking to me is that, the kinds of burdens that we’ve asked people to undertake, like putting on a mask, don’t really infringe on one’s freedoms very much. They’re low burden and they have an effect. They do protect the person who’s wearing the mask, as well as the people that are around them.”

      A recent credible study on mask wearing during the pandemic argued there is no clear impact of masking on Covid-19 infection rates.

      Patients Dying in Isolation

      During the pandemic, Grady revealed a default preference for government control over individual rights and responsibilities. Grady was an early proponent of one of the most heinous pandemic polices: patients dying in isolation.

      For example, while uncritically accepting dying in isolation as a fact of the pandemic, Grady’s primary solution was to expand funding for health care workers to have access to therapy and other resources to heal from their “moral distress.”

      As early as April 2020 Grady said:  

      “Because of visiting policies and fear of contagion sometimes when somebody is really sick their family cannot visit them, they can’t see them…the stress and the sadness and the isolation on families is and is going to be great.” 

      In a November 2020 NIH presentation she called these “lonely” deaths “understandable:”  

      “It’s a lonely kind of death, many institutions, understandably have visitor policies which either restrict the number of visitors to one or zero so sometimes people are dying without having their family nearby and that puts an additional burden on the healthcare staff.” 

      In one co-authored paper urging healthcare workers to “temper these potentially dehumanizing scenarios with imaginative solutions that do not sacrifice compassion and equal respect on the altars of safety and efficiency.” 

      She interrogates the tension between individual freedom and community safety in a book published April 26, 2022, as a co-author proposing a radical “solidarity model” for ethics in healthcare, stating that rather than emphasizing a respect for individuals to make decisions in their own interest:  

      “We should recognize that there are times when solidarity takes precedence over individual liberties, and broadening our concept of “respect for persons” means uniting as a profession to protect all those who expect to receive care from nurses in whatever healthcare setting they find themselves.” 

      She co-edited a section in the same book arguing this extends to dying in insolation: 

      “The solidarity model may apply to restricted family visitation, which generated moral distress for nurses, particularly when patients died without loved ones present…”

      CONCLUSION – GRADY AND THE NEXT PANDEMIC

      As demonstrated by her own words, Grady’s record evinces an understanding of ethics that begs fundamental moral questions, regularly subordinates individuals beneath an amorphous “public health,” and relies on subtle but unacknowledged shifts to retain an alleged moral high ground.

      While some of her observations early in the pandemic did show an interest in providing nuance to policymaking—questioning the usefulness of immunity passports and highlighting issues with long-term vaccine effects under a EUA rollout—this quickly gave way to conformity to broader political zeitgeist, painting pushback as ignorant, uncaring, and simply wrong.

      By 2021 her public statements never suggested a limit to sacrifices the individual should ethically make on behalf of “public health,” from masking, to taking vaccines, to foregoing family gatherings even at the point of one’s own death.

      Both Fauci and Grady made clear that they wish for ethicists like Grady to have more power and more influence over political decision-making.

      As Grady remains the chief NIH bioethicist, Americans should ponder: does Grady’s philosophy advance what is “fair” and “just” in public health policy? What does her continued leadership mean for the future of American policy.

      Taxpayers compensate Grady generously, and they’re owed full transparency about her role, responsibilities and influence – during the pandemic and into the future.

      Note: We reached out to Dr. Christine Grady and NIH for comment. While acknowledging our requests, no statement or comment was received before publication.

      ADDITIONAL READING

      Dr. Anthony Fauci: The Highest Paid Employee In The Entire U.S. Federal Government Published January 21, 2021 | Forbes

      Dr. Anthony Fauci’s Little Known Biodefense Work. It’s How He Became The Highest Paid Federal Employee. Published October 20, 2021 | Forbes

      No, Fauci’s Records Aren’t Available. Why Won’t NIH Immediately Release Them? Published January 12, 2022 | Forbes

      Breaking: Fauci’s Net Worth Soared To $12.6 Million During The Pandemic – Up $5 Million (2019-2021). Published September 28, 2022 | OpenTheBooks.Substack.com

      HISTORIC RELEASE: Dr. Anthony Fauci’s Official Work Calendar (November 2019 – March 2020) | Published October 20, 2022 | OpenTheBooks.Substack.com

      ABOUT US

      OpenTheBooks.com – We believe transparency is transformational. Using forensic auditing and open records, we hold government accountable.

      In the years 2021 and 2022, we filed 100,000+ FOIA requests and successfully captured $19 trillion government expenditures: nearly all federal spending; 50 state checkbooks; and 25 million public employee salary and pension records from 50,000 public bodies across America.

      Our works have been featured at the BBC, Good Morning America, ABC World News Tonight, The Wall Street Journal, USA Today, C-SPAN, Chicago Tribune, The New York Times, NBC News, FOX News, Forbes, National Public Radio (NPR), Sinclair Broadcast Group, & many others.

      Our organization accepts no government funding and was founded by CEO Adam Andrzejewski. Our federal oversight work was cited twice in the President’s Budget To Congress FY2021. Andrzejewski’s presentation, The Depth of the Swamp, at the Hillsdale College National Leadership Seminar 2020 in Naples, Florida posted on YouTube received 3.8+ million views.

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 21:00

    • Cashless Society: Panera Bread Debuts "Frictionless" Palm Payment System
      Cashless Society: Panera Bread Debuts “Frictionless” Palm Payment System

      Amazon’s palm-reading payment technology was first introduced at numerous Whole Foods locations in California, enabling customers to pay for their groceries by scanning their palms at checkout terminals rather than using cash or a card. Now Panera Bread is experimenting with Amazon’s cashless payment system as the war on cash marches on. 

      On Wednesday, Panera Bread announced plans to roll out a “contactless payment method” to several stores with additional locations in the coming months. The bakery-cafe chain has over 2,000 locations, and its loyalty program has 52 million members. 

      “Panera is the first national restaurant company to use Amazon One as both a way for guests to pay and access their loyalty account with their palm,” the company said. 

      “Our philosophy has been centered around leveraging best-in-class technology to create a better Panera experience and using that to deepen our relationship with our loyal guests. Introducing Amazon One, as a frictionless, personalized, and convenient service, is another way we’re redefining the loyalty experience,” Niren Chaudhary, CEO of Panera Bread and Panera Brands, stated.

      At the moment, dozens of Whole Foods locations and Amazon Go stores have integrated Amazon One contactless payment

      By summer, Panera Bread might have at least two dozen stores equipped with Amazon’s contactless payment system, as reported by Panera’s Chief Digital Officer George Hanson in an interview with CNBC.

      “We think the payment plus loyalty identification is the secret sauce that can unlock a really personalized, warm and efficient experience for our guests in our cafes,” Hanson said. 

      The adoption of contactless payment systems by corporate giants like Amazon and Panera Bread, both known for their massive loyalty programs, seems to signal a shift towards a cashless society.

      Recall the pivot toward a cashless society was clear as day. Perhaps the coin shortage during the pandemic was a pilot test. And anyone who dared mention a looming cashless society was deemed a ‘conspiracy theorist.’ 

      Just remember who is also shaping the world and influencing corporations and politicians away from a cash economy:

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      … and the rollout of contactless payment comes just before the Federal Reserve is set to activate its digital dollar in July. 

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 20:40

    • Yellen Pulls Rug Out From Powell's Dovish Promises: Gold Gains As Banks Bust
      Yellen Pulls Rug Out From Powell’s Dovish Promises: Gold Gains As Banks Bust

      Tl; dr: “Damn it, Janet!”

      Bill Ackman was pissed at Janet’s apparent flip-flop

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Yesterday, @SecYellen made reassuring comments that led the market and depositors to believe that all deposits were now implicitly guaranteed. That coupled with a leak suggesting that @USTreasury, @FDICgov and @SecYellen were looking for a way to guarantee all deposits reassured the banking sector and depositors. 

      This afternoon, @SecYellen walked back yesterday’s implicit support for small banks and depositors, while making it explicit that systemwide deposit guarantees were not being considered. 

      We have gone from implicit support for depositors to @SecYellen explicit statement today that no guarantee is being considered with rates now being raised to 5%.

      5% is a threshold that makes bank deposits that much less attractive. I would be surprised if deposit outflows don’t accelerate effective immediately. 

      A temporary systemwide deposit guarantee is needed to stop the bleeding.

      The longer the uncertainty continues, the more permanent the damage is to the smaller banks, and the more difficult it will be to bring their customers back.

      …and so was the stock market.

      *  *  *

      Nothing sums up the ‘trapped’ Fed better than today’s price action…

      • GME soaring: a legacy of record QE and helicopter money

      • PACW crashing: a legacy of the fastest rate-hikes since Volcker

      Fed Chair Powell hiked rates by 25bps and maintained QT (as expected), offering a dovish tilt in the statement and his comments.

      But, he summed it all up succinctly early in his press conference: “It will be bumpy” describing the process of getting inflation back down, adding that it “has a long way to go.”

      But as usual, all the major price action took place as Powell spoke.

      As Guy LeBas (@lebas_janney2m) commented:

      “The choice to start the presser with a discussion of the banking system has a clear policy message: the mini-banking crisis is the most important thing in the Fed’s thinking right now. Second is the focus on the labor markets, which policymakers still seem to view as too tight.”

      Powell claimed that “deposit flows in the banking system have stabilized”, noting their strong actions, but he fails to comment on the massive rotation likely below the surface from small-banks to big-banks (since deposit flows OUT of the banking system may have stabilized but we suspect the rotation hasn’t).

      Someone forgot to tell banking system investors…

      Powell says FOMC considered a pause, but hike was supported by “strong consensus”.

      Powell dismissed market’s expectations: “Rate cuts are not in our base case.”

      Powell said some members recognized the impact of the financial system crisis on credit tightening – which could do the job of some rate-hikes.

      This prompted a ramp in stocks (and bonds) as the market smells fewer rate-hikes if the credit market tightens itself.

      We have our own opinion on that relative to the impact on the consumer…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Not exactly something stocks should get excited about.

      Bloomberg’s model suggests Powell’s opening remarks from the post-meeting press conference were much more dovish than the recent trend, though still slightly hawkish, according to Ira Jersey. This move was driven mostly by more dovish statements, but also less hawkish ones, he said.

      “The indicator is quite close to neutral, suggesting the possibility of a pause has increased meaningfully at the May meeting compared with the recent past.”

      Then Janet struck:

      *YELLEN: NOT CONSIDERING BROAD INCREASE IN DEPOSIT INSURANCE

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      And that took stocks to the lows of the day…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Small Caps (small financial-heavy) were the ugliest horse in the glue factory while big-techs (Nasdaq) was the least bad of all…

      The S&P reversed around the 50DMA then plunged back below its 100DMA…

      Yesterday’s short squeeze was completely erased…

      Regional banks took a hit…

      With First Republic Bank getting slammed…

      And PacWest plunged…

      So, the goal of today was to stabilize banks and instead, they blew them up… “Damn it, Janet!”

      Office REITS hammered again

      Source: Bloomberg

      Treasury yields jumped overnight and were drifting lower into The Fed statement. The dovish bias sparked a further plunge in rates with the short-end notably outperforming (2Y -20bps, 30Y -6bps). On the week, 2Y remains the laggard (+15bps) while 30Y is up just 4bps…

      Source: Bloomberg

      …and the yield curve steepened…

      Source: Bloomberg

      The 2Y yield dropped back below 4.00%…

      Source: Bloomberg

      Rate-hike expectations tumbled for the latter half of 2023…

      Source: Bloomberg

      The odds of a 25bps hike in May dropped from around 70% to below 50%…

      Source: Bloomberg

      The dollar puked to 6-week lows…

      Source: Bloomberg

      Bitcoin was clubbed like a baby seal, down from almost $29k to below $27,500…

      Source: Bloomberg

      Gold spiked on the dovish statement…

      Oil extended its gains from yesterday with WTI back above $70…

      Finally, it is worth noting that two stocks account for over 13% of the S&P 500 for the first time since the 1970s

      Source: Goldman

      As goes MSFT and AAPL, so goes America.

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 20:33

    • China Gives US Advice On Ukraine After Xi, Putin Pledge To Shape New World Order
      China Gives US Advice On Ukraine After Xi, Putin Pledge To Shape New World Order

      China’s President Xi Jinping has arrived back in Beijing after his two-day visit with President Vladimir Putin over the China-proposed Ukraine peace plan. On the Ukraine crisis, there was nothing that can be considered a breakthrough, but the talks did prompt swift reaction from Washington.

      More important are the broader implications of the two ‘dear friends’ pledging to shape a new world order and signing multiple pacts on economic, technological, and strategic cooperation. These were the words captured in a Reuters headline Wednesday… “China’s President Xi Jinping and Russia’s President Vladimir Putin set their sights on shaping a new world order as the Chinese leader left Moscow, having made no direct support for Putin’s war in Ukraine during his two-day visit.” Arguably the most important exchange came during the sendoff before Xi’s entourage headed to the airport, and was captured by (or rather intended for) the cameras…

      Xi Jinping: “Change is coming that hasn’t happened in 100 years and we are driving this change together.”

      Putin: “I agree.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Putin had told Xi that the peace plan “correlates to the point of view of the Russian Federation”; but the message out of Biden officials was “don’t be fooled” as it’s all about Moscow seeking to “freeze the war on its own terms,” in the words of Secretary of State Blinken. Also on Tuesday, NSC spokesman John Kirby said China is not an impartial mediator and that China “keeps parroting the Russian propaganda”.

      On Wednesday the Chinese foreign ministry hit back, charging that Washington is “adding fuel to the fire” of the conflict by its “continuous supply” of weapons to the battlefield. Spokesman Wang Wenbin was asked directly about Kirby and Blinken’s comments from the day prior.

      “The US side claims that China’s stance isn’t impartial. But is it impartial to continuously supply weapons to the battlefield? Is it impartial to constantly escalate the conflict? Is it impartial to allow the effects of the crisis to spill over globally?” Wang said.

      “We advise the American side to rethink its own stance on the Ukraine issue, turn away from the erroneous path of adding fuel to the fire, and stop shifting the blame to China,” he added. The spokesman further insisted Beijing has “no selfish motives on the Ukraine issue, has not stood idly by… or sought profit for itself,” but that “what China has done boils down to one thing, that is, to promote peace talks.”

      He went on to assert that contrary to popular assumptions in the West, the global community stands by China on the side of diplomatically pursuing peace. According to a transcript

      On the Ukraine issue, voices for peace and rationality are building. Most countries support easing tensions, stand for peace talks, and are against adding fuel to the fire. This is also China’s position. President Xi Jinping’s visit to Russia is a journey of friendship, cooperation and peace. It has been warmly received internationally. We call on the US to reflect on its own role in the Ukraine issue, stop fueling the flames, and stop deflecting the blame on China.

      AP image: a toast during this week’s summit in Moscow.

      Wang spelled out that “We will continue to stand firm on the side of peace and dialogue and on the right side of history and work together with the rest of the world to play a constructive part in facilitating a political settlement of the Ukraine issue.”

      To the surprise of many, Ukraine’s President Zelensky on Tuesday invited China to start talks on a path forward based on offering a “Ukraine formula” for peace negotiations. It’s unclear what Beijing’s response will be, but it was widely seen as an unexpected and positive overture. It has also become clear that whatever peace talks might come to fruition involving China mediation, the US is not going to lead, but will likely be sidelined – despite the closeness to Kiev.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Below, Rabobank gives hard-hitting commentary on the overall implications of the Xi-Putin meeting, and the rapidly bifurcating world driven by Russia and China increasingly uniting against their common enemy the United States.

      * * *

      For a strident view on the Putin-Xi meeting and its broader implications, @samagreene, professor at the Russia Institute at King’s College London, notes:

      “…China’s domination of Russia is complete. Xi praised Putin, touted strong relations with Russia, unity in the UNSC, and promised coordination on IT and natural resources trade. And that’s it. Putin, by contrast, was almost obscenely generous – and not just with his praise…. He pledged completion of the Strength of Siberia 2 pipeline… [which] replaces structural dependence on Europe with structural dependence on China, at a time when Russia is a price taker for hydrocarbons. That’s a strategic win for China.

      Further, Putin announced a reorientation of agricultural trade towards China and a strategic role for China in  developing Russia’s far east and high north – a move Putin’s own security apparatus has long resisted (for obvious reasons). Again, strategic wins for China… And Russia offered Chinese companies first dibs on the assets of departing Western companies – again strengthening China’s presence in Russia, with no reciprocal strengthening of Russia’s presence in China…

      While there were undoubtedly agreements we are not meant to know about, there is no indication here of a significant increase in military support for Russia – nor even of a willingness on Xi’s part to ramp up diplomatic support. A swing and a miss for Putin…

      Putin greeted Xi with a rhetorical bear hug. Xi gave Putin a pat on the head and told him to run along now and play… Putin tells his people he’s fighting for Russia’s sovereignty. In truth, he’s mortgaged the Kremlin to Beijing. The question now is one for Xi: What will he do with his newest acquisition?”

      That leaves the EU facing a two-for-one in Russia and China, and as Politico notes, ‘Europe’s China policy will shape transatlantic relations’. The implication is large German firms lean on the large German government, “putting Europe’s priorities on a likely collision course with US strategic goals, which will focus on confronting China in economic, military and, increasingly, ideological domains.”

      On which, US historian Kotkin says, “So I’m in love with the Cold War. I’m in favour of the Cold War. The Cold War is not only a good thing – it’s a necessary thing, because we have to uphold…the terms of the way we share the planet…. You know, I hear a lot of people saying, “Oh my God, no Cold War with China. God forbid we should have a Cold War with China.” And I think to myself, “What world do these people live in?” First, we’re already in a Cold War with China, because China started that long before we understood that that’s what they were doing. And secondly, would you prefer a hot war? The alternative to Cold War is capitulation– which you can imagine I’m not in favour of– or hot war.”

      Yet maybe the EU is feeling Cold too. As @Schuldensuehner points out, China is losing importance as a German export destination: February exports to it were -12.4% while those to the US were +19%, making it by far the most important market, as well as supplying key LNG imports (and Fed swaplines); France is number two, far ahead of China. Moreover, Germany is considering China export restrictions similar to those of the US, according to its economy minister, who adds, “We have to prevent losing our technology leadership because we don’t look closely.”  Notably, China just threated the Netherlands over its tech export controls (“This will not be without consequences. I’m not going to speculate on countermeasures, but China won’t just swallow this.“): how long until the same message is heard in Berlin?

      A bifurcating world like this only complicates real economy investment decisions, supply chain issues, and monetary policy decisions.

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 20:24

    • Julie Kelly: The Death Of Dissent
      Julie Kelly: The Death Of Dissent

      Authored by Julie Kelly via AmGreatness.com,

      The lead prosecutor in charge of the January 6 investigation, the largest probe in Justice Department history, just confirmed what American Greatness has reported for months: the number of criminal cases related to the Capitol protest is expected to at least double before it’s all over.

      U.S. Attorney for the District of Columbia Matthew Graves, an advisor to Joe Biden’s presidential campaign who took over the powerful office in late 2021, sent a letter to the chief judge of the D.C. District court warning up to 1,200 more individuals could face charges. 

      “We expect the pace of bringing new cases will increase, in an orderly fashion, over the course of the next few months,” Graves told Beryl Howell, who ended her term as chief judge last week.

      Graves’ office just surpassed 1,000 total defendants in what he renamed the “Capitol Siege” investigation—which means the final caseload might well exceed 2,000.

      Graves also indicated his team would ramp up the number of felony indictments; the overwhelming majority of charges so far are low-level offenses, including the laughable “parading in the Capitol” misdemeanor. The Biden regime clearly wants to juice the numbers before the 2024 election season.

      And Graves isn’t wasting any time. Eight people have been charged since March 1, including a married couple from Indiana arrested on a civil disorder felony and four misdemeanors. The D.C. federal courthouse is monopolized by January 6 hearings and trials on a daily basis; one judge announced he would retire rather than deal with January 6 cases for the next several years.

      In addition to ruining the lives of thousands of Americans for mostly nonviolent participation in the events of January 6, the Justice Department is accomplishing a more sinister goal: criminalizing and silencing political dissent in America.warned two years ago, as Attorney General Merrick Garland’s prosecutors bastardized a post-Enron law in an attempt to turn political protesters into lifelong felons, that January 6 would be used in this manner.

      News of the imminent arrest of Donald Trump demonstrated the degree of the regime’s success. After NBC News reported that law enforcement agencies were preparing for unrest following the announcement of state charges against Trump in the Stormy Daniels saga, Trump responded on Truth Social. “[THE] FAR & AWAY LEADING REPUBLICAN CANDIDATE & FORMER PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, WILL BE ARRESTED ON TUESDAY OF NEXT WEEK! PROTEST, TAKE OUR NATION BACK!” Trump wrote on March 18.

      Trump followed up with a second post: “WE MUST SAVE AMERICA! PROTEST, PROTEST, PROTEST!!!”

      Before January 6, 2021, an American political leader who called for mass protests would not be heard as calling for violence. Trump, in fact, did not encourage his followers to behave violently. He merely—and perhaps unwisely, given the current Gestapo-like conduct of the FBI and federal prosecutors—asked his supporters to protest the unprecedented act of arresting a former president and current candidate for president.

      But his social media posts were enough to cause traumatizing flashbacks among the ruling class. The easily traumatized Washington Post columnist Philip Bump weighed in immediately. “The things that made Jan. 6 dangerous were a call to action and a time and place for that action to take place [sic],” Bump tweeted on Saturday morning, conveniently omitting that Trump urged peace during his speech on January 6. “It’s not just that Trump is again demanding a response, it’s that he’s telling people when.”

      Iraq War booster David Frum, partially responsible for decades of deadly violence around the globe, insisted that Trump “and his supporters proved on January 6, 2021, their readiness to use violence to defy the law.” Vox claimed Trump’s posts were an “echo of the capitol riots of January 6, 2021.” Salon writer Areeba Shaw said Trump’s “extreme rhetoric” on Truth Social “echoed similar language he used at a Washington rally shortly before the insurrection at the U.S. Capitol on Jan. 6, 2021.”

      “It’s almost like he’s attempting to organize his domestic terrorists to show up and to resist him being arrested,” Representative Maxine Waters (D-Calif.) warned. Waters infamously encouraged Democrats in 2018 to “create a crowd” to publicly harass Trump Administration officials.

      By Monday afternoon, in order to advance optics to support the January 6 comparison, the New York Police Department began installing steel barricades around the Manhattan criminal courthouse, the site of the expected announcement. Politico reported that Capitol Police this week planned to erect “bike-rack type fencing” around the Capitol building—because that worked so well on January 6.

      Republicans, understandably, cautioned against plans to protest, not over manufactured fears that another “insurrection” would occur but legitimate fear of how any protest will be criminalized by the Biden regime. 

      “We don’t need to protest about the Communists Democrat’s [sic] planning to arrest Pres Trump and the political weaponization of our government and election interference,” Rep. Marjorie Taylor Greene (R-Ga.) tweeted over the weekend. She later warned of likely infiltration by undercover agents or informants. “How many Feds/Fed assets are in place to turn protest against the political arrest of Pres Trump into violence?”

      House Speaker Kevin McCarthy (R-Calif.) also downplayed Trump’s calls for protests and appeared to help Trump walk back his own statements. “I don’t think people should protest this, no. And I think President Trump, if you talk to him, he doesn’t believe that, either,” McCarthy said during a Sunday press briefing. As if referring to January 6 himself, McCarthy urged “calmness” in response to Trump’s arrest.

      Regardless of the disparate responses from both political sides, the clear winner here is the Biden regime, and the Justice Department in particular. The ongoing manhunt for Trump supporters is yielding victories of all sizes, not the least of which is the elimination of once-cherished rights to petition the government and redress grievances without being considered a domestic terrorist.

      And if anyone thinks conditions will improve soon, just wait until this same Justice Department indicts Trump for “inciting” the events of January 6. 

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 20:20

    • DOJ Asks SCOTUS To Quickly Restore Ban On Guns In Domestic Violence Cases
      DOJ Asks SCOTUS To Quickly Restore Ban On Guns In Domestic Violence Cases

      Authored by Matthew Vadum via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      U.S. Attorney General Merrick Garland speaks during a press conference at the U.S. Department of Justice in Washington on March 7, 2023. (Anna Moneymaker/Getty Images)

      The Biden administration formally asked the Supreme Court to review an appeals court ruling that invalidated a federal law that bars people under domestic violence-related restraining orders from possessing firearms.

      U.S. Solicitor General Elizabeth Prelogar filed the new petition (pdf) in United States v. Rahimi, court file 22-915, which was docketed by the Supreme Court on March 21.

      Because the appeals court ruling has “significant disruptive consequences,” Prelogar asked the Supreme Court to expedite consideration of the government’s petition in the hope the court would “consider the petition before it recesses for the summer.”

      The appeals court “overlooked the strong historical evidence supporting the general principle that the government may disarm dangerous individuals,” Prelogar wrote.

      The request came after the U.S. Court of Appeals for the 5th Circuit in February struck down Section 922(g)(8) of Title 18 of the U.S. Code, a 1994 law that prohibits a person who is subject to a domestic restraining order from having a gun.

      The 5th Circuit determined that the law had ceased to be constitutional in light of the Supreme Court’s landmark June 2022 ruling in New York State Rifle and Pistol Association v. Bruen. That decision held that restrictions on guns must be deeply rooted in American history if they are to survive constitutional scrutiny.

      The ban on the possession of firearms by someone under a domestic restraining order “is an outlier that our ancestors would never have accepted,” the circuit court stated in its ruling.

      The case involves Zackey Rahimi of Texas, who previously entered a guilty plea to violating the statute. Rahimi was involved in five shooting incidents after the restraining order was entered against him in February 2020. After the Bruen decision was handed down, Rahimi asked the courts to review his conviction given the change in Second Amendment jurisprudence.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 19:40

    • Science Journal Nature Admits Biden Endorsement Damaged Their Reputation
      Science Journal Nature Admits Biden Endorsement Damaged Their Reputation

      Leading science journal Nature admitted on Monday that their endorsement of Joe Biden in the 2020 US election harmed their credibility, trust in science, and made virtually no difference when it came to influencing voters one way or the other.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      According to a survey conducted in July and early August 2021, random Trump and Biden supporters were notified of Nature‘s endorsement, while a control group was given irrelevant information about the journal’s new website design.

      As James Billot writes in The Post;

      the strength of reaction to the endorsement was particularly acute among Trump supporters, with treated participants (i.e. those who viewed the endorsement) scaling much higher on negative attitudes towards Nature‘s impartiality and knowledge. For Biden supporters, there was a marginal uptick in positive attitudes.

      Besides reducing trust in Nature among Trump supporters, the endorsement also had a cascading effect on their attitudes towards science and scientists more generally. Trump supporters were less likely to report high levels of trust towards US scientists than Biden supporters after the endorsement, and the gap is larger for treated participants.

      In addition, the shifts in trust in Nature resulted in lower demand for Covid-related information from the journal among Trump supporters. Results found that, at the height of the Delta variant surge in the US, the endorsement led to a -14.2 percentage point reduction in the frequency at which Trump supporters requested Nature articles, whereas the upswing for Biden supporters was negligible.

      These results show that Nature’s endorsement had a hugely divisive effect on its readership. Treated Trump and Biden supporters became two to four times more polarised than the control participants on these stated measures of trust in Nature. Meanwhile, treated Trump supporters were 38% less likely than control Trump supporters to request stories from the publication’s website. What’s more, the endorsement had little effect on changing participants’ opinions about the two presidential candidates, rendering it ineffective.

      *  *  *

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

       

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 19:20

    • Welcome To The Era Of Warring Elites
      Welcome To The Era Of Warring Elites

      Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

      What the Warring Elites don’t want us to realize is that a system of transparent competition in which no fiefdom is allowed to become dominant best serves the interests of society at large.

      I’ve been writing about Warring Elites for a long time (since 2007). As I have often noted, historian Michael Grant identified profound political disunity in the ruling class as a key cause of the dissolution of the Roman Empire.

      More recently, I’ve observed that Our Fragmentation Accelerates (December 20, 2019).

      Eras of Warring Elites have two key dynamics. One is that the Elites’ interests diverge from those of the society as a whole. In expansive eras, the many competing interests within the Elite class find common ground in supporting the status quo, and relegate their turf squabbles to the private club rooms. On the whole, the shared interests of the Elite class align with society at large.

      Since I see the global status quo as fundamentally neofeudal, we can say the interests of the Nobility and Peasantry overlap: each class benefits from political and social stability, economic expansion and broad-based distribution of prosperity.

      In disintegrative eras, this integrative, shared dynamic breaks down and the interests of the Elite diverge from those of society at large. The competition between neofeudal camps in the Elite class breaks into open conflict, and the result is a profound political disunity of hardened camps fighting to protect their fiefdoms from any diminishment of wealth or power.

      This leads not just to political fragmentation but to social fragmentation as the Elite fiefdoms wage a propaganda battle for the hearts and minds of the Technocrat Class and the Peasantry. The propaganda war is not just to establish the traditional us and them divisions in which we are good and they are evil, it’s also about cultivating The Plantation of the Mind so that all the neat rows of thoughts and emotions serve the interests of the Plantation Owners. I’ve discussed this for many years: Colonizing the Plantation of the Mind (August 25, 2010) and Social Media’s Plantation of the Mind (May 28, 2020).

      Each neofeudal fiefdom hopes we’ve seen too many movies in which the line between Good and Evil is cartoonishly clear. Each Elite fiefdom seeks to mask its single-minded devotion to its own self-interest behind fine-sounding claims of noble ideals: a Multipolar World (in which we’re free to pillage the planet), Freedom of Speech (controlled by us, of course), Decentralized Finance (which just so happens to be owned and controlled by the few) and a vast spectrum of other cover stories for the enrichment of Elite fiefdoms at the expense of society at large.

      With the emergence of AI Chatbots, each Warring Fiefdom now has the means to overwhelm the media with billions of automated messages about the good and noble and idealistic goals of our Fiefdom and how the evil Central State is scheming to limit our powers of predation (Central State, Bad, our Fiefdom, Good!) or some rabble of Peasantry threatens our extraction of wealth and our death-grip on power (Nobility-owned Fiefdom, Good, Peasantry, Bad!).

      The core message is always the same: increasing our wealth, power, profits and control is good for you, too. You’ll all benefit if you help us secure our fiefdom from any threats.

      The propaganda is designed to not just colonize our minds but eliminate any urge to ask cui bono, to whose benefit? The single-minded self-interest of each Elite fiefdom must be hidden lest the powerless lower classes start asking if the expansion of one fiefdom’s power and control actually benefits society at large or not.

      In this no-holds-barred existential struggle for supremacy, Elite fiefdoms will tear down society to weaken any potential resistance. So national interest is cast as Evil, while Multipolar Wonderfulness is Good (now the whole world can finally sing happy songs around the campfire!), any regulatory restraints are Evil while the rigged “free market” is Good (let the “market” which we control choose winners and losers; hey, surprise, we won!). Every fiefdom should be free to pillage without restraint (“Ask your doctor about Euphorestra,” etc.).

      In the Era of Warring Elites, Everything is Staged (October 22, 2020). The Elite fiefdoms don’t care if society and the economy fragment and collapse; they welcome the dissolution of national purpose, civic virtue and shared sacrifice as obstructions to their own limitless greed for more power and control.

      In a weakened Nation-State, the fiefdoms will be free to pillage without restraint. If society is an obstruction, they will gladly tear it down with propaganda designed to fragment the Peasantry and undermine any entity which might have the power to restrain their limitless greed. (I discuss the essential roles of national purpose, civic virtue and shared sacrifice in my book Global Crisis, National Renewal.)

      Before you buy into a slickly scripted depiction of what needs to be undermined to hasten its collapse, ask to whose benefit? Exactly who benefits from promoting the collapse of this or that? We already know the answer: the Elite fiefdoms who will be free to pillage once any source of resistance has been broken into pieces.

      What the Warring Elites don’t want us to realize is that a system of transparent competition in which no fiefdom is allowed to become dominant best serves the interests of society at large. Before we tear everything down, ask who will rush to fill the power vacuum with their own self-serving agenda?

      In the meantime, “Ask your doctor about Euphorestra.”

      *  *  *

      My new book is now available at a 10% discount ($8.95 ebook, $18 print): Self-Reliance in the 21st CenturyRead the first chapter for free (PDF)

      Become a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 19:00

    • Starbucks Baristas Strike, "Demand End To Illegal Union-Busting Campaign"
      Starbucks Baristas Strike, “Demand End To Illegal Union-Busting Campaign”

      Starbucks Workers United, representing thousands of baristas, tweeted early Wednesday morning that more than 100 Starbucks stores “are striking to demand an end to Starbucks’ illegal union-busting campaign.” 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Bloomberg reported that the work stoppage involves stores in more than 40 US cities. The union has said Starbucks’ anti-union campaign against it violates the company’s own commitment to respect its employees’ rights. 

      The fight between the union and Starbucks has intensified, with both parties alleging that the other is not bargaining in good faith.

      The union represents about 3% of the coffee chain’s 9,300 US stores, though the unionization movement is expanding. 

      Bloomberg added:

      The work stoppage comes one day before Starbucks’s annual shareholder meeting, the first for new CEO Laxman Narasimhan, who officially took the reins from Howard Schultz this week. Investors including New York City pension funds have put forward a resolution this year urging the company to conduct a labor-rights audit, and Schultz is slated to be grilled by lawmakers at a US Senate committee hearing next week.

      The union posted images of unionized baristas striking on Wednesday morning:

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      It’s uncertain whether coffee lovers are closely following the battle between the union and Starbucks. Customers simply desire their daily dose of a vanilla latte, white chocolate mocha, or chai latte — and nothing more. 

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 18:40

    • Coinbase Tumbles After-Hours On Wells Notice Disclosure
      Coinbase Tumbles After-Hours On Wells Notice Disclosure

      Coinbase shares are tumbling after-hours, down almost 20% on the day, following its disclosure that it received a notice from the SEC formally declaring the securities regulator’s plans to bring an enforcement action against the largest US crypto exchange.

      SEC Chair Gary Gensler has repeatedly said many of the tokens and products offered by crypto companies are securities and that the trading platforms need to register with his agency, and in a filing this afternoon, Coinbase said the so-called Wells notice regards aspects of its exchange as well as the staking service Coinbase Earn and Coinbase Wallet.

      Bloomberg reports that representatives from Coinbase have met with the SEC more than 60 times over the last nine months to try to resolve the issues, but those talks haven’t been fruitful, according to a person familiar with the matter.

      “We are prepared for this disappointing outcome and confident in the legality of our assets and services,” Paul Grewal, chief legal officer of Coinbase, said in a statement.

      “If needed, we welcome a legal process to provide the clarity we have been advocating for and to demonstrate that the SEC simply has not been fair or reasonable when it comes to its engagement on digital assets.”

      This isn’t the first time Coinbase has received a Wells notice.

      The SEC warned the company in 2021 that it considered the company’s proposed “Lend” product, which would have allowed users to earn interest by lending out their crypto holdings, to be a security. The exchange later canceled the launch.

      Coinbase CEO Brian Armstrong took to Twitter to explain:

      Today Coinbase received a Wells notice from the SEC focused on staking and asset listings.

      A Wells notice typically precedes an enforcement action.

      Two years ago the SEC reviewed our business in detail and approved Coinbase to go public. Our S1 clearly explained our asset listing process and included 57 references to staking.

      Coinbase runs a rigorous asset review process and has rejected more than 90% of assets that have applied to be listed on the platform.

      While we understand that this is all part of the journey to reforming our financial system, we are right on the law, confident in the facts, and welcome the opportunity for Coinbase (and by extension the broader crypto community) to get before a court.

      We are proud to stand up for our customers and the industry in these moments.

      Going forward the legal process will provide an open and public forum before an unbiased body where we will be able to make clear for all to see that the SEC simply has not been fair, reasonable, or even demonstrated a seriousness of purpose when it comes to its engagement on digital assets.

      In the meantime, Coinbase will continue to do what we do best: build the most trusted products and services in order to advance our purpose of updating the financial system, and creating more economic freedom in the world.

      We’re excited to work with all governments and regulators around the world who are focused on putting in place clear rules to regulate the crypto industry.

      Additionally, Decrypt reports that earlier on Wednesday, Coinbase had notified users it will suspends Algorand staking rewards on March 29.

      Last August, after the U.S. sanctioned Ethereum mixing service Tornado Cash and wallets that had used it, Armstrong said that if threatened by regulators, he would rather shut down Coinbase staking than censor transactions.

      Armstrong concluded a subsequent blog post with a clear message to the regulators:

      Tell us the rules and we will follow them. Give us an actual path to register, and we will register the parts of our business that need registering.

      In the meantime, the U.S. cannot afford for regulators to continue to threaten the good actors in the crypto industry for doing the same legal and compliant things they’ve always done.

      This unfair approach will only drive innovation, jobs, and the entire industry overseas. At our core, we are the very same company that we were on April 14, 2021 when we became a public company at the end of the lengthy process with the SEC itself. We remain confident in the legality of our assets and services, and if needed, we welcome a legal process to provide the clarity we have been advocating for and to demonstrate that the SEC simply has not been fair or reasonable when it comes to its engagement on digital assets.

      In the meantime, Coinbase will continue to do what we do best: updating the financial system by building the most trusted products and services to advance our mission of creating more economic freedom and opportunity around the world.

      The Wells Notice follows the SEC’s suing Tron founder Justin Sun (and a number of celebrities) on allegations the TRX and BT tokens are unregistered securities (among other charges).

      Does anyone else see a very recent pattern, between Silvergate, Signature Bank, and now this – did Liz Warren lay down the law to bring a dragnet against crypto?

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Who knows, maybe this could go to SCOTUS? Now that crypto has clearly become the Democrats’ latest boogeyman.

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 18:20

    • China's Auto Industry Association Urges "Cooling" Of Price War, As Major Manufacturers Slash Prices
      China’s Auto Industry Association Urges “Cooling” Of Price War, As Major Manufacturers Slash Prices

      Just hours after we wrote about maniacal price cutting in the automotive industry in China, China’s auto industry association is urging automakers to “cool” the hype behind price cuts.

      The statement was made in order to “ensure the stable development of the industry”, Automotive News Europe reported on Tuesday. 

      The China Association of Automobile Manufacturers even went so far as to put out a message on its official WeChat account, stating that “A price war is not a long-term solution”. Instead “automakers should work harder on technology and branding,” it said. 

      The consumer disagrees…

      Recall we wrote earlier this week that most major automakers were slashing prices in China. The move is coming after lifting pandemic controls failed to spur significant demand in China, the Wall Street Journal reported this week. Ford and GM will be joined by BMW and Volkswagen in offering the discounts and promotions on EVs, the report says. 

      Retail auto sales plunged the first two months of the year and automakers are facing additional challenges in trying to transition their business models to prioritize EVs over conventional internal combustion engine vehicles. 

      Ford is offering $6,000 off its Mustang Mach-E, putting the standard version of its EV at just $31,000. Last month, only 84 of the vehicles were sold, compared to 1,500 sales in December. There was some pulling forward of demand due to the phasing out of subsidies heading into the new year, and Ford had also cut prices by about 9% in December. 

      A spokesperson for Ford called it a “stock clearance”. 

      Discounts at Volkswagen are ranging from around $2,200 to $7,300 a car. The cuts will affect 20 gas powered and electric models. Its electric ID series is seeing price cuts of almost $6,000. The company called the cuts “temporary promotions due to general reluctance among car buyers, the new emissions rule and discounts offered by competitors.”

      Even more shocking is Citroën-maker Dongfeng Motor Group, who is offering a 40% discount on its C6 gas-powered sedan, now priced at $18,000. 

      Kelvin Lau, an analyst at Daiwa Capital Markets, told the Journal that automakers are also trying to get rid of 500,000 vehicles collectively stored in their inventory, most of which are older vehicles that won’t meet new emissions standards.

      David Zhang, a Shanghai-based independent automobile analyst, added: “Some car makers have been seeing very few sales. At this rate, the manufacturers’ production and dealership networks will collapse.”

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 18:00

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 22nd March 2023

    • NATO Shouldn't Trust Hungary And Turkey, Claims German Newspaper Die Welt
      NATO Shouldn’t Trust Hungary And Turkey, Claims German Newspaper Die Welt

      Authored by Denes Albert and John Cody via Remix News,

      Hungary is “authoritarian” and NATO should consider withholding sensitive information from Turkey and Hungary, Die Welt foreign policy commentator Clemens Wergin writes

      German newspaper Die Welt claims in an opinion piece that Turkey and Hungary should not be trusted within the NATO alliance. The paper writes that Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan continues to block Sweden’s NATO accession, and Hungary wants EU money in exchange for approving the membership of both nations.

      The author of the piece, Clemens Wergin, also claims that both nations have developed “unseemly” ties to Russia and then asks whether NATO should even share sensitive data with both countries.

      “And in their turn toward authoritarianism, Ankara and Budapest have also distanced themselves significantly from the community of values ​​for which NATO stands. The alliance is therefore well advised to treat both as partners with reservation. This should include, for example, no longer necessarily sharing certain sensitive data with Turkey and Hungary within NATO,” Wergin writes.

      When Wergin, the chief foreign policy correspondent for Die Welt, refers to “authoritarianism,” he makes no mention of the fact that French President Emmanuel Macron is facing mass protests in his country after ramming through pension reform without even a vote in parliament, or that he then banned protests in certain areas of Paris following the decree. In Germany itself, the current government is looking to ban one of the country’s top opposition parties, Alternative for Germany (AfD), even as the party soars in popularity. Such an authoritarian move would be met with an outcry from Brussels and Berlin if Orbán were to even consider banning opposition parties in Hungary.

      Regarding the “blackmail” Wergin claims Hungary is subjecting NATO to, it should be noted that the EU first “blackmailed” Hungary, demanding the country make rule-of-law changes in order to unlock billions in EU funds. Arguably, the Hungarian government has more of a democratic mandate than the German government, with Orbán’s Fidesz party receiving such high levels of support that it resulted in yet another landslide victory last year and a two-thirds majority in parliament.

      Wergin argues that Finland is likely to join NATO soon, as Erdoğan has given up his opposition to that country’s NATO membership. That means Finland is likely to join NATO without Sweden. He posits that this is because the Turkish decision is putting considerable pressure on the Hungarian government, which is also blocking membership, to agree to at least Finnish membership as well.

      “As a result, it has now become more likely that at least Finland, which is particularly vulnerable due to its long land border with Russia, will be able to join NATO in the near future. Sweden, on the other hand, will probably have to wait at least until after the elections in Turkey. Northeastern Europe would thus become an area of divided security for the time being, with the Finns inside the NATO umbrella and the Swedes on the outside,” he argues.

      He continues by writing that both states had turned the Nordic countries’ urgent application for membership, triggered by the Russian war, into a “farce” and prevented admission for extraneous reasons. Erdoğan wanted Sweden to impose a tougher policy on Turkish opposition groups and had also been outraged by an anti-Islam action by right-wing provocateur Rasmus Paulson, who had burned a Quran in Stockholm. He claims Paulson was funded by Russia but offers no evidence in support of his claim.

      On his recent trip to Turkey, Hungarian Prime Minister Viktor Orbán repeated his country’s stance for immediate peace talks to end the war in Ukraine, saying that Europe was suffering from “war psychosis,” with the continent drifting further into war day by day.

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 02:00

    • The People Vs. The Fed: What Political Movement Will Silicon Valley Bank’s Failure Spark?
      The People Vs. The Fed: What Political Movement Will Silicon Valley Bank’s Failure Spark?

      Authored by  Athan Koutsiouroumbas via RealClear Wire,

      In bucolic Indiana, Pennsylvania, residents have started an “It’s a Wonderful Life Festival.”

      The town’s Christmas celebration commemorates both favorite son Jimmy Stewart, who starred in the iconic movie, and the story’s message of redemption and hope.

      In the film, a bank run threatens to devastate an affordable-housing business run by George Bailey, Stewart’s character. The Great Depression has come to Bedford Falls. With over 9,000 banks failing during that period, bank runs were common.

      For nearly 100 years since that fictional Beaver Falls bank run, the federal government has insured bank depositors for the purpose of stopping bank runs, which have historically triggered economic depressions. That decision was part of a sweeping political movement in response to the financial crisis of the 1930s: the New Deal.

      Could a political movement arise from the recent failure of Silicon Valley Bank, which collapsed in mere hours? That question may be best answered by looking to the distant past.

      In what came to be known as the “Bank War,” President Andrew Jackson made it his mission to dismantle the U.S. National Bank, which many blamed for triggering the Panic of 1819. Elected in 1828, just forty years after George Washington was inaugurated, the nation’s first populist president consolidated a political base against federal overreach. He succeeded by stopping the bank from being rechartered.

      Near the end of the nineteenth century, the Panic of 1893 catapulted an unknown congressman from Nebraska to the Democratic Party’s 1896 presidential nomination. Comparing the economic plight of common Americans to a crucifixion, William Jennings Bryan heralded the arrival of the Progressive Era, which would legislate against the excesses of the Gilded Age.

      A decade and a half later, the Panic of 1907 gave Democrats momentum to seize unified control of Congress and the White House. Signed into law in 1913 by President Woodrow Wilson, the Federal Reserve Bank created a nationalized system to regulate banking. Wilson’s presidency would be the pinnacle of the Progressive Era.

      In 1929, the stock market’s Black Tuesday triggered a series of bank runs that cratered the American economy. The ensuing destitution deeply scarred a generation of Americans and realigned the electorate, which chose Franklin D. Roosevelt to implement the New Deal – the largest expansion of the federal government in American history.  

      A half-century later, stagflation – inflation without economic growth – during the Carter administration culminated with a run on First Pennsylvania Bank in 1980, resulting in the third-largest bank bailout in American history. Voters’ response was to launch the Reagan Revolution, which would attempt to pare back some of the New Deal. A former New Dealer himself, Reagan advocated for the restoration of federalism as the key to economic stability and growth.

      The Great Recession of 2008 was triggered by a banking failure totaling trillions of dollars. The federal response, the Troubled Assets Relief Program, sought to backstop the failing financial system – but its massiveness also helped give rise to the Tea Party, which preached a small-government ethos. In 2016, that conservative political movement would help elect Donald Trump, who campaigned against the excesses of a federal government in which millions of Americans had lost faith.

      Each of these six major financial panics launched a political movement. Americans were evenly split on choosing conservative and liberal solutions to the financial challenges they faced. The response to the Panic of 2023 will be the tiebreaker.

      One thing is clear. At $319 billion and counting, the failures of Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank alone in the last two weeks are already on par with the entire 2008 financial crisis, which saw 25 banks failing, with $373 billion in combined assets. And with $620 billion of unrealized losses that triggered this crisis still pending, we may be just getting started.

      What path policymakers will choose this time around is unclear. The country has never been more evenly split politically. Meanwhile, the regulatory system has attempted to stem the tide without the involvement of Congress or the White House. A political reconciliation, in other words, has been deferred.

      Political issues come and go, but financial panics create political movements because they hit Americans directly, in their bank accounts. Voters pay attention.

      The movement that results from this panic will depend ultimately on whom voters blame for it. That scapegoat, whether real or imagined, will determine where on the political spectrum the movement leans.

      Many Americans continue to identify government itself as the top non-economic issue they face. Inflation, a problem created by government, is their top economic problem. Most Americans believe the federal government is too big and doing too much. In places like real-life Indiana, Pennsylvania or fictional Beaver Falls, it is abundantly clear that Americans have lost faith in their leading institutions.

      “You sit around here and you spin your little webs and you think the whole world revolves around you and your money,” George Bailey tells his antagonist in “It’s a Wonderful Life.”

      Bailey was referring to the machinations of a powerful banker, but his words are fitting in an unintended sense, too: in American politics, realignments begin because the world revolves around voters and their money.

      Tyler Durden
      Wed, 03/22/2023 – 00:05

    • Bill Gates Says "The Age Of AI Has Begun"
      Bill Gates Says “The Age Of AI Has Begun”

      In an op-ed titled “The Age of AI has begun” on “The Blog of Bill Gates,” Microsoft co-founder Bill Gates discussed the upcoming paradigm shift in technology. Having been instrumental in developing personal computers several decades ago, the billionaire seems to know a thing or two about technological innovation. He believes that OpenAI’s language generation artificial intelligence tools will be at the forefront of the next technological revolution. 

      Gates wrote, “I’ve seen two demonstrations of technology that struck me as revolutionary.” 

      “The first time was in 1980, when I was introduced to a graphical user interface—the forerunner of every modern operating system, including Windows,” he said. 

      Gates said the second big surprise came last year with the impressive advancement in OpenAI’s ChatGPT.

      “The development of AI is as fundamental as the creation of the microprocessor, the personal computer, the Internet, and the mobile phone,” he said. “It will change the way people work, learn, travel, get health care, and communicate with each other.”

      Gates said he’s been in contact with OpenAI since 2016 and last year challenged the team to train the chatbot to pass the Advanced Placement biology exam. A few months later, he said the bot could pass a college-level biology course. 

      After seeing the results, Gates began to contemplate the future and how AI will be intertwined with humans on a day-to-day basis, just like computers and smartphones.

      “This inspired me to think about all the things that AI can achieve in the next five to 10 years.”

      Gates has emerged as a significant player in the AI arms race, as Microsoft, the company he founded, has pledged over $10 billion in funding to OpenAI.

      However, like any new technology, there’s always a concern. Gates addressed some of those issues:

      “Any new technology that’s so disruptive is bound to make people uneasy, and that’s certainly true with artificial intelligence. I understand why—it raises hard questions about the workforce, the legal system, privacy, bias, and more.”

      On the bias issue, there have been numerous complaints about AI trainers skewing ChatGPT toward answering questions with a left-leaning spin. This has been such a significant problem that Elon Musk is allegedly taking on — in a new project to develop a ‘non-woke’ alternative chatbot. 

      Even the co-creator of ChatGPT warned that the world might not be “that far away from potentially scary” AI. 

      … and what’s disturbing — is if AI is programmed to enforce the truths determined by figures like Gates, Pfizer CEO Albert Bourla, and the federal government. 

      While Gates expresses enthusiasm about the potential of AI to be game-changing for humans, there is a flip side to it. The technology could become a tool for extreme censorship, which could make the Twitter censorship program seem trivial in comparison.

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 23:45

    • Deficit Hawk Hypocrites And Warmongers Unite, Apparently Hoping To Start WWIII
      Deficit Hawk Hypocrites And Warmongers Unite, Apparently Hoping To Start WWIII

      Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk.com,

      The WSJ wants to send long-range missiles to Ukraine, Lindsey Graham discusses WWIII, and Republicans want defense spending to rise 5 percent more than inflation

      Long-Range Missiles 

      The WSJ editorial board says the best response Russian drones is to Send Long-Range Missiles to Ukraine.

      The Pentagon on Thursday released footage of a Russian fighter jet that harassed, dumped fuel on and then collided this week with an American reconnaissance drone. The provocation warrants a U.S. response, and the right one is giving the Ukrainians the sophisticated and long-range weapons they need to defeat Vladimir Putin’s military.

      President Biden now has more reason to do what he could have done long ago: Give Ukraine the weapons needed to win. Priority No. 1 is the Army tactical missile system, which would allow strikes deeper into Russian positions in Ukraine to gain momentum on the ground.

      Question One: Oh, I suppose Russia will sit back and let that happen in its backyard just like the US allowed Russian missiles in Cuba. Right? 

      Lindsey Graham: The Only Way to Avoid World War III Is to Start It

      The American Conservative reports Lindsey Graham: The Only Way to Avoid World War III Is to Start It

      It’s not atypical for Russian jets to intercept U.S. aircraft flying so close to its airspace. Russian aircraft have intercepted U.S. and allied aircraft over the Black Sea and off the coast of Alaska in years past. These interceptions have become more common as the U.S. and its allies continue to provide Ukraine with military and security assistance in the war against Russia, according to National Security Council spokesman John Kirby. Kirby said that almost all of these common interceptions have occurred without incident. The Tuesday incident, however, is drawing the eyes of the Biden administration and others in Washington not only because it resulted in the downing of an unmanned drone but because of the bizarre tactics employed by the Russian pilots, which Kirby called “unsafe and unprofessional.”

      Russia’s Ministry of Defense has denied any wrongdoing on the part of its pilots. In a statement, the Ministry said the Russian Air Force scrambled fighter jets to identify the drone, which allegedly had its identifying transponder off. 

      South Carolina Sen. Lindsey Graham appeared on Sean Hannity’s Fox News show last night and said the U.S. should shoot down Russian jets that intercept U.S. aircraft, manned or not.

      “We should hold them accountable and say that, ‘If you ever get near another U.S. asset flying in international waters, your airplane will be shot down,’” Graham claimed. Graham went on to employ the tactic that every Republican uses when trying to make a bad idea sound like a good idea: invoking the name of Ronald Reagan. “What would Ronald Reagan do right now? He would start shooting Russian planes down if they were threatening our assets.” Later, addressing Biden, Graham said, “If you don’t change your game and up your game, we’re going to have World War III.”

      Graham’s big-brained idea is that the only way to avoid World War III is to start it? To state the obvious, killing Russian pilots would bring the U.S. into direct confrontation with Russia. The United States would effectively be at war with Russia, and when Russia responds, the U.S. will feign surprise and drag the rest of NATO into the conflict. Entangling alliances are back, and so would the great war that follows them.

      Graham, the neocons, and the liberal interventionists may claim the foreign policy mantle of Reagan, but their knowledge only goes so far as “peace through strength” and the USSR is an “evil empire.” In reality, Reagan responded to acts much more reckless and violent than the downing of an unmanned drone with restraint. When the Soviet Union shot down Korean Air Lines Flight 007 on September 1, 1983, killing all 269 people, including sixty-one Americans and one member of Congress, Reagan did not start striking Russian assets or shooting down Russian military planes. Rather, Reagan’s first instinct was, in his own words from a National Security Meeting, “to protect against overreaction. Vengeance isn’t the name of the game.”

       “If you don’t change your game and up your game, we’re going to have World War III,” graham said addressing Biden.

      Question Two: Would shooting down manned Russian aircraft near the Russian border stop WWIII or help start it?

      Deficit Hawk Hypocrites 

      If you think Republicans really want fiscal constraint, you aren’t thinking. 

      Biden proposes a defense department increase of 3.2 percent, but the Budget Draws GOP Criticism, Sets Up Spending Clash.

      “The president’s defense budget is woefully inadequate and disappointing,” said Sen. Roger Wicker (R., Miss.), the top Republican on the Senate Armed Services Committee. He and other Republican leaders are advocating for military spending to increase at a minimum rate of 5% above inflation.

      Fancy that. Republicans want spending 5% above inflation. 

      Of course, Democrats are ready, willing and able to go along.

      Democratic leaders welcomed Mr. Biden’s proposal Thursday as a good starting point, but they said they would insist that any military-budget boost require a corresponding bump in domestic spending.

      Question Three: Has everyone gone mad?

      *  *  *

      Please Subscribe to MishTalk Email Alerts.

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 23:25

    • Where Biden Stands Vs. Trump, Obama On 6 Major Issues: Gallup
      Where Biden Stands Vs. Trump, Obama On 6 Major Issues: Gallup

      The latest Gallup poll reveals that President Biden’s standing on six major issues vs. his two predecessors is not great. See below for his Biden scores when it comes to; the economy, immigration, foreign affairs in general, and relations with Russia and China. A sixth chart compares Biden and Trump on the pandemic response.

      Via Gallup:

      1. The Economy: Not Biden’s Strongest Suit

      Biden’s latest job approval rating on the economy is about halfway between the worst ratings Trump and Obama each received. Both of his predecessors’ low points on the economy came toward the beginning of their presidencies, after which they saw strong improvement. This holds out some hope for Biden that he could follow a similar trajectory. Indeed, his 34% rating in February is slightly improved from his own low point of 31% in August 2022.

      2. Foreign Affairs: A Quick Decline

      Like Obama, Biden began his term in office with a majority of Americans approving of the job he was doing on foreign affairs in general. Yet, Biden’s approval ratings for handling foreign affairs have been 43% or lower since late 2021, including 41% now. However, Biden remains above the lowest points for both of his predecessors on the issue — 31% for Obama and 33% for Trump.

      3. Immigration: Lower Than Trump

      As recently highlighted in our weekly newsletter, Biden has mostly fared worse than his recent predecessors on the issue of immigration. Fewer Americans approve of the job he is doing on immigration than ever did for Trump. Obama received low approval on immigration at points in his first and second terms but saw some improvement by the end of his presidency.

      4. Handling Russia: Similar to Obama and Trump

      With the Russia-Ukraine war, which started over a year ago, being a major foreign policy focus of his presidency, Biden has spent a lot of time communicating to the American public about Russia. Today, Biden stands virtually tied with Trump’s last reading on handling U.S.-Russia relations, and his 37% approval rating on Russia matches Gallup’s only rating of Obama on the matter, from 2014.

      5. Relations With China: Room for Improvement

      For the third year in a row, Americans see China, more than any other country, as the United States’ greatest enemy in the world. As relations with China have soured, Biden’s marks on how he is handling it have worsened. Rising tensions between the nations in the past two years may also be a factor in the decline of Biden’s marks.

      Gallup measured Obama’s approval on relations with China (39%) just once, in 2012, while it did so on three occasions for Trump, ranging from 40% to 47%.

      6. Response to COVID: A Strong Point

      COVID-19 emerged as a global pandemic in 2020 and thus has only been an issue of concern for Biden and Trump. This is one area Biden has generally outperformed his predecessor, with approval ratings ranging between 47% and 67%. After an initial high of 60% for Trump at the beginning of the pandemic, his ratings were between 36% and 44% in the summer and fall of 2020.

      To stay up to date with the latest Gallup News insights and updates, follow us on Twitter.

      Explore President Trump’s approval ratings and compare them with those of past presidents in the Gallup Presidential Job Approval Center.

      Learn more about how the Gallup Poll Social Series works.

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 23:05

    • Alan Dershowitz: Trump Can Serve As President "From Prison"
      Alan Dershowitz: Trump Can Serve As President “From Prison”

      Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      Retired Harvard Law professor Alan Dershowitz suggested that former President Donald Trump could run for office or even serve as president if he is convicted in connection to the Manhattan District Attorney’s office investigation.

      Alan Dershowitz, an attorney for President Donald Trump, answers a question during the impeachment trial against Trump in the Senate at the U.S. Capitol in Washington, Jan. 29, 2020. (Senate Television via AP)

      Trump announced on social media this past weekend saying he believes he’ll be arrested soon in connection to District Attorney Alvin Bragg’s probe into whether he was involved in allegedly making hush money payments to during the 2016 campaign. Unnamed sources have also told news outlets that the former president may be indicted, but Trump has denied any wrongdoing.

      Dershowitz, an attorney who has represented controversial clients including O.J. Simpson and Jim Bakker, told Newsmax that he believes Trump will be indicted in New York City because of what he described as an unfair legal system in the Democrat-dominated city. But if Trump is convicted and sentenced to a prison term, the U.S. Constitution will allow him to serve in that capacity.

      “He will be indicted,” Dershowitz, who also provided legal counsel to Trump during his first impeachment trial, told Newsmax. “In New York, you can indict a ham sandwich. In New York City, you can convict a ham sandwich because the jury pool is so unfair. Even if he’s convicted, he can run for president. He can run for president from prison; he can even serve as president from prison.”

      The U.S. Constitution doesn’t bar felons from holding elected office, including the presidency. The Constitution’s text only lists three criteria to run for president: a candidate has to be age 35 or older, be a natural born citizen, and they must have lived in the United States for at least 14 years.

      In a separate interview with Chris Cuomo, Dershowitz asserted that “Trump can run from prison, the way [Boston] Mayor [James] Curley did, and he could win, and he can govern from prison.” Curley, a Democrat who served as mayor of Boston four times in the early part of the 20th century, was convicted twice and notably served time in prison during his fourth term in office.

      Former President Donald Trump speaks to guests gathered for an event at the Adler Theatre in Davenport, Iowa, on March 13, 2023. (Scott Olson/Getty Images)

      Trump has previously stated that he will continue to run for president in 2024 even if he is charged. Later this month, Trump is slated to hold his first 2024 rally in Waco, Texas.

      There has been no public announcement of any time frame for the Manhattan grand jury’s secret work in the case. At least one additional witness is expected to testify, further indicating that no vote to indict has yet been taken, according to a person familiar with the investigation who was not authorized to publicly discuss the case and spoke on condition of anonymity.

      A Trump-affiliated lawyer, Robert Castello, told media outlets on Monday that he testified in front of a Manhattan grand jury and sought to denigrate testimony put forth by Michael Cohen, a former Trump attorney who has been described as a key witness in the case. Castello said that Cohen, who was sentenced to federal prison on a range of charges, is an unreliable witness.

      Meanwhile, Bragg’s office has issued few public statements in connection to the investigation. A spokesperson for the district attorney issued a response to the Washington Post regarding a House Republican demand for information and testimony in connection to the Trump probe, merely saying that claims that New York City is dealing with a surge in violent crime is not true.

      A Trump lawyer, Susan Necheles, told The Associated Press that Trump’s weekend Truth Social post was “based on the media reports,” and another Trump spokesperson said there had been “no notification” from Bragg’s office, though the origin of Trump’s Tuesday reference was unclear. The Epoch Times has contacted Bragg’s office for comment.

      Trump’s aides and legal team have been reportedly preparing for the possibility of an indictment. Should that happen, he would be arrested only if he refused to surrender. Trump’s lawyers have previously said he would follow normal procedure, meaning he would likely agree to surrender at a New York Police Department precinct or directly to Bragg’s office.

      The indictment of Trump, 76, would be an extraordinary development after years of investigations that yielded essentially nothing. It would also be the first time a current or former president was indicted.

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 22:45

    • SCOTUS Overturns Appeals Court Upholding Abortion Without Parental Consent
      SCOTUS Overturns Appeals Court Upholding Abortion Without Parental Consent

      Authored by Matthew Vadum via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      The Supreme Court threw out a federal appeals court decision on March 20 that upheld the right of a minor to go to court for permission to pursue an abortion without notifying her parents.

      Then-Judge Ketanji Brown Jackson watches the Senate vote on her nomination to be an associate justice on the Supreme Court, from the Roosevelt Room of the White House in Washington on April 7, 2022. (Mandel Ngan/AFP via Getty Images)

      Justice Ketanji Brown Jackson was the sole member of the Supreme Court to file a dissenting opinion in the case, Chapman v. Doe, court file 22-312.

      In the case, the court vacated the ruling of the U.S. Court of Appeals for the 8th Circuit and remanded the case to that court with instructions to dismiss the proceeding as moot. Jackson objected to the specific manner in which this was done because it erased any precedential value the circuit court ruling may have had.

      In the case, a pregnant minor, Jane Doe, visited her local courthouse to apply for a dispensation allowing her to bypass parental consent for the planned abortion. The office of the petitioner, Michelle Chapman, circuit clerk for Randolph County, Missouri, told her she couldn’t file a bypass petition without notifying a parent.

      Doe got an abortion in Illinois after a court there authorized it, absent parental notification.

      Doe filed a civil rights lawsuit in federal district court for damages, claiming that Chapman violated her 14th Amendment rights. Chapman took the position that she was immune to lawsuits because she followed a Missouri statute and a judge’s directions.

      Chapman also claimed that Doe’s right to a bypass hearing wasn’t clearly established and that she therefore couldn’t have violated Doe’s rights.

      In what was perceived as a victory for the pro-abortion movement, the district court ruled against Chapman, finding that the statute didn’t require prehearing notification of the minor’s parents to obtain judicial authorization for an abortion.

      The 8th Circuit later determined that Doe’s claim must be allowed to proceed, finding that the right to bypass the parents was clearly established under the 14th Amendment.

      But in September 2022, Chapman asked the Supreme Court to review the case after the Supreme Court overturned Roe v. Wade, finding there was no right to abortion in the U.S. Constitution and returning the regulation of abortion to the states.

      In its June 24, 2022, ruling in Dobbs v. Jackson Women’s Health Organization, the high court also reversed a related 1992 precedent, Planned Parenthood of Southeastern Pennsylvania v. Casey, which affirmed Roe and declared that a woman had a right to obtain an abortion before fetal viability without undue interference from the state.

      “Doe’s claims rely on the proposition” that requiring parental notification of a judicial bypass proceeding must satisfy the undue burden test announced in Casey, Chapman said.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 21:25

    • Rent Inflation Approaches Two-Year Low Amid Cooling Market
      Rent Inflation Approaches Two-Year Low Amid Cooling Market

      Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell and his entire team should be cognizant of the fact that rents have been declining for many months. Despite this, Powell has been examining laggard data that persistently appears inflated. 

      The latest CoreLogic report adds to the mounting evidence of leading rental market indicators showing rent inflation has been cooling for the ninth consecutive month in January, as the yearly growth rate slid to the lowest point since 2021. 

      Single-family homes across the US experienced a 5.7% increase in value compared to the previous year. Each of the 20 major metropolitan regions monitored by CoreLogic saw annual rent growth in the single-digit range for the first time since the end of 2020.

      Despite the high-frequency rent data from CoreLogic and other research firms indicating a clear deceleration, this slowdown has not yet been reflected in the Fed’s consumer-price data due to delays in the calculation process. 

      Back in September, when looking at various leading rental market indicators, we reported that “Manhattan Apartment Rents Finally “Plateau” After Red-Hot Summer” a trend reversal that was also observed at the national level as we observed in “Nationwide Rents Drop For First Time In Two Years.” With rents peaking in August, two months later, the rental drop accelerated, as we discussed in “Just Tumbled The Most On Record As Economy Craters.” 

      Last month we penned a note, “Apartment Rents Slide Across All US Cities Amid “Crush” Of New Supply,” but outlined the Fed’s shelter inflation data is well behind the curve (as usual). 

      The good news is that with a long delay, the coming supply of new apartments – especially in places where housing inventory remains unusually low to the benefit of home sellers – will give renters more choices, making it not only more difficult for landlords to hike rents at rates seen last year. 

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 21:05

    • Gasoline Prices Buck The Trend Ahead Of Driving Season
      Gasoline Prices Buck The Trend Ahead Of Driving Season

      By Charles Kennedy of OilPrice.com

      With U.S. gasoline prices trending about 3 cents lower than the same time last week, analysts are now speculating that the banking crisis and broader financial markets concerns may prevent prices at the pump from ticking upwards as they would normally do ahead of the summer driving season.

      “The broad concern over recent failures of the U.S. and global banking system has put enough downward pressure on oil prices that we saw a reprieve in rising gasoline prices in the national average last week,” said Patrick DeHaan, the senior petroleum analyst for Chicago-based GasBuddy.

      DeHaan said that while markets are volatile, and we will see some differentiation in prices as certain states switch to the more expensive summer blend of gasoline, much going forward in the immediate future depends on how the banking crisis plays out.

      “Should the outlook for the banking sector improve, we could again see gasoline prices race higher, while continued or additional distress could raise the possibility of a broader economic slowdown, keeping gasoline prices in check,” he said. “Overall, there are a lot of possibilities.”

      Shares of Credit Suisse plunged some 60% early on Monday after its rival, UBS, announced it would take over the bank for $3 billion to shore up global markets. The plunge in Credit Suisse shares last week followed the failures of U.S regional banks Silicon Valley Bank (SVB) and Signature Bank.

      According to AAA, Monday’s natural average per gallon of gasoline is $3.443, compared to $3.446 on Sunday, and $3.473 a week ago. Monday was the first time in two weeks that gasoline prices in the U.S. had declined.

      Last week, gasoline inventories fell 2.1 million barrels amid maintenance and the usual transition to summer gasoline began to replace less expensive winter fuel. Implied gasoline demand rose by 32,000 bpd. 

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 20:45

    • Zelensky Invites China To Discuss Peace After 'No Breakthrough' In Xi-Putin Meeting
      Zelensky Invites China To Discuss Peace After ‘No Breakthrough’ In Xi-Putin Meeting

      Ukraine appears willing to engage China in mediation efforts to end the war, at a moment China’s Xi Jinping is in Moscow discussing Beijing’s own 12-point peace plan. With the main part of talks with Putin having been concluded as of Tuesday night, there’s been no breakthrough among the “friends” to come of it thus far.

      “We believe that many of the provisions of the peace plan put forward by China are consonant with Russian approaches and can be taken as the basis for a peaceful settlement when they are ready for that in the West and in Kyiv. However, so far we see no such readiness from their side,” Putin said, laying blame on the Ukrainians.

      But Ukraine’s President Volodymyr Zelensky said Tuesday his government has reached out to Beijing. Zelensky said he has invited China to engage in talks on implementation of Kyiv’s own peace formula, and that he’s waiting for an answer.

      “We offered China to become a partner in the implementation of the peace formula. We passed over our formula across all channels. We invite you to dialogue. We are waiting for your answer,” Zelensky announced at a Tuesday a press conference. He added: “We are receiving some signals, but there are no specifics yet”.

      This comes after last month Zelensky issued an unexpectedly positive response to Xi’s offering China’s 12-point peace plan, in an effort to jumpstart negotiations. “I think the fact that China started talking about Ukraine is not bad. But the question is what follows the words,” Zelensky said at the time. “I think some of the Chinese proposals respect international law, and I think we can work on it with China. Why not? Our goal is to gather many around us to isolate one [Russia],” he had added.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The reality is that since China first unveiled the broad peace plan weeks ago, its role as a mediator does appear to be taking shape.

      But all the while this has resulted in cynicism and condemnation from Washington as the US watches helplessly while Beijing and Moscow embark on an unprecedented level of cooperation.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Likely pressure is also growing on Zelensky to reject any Chinese hand of friendship and mediation – seeing in it a ploy to keep Russia strong and on the offensive in Ukraine. If China-Ukraine talks do come together with an eye toward bringing in Moscow, the US certainly won’t be happy.

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 20:25

    • …And Just Like That, The 'Tight Money' Era Is Over
      …And Just Like That, The ‘Tight Money’ Era Is Over

      Authored by John Rubino via Substack,

      At the beginning of last week, everyone expected central banks to “tighten until something breaks”. By the end of the week it was clear that they’d already broken everything.

      Two middling US banks imploded, European mega-bank Credit Suisse finally died a well-justified death, and “who’s next?” speculation ran wild. And just like that, the era of tight money ended.

      Now the world’s monetary authorities have broadened the definition of “systemic risk” to cover pretty much anything. FDIC insurance has been extended to every bank account of any size. Credit Suisse is being bought for pennies on the dollar by rival Swiss giant UBS. And according to Bloomberg,

      The Federal Reserve and five other central banks announced coordinated action on Sunday to boost liquidity in U.S. dollar swap arrangements, the latest effort by policymakers to ease growing strains in the global financial system.

      Central banks involved in the dollar swaps will “increase the frequency of seven-day maturity operations from weekly to daily,” the Fed said in a statement coordinated with the Bank of Canada, the Bank of England, the Bank of Japan, the European Central Bank, and the Swiss National Bank. 

      The Fed’s balance sheet — a measure of how much currency it creates and dumps into the economy — had been shrinking, which is to say the US money supply had been contracting. Now it’s soaring, up $300 billion in a matter of days.

      The piecemeal, fingers-in-the-dike character of this response can be explained in one of two ways: Either the morons running the global financial system were completely blindsided because they actually thought rising interest rates and a falling money supply would slow inflation without unintended consequences, despite a century of contrary experience. Or the evil geniuses running the global financial system have engineered a multi-faceted crisis as an excuse to assume total control.

      I’m agnostic on the above, but in either case, it seems clear that the world’s governments won’t be able to stop conditions from deteriorating. Consider:

      Lenders were already scared. Now they’re terrified

      Banks were already tightening credit standards before last week’s flash crisis. Now virtually all of them will stop lending to any but their strongest clients. A year from now the updated version of this chart will show a spike to record high tightening levels.

      Autos are a bursting bubble

      The number of underwater car loans, where the loan balance exceeds the value of the car, has been rising for months. Interest rates on used car loans had jumped from an average of 8% to over 10% in the past year. And auto loan delinquency rates have climbed to their highest levels in over 15 years, with an especially big jump among subprime borrowers. Now panicked banks will make car loans even harder to get while a growing number of borrowers will default on their existing loans. Typical recession behavior, but this time against a crisis backdrop.

      Commercial real estate was toast in any event, but now it’s burnt toast

      Office buildings, warehouses and such never fully recovered from the pandemic lockdowns, and by the 4th quarter of 2022 delinquencies on commercial real estate loans were rising sharply. Building prices were beginning to fall, and the specter of a commercial real estate crash was looming. And that was before banks and regulators went into their current panic mode.

      Now just try refinancing an underperforming office complex and see how it goes.

      And there’s more…

      Stephanie Pomboy, an analyst whose work has been spot-on lately, tweeted this 12 hours ago:

      ya know what’s keeping me up at night? Thinking about the unseen exposure by NONbank finl institutions to things far riskier than the stuff bringing down the banks. Esp, the prospect that some insurer (&counterparty in the giant mkt of credit derivatives) is about to go toes up

      And don’t even get me started on pensions. I’ve ranted breathlessly on that. They will be the subject of a bailout the likes of which we have never before witnessed. If you think the bank bailout is gonna be massive…stay tuned. You ain’t seen nothing.

      In other words, a lot can still go wrong, because excessive leverage is hidden all over the place. A pension bust would mean a multi-trillion dollar bailout, for instance, and that was probably coming even in “normal” times. As for derivatives, well, they’ll destroy the world eventually, so why not now?

      The take-away? In the midst of all the various credit crises, controlling inflation will be moved to the back burner. And the world will realize that the central banks are out of ammo, with no choice but to let their currencies burn.

      *  *  *

      Subscribe to John Rubino

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 20:05

    • First Signs Of A Notable Low-Income Slowdown
      First Signs Of A Notable Low-Income Slowdown

      The bank crisis, Fed and macro continue to lead the market in a daily rollercoaster, and while that won’t change for at least a few days, Goldman’s consumer retail trader Scott Feiler notes in his trading note today, there are some notable things to highlight in consumer…

      1. First signs of a notable low-income slowdown?:

      Feiler notes that investors have been bearish consumers for much of the year, even before the issues with the banks: he writes that “we had heard COST and VISA talk to modest deceleration in February (100-200 bps), but nothing precipitous. The big question has been whether anyone has seen a more worrisome slowdown with tax refunds (down double-digits y/y) and SNAP reductions (end of February) more front and center.”

      Well, according to the Goldman trader, we got that answer this morning from CTRN (Citi trends): it is an apparel store that caters to the low-income consumer. They guided 1Q sales to be down low double-digits vs Consensus +2%. This does not seem like conservatism like some other below consensus 1Q guides, as they explicitly said 1Q is off to a slow start. They said that given the macro-economic environment, they expect low income families, the bulk of their customer base, to remain under pressure in 1H.

      2. Is this a read-across though or idiosyncratic?

      CTRN is not getting a pass on that guide/commentary, with the stock -14%. The Goldman trader notes that “some of the feedback this morning from investors was that many consumer companies were at competitor conferences last week and the majority of companies continued to sound “fine” still.” While some of the other low-income names are underperforming, including WMT/BIG/DG/DLTR/FIVE/MCD, it’s still not clear that is just due to their low-income exposure, but potentially also from the rotation into beta today (IWM > SPY by over 100 bps today).

      Bottom line: “investors are taking the comments from CTRN at least somewhat seriously, but are skeptical it’s a true read-across.”

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 19:45

    • Victor Davis Hanson: What Happened To Stanford?
      Victor Davis Hanson: What Happened To Stanford?

      Authored by Victor Davis Hanson via AmGreatness.com,

      The list of serial embarrassments at Stanford reads like the suicides of Greek tragedy, where divine nemesis follows hubris…

      Stanford was once one of the world’s great universities.

      It birthed Silicon Valley in its prime. And along with its nearby twin and rival, UC Berkeley, its brilliant researchers, and teachers helped fuel the mid-20th-century California miracle.

      That was then.

      But like the descent of California, now something has gone terribly wrong with the university.

      Students at Stanford Law School recently shouted down visiting Fifth Circuit Court of Appeals Judge Kyle Duncan. He had been invited to give a lecture by the school’s Federalist Society. 

      The judge never even got the chance. The law school students drowned him out. They flashed obscene placards. They screamed that he was “scum.” One yelled he hoped the judge’s own daughters would be raped.

      Others bellowed, “You’re not welcome here, we hate you!” “Leave and never come back!” “We hate FedSoc [Federal Society] students, f–k them, they don’t belong here either!” and “We do not respect you and you have no right to speak here! This is our jurisdiction!”

      When the judge tried to reply, they drowned him out with “liar” and “scumbag.” Then, mission accomplished, they smugly stomped out.

      Note these were ostensibly not teenaged undergraduates. Instead, they were wannabe adult professionals, in law school to learn jurisprudence and to enter the elite American legal system that is supposed to have protocols separating it from the mobocracies prevailing abroad.

      One of those foundational principles is to honor the Constitution’s protection of free speech and expression—not to mention the ancient idea of respecting an invited guest, or the custom to treat with deference a federal judge, to say nothing of the duty to honor the codes and laws of the institution that they have chosen to join which prohibit disruption of lectures and any effort to drive out public speakers.

      When an exasperated Justice Duncan called out for a university administrator to restore calm, his podium was instead hijacked by Associate Dean for Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion Tirien Steinbach. She then gave her own preplanned, scripted lecture that sided with the disruptive protesters! Quis custodiet ipsos custodes?

      The diversity dean then turned on the speaker. She asked the startled judge whether it was even worth supporting his free speech rights, given he and his views were deemed abhorrent to the new absolutist Stanford.

      Note well: DEI Deans normally do not attend law school lectures. She showed up because she apparently knew in advance that the law students would violate their own university’s codes of conduct and disrupt a speaker.

      So she had planned, again in advance, to do nothing to stop them. Instead, she would prepare a performance-art speech for such a certainty, to chastise the speaker and defend the disrupters. She assumed correctly that none of the other administrators, who also strangely attended, would admonish her or the students for violating the laws of their own university. She apparently assumed, once more rightly, that her own leftist fides on campus would be enhanced.

      So far neither the diversity dean nor the students have been disciplined by the university. When the dean of the law school, Jenny Martinez, offered an apology (but did not punish the students), most of her own class walked out on her. And dozens of Stanford’s law school students lined the corridor in attempts to intimidate her as if she was some sort of toxic pariah.

      In a Soviet-style finale, the Acting Associate Dean of Students Jeanne Merino advised the Federalist Society students who were targeted by fellow law students that there were “resources that you can use right now to support your safety and mental health.” Then Merino directed them, inter alia, to none other than Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion Dean Tirien Steinbach herself, the very dean who had taken over the podium to lecture Judge Duncan!

      The debacle revealed three disturbing characteristics about the Stanford law students:

      One, they acted as if they were bullies and cowards. Videos of the mess showed how they turned mob-like in their chanting, flashing creepy placards, and, like Maoists, walking out on cue. Yet, when the judge fired back at their rudeness, like wounded fawns they took offense and pouted. And later, when there was mention that the names or photos of the protestors might be published, tit-for-tat, in the manner they themselves had put up posters of the Federalist Society members, they screamed that such exposure was unfair.

      Two, they seem incompetent. To the degree there were any questions and answers, few knew how or even attempted to engage the judge on matters of the law and judicial theory. In other words, any grammar-school students could have matched their performance since it required no knowledge of the law, just an ability to chant and—in groupthink style—cry, scream, and mimic the majority.

      Three, they were arrogant. One protestor blurted out that Justice Duncan probably could not have gotten into Stanford, as if their own puerile performance was proof of the school’s high standards of admission. That was obnoxious in addition to the fact that, as of recently, it may have become not so true. In July 2022, Stanford Law School announced that an uncharacteristic 14 percent of its graduates had flunked the California bar exam on their first attempt, a radical increase from past years. Four other California law schools—UC Berkeley, UCLA, UC Irvine, and USC—had a higher bar pass rate.

      After watching the sad performance, one wonders who taught such rude and unimpressive people.

      Ethics complaints were lodged last year against Stanford Law Professor Michele Dauber for tweeting a series of gross attacks on Camille Vasquez (“some Pick Me Girl lawyer”), the widely regarded attorney of Johnny Depp. Law professor Dauber also tweeted sick fantasies about Depp’s death—and imagined the actor’s corpse would “end up in a trash can eaten by rats.” Was she the sort of model that the law students had emulated?

      Then there was Professor Pamela Karlan’s 2019 testimony before the House Judiciary Committee’s hearing on the impeachment of President Trump. Off-topic and gratuitously, Karlan weirdly attacked the name of the president’s youngest son, Barron Trump: “While the president can name his son Barron, he can’t make him a baron.” Was that the sort of puerility that the law students sought to embrace?

      In 2021, a graduating Stanford law student sent the law school student body a bogus call to violence as if it was authored by the school’s small conservative Federalist Society. The fake call to arms read in part: “The Stanford Federalist Society presents: The Originalist Case for Inciting Insurrection . . . Riot information will be emailed the morning of the event . . . ” Was that the sort of smear that the law students learned?

      TIMOTHY A. CLARY/AFP via Getty Images

      Sam Bankman-Fried, the architect of the $26 billion FTX cryptocurrency meltdown that destroyed the livelihoods of thousands, is the son of two other Stanford Law School professors. Somehow they were involved in the Bankman-Fried family’s acquisition of a $16.4 million vacation home gifted to them from FTX shortly before it imploded.

      According to the New York Times, both parent professors were intimately involved in their son’s multibillion-dollar business, either directly or through gifts to one parent’s political donor network:

      He [Professor Bankman] and his wife, the Stanford Law professor Barbara Fried, were more than just supportive parents backing their child’s business. Mr. Bankman was a paid FTX employee who traveled frequently to the Bahamas, where the exchange was based. Ms. Fried did not work for the company, but her son was among the donors in a political advocacy network that she orchestrated.

      Were these the ethical models that had influenced the law students?

      Bankman-Fried is currently out on a $250 million bond and living under bond on the Stanford campus. He is out, in part, because two Stanfordites, former law school dean Larry Kramer and Andreas Paepcke, a Stanford senior research scientist, put up a $500,000 guarantee. Former Stanford student Caroline Ellison, a partner with Sam Bankman-Fried in his various financial collapses, has pled guilty to conspiracy to commit wire fraud, conspiracy to commit commodities fraud, conspiracy to commit securities fraud, and conspiracy to commit money laundering, and is now working with prosecutors. 

      Perhaps the law school should not be singled out since it simply reflects what appears to be symptomatic of a once-great university’s freefall.

      Philip Pacheco/Getty Images

      A former Stanford student Elizabeth Holmes was recently sentenced to a long prison term for defrauding investors in connection with her company Theranos. She had fraudulently claimed to have invented a “revolutionary” miniaturized blood testing device. Many of her corporation’s oversight board members were drawn from the Stanford community.

      The Wall Street Journal recently ridiculed a Stanford university group’s publication of a taboo vocabulary list (“Elimination of Harmful Language Initiative”). “Harmful” words supposedly unwelcome at Stanford included inflammatory expressions such as “American” and “immigrant.”

      The Journal also noted that perhaps the cause of such Orwellianism was too many idle administrators chasing too few students: “For 16,937 students, Stanford lists 2,288 faculty and 15,750 administrative staff.”

      More disturbing was the revelation of a “snitch list.” The harmful language initiative apparently is tangential to another new idea of rewarding Stanford snitches who feel offended by hurtful expression. Or, as the so-called “The Protected Identity Harm (PIH) Reporting” system put it, software will monitor campus speech and even offer “financial rewards for finding/reporting” any who supposedly violate approved language usage.

      Was this the sort of campus experience that the parents of Stanford students pay for at about $90,000 per year?

      Stanford was also plagued by a recent admissions scandal when a former head sailing coach accepted donations to his Stanford sailing program in exchange for trying to help two students’ admission applications. 

      Tom Williams/CQ Roll Call

      Then there were campus attacks on a pair of eminent Stanford public health experts, Drs. Scott Atlas and Jay Bhattacharya. Both were pilloried mercilessly by some of the Stanford faculty and administration for daring to doubt the efficacy of what has proved to be disastrous government-enforced COVID quarantines and school shutdowns.

      Yet the arguments of Atlas and Bhattacharya—the science does not support the mandatory use of masks to halt the pandemic, natural immunity was as efficacious as or superior to vaccine-induced immunity, the vaccinations would not offer lasting protection against either being infected or infecting someone else, and the quarantine lockdowns would cause more damage and death (familial abuse, suicides, substance abuse, mental depression, uneducated children, economic catastrophe, millions of missed surgeries, screenings, tests, and doctor’s appointments) than the virus itself—were all eventually substantiated.

      Neither doctor received apologies from the administrators, faculty, or students who attacked them.

      Currently Stanford’s long-serving president Marc Tessier-Lavigne—an accomplished neuroscientist—has been attacked serially by the Stanford Daily campus newspaper, which has called for his resignation. It alleges the president was culpable of scholarly misconduct concerning the publication of a joint research paper decades ago. The charges are not proven and remain under investigation. But they make it difficult for a president to weigh in on the above controversies when some faculty and the student newspaper are serially calling for him to step down for ethics violations. 

      In July 2020, a Stanford visiting neurology researcher, Chen Song, was arrested for not disclosing that she had apparently been an agent of China’s People’s Liberation Army. Stanford had also been investigated by the Department of Education for some $64 million in alleged Chinese-affiliated donations over a decade, all from previously unnamed, unidentified, and anonymous Chinese donors, most of them believed to be government associated.

      The list of serial embarrassments reads like the suicides of Greek tragedy, where divine nemesis follows hubris. In this case, overweening intolerant ideology has sabotaged disinterested inquiry and meritocracy. Arrogance and sanctimoniousness lead Stanford to continue down this spiral—rather than pause, reflect, and redirect—and thereby only compound the public ridicule.

      Stanford’s once-justified reputation for civility, transparency, tolerance, and professional ethics has been shredded before a global audience.

      Given its hallowed history, and the university’s vital global role in cutting-edge research, medicine, and professional training, something has to change—before it is too late.

      The university requires an array of compulsory workshops that faculty and many students must undergo. But given these recent debacles, perhaps two additional new training sessions are needed: required ethics instruction and a mandatory anger-management seminar.

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 19:25

    • US Secretary Of State Rebuffs China – No Diplomatic Solution Without Total Russian Pullback
      US Secretary Of State Rebuffs China – No Diplomatic Solution Without Total Russian Pullback

      Is the Ukraine war meant to go on forever?  For NATO officials and the Biden Administration, it seems as if this is the intention.  Secretary of State Antony Blinken made statements directed specifically to China during a press conference on the 2022 Human Rights Report, citing President Xi’s recent four hour meeting with Vladimir Putin in Moscow and China’s calls for diplomacy.  Blinken, not surprisingly, rebuffed China’s proposal because it does not include a total retreat of Russian forces from the Donbas regions of Ukraine.  He went on to accuse China of giving “diplomatic cover” to Putin. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Four areas making up Eastern Ukraine passed referendums to join Russia in September of last year, though NATO claims the votes were “rigged” in favor of the Kremlin.  Donbas citizens have been engaged in a rebellion against the Ukrainian government ever since the 2014 Maidan Revolution. 

      NATO leadership continues to argue that peace talks with Russia would only be a stalling tactic and that Russia cannot be allowed to keep hold of Eastern Ukraine because of the “domino effect” – The belief that Russia intends to invade other nations if it succeeds in Ukraine.  There is no evidence so far to support this theory.     

      With a Russian pullback highly unlikely and Ukraine with limited means to take back the Donbas, Blinken’s comments merely reaffirm what everyone already knew: NATO intends for the war to continue perpetually.  Take note that Blinken, like other Biden Administration officials, acts as if NATO is the arbiter of when and how diplomatic solutions might be pursued.  He does not suggest asking the Ukrainian people if they are open to China’s proposal.  This is because NATO, according to the evidence available, is in fact running the war.  Ukraine might be the ground on which the battles are fought, but the conflict is actually between the US, Europe and Russia.  

      Given this reality, one has to wonder what will happen if Ukraine fails to generate any forward momentum, or if Russia engages in another offensive?  How long before the situation escalates?  

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 19:05

    • First Republic Shares Plunge After-Hours As Restructuring Plans Fizzle
      First Republic Shares Plunge After-Hours As Restructuring Plans Fizzle

      At one point today, First Republic Bank (FRC) shares were up over 50% (based on the narrative that Yellen said the Biden admin was prepared to offer more support to banks).

      That is no longer the case as most of those gains have been erased following a number of reports late in the day on the state of the bank’s restructuring efforts, as no buyer has emerged.

      While investors have reportedly expressed interest in helping, the firm’s unrealized losses have been a sticking point, and The Wall Street Journal reports that FRC is adding Lazard and McKinsey to help review strategic options alongside JPMorgan, which had already been hired to advise on moves the bank could make to regain its footing.

      The addition of Lazard and McKinsey underscores what a complicated situation First Republic is in – one that defies an easy fix.

      Finding a willing buyer for the bank, whose customers had withdrawn some $70 billion since Silicon Valley Bank’s collapse (and has been downgraded deeper into junk), selling stock at these depressed levels and other alternatives all face their own substantial hurdles.

      Additionally, Bloomberg reports that US officials are exploring the possibility of government backing to encourage a deal that would shore up the lender, people with knowledge of the situation said.

      Among options being discussed, the government could play a role in lifting assets out of First Republic that have eroded its balance sheet.

      Additional ideas have included offering liability protection, applying capital rules more flexibly or easing limits on ownership stakes, the people said.

      Finally, we note that the bank itself issued a statement to its clients late in the day:

      To Our Valued Clients,

      The events of the past two weeks have been unprecedented, and we want to take a moment to provide an update.

      Our commitment to client service is unchanged, and we remain well-positioned to continue to manage deposit activity. Today, as every day, we are processing transactions, opening accounts, funding loans, answering questions, and serving clients’ overall banking and wealth management needs.

      We are grateful for your ongoing advocacy for the value of our relationship-based, exceptional service. We keep hearing from you, and the overwhelming theme is this: “We love our bank.” We want to extend our sincerest thanks for your continued and unwavering support.

      If you have any questions, please don’t hesitate to reach out to your banker or wealth manager.

      “processing transactions” and “opening accounts”?

      As S&P Global warned on Sunday, last week’s deposit infusion may not be enough to overcome the bank’s “substantial business, liquidity, funding, and profitability challenges.”

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 19:02

    • Judge OKs Lawsuits Against JPMorgan, Deutsche Bank For Epstein Connections
      Judge OKs Lawsuits Against JPMorgan, Deutsche Bank For Epstein Connections

      Authored by Katabella Roberts via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      JPMorgan Chase & Co. and Deutsche Bank will face lawsuits over claims they enabled disgraced financier and convicted sex offender Jeffrey Epstein to traffic his victims, a New York federal judge ruled on March 20.

      Jeffrey Epstein (C) appears in court in West Palm Beach, Fla., on July 30, 2008. (Uma Sanghvi/Palm Beach Post via AP)

      Two women referred to as “Jane Doe” filed federal class-action lawsuits against the banks in November last year, and the U.S. Virgin Islands filed its lawsuit against JPMorgan Chase & Co. in December.

      In his four-page order (pdf), U.S. District Judge Jed Rakoff said the women can try to make a case on claims that the defendants “knowingly benefited from participating in a sex-trafficking venture,” “obstructed enforcement of the Trafficking Victims Protection Act,” and “negligently failed to exercise reasonable care to prevent physical harm.”

      They can also pursue a claim that the banks “negligently failed to exercise reasonable care as a banking institution providing non-routine banking,” the judge said. However, all other claims are dismissed from the lawsuits.

      With regard to the lawsuit against JPMorgan Chase & Co. by the U.S. Virgin Islands, the judge ruled that the defendants can pursue the claim that the bank “knowingly benefited from participating in a sex-trafficking venture.”

      Some of the other claims were dismissed.

      Little St. James Island, one of the properties of financier Jeffrey Epstein, near Charlotte Amalie, U.S. Virgin Islands, on Aug. 17, 2019. (Marco Bello/Reuters)

      The judge’s opinion explaining the reasons for his rulings is set to be published soon.

      In their lawsuits, the two women had claimed that Epstein sexually abused them, and also accused the banks of aiding his sex trafficking operation by maintaining a financial relationship with him because he was a high-profile client.

      They also claim that multiple cash payments came from the banks to pay Epstein’s victims.

      Virgin Islands Accuses Bank of Enabling

      The lawsuit brought by the U.S. Virgin Islands accused JPMorgan of enabling Epstein’s sex trafficking by providing banking services to the financier after he had been convicted of sex charges and concealing suspicious wire and cash transactions, despite the fact that employees at the bank had raised concerns over the institution’s relationship with Epstein.

      It also suggests that JPMorgan senior officials at the bank were aware of Epstein’s crimes on the private and secluded island of Little St. James in the territory, and of the bank’s role in advancing them.

      The banks denied being aware of Epstein’s abuses and sought to have the lawsuits dismissed.

      Rakoff’s decision means the banks may be held financially liable for their relationships with Epstein if the plaintiffs succeed with their lawsuits in court.

      Epstein, 66, died in a New York City jail in August 2019 while awaiting trial on sex trafficking charges. He had been a client of JPMorgan from 2000 to 2013 and Deutsche Bank from 2013 to 2018.

      Following Rakoff’s ruling, Carol Thomas-Jacobs, the acting attorney general for the U.S. Virgin Islands, said the government looked forward to “ultimately proving our case in court.”

      ‘This Case Is Critically Important’

      “We are pleased that the U.S. Virgin Islands will continue to work alongside survivors to hold JPMorgan Chase accountable for enabling Jeffrey Epstein’s heinous sex-trafficking venture,” Thomas-Jacobs said in a statement.

      “This case is critically important to ensuring that financial institutions do their jobs, with the detailed, real-time information available to them, as a first line of defense in identifying and reporting potential human trafficking, as the law expects.”

      Jes Staley, then CEO of Barclays, arrives at Downing Street for a meeting in London, UK, on Jan. 11, 2018. (Tolga Akmen/AFP via Getty Images)

      Elsewhere, Brad Edwards, the attorney representing Epstein’s accusers, called the rulings Monday “a monumental victory for the hundreds of survivors of Jeffrey Epstein’s sex-trafficking scheme and survivors of sexual abuse in general, all of whom can rest easier knowing no individual or institution is above accountability.”

      “Epstein’s sex-trafficking operation was impossible without the assistance of JPMorgan Chase, and later Deutsche Bank,” Edwards said, according to CNBC. “And we assure the public that we will leave no stone unturned in our quest for justice for the many victims who deserved better from one of America’s largest financial institutions.”

      The Epoch Times has contacted JPMorgan and Deutsche Bank for comment.

      Monday’s ruling comes after JPMorgan filed a lawsuit against its former investment banking chief Jes Staley earlier this month, alleging that Staley protected Epstein and demanding that he return all of his compensation from 2006 through 2013 while employed at the bank, totaling more than $80 million.

      Staley has claimed that he was unaware of Epstein’s sex crimes despite maintaining a friendly relationship with him while he worked as a top executive for the bank.

      “I thought I knew him well, and I didn’t,” he told The Wall Street Journal in early 2020. “For sure, with hindsight, with what we all know now, I deeply regret having had any relationship with Jeffrey Epstein.”

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 18:45

    • Auto-Loan Denials Hit Six-Year High As Distress Cycle Shifts Into Gear
      Auto-Loan Denials Hit Six-Year High As Distress Cycle Shifts Into Gear

      The Federal Reserve has managed to aggressively raise interest rates and tighten financial conditions so much that it sparked a regional banking crisis and unleashed contagion in European banks. Even before the banking meltdown, financial conditions were tight, pressuring subprime consumers the most. 

      A new Federal Reserve Bank of New York survey shows the auto loan denial rate rose to 9.1%, a six-year high in February — and up from 5.8% in October. 

      “The findings show how higher interest rates are squeezing consumer credit in some key areas, in line with the Fed’s goal of cooling inflation. But in recent days, the collapse of three US banks has spurred fears of a sharper credit crunch that risks tipping the economy into a recession,” Bloomberg said. 

      We suspect denial rates will continue increasing as banks lose faith in subprime consumers. Earlier this year, when discussing the “perfect storm” hitting the US auto market, we showed that according to Fitch, “More Americans Can’t Afford Their Car Payments Than During The Peak Of Financial Crisis“…

      Since 1H21, the average rate on a new-car loan has nearly doubled, making vehicles much less affordable. 

      And the number of folks with $1,000 monthly car payments has soared in recent years, with the average loan amount financed hitting a record high of $40,000 — a disaster in the making… 

      The good news for the auto market is that tighter financial conditions have reduced the number of people buying new cars. However, that could only shift more consumers to the used car market in search of deals. As we noted in recent weeks, used car prices are reaccelerating

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 18:35

    • SVB's Loans To 'Insiders' Exploded Ahead Of Its Collapse
      SVB’s Loans To ‘Insiders’ Exploded Ahead Of Its Collapse

      By now, we’ve all seen the losses that SVB faced on its unhedged book of Treasuries and MBS. We’ve all read about the gargantuan deposit run that occurred on the eve of its demise. We’ve all scratched the back of our heads at the percentage (and size) of uninsured depositors that were bailed out by the Biden administration.

      We have also all seen the relatively huge amount of share-selling by insiders in the month leading up to the bank’s inevitable collapse.

      But, this next chart is a doozy…

      Courtesy of Bloomberg’s reporting, it appears that not only were insiders dumping their shares faster than syphilitic hooker, there were loading up on loans from the bank at a scale that makes a mockery of any regulatory oversight…

      Yes, that’s real.

      Loans to officers, directors and principal shareholders, and their related interests, more than tripled from the third quarter last year to $219 million in the final three months of 2022 – a record dollar amount of loans going back over 20 years.

      Many questions come to mind – what were the terms, who were the recipients, what was the collateral?

      But, sadly, we will likely never know.

      However, we do note that the banking execs may be facing a serious shortfall (like their bank): if the loans were collateralized by SVB shares for example, those shares are now worthless, leaving the loan-heavy C-suite left to come up with the cash to repay the loans (and no, these loans don’t disappear with the bank’s liquidation).

      While there is no evidence of wrongdoing, and no personal details of the loans (names, purposes, collateral) are disclosed in the government filings, this headline dollar data is part of the regulatory oversight panel demanded to guard against banking executives getting preferential treatment.

      “Our loan portfolio has a credit profile different from that of most other banking companies,” the banks aid in its 2022 annual report.

      The firm added that “a significant portion of our loan portfolio is comprised of larger loans, which could increase the impact on us of any single borrower default.”

      With DOJ and SEC eyes already probing the stock-sales ahead of the collapse, we can only imagine what this chart will do to stoke some more WTF-isms from Washington’s elites.

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 18:25

    • Three Years To Slow The Spread: COVID Hysteria & The Creation Of A Never-Ending Crisis
      Three Years To Slow The Spread: COVID Hysteria & The Creation Of A Never-Ending Crisis

      Authored by Jordan Schachtel via ‘The Dossier’ Substack,

      Last Thursday marked the three year anniversary of the infamous “15 Days To Slow The Spread” campaign.

      By March 16, yours truly was already pretty fed up with both the governmental and societal “response” to what was being baselessly categorized as the worst pandemic in 100 years, despite zero statistical data supporting such a serious claim.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      I was living in the Washington, D.C. Beltway at the time, and it was pretty much impossible to find a like-minded person within 50 miles who also wasn’t taking the bait. After I read about the news coming out of Wuhan in January, I spent much of the next couple weeks catching up to speed and reading about what a modern pandemic response was supposed to look like.

      What surprised me most was that none of “the measures” were mentioned, and that these designated “experts” were nothing more than failed mathematicians, government doctors, and college professors who were more interested in policy via shoddy academic forecasting than observing reality.

      Within days of continually hearing their yapping at White House pressers, It quickly became clear that the Deborah Birx’s and Anthony Fauci’s of the world were engaging in nothing more than a giant experiment. There was no an evidence-based approach to managing Covid whatsoever. These figures were leaning into the collective hysteria, and brandishing their credentials as Public Health Experts to demand top-down approaches to stamping out the WuFlu.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      To put it bluntly, these longtime government bureaucrats had no idea what the f—k they were doing. Fauci and his cohorts were not established or reputable scientists, but authoritarians, charlatans, who had a decades-long track record of hackery and corruption. This Coronavirus Task Force did not have the collective intellect nor the wisdom to be making these broad brush decisions.

      Back then, there were only literally a handful of people who attempted to raise awareness about the wave of tyranny, hysteria, and anti-science policies that were coming our way. There were so few of us back in March in 2020 that it was impossible to form any kind of significant structured resistance to the madness that was unfolding before us. These structures would later form, but not until the infrastructure for the highway to Covid hysteria hell had already been cemented.

      Making matters worse was the reality that the vast majority of the population — friends, colleagues, peers and family included — agreed that dissenters were nothing more than reckless extremists, bioterrorists, Covid deniers, anti-science rabble rousers, and the like.

      Yet we were right, and we had the evidence and data to prove it. There was no evidence to ever support such a heavy-handed series of government initiatives to “slow the spread.”

      By March 16, 2020, data had already accumulated indicating that this contagion would be no more lethal than an influenza outbreak.

      The February, 2020 outbreak on the Diamond Princess cruise ship provided a clear signal that the hysteria models provided by Bill Gates-funded and managed organizations were incredibly off base. Of the 3,711 people aboard the Diamond Princess, about 20% tested positive with Covid. The majority of those who tested positive had zero symptoms. By the time all passengers had disembarked from the vessel, there were 7 reported deaths on the ship, with the average age of this cohort being in the mid 80s, and it wasn’t even clear if these passengers died from or with Covid.

      Despite the strange photos and videos coming out of Wuhan, China, there was no objective evidence of a once in a century disease approaching America’s shores, and the Diamond Princess outbreak made that clear.

      Of course, it wasn’t the viral contagion that became the problem.

      It was the hysteria contagion that brought out the worst qualities of much of the global ruling class, letting world leaders take off their proverbial masks in unison and reveal their true nature as power drunk madmen.

      And even the more decent world leaders were swept up in the fear and mayhem, turning over the keys of government control to the supposed all-knowing Public Health Experts.

      They quickly shuttered billions of lives and livelihoods, wreaking exponentially more havoc than a novel coronavirus ever could.

      In the United States, 15 Days to Slow The Spread quickly became 30 Days To Slow The Spread. Somewhere along the way, the end date for “the measures” was removed from the equation entirely.

      3 years later, there still isn’t an end date…

      Anthony Fauci appeared on MSNBC Thursday morning and declared that Americans would need annual Covid boosters to compliment their Flu shots.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      So much of the Covid hysteria era was driven by pseudoscience and outright nonsense, and yet, very few if any world leaders took it upon themselves to restore sanity in their domains. Now, unsurprisingly, so many elected officials who were complicit in this multi-billion person human tragedy won’t dare to reflect upon it.

      In a 1775 letter from John Adams to his wife, Abigail, the American Founding Father wrote:

      “Liberty once lost is lost forever. When the People once surrender their share in the Legislature, and their Right of defending the Limitations upon the Government, and of resisting every Encroachment upon them, they can never regain it.”

      Covid hysteria and the 3 year anniversary of 15 Days To Slow The Spread serves as the beginning period of a permanent scar resulting from government power grabs and federal overreach.

      While life is back to normal in most of the country, the Overton window of acceptable policy has slid even further in the direction of push-button tyranny. Hopefully, much of the world has awakened to the reality that most of the people in charge aren’t actually doing what’s best for their respective populations.

      Tyler Durden
      Tue, 03/21/2023 – 18:05

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 21st March 2023

    • The Lords Of Chaos: Iraq Invasion 20 Years Later
      The Lords Of Chaos: Iraq Invasion 20 Years Later

      Authored by Chris Hedges via Consortium News/ScheerPost.com,

      Two decades ago, I sabotaged my career at The New York Times. It was a conscious choice. I had spent seven years in the Middle East, four of them as the Middle East Bureau Chief. I was an Arabic speaker. I believed, like nearly all Arabists, including most of those in the State Department and the C.I.A., that a “preemptive” war against Iraq would be the most costly strategic blunder in American history.

      It would also constitute what the International Military Tribunal at Nuremberg called the “supreme international crime.” While Arabists in official circles were muzzled, I was not. I was invited by them to speak at The State Department, The United States Military Academy at West Point and to senior Marine Corps officers scheduled to be deployed to Kuwait to prepare for the invasion.

      We’re Number One – by Mr. Fish

      Mine was not a popular view nor one a reporter, rather than an opinion columnist, was permitted to express publicly according to the rules laid down by the newspaper. But I had experience that gave me credibility and a platform. I had reported extensively from Iraq. I had covered numerous armed conflicts, including the first Gulf War and the Shi’ite uprising in southern Iraq where I was taken prisoner by The Iraqi Republican Guard.

      I easily dismantled the lunacy and lies used to promote the war, especially as I had reported on the destruction of Iraq’s chemical weapons stockpiles and facilities by the United Nations Special Commission (UNSCOM) inspection teams. I had detailed knowledge of how degraded the Iraqi military had become under U.S. sanctions. Besides, even if Iraq did possess “weapons of mass destruction” that would not have been a legal justification for war.

      The death threats towards me exploded when my stance became public in numerous interviews and talks I gave across the country. They were either mailed in by anonymous writers or expressed by irate callers who would daily fill up the message bank on my phone with rage-filled tirades. Right-wing talk shows, including Fox News, pilloried me, especially after I was heckled and booed off a commencement stage at Rockford College for denouncing the war.

      The Wall Street Journal wrote an editorial attacking me. Bomb threats were called into venues where I was scheduled to speak. I became a pariah in the newsroom. Reporters and editors I had known for years would lower their heads as I passed, fearful of any career-killing contagion. I was issued a written reprimand by The New York Times to cease speaking publicly against the war. I refused. My tenure was over.

      No Accountability

      What is disturbing is not the cost to me personally. I was aware of the potential consequences. What is disturbing is that the architects of these debacles have never been held accountable and remain ensconced in power. They continue to promote permanent war, including the ongoing proxy war in Ukraine against Russia, as well as a future war against China.

      The politicians who lied to us — George W. BushDick CheneyCondoleezza RiceHillary Clinton and Joe Biden to name but a few — extinguished millions of lives, including thousands of American lives, and left Iraq along with Afghanistan, Syria, Somalia, Libya and Yemen in chaos. They exaggerated or fabricated conclusions from intelligence reports to mislead the public. The big lie is taken from the playbook of totalitarian regimes. 

      The cheerleaders in the media for war — Thomas FriedmanDavid RemnickRichard CohenGeorge PackerWilliam KristolPeter BeinartBill KellerRobert KaplanAnne ApplebaumNicholas KristofJonathan ChaitFareed ZakariaDavid FrumJeffrey GoldbergDavid Brooks and Michael Ignatieff — were used to amplify the lies and discredit the handful of us, including Michael MooreRobert Scheer and Phil Donahue, who opposed the war.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      These courtiers were often motivated more by careerism than idealism. They did not lose their megaphones or lucrative speaking fees and book contracts once the lies were exposed, as if their crazed diatribes did not matter. They served the centers of power and were rewarded for it.

      Many of these same pundits are pushing further escalation of the war in Ukraine, although most know as little about Ukraine or NATO’s provocative and unnecessary expansion to the borders of Russia as they did about Iraq. 

      “I told myself and others that Ukraine is the most important story of our time, that everything we should care about is on the line there,” George Packer writes in The Atlantic magazine. “I believed it then, and I believe it now, but all of this talk put a nice gloss on the simple, unjustifiable desire to be there and see.”

      Packer views war as a purgative, a force that will jolt a country, including the U.S., back to the core moral values he supposedly found amongst American volunteers in Ukraine. “I didn’t know what these men thought of American politics, and I didn’t want to know,” he writes of two U.S. volunteers. 

      “Back home we might have argued; we might have detested each other. Here, we were joined by a common belief in what the Ukrainians were trying to do and admiration for how they were doing it. Here, all the complex infighting and chronic disappointments and sheer lethargy of any democratic society, but especially ours, dissolved, and the essential things — to be free and live with dignity — became clear. It almost seemed as if the U.S. would have to be attacked or undergo some other catastrophe for Americans to remember what Ukrainians have known from the start.”

      The Iraq war cost at least $3 trillion and the 20 years of warfare in the Middle East cost a total of some $8 trillion. The occupation created Shi’ite and Sunni death squads, fueled horrific sectarian violence, gangs of kidnappers, mass killings and torture.

      It gave rise to al-Qaeda cells and spawned ISIS which at one point controlled a third of Iraq and Syria. ISIS carried out rape, enslavement and mass executions of Iraqi ethnic and religious minorities such as the Yazidis. It persecuted Chaldean Catholics and other Christians. This mayhem was accompanied by an orgy of killing by U.S. occupation forces, such as as the gang rape and murder of Abeer al-Janabi, a 14-year-old girl and her family by members of the U.S. Army’s 101st Airborne. The U.S. routinely engaged in the torture and execution of detained civilians, including at Abu Ghraib and Camp Bucca

      There is no accurate count of lives lost, estimates in Iraq alone range from hundreds of thousands to over a million. Some 7,000 U.S. service members died in our post 9/11 wars, with over 30,000 later committing suicide, according to Brown University’s Costs of War project. 

      Yes, Saddam Hussein was brutal and murderous, but in terms of a body count, we far outstripped his killings, including his genocidal campaigns against the Kurds. We destroyed Iraq as a unified country, devastated its modern infrastructure, wiped out its thriving and educated middle class, gave birth to rogue militias and installed a kleptocracy that uses the country’s oil revenues to enrich itself.

      Ordinary Iraqis are impoverished. Hundreds of Iraqis protesting in the streets against the kleptocracy have been gunned down by police. There are frequent power outages. The Shi’ite majority, closely allied with Iran, dominates the country. 

      The occupation of Iraq, beginning 20 years ago today, turned the Muslim world and the Global South against us. The enduring images we left behind from two decades of war include President Bush standing under a “Mission Accomplished” banner onboard the USS Abraham Lincoln aircraft carrier barely one month after he invaded Iraq, the bodies of Iraqis in Fallujah that were burned with white phosphorus and the photos of torture by U.S. soldiers. 

      To The Hague

      The U.S. is desperately attempting to use Ukraine to repair its image. But the rank hypocrisy of calling for “a rules-based international order” to justify the $113 billion in arms and other aid that the U.S. has committed to send to Ukraine, won’t work. It ignores what we did. We might forget, but the victims do not.

      The only redemptive path is charging Bush, Cheney and the other architects of the wars in the Middle East, including Joe Biden, as war criminals in the International Criminal Court. Haul Russian President Vladimir Putin off to The Hague, but only if Bush is in the cell next to him. 

      Many of the apologists for the war in Iraq seek to justify their support by arguing that “mistakes” were made, that if, for example, the Iraqi civil service and army were not disbanded after the U.S. invaded, the occupation would have worked. They insist that our intentions were honorable. They ignore the hubris and lies that led to the war, the misguided belief that the U.S. could be the sole major power in a unipolar world. They ignore the massive military expenditures spent annually to achieve this fantasy.

      They ignore that the war in Iraq was only an episode in this demented quest. 

      A national reckoning with the military fiascos in the Middle East would expose the self-delusion of the ruling class. But this reckoning is not taking place. We are trying to wish the nightmares we perpetuated in the Middle East away, burying them in a collective amnesia. “World War III Begins With Forgetting,” warns Stephen Wertheim.

      The celebration of our national “virtue” by pumping weapons into Ukraine, by sustaining at least 750 military bases in more than 70 countries and by expanding our naval presence in the South China Sea, is meant to fuel this dream of global dominance.

      What the mandarins in Washington fail to grasp is that most of the globe does not believe the lie of American benevolence or support its justifications for U.S. interventions. China and Russia, rather than passively accepting U.S. hegemony, are building up their militaries and strategic alliances.

      China Brokers Deal

      China, last week, brokered an agreement between Iran and Saudi Arabia to re-establish relations after seven years of hostility, something once expected of U.S. diplomats. The rising influence of China creates a self-fulfilling prophecy for those who call for war with Russia and China, one that will have consequences far more catastrophic than those in the Middle East.

      There is a national weariness with permanent war, especially with inflation ravaging family incomes and 57 percent of Americans unable to afford a $1,000 emergency expense. The Democratic Party and the establishment wing of the Republican Party, who peddled the lies about Iraq, are war parties.

      Donald Trump’s call to end the war in Ukraine, like his lambasting of the war in Iraq as the “worst decision” in American history, are attractive political stances to Americans struggling to stay afloat. The working poor, even those whose options for education and employment are limited, are no longer as inclined to fill the ranks. They have far more pressing concerns than a unipolar world or war with Russia or China. The isolationism of the far right is a potent political weapon.

      The pimps of war, leaping from fiasco to fiasco, cling to the chimera of U.S. global supremacy. The dance macabre will not stop until we publicly hold them accountable for their crimes, ask those we have wronged for forgiveness and give up our lust for uncontested global power.

      The day of reckoning, vital if we are to protect what is left of our anemic democracy and curb the appetites of the war machine, will only come when we build mass anti-war organizations that demand an end to the imperial folly threatening to extinguish life on the planet.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 23:40

    • North Korea Claims 1.4 Million People Just Enlisted To Fight 'Imperialist' US
      North Korea Claims 1.4 Million People Just Enlisted To Fight ‘Imperialist’ US

      North Korean state media has been touting new claims of mass enlistments amid “an atmosphere of war” and urgent defense preparedness in response to ongoing joint US-South Korea drills, which are the largest in five years.

      The state-run Korean Central News Agency (KCNA) initially over the weekend cited a figure of 800,000 citizens having newly signed up for military service, most of them young people, while other state-linked sources are saying it’s well over one million enlistees. By Monday the number jumped significantly to claims of around 1.4 million people enlisting

      “Amidst soaring anger and hostility toward the US imperialists and the South Korean puppet traitors going mad over the reckless nuclear war provocation targeting the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea, the ranks of hot-blooded youths bravely and vigorously set out to defend the homeland are growing day by day is growing,” a Pyongyang statement said.

      The reports follow the North Korean government holding a major new recruiting drive, hosting events across the country while conducting near daily test launches of projectiles – including the latest on Sunday which included a ‘mock nuclear warhead’ as a warning to Seoul and Washington.

      State media described that “youth college students from universities in various places as well as high-end middle school students from all over the country” expressed their determination “to join forces in the fight…”

      The KCNA report additionally cited citizens’ willingness “mercilessly wipe out the war maniacs” – in what’s also clearly a propaganda blitz and bit of signaling aimed at the south and at the west. Kim Jung Un had promised a fierce response to the major US-South Korean drills which have lately included American B1 bombers and stealth jets joining the drills, dubbed Freedom Shield joint exercise.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      But it seems Kim hasn’t gotten the reaction or attention from Washington that he hoped for, and thus could be daily ramping up the threatening missile launches and rhetoric.

      The South Korean military, for its part, promised to continue undeterred with the US drills: “The South Korea-US alliance maintains the best-combined defense posture in the face of North Korea’s continued regional instability,” a press release said. “Going forward, we will realize ‘Peace through Strength’ and enhance the credibility of the US extended deterrence based on the solid capabilities and posture of the alliance,” it added.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 23:20

    • Too Wrong To Fail
      Too Wrong To Fail

      Authored by Thomas McArdle via The Epoch Times,

      As the old saw goes, a banker is someone who lends you his umbrella when the sun is shining and then wants it back as soon as the first drops of rain fall.

      Hostility toward money lenders goes way back. In the Middle Ages in Europe, to deposit your money with one was unlawful, “even as it would be unlawful to deposit one’s sword with a madman, a maiden with a libertine, or food with a glutton.”

      Loans may no longer be against the law, but bankers have been, and still are, convenient villains in popular culture.

      In the movie “It’s a Wonderful Life,” for example, old man Henry Potter mocked George Bailey’s just-deceased father by remarking that “ideals without common sense can ruin this town.” And he said of George issuing a loan to his friend Ernie, Bedford Falls’s cabby, “You see, if you shoot pool with some employee here, you can come and borrow money.”

      Were the now-failed Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank acting sensibly or madly? And did they shoot pool with powerful Washington figures in hopes that they could avoid ruin despite their lack of sense?

      How much common sense is there in the “ideals” associated with SVB not having a chief risk officer for most of last year as it hurtled toward collapse, but at the same time employing a chief diversity, equity, and inclusion officer and making a point of focusing on climate change, and social and corporate governance policies? “Issues of inequity in the innovation sector” apparently mattered more to SVB president and CEO Greg Becker than the soundness of his bank’s loans in an environment of rising interest rates amid high inflation.

      It’s no shock to find that Joe Biden’s presidential campaign and political action committees were bestowed with at least $11,900 from SVB executives, with SVB managing director Gerald Brady giving $5,600 to Biden’s 2020 campaign, according to the Federal Election Commission. The Democratic National Committee and various party politicians are announcing the return or the money or donating funds received to charities.

      Congress early this month moved against a Biden administration rule forcing pension funds holding $12 trillion of 150 million Americans’ savings to include environmental, social, and corporate governance (ESG) in their investment decisions—in other words, make your retirement finances dependent on the same kind of thinking that led SVB to collapse. ESG equities distinctly underperform the market.

      Who can forget Jimmy Stewart as George Bailey scrambling to hand out cash meant for his honeymoon to beleaguered depositors during the run on the Bailey Savings & Loan? But the tone-deaf sixteenth largest bank in the country was handing out company-wide bonuses to its employees for their 2022 work just hours before the government had to take it over.

      In the case of Signature Bank, it wasn’t George Bailey shooting pool, it was superstar bankers poached from competitors in at least one case spending “most of his week golfing with prospective clients.” Big Signature Bank customers ultimately included rap superstars. And speaking of Ernie the Bedford Falls cabby, among Signature’s peculiar banking practices was to encourage taking out loans to buy New York City’s infamously expensive taxi medallions—in itself a regulatory shell game—in expectation of Uber and Lyft upending the passenger transport landscape.

      Of far more import, however, was Signature’s over-exposure in cryptocurrency, where it placed over a quarter of its $109 billion in deposits before the FTX debacle last year that sent crypto spiraling to earth.

      The bailing out of these two boutique, politically fashionable institutions by the “wokest” of woke presidents is for the benefit of the well-to-do; most of the tens of billions of dollars in deposits exceed the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation’s (FDIC) $250,000 ceiling. Would a bank in deep trouble in, say, Roberts County in the Texas panhandle, where the median average family income is $50,400, have received such exceptional treatment from Uncle Sam?

      And don’t swallow Treasury Secretary and former Federal Reserve chairwoman Janet Yellen’s claims that the “bank fees”-funded rescues will leave no taxpayers on the hook. Like any other business, banks ultimately pass the taxes and fees imposed upon them by the government down to their customers, whether it happens individually or collectively, conspicuously or in hidden manner. As Fordham University law school professor and bank bailout expert Richard Squire points out, while management at SVB and Signature may be being allowed to save face, “the venture capital firms and the startups are being bailed out. There is no doubt about that.”

      The Biden administration’s nearly $5 trillion in spending is the engine behind the inflation that forced the Federal Reserve to embark on an extended policy of raising the interest rates under its direct control—which in turn has put the squeeze on banks, especially those conducting fast and loose financial practices. But as scary as that chain reaction may be, the FDIC’s guarantee to reimburse all the rich uninsured depositors at the two failed institutions, making an exception to its $250,000 cap, and no matter how big the depositors’ accounts, is more alarming.

      Such measures take the United States down a road toward total nationalization of the banking system and removes the indispensable elements of accountability and discipline all businesses need: certainty that misjudgment and irresponsibility must come with a cost.

      When Washington bails that out, America turns into Potterville.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 23:00

    • A "Stock Clearance": Most Major Automakers Slash Prices In China As Demand Stalls
      A “Stock Clearance”: Most Major Automakers Slash Prices In China As Demand Stalls

      Move over Tesla: both Ford and GM are also trying to take a page out of the ‘price cut’ playbook that the EV manufacturer has been (successfully) running in China over the last couple months. 

      The move is coming after lifting pandemic controls failed to spur significant demand in China, the Wall Street Journal reported this week. Ford and GM will be joined by BMW and Volkswagen in offering the discounts and promotions on EVs, the report says. 

      Retail auto sales plunged the first two months of the year and automakers are facing additional challenges in trying to transition their business models to prioritize EVs over conventional internal combustion engine vehicles. 

      Ford is offering $6,000 off its Mustang Mach-E, putting the standard version of its EV at just $31,000. Last month, only 84 of the vehicles were sold, compared to 1,500 sales in December. There was some pulling forward of demand due to the phasing out of subsidies heading into the new year, and Ford had also cut prices by about 9% in December. 

      A spokesperson for Ford called it a “stock clearance”. 

      Discounts at Volkswagen are ranging from around $2,200 to $7,300 a car. The cuts will affect 20 gas powered and electric models. Its electric ID series is seeing price cuts of almost $6,000. The company called the cuts “temporary promotions due to general reluctance among car buyers, the new emissions rule and discounts offered by competitors.”

      Even more shocking is Citroën-maker Dongfeng Motor Group, who is offering a 40% discount on its C6 gas-powered sedan, now priced at $18,000. 

      Kelvin Lau, an analyst at Daiwa Capital Markets, told the Journal that automakers are also trying to get rid of 500,000 vehicles collectively stored in their inventory, most of which are older vehicles that won’t meet new emissions standards.

      David Zhang, a Shanghai-based independent automobile analyst, added: “Some car makers have been seeing very few sales. At this rate, the manufacturers’ production and dealership networks will collapse.”

      Hopefully Tesla is paying close attention to the cuts – but perhaps even moreso to their mainland China competition. Domestic-based market leader BYD has only cut prices “a single percentage point”. 

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 22:40

    • Americans To Bear Burden Of Monetary System's Gradual Deterioration, Economist Says
      Americans To Bear Burden Of Monetary System’s Gradual Deterioration, Economist Says

      Authored by Petr Svab via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      Ordinary Americans can expect their wealth to get repeatedly chipped away as the monetary system degrades and requires progressively more intervention by authorities to perpetuate itself, according to an influential author and economist. It may take “a very long time,” however, for the system to actually break, he told The Epoch Times.

      Traders work on the floor at the New York Stock Exchange as the Federal Reserve chairman Jerome Powell speaks after announcing a rate increase in New York on Nov. 2, 2022. (Seth Wenig/AP Photo)

      The recent downfall of two sizable American banks, Silicon Valley Bank (SVB) and First Republic Bank, rattled the financial markets. Investors are now looking to the Federal Reserve to provide relief and within months reverse its policy of raising interest rates. That’s after the central bank, together with the Treasury and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), already shored up the banking sector, offering special loans and guaranteeing uninsured deposits for the failed banks.

      The failures, however, represent a symptom of a broader problem—one the central bank can’t fix, according to Daniel Lacalle, fund manager, economist, and prolific author.

      The problem here is the concept of ‘what can be done?’” he said, arguing central bank market interventions intended to smooth over market perturbations tend to simply redistribute the risk and losses—and at the added cost of making the system more fragile in the long run.

      “Every time they try to solve a bubble with more liquidity injections, they create another bubble,” he said. “What you have to do first is not implement crazy monetary policies.”

      He was referring to the policy of extremely low interest rates that the Fed maintained for most of the past decade.

      Free Money

      Lacalle alluded to the Austrian economic theory, which posits that central banks can’t set interest rates correctly. When the economy is not doing well, central banks set the rates artificially low in order to “stimulate” the economy. That allows companies to loosen fiscal discipline and makes credit available to projects that would be otherwise too risky to attract capital. When the economy “overheats”—the availability of credit outstrips the production capacity of the economy, resulting in inflation—the central bank raises rates, tightens credit, and the poorly performing risky projects go under. Because rate hikes take more than a year to fully manifest in the economy, central bankers tend to continue hiking for too long. Excessively high rates then cause the destruction of even viable businesses. Recession ensues. The central bank then tries to cushion the recession blow by dramatically cutting rates, thereby repeating the cycle.

      “After a decade of excess, of course, there are going to be episodes like SVB and these other regional banks,” Lacalle said.

      SVB was the banker of choice for many Silicon Valley tech startups and their venture capital funders that have benefited from the protracted period of loose credit. In just a few years, it grew into one of the 20 largest banks in the country, with some $200 billion in assets. When its investments started to underperform and its stock dropped, clients got cold feet and many moved their money elsewhere, triggering a bank run.

      Regulation

      Some economists have argued that the SVB crash was the fault of regulators. The Federal Reserve of San Francisco should have stepped in when it saw warning signs of SVB’s instability, argued the Brookings Institution’s Aaron Klein in a recent commentary.

      Lacalle wasn’t convinced. He pointed out that on paper, SVB was following the regulatory mantras.

      “You’re hedging your volatile positions in technology and risky ventures, which obviously is your core business—that’s nothing we can do about—and you’re hedging it with long-term treasuries and mortgage-backed securities,” he said.

      But it was exactly the large treasuries portfolio, which dropped in value due to the Fed’s rate hikes last year, that pushed SVB over the edge.

      Klein also pointed to SVB’s unhedged $100 billion position in mortgage-backed securities. But Lacalle noted that the Fed itself has designated those as low-risk, sitting on $2.6 trillion of them. If the Fed, as a regulator, was to declare mortgage-backed securities as risky, how could the Fed, as a monetary policy setter, declare them low-risk?

      Intervention

      The Fed’s response to the SVB crisis is a typical example, Klein suggested, of the system’s underlying flaw—a short-term solution with long-term negative implications.

      Shortly after regulators took over SVB, the Fed, the Treasury, and the FDIC announced that no depositors in the failed banks will lose money, despite most of the deposits being above the FDIC insurance limit of $250,000 per account. Furthermore, to ensure no other banks hit a liquidity crunch because of the value drop in their treasury holdings, the Fed will allow them one year to borrow against those holdings at “par value”—the Fed will de facto pretend the treasuries are worth more than they currently are.

      The Fed’s apparent motivation was to forestall runs on other smaller banks. Yet its actions created “an incentive to take even more risk by the next bank,” Lacalle said.

      “The example of SVB is telling everyone that what they should do is exactly what SVB did because nothing’s going to happen. If things go well, you will make a lot of money and if things go badly, bad luck, but nothing’s going to happen. So what is the incentive to be prudent and to have a prudent level of risk management? Zero.”

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 22:20

    • New York Most Expensive State To Retire In, New Study Finds
      New York Most Expensive State To Retire In, New Study Finds

      Surprisingly, out of the 10 most expensive states to retire in the United States, California is conspicuously absent from the list. 

      That is according to a new WalletHub piece that dove into the most affordable places for U.S. citizens to settle down in once their work lives are over – which, nowadays, is somewhere between age 90 and 120. 

      The study “used data from various agencies such as the U.S. Census Bureau and the Council for Community and Economic Research” and its rankings “looked at adjusted cost of living, general tax-friendliness and annual cost of in-home services, as well as other factors,” CNBC wrote

      Topping the list, likely without much surprise, was New York, which ranked dead last in affordability, despite coming in 10th in quality of life and 16th in healthcare. It has the 3rd highest tax rate, the article noted. 

      $1 million in savings would only cover living costs for about 14 years in New York, the article wrote. Retirement is generally thought to last about 25 years. 

      Not in the top 10 most expensive was California, which came in 32nd in affordability.

      Alan Castel, a professor at the University of California, Los Angeles, and author of “Better with Age: The Psychology of Successful Aging,” is quoted in the report as saying: “Sometimes our spending habits need to be re-evaluated, and many senior discounts can be utilized to lower bills. It may also be useful to consider downsizing or minimizing certain costs that are no longer needed.”

      Or, you can work until you’re 95. 

      The full list of the 10 most expensive states to retire in is:

      1. New York
      2. New Jersey
      3. Vermont
      4. Massachusetts
      5. Maryland
      6. Washington
      7. Connecticut
      8. Maine
      9. Illinois
      10. Oregon

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 22:00

    • Kolanovic Sees Growing Odds Of A "Minsky Moment In Markets"
      Kolanovic Sees Growing Odds Of A “Minsky Moment In Markets”

      It seems like it was a lifetime ago when, frazzled with the market’s rangebound trade, Wall Street’s biggest bears were coming up with fictitious narratives seeing bogeymen anywhere and everywhere, if it meant convincing their clients to sell. A distant one month ago – because during bank crises time moves in Inception terms – JPMorgan’s permabull-turned-permabear Marko Kolanovic was warning that Wall Street’s trading black box du jour, 0DTE or Zero Days to Expiration options, would somehow lead to “$30 billion in intraday selling” and crash the market. Such fearmongering was, of course, ridiculous – after all if 0DTE didn’t spark a liquidity cascade in the past week when we have seen the worst banking crisis since Lehman it never will – but it highlights a familiar trope among Wall Street strategists: take the latest market-moving bogeyman and make it into a monster, then goalseek the narrative for the highest employer benefit (almost as if the deposit-sucking JPMorgan has had an agenda to freak everyone out in recent weeks… and certainly small bank depositors).

      And sure enough, one month later everyone has forgotten about 0DTE (which “shockingly” did not lead to a massive selloff) and instead attention is now occupied with what is a far bigger crisis – the collapse of small and medium regional US banks, and not so small Swiss banks… and until the Fed pivots, cuts rates and reintroduces QE, the contagion will continue because once lost, depositors confidence needs a reboot to the system, one which only a Fed capitulation can provide (the Fed came close by announcing USD swap lines yesterday but much more will be needed to safeguard $18 trillion in US deposits, and the latest step – a proposed guarantee of all US deposits is slowly but surely getting us there).

      Enter Marko Kolanovic again, who in his latest note not only quotes Lenin (the infamous “There are-decades where nothing happens; and there are weeks where decades happen” which pops out like clockwork every time the FRA-OIS spread hits 50bps), but – having completely forgotten about his 0DTE doomsday thesis from just 4 weeks back – has now escalated the doom and gloom rhetoric to conclude that virtually everything that is now happening is bearish and that “the possibility of a Minsky moment in markets and geopolitics has increased.”

      Translation: having tried to pinpoint the market’s weakest link one month ago – and failing – and having had nothing at all to say about what would have a fare more devastating impact on market psychology and the economy, the cascading failure of major banks (as described here weeks ago), Marko is now just shotgunning it and hoping that something sticks to the wall, so that he can then point to it and say: “look, I was right.” Here is the choice excerpt from his latest note:

      A lot has happened in the past week. The bailout of several US banks did not manage to calm markets, which consumed another large bank in Europe. In a Trichet-like moment, the ECB increased rates by 50bps. The Fed is facing a difficult task on Wednesday, but it is likely already past the point of no return – a soft landing now looks unlikely, with the airplane in a tailspin (lack of market confidence) and engines about to turn off (bank lending). China brokered a Middle East deal, and there is a presidential visit to Russia this week. “There are decades where nothing happens; and there are weeks where decades happen”— Lenin.

      The possibility of a Minsky moment in markets and geopolitics has increased. Even if central bankers successfully contain contagion, credit conditions look set to tighten more rapidly because of pressure from both markets and regulators. We stay neutral duration in the US and Europe amid cross-winds, favoring 10s/30s steepeners as an asymmetric way to position for an eventual Fed pause.

      Cracks are beginning to emerge in US credit fundamentals, and Euro credit spreads will likely continue to widen unless we see meaningful policy intervention. The historical template for FX during widening credit spreads is for USD strength, coupled with relative safe-FX (USD, CHF, JPY) strength vs. highbeta. We see little change in oil fundamentals and keep our price forecasts unchanged for now, while financial stress and macro uncertainty have boosted safe haven demand for gold and silver.

      There is a famous saying about a broken clock that is right twice a day… and yet, when it comes to Marko’s track record the past two years don’t even show that: starting in January for all of 2022, the JPM strategist was telling clients to buy the dip, yet every time a new and bigger dip emerged. Marko then flip-flopped in late September, and turned bullish which as we said at the time, marked the market bottom…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      … which it has been to this day. Meanwhile, stocks have continued to grind upward, reaching as high as 4,200 all the while Kolanovic kept invoking the latest and greatest bogeyman du jour in hopes of convincing JPM’s remaining clients to sell… to JPM of course.

      And speaking of clocks, broken or otherwise, JPM is one of the banks that still expects the Fed to hike 25bps even though moments ago Bloomberg reported that the Treasury is now studying how to backstop all $18 trillion in US deposits. Needless to say, trying to destroy your banking system with one hand (small banks can’t match anywhere near 4.75% in deposit rates, surely 5.00% will be a slam dunk) while saving it with the other (and $18 trillion in deposits) is something the US government will excel at… unless of course the Fed isn’t actually advised by Hunter Biden and the Fed does not hike 25bps on Wednesday. Then again, if Powell does go ahead and tighten financial conditions further, the only thing that will follow is an even bigger and faster rate cut, just as Elon Musk suggested on Monday evening.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      What is remarkable is that instead of discounting the future, one where the Fed is about to unleash all liquidity spigots and making it rain sending risk assets to the moon, Marko is doubling down on what has been a wrong call for the past 6 months.

      “Use relief bounces to reduce beta and Value factors further. We stick to our call that Q1 will likely end up the high point for stocks this year. This call is predicated on the view that bond yields will move lower along with a likely end of PMI rebound soon, as the impact of past policy tightening starts to take full effect, and the positive offsets (e.g. the cushion of COVID savings and pricing power for corporates) erode,” he said.

      Translation: Marko believes that even though the Fed is about to unleash a liquidity bazooka at the relentless bank crisis, the S&P has already seen its highs for the year and will soon take out 2022 lows. We’ll take the other side of that bet.

      More in the full JPM note available to pro subs.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 21:45

    • Socialism Isn't About Creating Economies. It Is About Amassing Political Power
      Socialism Isn’t About Creating Economies. It Is About Amassing Political Power

      Authored by Ovidiu Tanjala via The Mises Institute,

      Ludwig von Mises wrote Socialism: An Economic and Sociological Analysis, a small book published in 1922, which demonstrated that economic calculation in a socialist commonwealth is impossible. Of course, Mises assumed that the purpose of an economy, even a socialist one, was supposed to produce goods and services, which determined its success or failure.

      Alain Besançon wasn’t an Austrian or a Misesian, but he wrote Anatomie d’un spectre: l’Économie politique du socialisme réel, also a small book the size of Mises’s own Socialism, in which he also observed that the Soviet economy couldn’t perform economic calculation; thus, the Soviet economy performed poorly, very poorly by Western standards.

      The Soviet economy was wasteful and chaotic.

      Besançon believed that economic planning induced irrationality in the system.

      Terrified managers couldn’t report failing the plan, and consequently any subsequent economic planning would be even more divorced from reality than previous planning had been.

      Both Besançon and Mises knew that socialism could not discover market prices. Both knew that this would lead to widespread corruption. However, Besançon realized that the state not only tolerated but also used the black market for price discovery in economic sectors critical to the regime, like defense and certain prestigious cultural and sport endeavors (Bolshoi Theatre, gymnastics, eventually hockey, etc.).

      However, there is a critical difference between Mises and Besançon. While Mises believed that the goal of the Soviet economy was to produce usable goods and services, Besançon believed otherwise. The Soviet economy, he posited, was never about producing goods and services for consumers, but rather had other goals.

      The Soviet economy existed to keep the Communist Party in power, and that was the sole criteria party leaders used to evaluate its performance. The “production” of political power was supreme, and anything else was secondary, subordinated to the main goal for the Soviet economy.

      Soviet political leaders did not want an economy that produced goods abundantly because abundance separates the citizen from the state. The state would lose its power over its subjects if they became wealthier. Homo sovieticus—the Soviet man—had to be dependent on the state, barely living from one day to the next on state-issued ration cards.

      If a Soviet manager managed by some miracle to produce well-being, despite absurd planning orders and a lack of market prices, he might well have been punished for failing to produce what he really needed to produce: state power over simple people. Abundance and well-being always were and still are the true enemies of socialism; people cannot be able to ignore or to forget the power of the state.

      While the Soviet economy is not something people wish to revisit, nonetheless, influential elites are calling for governments to assert power over individuals to restrict consumer choice to achieve political goals benefitting those in power. For example, the World Economic Forum declares that people should start eating insects in the name of “sustainability.” Likewise, in the name of fighting climate change, progressive elites in government and business are attempting to force people to buy electric cars despite their serious drawbacks. While social media outlets like Facebook and Twitter are private companies, they have done the bidding of governments in the name of “fighting disinformation” or trying to preserve a narrative that reflects the governmental message, something especially seen during the government-imposed covid restrictions, by restricting online speech.

      For decades Western governments have been spending more than 45 percent of the gross domestic product. Rothbard warned us that every government-owned entity is an island of calculational chaos in the economy. In countries like Finland, France, Germany, Austria, and Belgium the government represents the majority of the economy. In the United States, government spending is nearly 40 percent of GDP and in 2020, it was almost half of GDP.

      Hence, we cannot any longer speak of islands of calculational chaos induced by the government. In our day the rule of Western economies is chaos, the exception being the continued existence of market prices. The presence and influence of the environmental, social, and governance (ESG) movement in US corporations and especially financial and capital markets enables socialists to have a huge influence over the US economy, and ordinary people are helpless to stop it. Many economic sectors are enabling socialists to gain political power, and the production of real goods and services has become secondary to the promotion of leftist ideology.

      Alain Besançon was right about the real goals of socialists, and while both he and Mises understood the inherent dysfunctionality of a socialist economy, Besançon went one step further in realizing that the chaos the socialism produces worked to the advantage of those in power. The goal of socialists is not a better economy through socialism, but rather the full establishment of socialist power.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 21:20

    • US Studies How To Guarantee All $18 Trillion In US Bank Deposits
      US Studies How To Guarantee All $18 Trillion In US Bank Deposits

      After repeated laments by the likes of Bill Ackman, who most recently said that “I continue to believe that the best course of action is a temporary @FDICgov deposit guarantee until an updated insurance regime is introduced” (and who just flip-flopped on his Fed must hike with shock and awe call from 2022 and is now urging for a Fed hiking pause), and following a Bloomberg weekend report that US mid-sized banks demanded a two-year total deposit insurance scheme from the FDIC, and warned if it doesn’t arrive, there may lots more shotgun weddings (or shotguns), moments ago Bloomberg reported that “US officials are studying ways they might temporarily expand Federal Deposit Insurance Corp. coverage to all deposits, a move sought by a coalition of banks arguing that it’s needed to head off a potential financial crisis.” Guess our March 12 tweet was ahead of its time yet again.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The BBG report explains that “Treasury Department staff are reviewing whether federal regulators have enough emergency authority to temporarily insure deposits greater than the current $250,000 cap on most accounts” without formal consent from a deeply divided Congress, and goes on to note that “authorities don’t yet view such a move as necessary, especially after regulators took steps this month to help banks keep up with any demands for withdrawals” which is an important caveat, and is the same one that hawks are using to justify why a Fed pause would be self-defeating (“why is the Fed blowing up their last bit of inflation-fighting credibility; what do they know that we don’t): the same question can be applied to the Treasury: “what does the Treasury know that we don’t.”

      Most likely nothing – after all bank crises are non-linear, but as Bloomberg notes, “still, they are developing a strategy out of due diligence in case the situation worsens.”

      “We will use the tools we have to support community banks,” White House spokesman Michael Kikukawa said, without directly addressing whether the measure is being studied. “Since our administration and the regulators took decisive action last weekend, we have seen deposits stabilize at regional banks throughout the country and, in some cases, outflows have modestly reversed.”

      Still, the report notes, the behind-the-scenes deliberations show there are concerns in Washington’s corridors of power as midsize banks call for broader government intervention after three lenders collapsed this month when uninsured depositors pulled their money, and as a fourth firm strives to avoid a similar fate. Shares of that one, First Republic Bank, tumbled an additional 47% on Monday as industry leaders tried to find a way to bolster the company’s finances.

      Ok, that’s the theory. What about the practice? After all, as regular readers know there are $18 trillion in total deposits, all of which will have to be insured…

      … and just $125 billion in the FDIC’s Deposit Insurance Fund, which makes an outright guarantee of all deposits just a small mathematical impossibility.

      Well, there’s always printing. According to Bloomberg, one legal framework under discussion for expanding FDIC insurance would use the Treasury Department’s authority to take emergency action and lean on the Exchange Stabilization Fund. The same magical Exchange Stabilization Fund which the Treasury is already using to backstop its latest bank bailout facility, the Bank Term Funding Program, or BTFP.

      Here too there is a small problem: that ESF pot of money is used to buy or sell currencies and to provide financing to foreign governments. A bigger problem: the ESF only has $25 billion currently in it as parts of its BTFP backstop…. but it has to do, as it is the only pot of money under the full authority of Janet Yellen, with other spending and financing under the jurisdiction of Congress.

      Any mechanism using the ESF as a bailout mechanism uses the cash from the fund as a first-loss equity tranche to which the Fed then applies leverage. LOTS of leverage, because if authorities plan on backstopping the $18 trillion in total US deposits, the Fed will need to cover the difference… of some $17.975 trillion (unless Congress reaches a bipartisan deal to infuse more capital in the ESF, the same way the ESF was expanded to $500BN during the covid crisis

      Meanwhile, in keeping with the tradition of saying the polar opposite of what it is doing, a Treasury spokeswoman said in a statement that “due to decisive recent actions, the situation has stabilized, deposit flows are improving and Americans can have confidence in the safety of their deposits”

      Which of course explains why First Republic is about to join the collapse contagion and why Treasury is planning a full deposit backstop.

      Finally, such a program will likely have to also be the result of an executive order since it has little hope of passing in Congress where members of both the left and right will be vehemently against it. 

      “Any universal guarantee on all bank deposits, whether implicit or explicit, enshrines a dangerous precedent that simply encourages future irresponsible behavior to be paid for by those not involved who followed the rules,” the House Freedom Caucus said in a statement, and we are confident most of the progressive wing will not be too excited about bailing out billionaires and corporations with orders of magnitude more in the bank than the FDIC limit.

      As The Chicago Fed wrote in a paper in 1986 – after the deposit runs at Penn Square National Bank and Continental Illinois Bank – uninsured deposits are a source of market discipline for banks. Herbert Baer and Elijah Brewer go further, warning that doing away with insured deposits (i.e. by insuring every deposit as is being considered currently) would actually increase risk in the banking system.

      “While such proposals might reduce the likelihood of bank runs, they would at the same time reduce banks’ incentives to control risk.”

      Will US bank regulators learn from the mistakes of the past?

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 21:00

    • Biden Signs Bill To Declassify COVID Origins Intel
      Biden Signs Bill To Declassify COVID Origins Intel

      Having earlier issued his first veto since taking office, rejecting a bill that would have reversed a Labor Department rule on ESG investing, President Biden signed a bipartisan bill late on Monday that directs the federal government to declassify as much intelligence as possible about the origins of COVID-19.

      His signature follows both the House and Senate unanimously approving of the measure, a rare moment of overwhelming bipartisan consensus.

      The vote tallies meant that the measure would likely have survived a presidential veto had Biden opted to withhold his signature.

      Biden, in a statement, said he was pleased to sign the legislation.

      “My Administration will continue to review all classified information relating to COVID–19’s origins, including potential links to the Wuhan Institute of Virology,” he said.

      “In implementing this legislation, my administration will declassify and share as much of that information as possible, consistent with my constitutional authority to protect against the disclosure of information that would harm national security.”

      Of particular interest to freedom-loving Americans who were tyrannized, censored, banned, and deplatformed for even daring to mention it, is the small matter of whether the virus leaked from the Level 4 Virus Lab at the Wuhan Institute of Virology (or instead, as The Atlantic proclaimed recently, a sick pangolin fucked a raccoon dog and coughed in someone’s bat soup in a wet market.

      The Department of Energy and other federal agents such as the FBI have increasingly backed a lab leak as the likely origin of the virus, while some lawmakers have even suggested Beijing may have deliberately allowed it to spread.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 20:41

    • Putin Tells Xi He's "Open To Negotiating Process" On Ukraine As US Says Ceasefire "Unacceptable"
      Putin Tells Xi He’s “Open To Negotiating Process” On Ukraine As US Says Ceasefire “Unacceptable”

      Update(1017ET)What’s being described as an initial, informal meeting between Presidents Xi and Putin is underway at the Kremlin. While the expected cordialities and expressions of closer relations were exchange, among the most notable early statements came from Putin, who said he’s “open” to peace talks with Ukraine and China’s mediation efforts.

      “We have a lot of joint tasks, goals,” Putin told his Chinese counterpart while also congratulating him on re-election as the head of the Chinese state for a third 5-year term. Xi in return said “Russia succeeded in promoting prosperity under Putin’s leadership.” Putin further expressed that “we will discuss your initiative [on Ukraine] which we view with respect.”

      “We are open for a negotiating process on Ukraine,” the Russian leader added. He noted to Xi that “we have looked at your proposals for the resolution of the Ukraine conflict” and previewed that “we will discuss this question.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The day prior in media interviews, White House NSC spokesperson John Kirby declared that any “call for a ceasefire” in Ukraine is “unacceptable.”

      Likely Moscow will only be satisfied with nothing short of a full Kiev recognition of the Donbass being under Russia; however, this is the very thing Washington will condemn and seek to induce the Zelensky administration to resist.

      According to state media commentary (RT), “Moscow has said that it would consider the proposal but has pointed to several factors that stand in the way of a peaceful resolution in Ukraine.” And more of Moscow’s perspective headed into more Xi meetings: “Those include the insistence of Kiev and its Western backers on inflicting a military defeat of Russia, their firm opposition to any sort of ceasefire, as well as a law enacted by Ukrainian President Vladimir Zelensky that forbids holding negotiations with Russia as long as Putin remains in office.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      * * *

      Chinese President Xi Jinping has arrived in Moscow on Monday for what Beijing is calling a “trip for peace” – but at a moment the White House is emphasizing “We don’t support calls for a ceasefire right now,” according to the words of White House National Security Council spokesman John Kirby. “We certainly don’t support calls for a ceasefire that would be called for by the PRC in a meeting in Moscow that would simply benefit Russia,” Kirby said.

      The three-day trip was kicked off as Xi’s plane touched down at Moscow’s Vnukovo airport, where Russia’s deputy prime minister for tourism, sport, culture and communications, Dmitri N. Chernyshenko, greeted him a red carpet ceremony and military brass band. His first stop was the Kremlin for an initial and informal meeting with President Putin.

      Image: Kommersant/AFP

      “I am very glad, at the invitation of President Vladimir Vladimirovich Putin, to come back to the land of our close neighbor on a state visit,” Mr. Xi said upon arrival. He added: “China and Russia are good neighbors and reliable partners connected by mountains and rivers.”

      Kremlin spokesman Dmitry Peskov told reporters that China’s 12-point peace plan in Ukraine will top the agenda. “One way or another, issues raised in (Beijing’s) plan for Ukraine will be touched upon during the negotiations,” he said. “Comprehensive explanations will be given by President Putin” of the Russian position.”

      Just hours ahead of the Chinese presidential plane being en route, both Xi and Putin published separate articles previewing the bilateral summit, with Xi emphasizing China’s push to end the Ukraine crisis reflects global support. Putin for his part wrote that he has “high expectations for the upcoming talks” with his “good old friend”.

      Putin said he enjoys the “warmest relationship” with Xi, in a partnership between countries which is “consistently growing stronger” and has reached “the highest level in their history”. Speaking of the talks, the first in-person summit with the Chinese leader since the start of the Ukraine war, Putin stressed, “We have no doubt that they will give a new powerful impetus to our bilateral cooperation in its entirety.” According to more from Putin’s letter, published also in English on state websites:

      Yet the main thing has remained unchanged: I am talking of the firm friendship between Russia and China, which is consistently growing stronger for the benefit and in the interest of our countries and peoples. The progress made in the development of bilateral ties is impressive. The Russia-China relations have reached the highest level in their history and are gaining even more strength; they surpass Cold War-time military-political alliances in their quality, with no one to constantly order and no one to constantly obey, without limitations or taboos. We have reached an unprecedented level of trust in our political dialogue, our strategic cooperation has become truly comprehensive in nature and is standing on the brink of a new era.

      Putin also at one point took a swipe directly at the United States:

      Sticking more stubbornly than ever to its obsolete dogmata and vanishing dominance, the “Collective West” is gambling on the fates of entire states and peoples. The US’s policy of simultaneously deterring Russia and China, as well as all those who do not bend to the American dictation, is getting ever more fierce and aggressive. The international security and cooperation architecture is being dismantled. Russia has been labelled an “immediate threat” and China a “strategic competitor.”

      Meanwhile, Washington is watching the Xi trip very closely, also as the Chinese leader is at some point soon expected to hold a phone call with Ukrainian President Zelensky….

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      And on China’s mediation efforts in the Ukraine crisis in particular, Putin vowed that efforts to split the major Eurasian allies “won’t work”…

      “The crisis in Ukraine, which was provoked and is being diligently fuelled by the West, is the most striking, yet not the only, manifestation of its desire to retain its international dominance and preserve the unipolar world order,” the Russian leader wrote. “It is crystal clear that NATO is striving for a global reach of activities and seeking to penetrate the Asia-Pacific.” He continued:

      It obvious that there are forces persistently working to split the common Eurasian space into a network of “exclusive clubs” and military blocs that would serve to contain our countries’ development and harm their interests. This won’t work.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Putin concluded near the end of his letter, “We appreciate the well-balanced stance on the events in Ukraine adopted by the PRC, as well as its understanding of their historical background and root causes.” He emphasized: “We welcome China’s readiness to make a meaningful contribution to the settlement of the crisis.”

      The NY Times notes based on Chinese state media that Xi as accompanied to Moscow by “senior officials including Wang Yi, China’s highest ranking diplomat; Foreign Minister Qin Gang; and Cai Qi, director of the General Office of the Chinese Communist Party’s Central Committee.” Ukraine at the same time issued a call for Russia to remove all of its troops, saying this is the proper formula for the successful implementation of China’s ‘Peace Plan’.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 20:35

    • US Cattle Inventory Forecast Falls To Lowest Level In Nearly A Decade: USDA
      US Cattle Inventory Forecast Falls To Lowest Level In Nearly A Decade: USDA

      Authored by Allan Stein via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      Declining cattle production and drought contributed to a sizable drop in beef supplies last year, the lowest in nearly a decade, according to the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA).

      A view of cattle ruminating around Frank Konyn Dairy Inc. in Escondido, Calif., on April 16, 2020. (Ariana Drehsler/AFP via Getty Images)

      As of Jan. 1, there were 89.3 million head of cattle, down 3 percent from a year ago; and 29 million beef cows bred for slaughter in the United States, down 4 percent from last year.

      “Total red meat and poultry production in 2023 is forecast to decrease for the first time in nearly a decade,” the USDA said in its bi-annual livestock, dairy, and poultry outlook released in early March.

      “This is due to the 6-percent decline in beef production that more than offsets forecast increases in pork (2 percent), broiler meat (1 percent), and turkey (7 percent) production.”

      The report said dwindling cattle production would likely cause a “significant year-over-year decrease in beef production, the first decline since 2015.”

      However, the USDA expects pork supplies to increase in 2023 after two consecutive years of decline due to higher carcass weights.

      Broiler meat production is forecast to continue its longstanding upward trends into 2023, increasing marginally over last year’s record production,” the report added.

      “Turkey production is expected to increase throughout 2023, under the assumption that the sector recovers from Highly Pathogenic Avian Influenza outbreaks.”

      Of the 89.3 million head inventory, about 38 million cows and heifers produced calves in 2022, the report said.

      According to the USDA, drought conditions contributed to the yearly decline in the beef cow inventory last year.

      “While 2019 was the second-wettest year on record for the continental United States, after 1973, dry conditions began to persist in 2020, mostly in the West and Plains farm production regions,” the report noted.

      Overall, drought has contributed to reduced pasture and range conditions, and increased beef and cow slaughter. Any changes to the current drought conditions will likely impact inventory numbers in the coming year.”

      The U.S. Drought Monitor reported that 41.5 percent of the continental United States experienced moderate to exceptional drought during the third week of February.

      However, the agency’s three-month outlook in February said those conditions could persist in more than 34 percent of the lower 48 states, “with drought development likely in 8.9 percent of the country.

      Other report findings showed that the number of milk cows had increased to 9.4 million in 2022, while the calf crop had decreased by 2 percent from 2021 to about 35 million head.

      A higher forecast for beef cattle slaughter “more than offsets a decline in expected dressed weights, resulting in projected beef production being raised 165 million pounds to 26.7 billion pounds,” the USDA reported. “Fed cattle prices in 2023 are raised to $162 per hundredweight on firm demand. The trade forecast for 2023 is unchanged.”

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 20:20

    • LIV Golf "Strips" TV Crews Of Benefits As Ratings Sour
      LIV Golf “Strips” TV Crews Of Benefits As Ratings Sour

      Saudi-backed LIV Golf “stripped” broadcast workers of healthcare and other benefits by shifting to a non-union production company and circumventing the need to provide employee benefits. The move is an ominous sign the second season of the golf league, stacked with ex-PGA stars, struggles to garner enough viewership to even compete with the PGA Tour. 

      According to a statement from The International Alliance of Theatrical Stage Employees (IATSE), a labor union representing workers in the entertainment and TV production industries, LIV Golf “shocked” broadcast workers by “pulling the rug out from under them by shifting to a non-union production company and circumventing the need to provide important employee benefits.” 

      “As it stands, the technicians behind LIV Golf’s telecasts are some of the few in major sports who do not receive health and retirement benefits when providing world-class coverage,” IATSE wrote. 

      The sudden change comes as LIV Golf’s TV ratings cratered for the second time at its latest event in Tucson, Arizona. 

      Golf blog No Laying Up’s Kevin Van Valkenburg tweeted that LIV’s Tucson event over the weekend scored a .14 rating in the 18-49 demographic across 33 markets from their event on Saturday. That’s a worse rating than last month’s event which the “World’s Funniest Animals” show had more viewers. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      LIV suffers not just from dismal viewership but enormous overhead as the season is expected to cost the Saudi Arabian Government’s Public Investment Fund (PIF) a whopping billion dollars.

      Even though PIF has tremendous wealth, there’s no telling how long they will continue with this shaky venture. 

      Some broadcaster workers told IATSE they gave up stable jobs with good benefits — now LIV’s future is uncertain. 

      “I gave up other work last year to commit to LIV because I knew I would receive much-needed healthcare contributions to keep my family in coverage,” said one crewmember. “But now that’s all changed, there seems to be plenty of money to spend on extravagant excess but not to guarantee the crew that puts their product on the air access to healthcare. These are industry standards, and the LIV executives could care less.”

      Another broadcast worker said:

      “I’m in the twilight of my 30+ plus year career broadcasting golf, and I am losing much-needed retirement contributions, that I was counting on to keep me on track to reach my retirement goals,” said a veteran broadcast technician. “At this phase of my life, I must continue to save as much as possible to retire at an appropriate age.”

      One Twitter user said the IATSE statement “sounds like a human rights violation. I’m sure no one expected this from the Saudis.” 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Will LIV make it to a third season? 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 20:00

    • Home Surveillance Cameras Pose Privacy Risks, Data Leakage By Hacking
      Home Surveillance Cameras Pose Privacy Risks, Data Leakage By Hacking

      Authored by Rita Huang, Danny Tang and Nathan Amery via The Epoch Times,

      The Hong Kong Consumer Council tested the cyber security of ten home surveillance cameras on the market and found that only one model complied with the European cyber security standard. At the same time, the other nine posed various cyber security concerns, including the transmission of videos and data without encryption and failure to defend against “brute-force attacks” by hackers to crack passwords.

      The Consumer Council tested the cyber security of 10 home surveillance cameras on the market and found that only one sample met the European Cyber Security Requirements. (Courtesy of the Consumer Council)

      In addition, the security of user data storage could have been improved in many apps, with half of the tested models able to access the user files stored in intelligent devices through Android apps. Some apps even requested excessive permission.

      (The Epoch Times)

      The Council urges manufacturers to improve the cyber security of products, such as introducing anti-brute-force attack designs and data encryption of video and data.

      Consumers should also set strong passwords for their surveillance cameras and change them regularly and make good use of firewalls and network monitoring functions.

      The ten models of home surveillance cameras tested were priced between $269 and $1,888, all providing two-way audio, motion detection, night vision, Amazon Alexa, and Google Assistant voice control. The models tested were from Arlo, Xiaomi, Imou, TP-Link, BotsLab, Eufy, EZVIZ, SpotCam, D-Link, and Reolink.

      In addition, the Council commissioned an independent laboratory to test the cyber security and hardware design of these ten models with reference to the European Standards ETSI EN 303 645 and the industry-standard OWASP MASVS.

      Among the ten surveillance cameras, Arlo has the highest total score of four out of five, with five marks for protection against attack, security of data transmission and apps, and hardware design, but three marks for the security of data storage and the highest price of $1,888 in the sample.

      The other nine models have a micro-SD memory card slot, which can be inserted to save videos.

      5 Models Do Not Have Encrypted Data Transmission

      The Council said that live video streaming to mobile devices through the app allows users to keep track of the real-time status.

      Four models tested did not use Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) in live streaming, which could provide data encryption and message authentication. Instead, they used the less secure and unencrypted Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP).

      The four models are Imou (Model: IPC-F88FIP-V2), TP-Link (Model: Tapo C210), EZVIZ (Model: CS-C6), and D-Link (Model: DCS-8350LH).

      In addition, the Reolink (model: Argus 3 Pro) uses Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) to transmit data when connecting to the user’s Wi-Fi network without encrypting sensitive data so that hackers can find the router’s account information from ordinary text files.

      The Consumer Council recommends manufacturers switch to the more secure Hypertext Transfer Security Protocol (HTTPS) to provide excellent user protection.

      4 Failed to Defend Against Brute-force Attacks

      The test found that three samples could be cracked using automated tools and programs that repeatedly (Brute Force attacks) tested all possible password combinations during live motion picture streaming.

      The default passwords of EZVIZ and D-Link are only six digits or letters, which are very low in strength and are easily cracked. The Eufy (model: T8441X) could also be cracked.

      The Council mentioned that the sample of SpotCam (model: Solo 2) has no limit on how many times a hacker can log in with a mobile phone application to obtain account information.

      The Council recommends that the manufacturers of these four products incorporate anti-brute-force designs, such as multi-factor authentication and limiting the number of password attempts.

      Temporary Passwords are Valid When Logging Back Into the Account on 3 Models

      Each time the user logged in to connect to the camera, a conversation key equivalent to a temporary password would be used. The conversation key should expire after disconnection, and the user would use a new conversation key when logging in again.

      However, the test results showed that when the samples of BootsLab (model: P4 Pro), SpotCam, and Reolink were logged in to connect to the camera again, the conversation key used for the previous connection was still valid. If the hacker steals the old conversation key, he can connect to the camera and see the image.

      After logging out of an account or logging in to another account in the same mobile phone application, live images of the surveillance camera can still be seen on Reolink when connecting to the logged-out account, a security vulnerability.

      Insufficient Data Security for All Sample Applications Storage

      Sensitive information such as email addresses, account names, or passwords was stored in ordinary text files without encryption. The relevant information would only be removed after a certain time, posing risks.

      In addition, the embedded browser of the Android version of five samples did not block access to files, including Imou, TP-Link, Eufy, EZVIZ, and D-Link, which allowed hackers to access files in the device by implanting the code. In addition, there are five samples of mobile phone applications with excessive access rights, and the data inside the device may be leaked, including Xiaomi Mi (model: MJSXJ09CM), Imou, BotsLab, Eufy, and EZVIZ.

      The Council also pointed out that the Android version of BootsLab uses the obsolete Data Encryption Standard (DES) with a shorter key length of 56 bits.

      City University Scholar: Only Rely on Manufacturers to Improve Product Quality

      Mr. Tsang Kim Fung, Associate Professor of the Department of Electronic Engineering City the University of Hong Kong, believes that some samples have greater network security issues, such as unauthorized server access, insecure data transmission, and insecure data encryption, which may pose risks such as privacy leakage and mobile phone data leakage.

      However, the product design and application of the home surveillance cameras are the manufacturer’s responsibility, and consumers can only rely on the manufacturer to improve the quality of the product.

      The Council reminds consumers to be vigilant of the following when choosing and using home surveillance cameras.

      Consumers should avoid purchasing products without a brand name or from unknown sources. They should open the app and activate the camera only when monitoring is needed. Also, they should set a strong password with no fewer than eight characters. The password should also contain a combination of upper- and lower-case letters, numbers, and special symbols.

      The password should be changed regularly, and if the surveillance camera is installed and set up by someone providing door-to-door service, change the password immediately after installation.

      In addition, consumers should never use public devices and those without administrator permission to log into an account and avoid using public Wi-Fi networks for monitoring to prevent account data from being recorded and stolen.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 19:40

    • Kim Jong Un Oversees 'Simulated Nuclear Attack' On South Korea
      Kim Jong Un Oversees ‘Simulated Nuclear Attack’ On South Korea

      After days of repeat smaller missile tests aimed at sending a message to Washington amid joint US-South Korea military drills, which are the largest in years, North Korea on Monday said it launched a ballistic missile over the weekend as part of a simulated nuclear attack on the south.

      State media indicated that Kim Jong Un oversaw the drill which sought to push back “aggression” from enemies. Notably it came the same day that US B-1B strategic bombers joined the aerial exercises with the south’s military.

      Sunday’s launch of ballistic missile equipped with a mock nuclear warhead, via KCNA

      Pyongyang said of Sunday launch that it was “carried out under the tense situation in which a large-scale war drill is being frantically scaled up by the U.S.-South Korean allied forces to invade the DPRK and U.S. nuclear strategic assets are massively brought to South Korea.”

      This appears a reference to the US strategic bombers joining the drills. While there were reports that the north’s provocative Sunday launch involved a projectile tipped with a mock nuclear warhead, Pyongyang still claimed it had “no adverse effect on the security of the neighboring countries.”

      It reportedly exploded about 800 meters above targeted waters. According to further details of the launch:

      The suspected ballistic missile launched by North Korea on Sunday reached a maximum altitude of approximately 50km (31 miles) and flew a distance of approximately 800km (497 miles), according to Japan’s defense ministry. It was fired from the Dongchang-ri area of North Pyongan province in North Korea and landed in the sea between the Korean Peninsula and Japan, according to the South Korean military.

      South Korea’s Joint Chiefs of Staff (JCS) has meanwhile emphasized is remaining vigilant and prepared for more launches coming out of the north, “while maintaining a full readiness posture through close cooperation with the US.”

      Kim Jong Un monitors missile launch with his daughter, via KCNA

      Other regional powers are closely monitoring too, especially Japan. Its defense ministry said in a statement that these launches “threaten the peace and security of Japan, the region and the international community.”

      The ongoing 11-day Freedom Shield exercises between the United States and South Korea are being widely described as the largest war games among the allies in a half-decade. North Korea earlier warned it is ready to initiate the “toughest counteraction against the most vicious plots of the US and its followers.”

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 19:20

    • "I Couldn't Remain Silent": Physician Assistant Fired For Reporting COVID-19 Vaccine Adverse Events To VAERS
      “I Couldn’t Remain Silent”: Physician Assistant Fired For Reporting COVID-19 Vaccine Adverse Events To VAERS

      Authored by Matt McGregor via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      For her efforts to report injuries to the Vaccine Adverse Events Reporting System (VAERS) and to educate others in her hospital system on doing the same, Physician Assistant Deborah Conrad said she was labeled an anti-vaxxer and fired from her job.

      Whistleblower Deborah Conrad tells her story in Jackson, Miss., on Feb. 27, 2023. (Courtesy of Charlotte Stringer Photography)

      Today, the New York-based Conrad tells her story at medical freedom conferences throughout the country, the most recent being one in Mississippi where physicians, scientists, and the vaccine injured warned state lawmakers to pull the COVID-19 vaccines from the market.

      Conrad told The Epoch Times she began to see early danger signals in 2021 upon the vaccine rollout, and with that, resistance among her colleagues to report on them.

      After the vaccines came out, there was this uptick in unusual symptoms, some of which I had never seen in my 20-year career,” Conrad said. “In every case, it was in somebody who had received the COVID-19 vaccine.

      Conrad said she had never admitted an adult patient with RSV (respiratory syncytial virus) until the COVID-19 vaccines.

      “And every patient who came in with RSV was vaccinated for COVID,” Conrad said. “It wasn’t normal.”

      Then, there were the adolescents with no previous medical conditions who had gotten the COVID-19 vaccine a week prior and, suddenly, they were struck with pneumonia and not able to function, she said.

      They weren’t able to walk or eat, and they were completely and totally fatigued,” Conrad said.

      This was in 2021 before myocarditis was being discussed, so many of those early cases that were probably myocarditis were diagnosed as pneumonia, she said.

      “A lot of these myocarditis cases came in with fevers because of this massive inflammatory response that was taking place in the body, so they would be labeled as septic, treated as if we were treating pneumonia or fevers of unknown origin,” Conrad said. “We’d treat them with antibiotics and all sorts of other things, not realizing that they were having heart failure.”

      Conrad began reporting to VAERS, which she said was an overwhelming task not made easy by its multiple user-interface complications.

      My entire life had been taken over by doing these VAERS reports by myself,” she said.

      In meetings with leadership, she would propose implementing a reporting system and hiring someone to manage the reports, she said.

      ‘A Hostile Environment’

      “They kept telling me we’re looking into it and we’ll get back to you,” Conrad said. “Around April 2021, leadership came back and said no one else is reporting injuries—implying that I was crazy and there was nothing really going on with the vaccines.”

      Leadership then audited her reports, she said and concluded that she was overreporting.

      “I was then told that by doing VAERS reports and even discussing VAERS that it was an admission that the vaccines were unsafe, so it’s contributing to vaccine hesitancy,” Conrad said.

      From there, it became a “very hostile environment” that compelled her to seek legal counsel, who wrote letters to the Department of Health, the CDC, and the FDA.

      No one cared,” Conrad said. “Finally, I had had it. It was so unethical; I couldn’t take it anymore. These VAERS reports are critical to assuring these vaccines are safe for us all. I could no longer be a part of a system that is lying to the American people.”

      Conrad decided to become a whistleblower, telling her story on Del Bigtree’s The Highwire, knowing, she said, that it would cost her job.

      I couldn’t remain silent, even if it meant losing my career and everything I worked for,” she said. “I was fired a few weeks later and walked out like a criminal in front of all my peers.”

      The initiative and education she had brought forth to report to VAERS were squashed that day, she said.

      Whistleblower Deborah Conrad speaks about her termination for attempting to utilize the VAERS reporting in her hospital system, in Jackson, Miss., on Feb. 27, 2023. (Courtesy of Charlotte Stringer Photography)

      National Vaccine Injury Act of 1986

      According to Barbara Loe Fisher, co-founder and president of the National Vaccine Information Center (NVIC), under the National Vaccine Injury Act of 1986, it’s a federal requirement for health care workers to report vaccine-related adverse events to VAERS.

      Fisher, whose son was harmed by the DTP vaccine in 1980, worked with other parents of vaccine-injured children in establishing the NVIC in 1982.

      “The 1986 Act was driven by parents of DPT vaccine injured children asking the government to pass legislation to secure vaccine safety informing, recording, reporting, and research provisions in the vaccination system to make it safer, and to create a federal compensation system alternative to a lawsuit against manufacturers of vaccines that injure or kill children,” Fisher told The Epoch Times.

      In addition to NVIC arguing that physicians and vaccine manufacturers should be giving informed consent and report injuries, the organization maintained they should also continue to be held accountable in a civil court to serve as an incentive for physicians to administer vaccines responsibly, for manufacturers to produce safer vaccines, and for adequate federal compensation to vaccine-injured children.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 19:00

    • US Unveils $350M More Defense Aid For Ukraine, Condemns Xi-Putin Meeting
      US Unveils $350M More Defense Aid For Ukraine, Condemns Xi-Putin Meeting

      On Monday US Secretary of State Antony Blinken once again emphasized that the Biden administration remains ready to support Ukraine “for as long as it takes.”

      He also unveiled the latest defense aid package – at $350 million including more missiles and air defense missiles, listed among these more High Mobility Artillery Rocket Systems (HIMARS) and howitzers, ammo for Bradley Infantry Fighting Vehicles, high-speed anti-radiation missiles, anti-tank weapons as well as and riverine boats, according to The Hill

      Via Reuters

      “This week, as Russia’s unconscionable war of aggression against Ukraine continues at great human cost, we are again reminded of the boundless courage and steadfast resolve of the Ukrainian people, and the strong support for Ukraine across the international community,” Blinken said.  

      The Hill reviews concerning total defense aid pledged thus far, “With Monday’s announcement, the United States has now committed more than $32 billion in lethal aid to Ukraine through presidential drawdown since Russia first attacked the country more than a year ago.”

      Blinken also on Monday condemned the visit of China’s President Xi to Putin to talk Ukraine peace…

      “That President Xi is traveling to Russia days after the International Criminal Court issued an arrest warrant for President Putin suggests that China feels no responsibility to hold the Kremlin accountable for the atrocities committed in Ukraine, and instead of even condemning them, it would rather provide diplomatic cover for Russia to continue to commit those very crimes,” Blinken said.

      Xi Jinping’s visit “suggests that China feels no responsibility to hold the president accountable for the atrocities committed in Ukraine,” the US top diplomat stated.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Blinken described China’s 12-point Ukraine peace plan as essentially nothing but a scheme to provide diplomatic cover to Russia’s war crimes. Despite all of this, Zelensky himself has maintained some degree of openness, and is likely to hold a phone call with Xi in the coming days to explore potential ceasefire options.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 18:40

    • California Hospital Refuses Transplant Surgery For Unvaccinated Woman With End-Stage Kidney Disease
      California Hospital Refuses Transplant Surgery For Unvaccinated Woman With End-Stage Kidney Disease

      Authored by Allan Stein via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      Even on a good day, Linda Garinger of Ramona, California, thinks about dying.

      Linda Garinger (L), who has end-stage kidney disease, and her daughter Emily Lewis read the letter from a hospital denying Garinger a kidney transplant operation because she won’t get a COVID-19 vaccine. (Allan Stein/The Epoch Times)

      Since she went on kidney dialysis two years ago, she’s had a heart attack and a cardiac episode associated with her thrice-weekly treatments.

      Her energy is low as her other vital organs slowly fail. Her blood pressure is out of control—hovering at around 200 systolic over “100-something”diastolic whenever she undergoes dialysis.

      Garinger feels it’s only a matter of time before her next heart attack, which could prove fatal unless she gets a new kidney.

      Linda Garinger, 68, of Ramona, Calif., looks out her living room window on March 13, 2023. (Allan Stein/The Epoch Times)

      The dialysis is very stressful on me. My vision is going. My hair is falling out. I’ve got skin cancer,” said Garinger, 68. “They said it’s from the dialysis not filtering out all the bad stuff.

      “My biggest fear is I’ll have a heart attack during dialysis. I’m just going downhill right now.”

      In 2022, Garinger was eagerly waiting for a kidney transplant at Sharp Memorial Hospital in San Diego, having found a good organ match in her daughter, the doctors told her.

      But, “I needed [the transplant] like two years ago,” Garinger said.

      Early last May, Garinger received an unexpected letter from the hospital saying she was no longer on the United Network for Organ Sharing (UNOS) waitlist for a kidney transplant.

      “The reason for this status change is you have not had your COVID vaccines,” read the May 6, 2022, letter Garinger shared with The Epoch Times.

      “Once this situation is remedied, you will be evaluated for re-activation on the transplant waitlist.”

      Garinger did not appeal the hospital’s decision. She knew “in her gut” her unvaccinated status would always be a problem.

      Still, she put her faith in Sharp Memorial, only to be put through tests, medical procedures, and consultations at a substantial cost to Medicare.

      “The whole time, they knew I wasn’t vaccinated and that [my daughter] wasn’t vaccinated. They would always ask me, ‘Why don’t you want to get a vaccine?’”

      “I was pretty adamant,” said Garinger. “I didn’t want to take anything that was still experimental.”

      She remembered her good friend who died two weeks after receiving a COVID shot. “She lived right over here, on the other side [of the street],” Garinger said.

      Garinger said she was fortunate to find another hospital nearby that would operate without her taking the vaccine.

      Starting All Over

      The challenge now is the time it will take to complete all the required paperwork and preliminary procedures, the time it will take to get on a waitlist for a kidney donor, and the time it will take to find a donor.

      She fears her time will run out before then.

      One sympathetic doctor said, ‘Linda, you could drop over dead. Your heart could stop.’ So, I have to watch what I eat, and on the days I don’t do dialysis, I take this powder that tastes like gritty sand” to remove the excess potassium from her body.

      Garinger finds herself among many people who need an organ transplant but are up against a medical system still adhering to vaccine protocols in many facilities.

      In a 2021 Healio transplantation survey, 60 percent of the 141 transplant centers that responded did not require a COVID-19 injection before surgery. The survey sample represented just over 56 percent of the transplant centers in the United States.

      Jeffrey Childers, a commercial attorney based in Gainesville, Florida, served clients facing COVID-19 mandates at hospitals and medical clinics during the pandemic.

      He said Garinger’s case reflects the “COVID mania” that permeated the medical establishment beginning in 2020.

      “This was an ugly manifestation of the COVID management regime that popped up,” Childers said. “All the cases get a lot of attention because people are horrified. But the transplant people will say they have limited resources, only get so many organs each year, and we have to give them to people with the best survival chances. They’ll hide behind that forever.”

      Life-and-Death Decisions

      Childers said health care facilities still have tremendous discretionary power to make critical decisions concerning COVID-19 vaccines.

      “To see these kinds of life-and-death bureaucratic powers wielded by people who are not motivated by the science but—something else—is horrifying,” Childers said.

      “I’ve run into it a handful of times in Florida. The law that applies is state dependent. The folks who manage those donor lists and the assignments have a lot of discretion.

      “It’s even more appalling it’s happening now so late in the pandemic when the mandates are gone. You can’t find a single person who says they regret not taking the vaccine. But you can find tons going the other way.”

      Childers said pro-vaccine advocates argue that an unvaccinated recipient is much more likely to die from COVID-19 following transplant surgery than a vaccinated patient.

      I don’t know the official line anymore,” he told The Epoch Times. “[The vaccine] doesn’t stop you from dying. It doesn’t stop you from getting sick.”

      One study in the November 2022 MDPI, a Switzerland-based publisher of open-access scientific journals, claimed that over 60 days, the death rate among unvaccinated kidney transplant patients was 11.2 percent at the time of COVID-19 infection.

      The study found the death rate among the vaccinated was 2.2 percent. More than two-thirds of the 144 patients in the study received a kidney transplant.

      By contrast, a study published in the Journal of Clinical Medicine in September 2022 found that some cornea transplant patients rejected the grafts after receiving a COVID-19 vaccine.

      In some cases, the rejection took place 20 years after the procedure.

      Childers believes the science generally does not support the notion that unvaccinated transplant recipients are at an increased risk of dying from COVID-19.

      The argument is always don’t give an organ to a person who is living some kind of lifestyle that is risky or increases the risk of dying from something else,” Childers told The Epoch Times.

      “That’s the logic they’re applying to this. They’re essentially saying by not taking the vaccine, [transplant patients] are at higher risk of dying from COVID. So they don’t want to give an organ to somebody at high risk voluntarily.”

      Ohio attorney Warner Mendenhall, representing clients in vaccine mandate cases, said he knows at least 60 organ transplant denial suits working through the medical freedom group Liberty Counsel.

      Each case involves a client refusing to take the COVID-19 vaccine required for transplant surgery.

      “We’re seeing [transplant denials] at many hospitals across the country,” Mendenhall said.

      And while the medical establishment remains split on the safety and effectiveness of COVID-19 injections, some “medical people are concerned about clotting and other issues that occur with the vaccinated.”

      “Especially if you’ve got liver and kidney problems and need that type of transfer, you don’t want to be vaccinated before the transplant. That’s my understanding,” Mendenhall said.

      A ‘Fiduciary Responsibility’ to Patients

      Often, the unvaccinated transplant patient has maintained a longstanding medical relationship with the hospital or clinic without issue before the COVID-19 vaccine rollouts.

      For this reason, Mendenhall believes there is a “fiduciary relationship that the hospitals engage in with a transplant patient.” To break that obligation would be “a real breach of that fiduciary responsibility to them.”

      According to the Chronic Disease Research Group, an estimated 37 million people in the United States have kidney disease in varying stages.

      About 1 million Americans are in the end stages of the disease. At the same time, 550,000 undergo kidney dialysis to remove excess toxins from the blood because their kidneys cannot perform this function.

      The average wait time for a kidney transplant in the United States is three to five years at most health facilities, but it’s longer in some parts of the country, according to kidney.org.

      “It is best to explore transplant before you need to start dialysis. This way, you might be able to get a transplant ‘preemptively,’ before you need dialysis,” the organization’s website states.

      “It takes time to find the right transplant center for you, to complete the transplant evaluation, to get on the transplant waitlist for a deceased donor, or to find a living kidney donor if you can.”

      Garinger said she is in terminal Stage 5 of her kidney disease and needs dialysis almost every other day to stay alive.

      “I’m pissed off,” said Garinger, who gets short of breath just walking to the kitchen.

      I can’t walk to Costco or a grocery store now. My muscles—I get out of wind so easily. I can’t walk down to my chickens anymore.

      Her daughter Emily Lewis, 35, is a recent medical assistant program graduate and is now her mother’s live-in caretaker as she waits for a kidney transplant.

      “I put my life on hold because [of my mother],” Lewis said, although she has no regrets.

      With her career in limbo, Lewis said she is angry at the injustice of the COVID-19 mandates while doubting the shots even work.

      Linda Garinger, who has end-stage kidney disease, goes through her medicines on March 13, 2023. (Allan Stein/The Epoch Times)

      “Everyone I know who’s COVID vaccinated has had it four or five times. I’ve had it zero,” Lewis told The Epoch Times.

      Denied access to the kidney wait list at Sharp Memorial, Garinger found that the University of California San Diego Medical Center was willing to perform the kidney transplant surgery.

      But the longer it takes to find a kidney donor, the more likely it is that she won’t make it back to a more normal life.

      She characterized her relationship with her doctors at Sharp Memorial as adversarial since she opposed taking the COVID-19 vaccine under any circumstances.

      She remembered one doctor in Ramona who kept “pressuring me” about the vaccine.

      He said, “What will you do if you get COVID? What if you catch COVID and you have to go to the hospital?’

      “Well,” she told him. “I have this protocol on my fridge—vitamins C and D. I have ivermectin. Number one: I won’t go to the hospital. It’s a death sentence there.”

      “I guess you know more than me,’” the doctor said as he stood up and left the room.

      “I didn’t know I had an adversary” or that “I was an evil person. I just had a gut feeling they would deny me [a kidney] because they kept pressuring me about the shot.”

      “They did the same thing with me,” Emily said.

      ‘Why Aren’t You Vaccinated?’

      At one point, Garinger demanded data showing the vaccine’s side effects.

      “There was none,” she said. “It came down to the last final interview with the surgeon. All he could ask me was, ‘Why aren’t you vaccinated? Why don’t you want to get vaccinated?’”

      “I don’t have COVID,” Garinger said. “[Emily] doesn’t have COVID. Another thing they told me was we were a [donor] match. And then I got to UCSD, and the bloodwork showed she was not a match.”

      Sharp Memorial did not respond to a request for comment from The Epoch Times. UCSD Medical Center did not return an email seeking comment.

      New Orleans attorney David Dalia said Garinger’s case seems to be medical “discrimination.”

      They are discriminating against her based on her vaccination status,” he said.

      During the pandemic, Dalia worked on vaccine mandate cases with Frontline doctors, filing amicus briefs on behalf of 1.5 million federal employees who refused to take a COVID-19 vaccine by order of President Joe Biden.

      “The truth is [Garinger] has a lot better chance of living than a vaccinated person. We can back that up. They’re viewing it as sort of a disability.

      “Well, that’s a violation of the Americans with Disabilities Act. And federal law specifically says all experimental use authorization drugs are strictly voluntary and subject to informed consent.”

      Dalia said informed consent is “never coerced.”

      As Garinger works through the intake process at UCSD Medical Center, she has good, bad, and “hell” days.

      “I sit in a chair all day,” said Garinger, who ran a successful foreclosure business before she retired due to her illness. “[Emily] helps me do cooking. She does all the chopping and stuff. I have a chair in the kitchen. I walk to the kitchen and start cooking. I don’t do much. My gardening is on hold—everything is on hold. My muscles are gone. I use electric carts to go to Costco. I can’t do anything. I’m out of breath. It sucks.”

      “Every part of my body is deteriorating. So, I’m on hold until I get a kidney.”

      Just as painful are the times people call her “evil ” because she refuses to take an mRNA vaccine for COVID-19.

      “You’re going to give [COVID] to everybody,” they tell her. “You’re evil for not getting vaccinated.”

      “That’s how I felt,” Garinger told The Epoch Times.

      She said another fear is receiving a kidney from a vaccinated donor, with unknown health effects, since there is no way to determine which donor is vaccinated and which one is not.

      Feeling her time is growing short, Garinger said she is still determined to keep fighting in the time she has left.

      “I’ve got to get this done. Every day there’s something else going wrong with me because my kidneys are gone,” Garinger said.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 18:20

    • 16 Terrorists On FBI Watchlist Crossed Southern Border In February Alone; CBP Data Shows
      16 Terrorists On FBI Watchlist Crossed Southern Border In February Alone; CBP Data Shows

      Authored by Steve Watson via Summit News,

      Fresh data from Customs and Border Protection has revealed that sixteen people matched to the FBI’s terrorist watchlist were apprehended by Border Patrol agents in February alone.

      As reported by Fox News, the total number of individuals on the watchlist found to be attempting to enter the country so far this fiscal year is now 69.

      CBP expects the trend to continue, and to smash last fiscal year’s record 98 encounters.

      Between FY17 and FY20 there were only 8 of these terror watchlist arrests, and in 2021 only 15.

      Federal Data Quietly Reveals 100 Terror Suspects Caught At Southern Border

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–
      !function(c,d){"use strict";var e=!1,n=!1;if(d.querySelector)if(c.addEventListener)e=!0;if(c.wp=c.wp||{},!c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage)if(c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage=function(e){var t=e.data;if(t)if(t.secret||t.message||t.value)if(!/[^a-zA-Z0-9]/.test(t.secret)){for(var r,a,i,s=d.querySelectorAll('iframe[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),n=d.querySelectorAll('blockquote[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),o=0;o<n.length;o++)n[o].style.display="none";for(o=0;o<s.length;o++)if(r=s[o],e.source===r.contentWindow){if(r.removeAttribute("style"),"height"===t.message){if(1e3<(i=parseInt(t.value,10)))i=1e3;else if(~~i<200)i=200;r.height=i}if("link"===t.message)if(a=d.createElement("a"),i=d.createElement("a"),a.href=r.getAttribute("src"),i.href=t.value,i.host===a.host)if(d.activeElement===r)c.top.location.href=t.value}}},e)c.addEventListener("message",c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage,!1),d.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded",t,!1),c.addEventListener("load",t,!1);function t(){if(!n){n=!0;for(var e,t,r=-1!==navigator.appVersion.indexOf("MSIE 10"),a=!!navigator.userAgent.match(/Trident.*rv:11\./),i=d.querySelectorAll("iframe.wp-embedded-content"),s=0;s

      //–>

      //–>

      //–>

      When border the Southern and Northern borders are taken into account, FY23 has seen 214 people in the Terrorist Screening Database stopped by CBP agents to date. Last year, the total was 380, yet the year before that there were only 157 encounters.

      The Department of Homeland Security says the border is secure and claims that the biggest terror threat the U.S. faces is ‘domestic extremists’ radicalised by “false narratives propagated on online platforms.”

      DHS Chief Says Biggest Terror Threat is Americans Radicalized by ‘Online Narratives’

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–
      !function(c,d){"use strict";var e=!1,n=!1;if(d.querySelector)if(c.addEventListener)e=!0;if(c.wp=c.wp||{},!c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage)if(c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage=function(e){var t=e.data;if(t)if(t.secret||t.message||t.value)if(!/[^a-zA-Z0-9]/.test(t.secret)){for(var r,a,i,s=d.querySelectorAll('iframe[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),n=d.querySelectorAll('blockquote[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),o=0;o<n.length;o++)n[o].style.display="none";for(o=0;o<s.length;o++)if(r=s[o],e.source===r.contentWindow){if(r.removeAttribute("style"),"height"===t.message){if(1e3<(i=parseInt(t.value,10)))i=1e3;else if(~~i<200)i=200;r.height=i}if("link"===t.message)if(a=d.createElement("a"),i=d.createElement("a"),a.href=r.getAttribute("src"),i.href=t.value,i.host===a.host)if(d.activeElement===r)c.top.location.href=t.value}}},e)c.addEventListener("message",c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage,!1),d.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded",t,!1),c.addEventListener("load",t,!1);function t(){if(!n){n=!0;for(var e,t,r=-1!==navigator.appVersion.indexOf("MSIE 10"),a=!!navigator.userAgent.match(/Trident.*rv:11\./),i=d.querySelectorAll("iframe.wp-embedded-content"),s=0;s

      //–>

      //–>

      //–>

      The latest data shows that on the whole, CBP apprehended 128,877 people who crossed the border illegally in January and another 128,913 in February.

      Those figures are down from December when a record amount of illegal crossings were recorded, as 251,487 illegal immigrants crossed, marking the highest monthly total in history. A total of 17 individuals on the terrorism watchlist were apprehended.

      CBP Figures Show Highest Monthly Total Of Illegal Crossings EVER Recorded

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–
      !function(c,d){"use strict";var e=!1,n=!1;if(d.querySelector)if(c.addEventListener)e=!0;if(c.wp=c.wp||{},!c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage)if(c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage=function(e){var t=e.data;if(t)if(t.secret||t.message||t.value)if(!/[^a-zA-Z0-9]/.test(t.secret)){for(var r,a,i,s=d.querySelectorAll('iframe[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),n=d.querySelectorAll('blockquote[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),o=0;o<n.length;o++)n[o].style.display="none";for(o=0;o<s.length;o++)if(r=s[o],e.source===r.contentWindow){if(r.removeAttribute("style"),"height"===t.message){if(1e3<(i=parseInt(t.value,10)))i=1e3;else if(~~i<200)i=200;r.height=i}if("link"===t.message)if(a=d.createElement("a"),i=d.createElement("a"),a.href=r.getAttribute("src"),i.href=t.value,i.host===a.host)if(d.activeElement===r)c.top.location.href=t.value}}},e)c.addEventListener("message",c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage,!1),d.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded",t,!1),c.addEventListener("load",t,!1);function t(){if(!n){n=!0;for(var e,t,r=-1!==navigator.appVersion.indexOf("MSIE 10"),a=!!navigator.userAgent.match(/Trident.*rv:11\./),i=d.querySelectorAll("iframe.wp-embedded-content"),s=0;s

      //–>

      //–>

      //–>

      Last week, during testimony before the House, Border Patrol chief Raúl Ortiz contradicted Biden administration officials by stating that there is a full on crisis on the southern border, urging that it is not secure, and calling for a wall to be built.

      Video: Border Patrol Chief Testifies Border Is Not Secure, Wall Needed

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–

      <!–
      !function(c,d){"use strict";var e=!1,n=!1;if(d.querySelector)if(c.addEventListener)e=!0;if(c.wp=c.wp||{},!c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage)if(c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage=function(e){var t=e.data;if(t)if(t.secret||t.message||t.value)if(!/[^a-zA-Z0-9]/.test(t.secret)){for(var r,a,i,s=d.querySelectorAll('iframe[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),n=d.querySelectorAll('blockquote[data-secret="'+t.secret+'"]'),o=0;o<n.length;o++)n[o].style.display="none";for(o=0;o<s.length;o++)if(r=s[o],e.source===r.contentWindow){if(r.removeAttribute("style"),"height"===t.message){if(1e3<(i=parseInt(t.value,10)))i=1e3;else if(~~i<200)i=200;r.height=i}if("link"===t.message)if(a=d.createElement("a"),i=d.createElement("a"),a.href=r.getAttribute("src"),i.href=t.value,i.host===a.host)if(d.activeElement===r)c.top.location.href=t.value}}},e)c.addEventListener("message",c.wp.receiveEmbedMessage,!1),d.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded",t,!1),c.addEventListener("load",t,!1);function t(){if(!n){n=!0;for(var e,t,r=-1!==navigator.appVersion.indexOf("MSIE 10"),a=!!navigator.userAgent.match(/Trident.*rv:11\./),i=d.querySelectorAll("iframe.wp-embedded-content"),s=0;s

      //–>

      //–>

      //–>

      Ortiz noted that there have already been approximately 385,000 known gotaways at the border since fiscal year 2023 began on Oct 1. That is in addition to 600,000 in FY’22, and 390,000 in FY’21. There have been approximately 1.4 million gotaways since start of FY’21.

      Meanwhile:

      *  *  *

      Brand new merch now available! Get it at https://www.pjwshop.com/

      In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. We need you to sign up for our free newsletter here. Support our sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown. Also, we urgently need your financial support here.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 03/20/2023 – 17:40

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 20th March 2023

    • What Follows US Hegemony
      What Follows US Hegemony

      Authored by Vijay Prashad via thetricontiental.org,

      On 24 February 2023, the Chinese Foreign Ministry released a twelve-point plan entitled ‘China’s Position on the Political Settlement of the Ukraine Crisis’.

      This ‘peace plan’, as it has been called, is anchored in the concept of sovereignty, building upon the well-established principles of the United Nations Charter (1945) and the Ten Principles from the Bandung Conference of African and Asian states held in 1955. The plan was released two days after China’s senior diplomat Wang Yi visited Moscow, where he met with Russia’s President Vladimir Putin.

      Russia’s interest in the plan was confirmed by Kremlin spokesperson Dmitry Peskov shortly after the visit: ‘Any attempt to produce a plan that would put the [Ukraine] conflict on a peace track deserves attention. We are considering the plan of our Chinese friends with great attention’.

      Ukraine’s President Volodymyr Zelensky welcomed the plan hours after it was made public, saying that he would like to meet China’s President Xi Jinping as soon as possible to discuss a potential peace process. France’s President Emmanuel Macron echoed this sentiment, saying that he would visit Beijing in early April. There are many interesting aspects of this plan, notably a call to end all hostilities near nuclear power plants and a pledge by China to help fund the reconstruction of Ukraine. But perhaps the most interesting feature is that a peace plan did not come from any country in the West, but from Beijing.

      When I read ‘China’s Position on the Political Settlement of the Ukraine Crisis’, I was reminded of ‘On the Pulse of Morning’, a poem published by Maya Angelou in 1993, the rubble of the Soviet Union before us, the terrible bombardment of Iraq by the United States still producing aftershocks, the tremors felt in Afghanistan and Bosnia. The title of this newsletter, ‘Birth Again the Dream of Global Peace and Mutual Respect’, sits at the heart of the poem. Angelou wrote alongside the rocks and the trees, those who outlive humans and watch us destroy the world. Two sections of the poem bear repeating:

      Each of you, a bordered country,
      Delicate and strangely made proud,
      Yet thrusting perpetually under siege.
      Your armed struggles for profit
      Have left collars of waste upon
      My shore, currents of debris upon my breast.
      Yet today I call you to my riverside,
      If you will study war no more. Come,
      Clad in peace, and I will sing the songs
      The Creator gave to me when I and the
      Tree and the rock were one.
      Before cynicism was a bloody sear across your
      Brow and when you yet knew you still
      Knew nothing.
      The River sang and sings on.

      History, despite its wrenching pain
      Cannot be unlived, but if faced
      With courage, need not be lived again.

      History cannot be forgotten, but it need not be repeated. That is the message of Angelou’s poem and the message of the study we released last week, Eight Contradictions of the Imperialist ‘Rules-Based Order’.

      In October 2022, Cuba’s Centre for International Policy Research (CIPI) held its 7th Conference on Strategic Studies, which studied the shifts taking place in international relations, with an emphasis on the declining power of the Western states and the emergence of a new confidence in the developing world. There is no doubt that the United States and its allies continue to exercise immense power over the world through military force and control over financial systems. But with the economic rise of several developing countries, with China at their head, a qualitative change can be felt on the world stage. An example of this trend is the ongoing dispute amongst the G20 countries, many of which have refused to line up against Moscow despite pressure by the United States and its European allies to firmly condemn Russia for the war in Ukraine. This change in the geopolitical atmosphere requires precise analysis based on the facts.

      To that end, our latest dossier, Sovereignty, Dignity, and Regionalism in the New International Order (March 2023), produced in collaboration with CIPI, brings together some of the thinking about the emergence of a new global dispensation that will follow the period of US hegemony.

      The text opens with a foreword by CIPI’s director, José R. Cabañas Rodríguez, who makes the point that the world is already at war, namely a war imposed on much of the world (including Cuba) by the United States and its allies through blockades and economic policies such as sanctions that strangle the possibilities for development. As Greece’s former Finance Minister Yanis Varoufakis said, coups these days ‘do not need tanks. They achieve the same result with banks’.

      The US is attempting to maintain its position of ‘single master’ through an aggressive military and diplomatic push both in Ukraine and Taiwan, unconcerned about the great destabilisation this has inflicted upon the world. This approach was reflected in US Defence Secretary Lloyd Austin’s admission that ‘We want to see Russia weakened’ and in US House Foreign Affairs Committee Chairman Michael McCaul’s statement that ‘Ukraine today – it’s going to be Taiwan tomorrow’. It is a concern about this destabilisation and the declining fortunes of the West that has led most of the countries in the world to refuse to join efforts to isolate Russia.

      As some of the larger developing countries, such as China, Brazil, India, Mexico, Indonesia, and South Africa, pivot away from reliance upon the United States and its Western allies, they have begun to discuss a new architecture for a new world order. What is quite clear is that most of these countries – despite great differences in the political traditions of their respective governments – now recognise that the United States ‘rules-based international order’ is no longer able to exercise the authority it once had. The actual movement of history shows that the world order is moving from one anchored by US hegemony to one that is far more regional in character. US policymakers, as part of their fearmongering, suggest that China wants to take over the world, along the grain of the ‘Thucydides Trap’ argument that when a new aspirant to hegemony appears on the scene, it tends to result in war between the emerging power and existing great power. However, this argument is not based on facts.

      Rather than seek to generate additional poles of power – in the mould of the United States – and build a ‘multipolar’ world, developing countries are calling for a world order rooted in the UN Charter as well as strong regional trade and development systems. ‘This new internationalism can only be created – and a period of global Balkanisation avoided’, we write in our latest dossier, ‘by building upon a foundation of mutual respect and strength of regional trade systems, security organisations, and political formations’. Indicators of this new attitude are present in the discussions taking place in the Global South about the war in Ukraine and are reflected in the Chinese plan for peace.

      Our dossier analyses at some length this moment of fragility for US power and its ‘rules-based international order’. We trace the revival of multilateralism and regionalism, which are key concepts of the emerging world order. The growth of regionalism is reflected in the creation of a host of vital regional bodies, from the Community of Latin American and Caribbean States (CELAC) to the Shanghai Cooperation Organisation (SCO), alongside increasing regional trade (with the BRICS bloc being a kind of ‘regionalism plus’ for our period). Meanwhile, the emphasis on returning to international institutions for global decision-making, as evidenced by the formation of the Group of Friends in Defence of the UN Charter, for example, illustrates the reinvigorated desire for multilateralism.

      The United States remains a powerful country, but it has not come to terms with the immense changes taking place in the world order. It must temper its belief in its ‘manifest destiny’ and recognise that it is nothing more than another country amongst the 193 members states of the United Nations. The great powers – including the United States – will either find ways to accommodate and cooperate for the common good, or they will all collapse together.

      At the start of the pandemic, the head of the World Health Organisation, Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, urged the countries of the world to be more collaborative and less confrontational, saying that ‘this is the time for solidarity, not stigma’ and repeating, in the years since, that nations must ‘work together across ideological divides to find common solutions to common problems’.

      These wise words must be heeded.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 23:30

    • Best Used Cars Under $15,000 For Those Who Cannot Afford New
      Best Used Cars Under $15,000 For Those Who Cannot Afford New

      Americans are spending too much on their new vehicles, and the average household can no longer afford $1,000 monthly payments. Consequently, a growing number of folks are turning to the secondary market for used cars even though prices are reaccelerating this spring. 

      Business Insider and Consumer Reports have constructed a report of the best-used car’s money can buy for under $15,000. 

      The small cars, sedans, trucks, and SUVs listed below are considered the most reliable, affordable, and equipped with modern safety features built within the last decade. 

      Here’s the list: 

      Small car under $10,000: Nissan Leaf (2013, 2015)

      Midsized car under $10,000: Subaru Legacy (2013)

      Midsized SUV under $10,000: Nissan Murano (2014)

      Small car under $12,000: Ford C-Max (2014-2016) 

      Small car under $14,000:Toyota Prius C (2013-2015)

      Luxury car in the $10,000-$15,000 range: Lincoln MKZ (2014-2015)

      Minivan/wagon in the $10,000-$15,000 range: Toyota Venza (2013-2014)

      Small SUVs in the $10,000-$15,000 range: Mazda CX-5 (2014-2016) and Toyota RAV4 (2013)

      Pickup truck in the $10,000-$15,000 range: Toyota Tacoma (2013)

      The list above would be perfect for Gen Z and Millennials, who are drowning in insurmountable debts and inflation. 

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 23:00

    • Biden DOJ Asks Supreme Court To Fast-Track Case That Could Reinstate Federal Gun Ban
      Biden DOJ Asks Supreme Court To Fast-Track Case That Could Reinstate Federal Gun Ban

      Authored by Matthew Vadum via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      The U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ) is asking the Supreme Court to overturn an appeals court ruling that struck down a federal law preventing people under domestic violence-related restraining orders from having guns.

      Attorney General Merrick Garland delivers a statement at the Department of Justice in Washington on Aug. 11, 2022. (Drew Angerer/Getty Images)

      The Biden administration asked in its new petition (pdf) for the high court to hear the case on a “highly expedited schedule” because of the “significant disruptive consequences” of the lower court’s ruling. The petition was reportedly filed with the court on March 17 but had not been docketed as of press time.

      The case comes as courts nationwide are playing catchup regarding the Supreme Court’s landmark June 2022 ruling in New York State Rifle and Pistol Association v. Bruen that held firearms restrictions must be deeply rooted in American history if they are to survive constitutional scrutiny.

      Senate Judiciary Committee chairman Dick Durbin (D-Ill.) said on March 15 that the Bruen ruling offers little guidance to lower courts on interpreting the decision, as Courthouse News Service reported.

      “The gun lobby saw Bruen as a landmark win, but it is a significant challenge for police, law enforcement, and the population of America when it comes to public safety,” Durbin said.

      The case involves Zackey Rahimi of Texas, who pled guilty to violating a 1994 federal law –Section 922(g)(8) of Title 18 of the U.S. Code— that prohibits a person who is subject to a domestic-violence restraining order from possessing a firearm. Rahimi was involved in five shooting incidents after the restraining order was entered against him in February 2020.

      But when the U.S. Court of Appeals for the 5th Circuit took up Rahimi’s case earlier this year, it overturned the law, finding it was no longer constitutional according to the principles laid down in Bruen.

      The government failed “to demonstrate that § 922(g)(8)’s restriction of the Second Amendment right fits within our Nation’s historical tradition of firearm regulation,” the panel stated. The ban on the possession of firearms by someone under a domestic violence-related restraining order “is an outlier that our ancestors would never have accepted.”

      U.S. Attorney General Merrick Garland said last month the DOJ would appeal the ruling but did not provide a timeline for doing so.

      “Nearly 30 years ago, Congress determined that a person who is subject to a court order that restrains him or her from threatening an intimate partner or child cannot lawfully possess a firearm,” Garland said in a Feb. 2 statement.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 22:30

    • Half Of California Lifted Out Of Drought; Flooding Now A Concern As More Rain Looms
      Half Of California Lifted Out Of Drought; Flooding Now A Concern As More Rain Looms

      Authored by Jamie Joseph via The Epoch Times,

      Almost half of California is out of a drought, including San Francisco, Sacramento, and Los Angeles, according to data released by the U.S. Drought Monitor March 16.

      But with so much Sierra Nevada Mountain snowpack, the possibility of flooding is a new concern, forecasters in the National Weather Service Office of Water Prediction warned.

      According to the drought monitor, about 45 percent of the state is now out of a drought including nearly all of Central California.

      But some swaths of Northern and Southern California remain in “abnormally dry” and “moderate drought” conditions.

      (Courtesy of the U.S. Drought Monitor)

      California has experienced severe drought conditions, off and on, since 2006, leading to water rationing and regulations, in urban and agricultural zones and unprecedentedly low reservoir levels statewide.

      But its long-standing water woes took a positive turn after a series of storms that started in December.

      By mid-January, the mountain snowpack reportedly exceeded 200 percent, according to the National Weather Service.

      According to the state’s water data, reservoirs that were once depleted are now filling up with some over 80 percent full – and groundwater reserves have received a significant boost.

      (Screenshot via California Department of Water Resources)

      Due to the excessive snowpack, the National Weather Service warned March 16 that approximately 15 million Californians are at risk for some type of flooding in their communities, including 1.4 million for major flooding and another 6.4 million may be hit moderately.

      More rain, according to forecasters, is expected next Tuesday and Wednesday.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 22:00

    • The Eggheads Vs The Doers
      The Eggheads Vs The Doers

      Authored by Jeffrey Tucker via DailyReckoning.com,

      I recently spoke at one of my favorite venues, the Liberty Forum in New Hampshire, which is an annual conference center on the Free State Project.

      It’s designed to encourage people to pick up and move to the freest state in the country for community and to help protect the state from the fate that befell Massachusetts, Connecticut, and Rhode Island.

      My first time speaking there was 2012, I believe, and I came away with an interesting revelation, which I can summarize as “Liberty is a hands-on task.”

      In my career until that time, the problem of economic and political matters were mostly matters of theory and I had spent most of my time reading and distributing high theory, a task I loved and still do.

      But coming to this event in New Hampshire I found something else entirely; a group of people who were busy doing things in practice to live freer lives.

      They were small business people, real-estate agents, people with alternative currency systems, people raising and selling food on and from their own farms, organizers of houses of worship and community centers, homeschoolers and school entrepreneurs, and much more besides, including office holders focusing on laws and legislation.

      It was here, for example, that I acquired my first Bitcoin, which in the early days showed great promise finally to recreate money in a way that government could not ruin.

      It struck me at the time as among the greatest inventions of the human mind.

      Tellingly, it did not come from academia (so far as we know) but from tinkerers who wanted to solve the problem of double spending on digital monetary units.

      It was genius.

      The economics journals ignored it for many years, of course.

      Doers

      At this event were and are the practitioners. There is not one path forward but many, each person creatively implementing their own version of the freedom ideal. I recall being puzzled a bit by this approach but later inspired.

      I felt like a pianist who had only known scales who finds himself listening to a concerto by Liszt. I came to realize the difference between theory and practice, between the academic class and the people in clinical practice.

      Theory should never be put down but we make a mistake in thinking that this is the whole of the task. Theory alone introduces its own dangers of following a logic to the point of absurdity that goes unnoticed. Minor mistakes in thinking can metastasize and create models that make no sense in reality.

      Theory unchecked by practical experience can even be catastrophic.

      I knew an architect at university who received a large grant to develop a community of residences, which he did according to the highest standards of then-fashionable art and a theoretically informed sense of how people should live.

      The results were intriguing but the builders fought with the architect the entire time. The roofs had no overhang, the wiring and pipes under the houses on stilts had no covering, and the bathrooms had no doors, to mention just three problems.

      Sure enough, once houses went on the market and faced the first winter, many design elements had to change. Residents put doors on bathrooms, the roofs were all retrofitted, and the open basements were all closed in and insulated.

      This was all made necessary once the first rains led to flooding and the first freeze caused all pipes to burst. In essence, the result was a disaster simply because the architect was a designer and not a builder.

      There is a lesson in this. Theory without a reality check can make the world unlivable. This is because theorists can build beautiful models that hide grave errors, intentionally or not, and there is no means by which their mistakes are revealed until you test them against the real world.

      You never want them in charge of the whole project.

      The Theorists Dictated COVID Policy

      This is essentially what happened in the Covid years. The designers of the response were academics, bureaucrats, modelers, and other highly credentialed experts. Sidelined were medical practitioners, clinical workers, and other people with hands-on experience in dealing with healthcare.

      As time went on a massive chasm opened between the two camps with the theorists and modelers prevailing with media megaphone.

      Meanwhile, the doctors, nurses, teachers, parents, elderly in nursing homes, and really the whole of everyone else were left without discretion, their concerns and issues not only ignored but censored and blotted out from public life.

      To return to the above analogy, the houses were flooding, the pipes were bursting, the residents humiliated, but there was no one to fix the problem because the architect was sure that he was right.

      The problem is nowhere more clear than on the issue of early treatment. Doctors know how to deal with respiratory infections. Among the products in their toolkit are nasal rinses, zinc and vitamins, hydroxychloroquine and ivermectin, steroids, and antibiotics.

      None of this was a focus of the CDC or the NIH. They had their sights on one thing only, the novel gene therapy they would call a vaccine, and they even went further to remove as far as possible repurposed drugs from the market.

      This was a mind-boggling response because it contradicted all practical and clinical experience. What is the first thing one should do when faced with a new pathogen? Figure out how to make sick people get better.

      Aside from invasive ventilation, the government and academic theorists had no answers except for everyone to lock down and wait for the shot, which turned out to be a flop.

      Fantasyland

      Here is the essence of the scandal without precedent that took place all over the world. The theorists triumphed entirely over the practitioners. The job of the rest of us was to place ourselves into their models.

      We were supposed to comply in order to “flatten the curve” as if any kind of widespread viral infection could be so easily modeled. We were supposed to watch the databases online to make sure we would all be doing the right thing according to someone else’s plan.

      Meanwhile, for nearly two years, if you could leave your home and go to the downtown area of anywhere in the US, you saw boarded up businesses, empty streets, and the periodic saddened straggler making his way through alleyways in a mask while the kids and parents sat lonely at home consuming streaming videos and living on social media.

      The disaster was obvious to everyone but those who created it.

      As time went on, we came to realize that the experiment was much bigger than we thought. They were not just trying to mitigate a pathogen. They were attempting to rebuild “the infrastructures of human existence.”

      Here we have a paradigmatic example of theory gone mad, a vision wholly unconstrained from any reality, a cockamamie idea wholly unmoored from practical tangibilities. It’s utter madness. And yet they had the power and the rest still do not.

      And even today, precious few have admitted that anything went wrong. They are still blocking unvaccinated foreigners from travel, still mandating shots for kids and students, still pushing for human separation with 15-minute cities, and still swearing without a shred of evidence that they saved millions of lives.

      If you doubt it, they will send you to an academic study hosted on the website of the NIH.

      What Makes Society Work?

      It was the triumph of theory over practice and experience. And look what they did to the world!

      The writings of Friedrich Hayek, building on Adam Smith, take the insight to a deeper level.

      There are many answers to social problems that are not readily part of human cognition in the present generation, certainly not to the theorists in charge, and not even to any one of us as intellectuals.

      Rather, the essential knowledge that makes society work properly — in vast amounts of its functioning — and to the advantage of all its members, is dispersed among millions and billions of minds, living tacitly in our mental spaces, and it is often the product of habits and rituals of living that are inherited from long experience deep in history.

      We take all of this for granted and hardly think about it. Much of it is inaccessible to us and certainly cannot be extracted, modeled, and codified into a grand plan.

      The great lesson of our time should certainly include grave incredulity toward any philosopher king who comes along to tell us that it is all wrong and must be replaced with a wholly new way, else we will all die from a scary new threat, whether be a new pathogen or a change in the climate or some other invisible enemy.

      Looked at this way, it’s truly hard to believe that anyone gave the time of day to these people in the first place.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 21:30

    • Turley: Soros-Backed Manhattan DA's Made-For-TV Trump Prosecution Is "Legally Pathetic"
      Turley: Soros-Backed Manhattan DA’s Made-For-TV Trump Prosecution Is “Legally Pathetic”

      George Washington University Law Professor Jonathan Turley panned reports of the looming potential case against former President Donald Trump after the former commander-in-chief announced he may be arrested in the next week.

      As The Epoch Times’ Jack Phillips reports below, alleged unnamed court sources have told multiple news outlets that Trump could be indicted in the near future, while Trump said via Truth Social that he expects to be arrested by Manhattan District Attorney Alvin Bragg’s office on Tuesday. Bragg’s office has not publicly confirmed reports that he may possibly indict the former president for allegedly misclassifying a $130,000 hush payment made to Stormy Daniels in 2016.

      Trump has denied claims that he had an affair with Daniels in the early 2000s.  However, unconfirmed reports alleged that a grand jury in New York has been empaneled and may be seeking an indictment of the former president.

      But Turley said that based on those reports, the DA’s case against Trump “is legally pathetic” and “is struggling to twist state laws to effectively prosecute a federal case long ago rejected by the Justice Department against Trump.”

      “In 2018 (yes, that is how long this theory has been around), I wrote how difficult such a federal case would be under existing election laws. Now, six years later, the same theory may be shoehorned into a state claim,” wrote Turley, who was a former expert witness for Trump’s first impeachment trial, for The Hill.

      “While we still do not know the specific state charges in the anticipated indictment, the most-discussed would fall under Section 175 for falsifying business records, based on the claim that Trump used legal expenses to conceal the alleged hush-payments that were supposedly used to violate federal election laws,” Turley said.

      “While some legal experts have insisted such concealment is clearly a criminal matter that must be charged, they were conspicuously silent when Hillary Clinton faced a not-dissimilar campaign-finance allegation.”

      He noted that a Section 175 charge “would normally be a misdemeanor” and that the “only way to convert it into a Class E felony requires a showing that the ‘intent to defraud includes an intent to commit another crime or to aid or conceal the commission thereof.’ That other crime would appear to be the federal election violations which the Justice Department previously declined to charge.”

      Bragg’s office, meanwhile, could not prosecute the charge as a misdemeanor as it falls outside the two-year statute of limitations, Turley wrote. Instead, Bragg would have to pursue a felony charge.

      “Prosecutors working under Bragg’s predecessor, Cyrus Vance Jr., also reportedly rejected the viability of using a New York law to effectively charge a federal offense,” Turley noted.  

      DA Bragg (who was elected with a million dollars of support from George Soros funneled through the Color of Change PAC) also previously expressed doubts about the Daniels case and shut it down when he took office several years ago, he said, adding that two lead prosecutors resigned at the time.

      “…Bragg himself threw a flag on this play. I mean, he stopped the two prosecutors who were moving toward a trial. They resigned in protest. One of them then wrote a book. In my view, that book was deeply improper and unprofessional. The book was about prosecuting someone who had not been charged, let alone convicted. But it triggered a huge amount of pressure on Bragg. It does appear that it works. He then proceeded to bring this case.

      If Trump is indicted, it may require Trump to travel to the district attorney’s office in downtown New York to surrender. In white-collar cases, the defendant’s lawyers and prosecutors typically agree on a date and time, rather than arresting the person at home.

      Trump would have his fingerprints and mugshot taken and would appear for arraignment in court. He would likely be released on his own recognizance and allowed to head home, legal analysts told Reuters.

      Trump’s lawyer, Joe Tacopina, told CNBC on Friday that Trump would surrender if charged. If Trump refused to come in voluntarily, prosecutors could seek to have him extradited from Florida, where he currently resides.

      On Saturday, Trump spokesperson Steven Cheung told The Epoch Times in an emailed statement that the former president has not been formally notified of any pending arrest. Both Cheung and Trump accused Bragg, a Democrat who received $1 million in campaign cash from a George Soros-linked organization, of targeting him for political gain and could try to seek dismissal of the charges on those grounds.

      “There has been no notification, other than illegal leaks from the Justice Dept. and the DA’s office, to NBC and other fake news carriers, that the George Soros-funded Radical Left Democrat prosecutor in Manhattan has decided to take his Witch-Hunt to the next level,” Cheung said.

      “President Trump is rightfully highlighting his innocence and the weaponization of our injustice system,” he added.

      The Manhattan District Attorney’s Office has not responded to a request for comment.

      As Jonathan Turley concludes, via The Hill, while some will view it as poetic justice for this former reality-TV host to be tried like a televised talent show, the damage to the legal system is immense whenever political pressure overwhelms prosecutorial judgment. The criminal justice system can be a terrible weapon when used for political purposes, an all-too-familiar spectacle in countries where political foes can be targeted by the party in power.

      None of this means Trump is blameless or should not be charged in other cases. However, we seem to be on the verge of watching a prosecution by plebiscite in this case.

      The season opener of “America’s Got Trump” might be a guaranteed hit with its New York audience — but it should be a flop as a prosecution.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 20:30

    • Visualizing California's GDP Compared To Countries
      Visualizing California’s GDP Compared To Countries

      Comedian Trevor Noah once said America is fifty little countries masquerading as one.

      From an economic sense, this might carry some truth. As Visual Capitalist’s Aran Alai details below, when looking at the economic output of each state, especially the largest and wealthiest ones, they often compare to or even exceed the GDPs of entire nations.

      To illustrate, this visual from StatsPanda looks at California’s $3.36 trillion GDP using data from The World Bank and compares it to 10 sizable country economies.

      Let’s take a closer look.

      Sizing Up California’s GDP in 2021

      California’s $3+ trillion GDP is an enormous figure in its own right, so it’s no surprise that it is larger than certain nations’ economic output.

      But even when comparing with economies like MalaysiaColombia, and Finland, all among the top 50 countries by GDP, California stands tall.

      What’s more, these 10 countries are quite densely populated, with a combined population of 653 million compared to California’s 39 million total.

      A Closer Look At California’s Economy

      What makes California’s GDP so vast and their economy so powerful?

      Relative population is a big factor, as the state is the most populous in the U.S. with roughly 12% of the country’s population calling it home. But since California’s GDP makes up over 15% of the country’s economic output, there must be something else at work.

      One key driver is the technology sector. Not only does Silicon Valley generate massive amounts of technological output, this also translates directly to wealth and economic activity. Many tech markets follow winner-take-all dynamics, bringing large revenues back to the state. In addition, smaller technology companies are frequently gobbled up by larger competitors, adding wealth back into the mix through M&A.

      This might partly explain why California’s GDP is actually estimated to overtake Germany’s in the coming years and become the world’s 4th largest economy.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 20:00

    • Were The Bank Bailouts The Result Of Rising Wealth Concentration?
      Were The Bank Bailouts The Result Of Rising Wealth Concentration?

      Authored by Yves Smith via NakedCapitalism.com,

      Typically, financial crises, as in the sort that might or actually do impair the banking system, are the result of leveraged speculation. Is this one of those rare instances when this time might actually be different, via rising wealth inequality creating new levels of hot money that can slosh in and out of banks, making many of them fundamentally less stable?

      Now admittedly, the continued rise in wealth inequality is an effect of sustained low central bank interest rates, which goosed asset prices generally and particularly favored speculative plays as investors reached for returns. A great deal of commentary has correctly focused on the effects of deflating these asset bubbles and how the rollback of paper wealth can be particularly harmful to financial firms that wrongfooted the correction.

      But the reduction in wealth also produces a system wide reduction in liquidity (mind you, we’ve always thought liquidity is not the virtue that investment touts make it out to be; the world got by just fine in the stone ages with less that instantaneous trading times and higher transaction costs). The effect in a regime, where for better or worse, there are (or have been) lots of big fish with tons of cash who are accustomed to moving it quickly would wind up looking like an emerging market, where US interest rate moves wind up producing huge and destabilizing waves of hot money moving in and out. It appears not to have occurred to the authorities that we were restructuring our financial system so as to make it possible to generate banana-republic levels of upheaval.

      The Great Crash blew back to the banking system because stock buyers were making heavy use of margin loans, and on top of that, stock operators were creating leveraged structures (trusts of trusts of trusts). By contrast, the 1987 crash, the result of leveraged buyouts producing a stock market bubble, didn’t do lasting damage, and neither did the later leveraged buyout collapse and large-scale workouts o LBO loans (a big reason is that the loans were syndicated and big foreign banks were big buyers but they didn’t eat enough of this bad US cooking to get really sick). But the Japanese financial crisis was the result of a dual commercial real estate and stock market crash, together on a scale that has stalled Japanese growth for decades. The 2008 crisis looks like a housing crisis, but the severity of the damage resulted from credit default swaps creating synthetic subprime debt that was four to six times real economy exposures.

      This is a long-winded way of saying that herd behavior in bad lending and/or leveraged speculation produced enough in the way of actual or soon to be realized losses to damage a lot of banks. And banks are interconnected: if one bank gets in trouble, its depositors are the customers or employers of customers of other banks. If those linked customers of other banks have an unexpected hit to income, they could default on their debt payments, propagating damage across the system.

      The crisis of the past week was not that. Three different banks with very different business strategies and asset mixes got in trouble at the same time. Some like Barney Frank, on the board of Signature Bank, argue that the common element was a regulatory crackdown on banks too cozy with the crypto industry. But that’s not really the case with Silicon Valley Bank, which has been suffering for a while from declines in its deposits due to a falloff in new funding all across tech land, as well as more difficult business conditions leading to not much in the way of new customers and falling deposit balances at most existing customers.

      What the three banks did have in common was a very high level of uninsured deposits which made them particularly vulnerable to runs and therefore should have led the banks’ managements to be very mindful of asset-liability mismatches and liquidity. And they should have focused on fees rather than the balance sheet to achieve better than ho-hum profits.

      Silicon Valley Bank has attempted to wrap itself in the mantle of being a stalwart of those rent-extracting innovative tech companies. But Silicon Valley Bank is hiding behind the skirts of venture capital firms. They are the ones who provided and then kept organizing the influx of capital to these companies. The story of the life of a venture capital backed business is multiple rounds of equity funding. Borrowing is very rarely a significant source of capital. So the idea that Silicon Valley Bank was a lender to portfolio companies is greatly exaggerated.2

      Both the press and several readers have confirmed that the reason for Silicon Valley Bank’s lock on the banking business of venture-capital-funded companies was that the VCs required that the companies keep their deposits there. And that’s because the VCs could keep much tighter tabs on their investee companies by having the bank monitor fund in and outflows on a more active basis than the VCs could via periodic management and financial reports.

      Now what flows from that? One of the basic rules of business is that it is vastly cheaper to keep customers than find them. Silicon Valley Bank would be highly motivated to attract and retain both the fund and the personal business of its venture capital kingpins. Accordingly, the press has pointed out that loans to vineyards and venture capital honchos’ mortgages were important businesses. It’s not hard to think that these were done on preferential terms to members of a big VC firm’s “family” as a loyalty bonus of sorts.

      On top of that, recall that Silicon Valley Bank bought Boston Private with over $10 billion in assets, in July 2021. The wealth management firm also had a very strong registered investment adviser platform and additional assets under management. That suggests Silicon Valley recognized increasingly that the care and feeding of its rich individual clients was core to its strategy.

      It’s impossible to prove at this juncture, but I strongly suspect that the individual account withdrawals were at least as important to Silicon Valley Bank’s demise as any corporate pullouts. One tell was the demand for a backstop of all unsecured deposits, and not accounts that held payrolls. A search engine gander quickly shows that it’s recommended practice for companies to keep their payroll funds in a bank account separate from that of operating funds. One has to assume that the venture capital overlords would have their portfolio companies adhere to these practices.

      The press also had anecdata about wealthy customers in Boston getting so rowdy when trying to get their money out that the bank called the police, as well as Peter Thiel (to the tune of $50 million), Oprah, and Harry & Meghan as serious depositors.

      Similarly, there is evidence that the run at Signature Bank was that of rich people. Lambert presented this tidbit from the Wall Street Journal yesterday in Water Cooler:

      A rush by New York City real-estate investors to yank money out of Signature Bank last week played a significant role in the bank’s collapse, according to building owners and state regulators. The withdrawals gained momentum as talk circulated about the exposure Signature had to cryptocurrency firms and that its fate might follow the same path as Silicon Valley Bank, which suffered a run on the bank last week before collapsing and forcing the government to step in. Word that landlords were withdrawing cash spread rapidly in the close-knit community of New York’s real-estate families, prompting others to follow suit. Regulators closed Signature Bank on Sunday in one of the biggest bank failures in U.S. history. Real-estate investor Marx Realty was among the many New York firms to cash out, withdrawing several million dollars early last week from Signature accounts tied to an office building, said chief executive Craig Deitelzweig.

      This selection also illustrates a point that makes it hard to analyze these bank crashes well. The very wealthy regularly use corporate entities for personal investments, so looking at corporate versus purely individual account holdings is often misleading in terms of who is holding the strings. A business owned by a billionaire does not operate like a similar-sized company with a typical corporate governance structure.

      Ironically, First Republic Bank, which holds itself out as primarily a private bank, had the lowest level of uninsured deposits, 67% versus 86% at Silicon Valley Bank and 89% at Signature. But its balance sheet was heavy on long-term municipal bonds, which are not eligible collateral at the discount window or the Fed’s new Bank Term Funding Program facility. Hence the need for a private bailout.

      Before you say, “Well, even if there was time to figure out how to backstop payrolls, which there wasn’t, we had to go whole hag because contagion,” that is not a satisfactory answer. Because nearly all banks have sizable Treasury and/or agency holdings (First Republic was unusual), the new Fed interventions come very close to being a full backstop of uninsured deposits. That means vastly more subsidized gambling. There should be a great increase in supervision and regulation to try to prevent more sudden meltdowns, which one would expect to become more frequent otherwise due to even greater government backstopping:

      As Georgetown law professor Adam Levitin put it:

      ….. the Bank Term Funding Program bears some consideration. No one in the private market would lend against securities at face, rather than at market. But that’s what the Fed’s doing in order to enable banks that have held-to-maturity securities avoid loss realization. The Bank Term Funding Program is a lifeline for banks that failed at banking 101—managing interest rate risk. The whole nature of banking is that it involves balancing long-term assets and short-term liabilities. Firms that can’t do that well probably shouldn’t be in the banking business.

      Moreover, European banking regulators, regularly been criticized for last minute, kick-the-can interventions, are finding out how the US rules-based order of “we get to rewrite the rules when we feel like it” works in their arenaFrom the Financial Times:

      Europe’s financial regulators are furious at the handling of the Silicon Valley Bank collapse, privately accusing US authorities of tearing up a rule book for failed banks that they had helped to write.

      While the disapproval has yet to be conveyed in a formal setting, some of the region’s top policymakers are seething over the decision to cover all depositors at SVB, fearing it will undermine a globally agreed regime.

      One senior eurozone official described their shock at the “total and utter incompetence” of US authorities, particularly after a decade and a half of “long and boring meetings” with Americans advocating an end to bailouts.

      Europe’s supervisors are particularly irate at the US decision to break with its own standard of guaranteeing only the first $250,000 of deposits by invoking a “systemic risk exception” — despite claiming the California-based lender was too small to face rules aimed at preventing a rerun of the 2008 global financial crisis.

      Mind you, the Europeans are not being hypocrites. They forced the unsecured depositors at Cyprus bank to take 47.5% haircuts in its banking crisis. Admittedly those were banks in a country seen as a money laundering haven, but it had a lot of British retirees banking there too. The EU also tried to get banks to use bail-in structures like co/cos bonds. The US was skeptical of them and as we predicted, they had perverse effects. But the point is the EU has made a much more serious attempt at renouncing bailouts than we have, even if they have yet to find the secret sauce.

      And they are not shy about calling out who bears the cost. Again from the Financial Times:

      The US has claimed SVB’s failure will not hit taxpayers because other banks will cover the cost of bailing out uninsured depositors — over and above what can be recouped from the lender’s assets.

      However, a European regulator said that claim was a “joke”, as US banks were likely to pass the cost on to their customers. “At the end of the day, this is a bailout paid for by the ordinary people and it’s a bailout of the rich venture capitalists which is really wrong,” he said.

      So not only are the bailouts an effect of rising wealth concentration, they are going to make it worse. Nicely played.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 19:35

    • Mike Wilson: "Why On Earth Did US Stocks Rally Last Week?"
      Mike Wilson: “Why On Earth Did US Stocks Rally Last Week?”

      By Michael Wilson, chief equity strategist at Morgan Stanley

      Over the past two weeks, the markets have been fixated (rightly) on the rapid failure of two major banks that up until very recently had been viewed as “safe” depository institutions. The reason for their demise is crystal clear in hindsight and not that surprising when you see what they were doing with the deposits and the fact that interest rates are up 500bp year over year. The uninsured deposit backstop put in place last weekend by the Fed/FDIC will help to alleviate further major bank runs, but it won’t stop the already tight lending standards across the banking industry from getting even tighter. It also won’t prevent the cost of deposits from rising, thereby pressuring net interest margins. In short, the risk of a credit crunch has increased materially.

      Bond markets have exhibited extreme volatility around these developments as market participants realize the ramifications of tighter credit. The yield curve has bull steepened by 60bp in a matter of days, something seen only a few times in history and usually the bond market’s way of saying recession risk is now more elevated. An inversion of the curve  typically signals a recession within 12 months, but the real risk starts when it re-steepens from the trough. Meanwhile, the ECB decided to raise rates by 50bp last week despite Europe’s own banking crisis and very sluggish economy. The German Bund curve seemed to disagree with that decision and bull steepened by 50bp.

      If growth is likely to slow from the effective tightening rolling through the US banking system, as we expect, and the bond market seems to be supporting that conclusion, why on earth did US stocks rally last week? We think it had to do with the view we have heard from some clients that the Fed/FDIC bailout of depositors is a form of quantitative easing (QE) and provides the catalyst for stocks to go higher [ZH: it may not be technically right now, but give it a few weeks and a few more failed banks].

      While the massive increase in Fed balance sheet reserves last week does reliquefy the banking system, it does little in terms of creating new money that can flow into the economy or the markets, at least beyond a brief period of, say, a few days or weeks. Secondarily, the fact that the Fed is lending, not buying, also matters. If a bank borrows from the Fed, it is expanding its own balance sheet, making leverage ratios more binding. When the Fed buys the security, the seller of that security has balance sheet space made available for renewed expansion. That is not the case in this situation.

      According to the Fed’s weekly release of its balance sheet on Wednesday, the Fed was lending depository institutions $308B, up $303B week over week. Of this, $153B was primary credit through the discount window, which is often viewed  as temporary borrowing and unlikely to translate into new credit creation for the economy. $143B was a loan to the bridge banks the FDIC created for Silicon Valley Bank and Signature. These reserves are obviously going nowhere. Only $12B was lending through its new Bank Term Funding Program (BTFP), which is viewed as more permanent but also unlikely to end up converting into new loans in the near term. In short, none of these reserves will likely transmit to the economy as bank deposits normally do. Instead, we believe the overall velocity of money in the banking system is likely to fall sharply and more than offset any increase in reserves, especially given the temporary/emergency nature of these funds. Moody’s recent downgrade of the entire sector will likely contribute further to this deceleration.

      Over the past month, the correlation between stocks and bonds has reversed and is now negative. In other words, stocks go down when rates fall and vice versa. This is in sharp contrast to most of the past year when stocks were more worried about inflation, the Fed’s reaction to it, and rates going higher. Instead, the path of stocks is now about growth, and our conviction that earnings forecasts are 15-20% too high has increased. From an equity market perspective, the events of the past week mean that credit availability is decreasing for a wide swath of the economy, which may be the catalyst that finally convinces market participants the equity risk premium (ERP) is way too low. We have been waiting patiently for this acknowledgment because with it comes the real buying opportunity.

      Just to remind readers, the S&P 500 ERP is currently 220bp. Given the risk to the earnings outlook, risk/reward in US equities remains unattractive until the ERP is at least 350-400bp, in our view.

      More in the full note available to pro subs.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 19:10

    • Musk Blasts Biden After Prez Lies Twice About '3% Billionaire Tax'
      Musk Blasts Biden After Prez Lies Twice About ‘3% Billionaire Tax’

      On Saturday, President Biden’s social media galaxy brains tweeted out a twice-corrected lie, quoting the president telling said lie, that billionaires are getting away paying just 3% of their average earnings in taxes.

      “You know the average tax billionaires pay?

      THREE PERCENT.

      No billionaire should be paying a lower tax than somebody working as a schoolteacher or firefighter,” reads the erroneous tweet.

      To which Musk replied: “I paid 53% taxes on my Tesla stock options (40% Federal & 13% state), so I must be lifting the average!

      “I also paid more income tax than anyone ever in the history of Earth for 2021 and will do that again in 2022.”

      As Ian Bremmer points out, “the 3% number isn’t even close to true.” 

      Bremmer’s tweet includes a screenshot from CNN, which fact check’s the claim and notes that it’s from a 2021 finding that found the 400 wealthiest billionaire families pay an average of 8.2% of their income in federal taxes.

      In response so Biden’s original claim that was fact checked, the White House published a corrected transcript.

      Politifact found that the 25 highest-earning billionaires are paying around 16% in federal taxes, while most teachers and firefighters pay between zero and 15%.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 18:45

    • The Longer It Takes The Fed To "Go Big", The Deeper The Damage Will Be, And The Bigger The "Big" Will Be
      The Longer It Takes The Fed To “Go Big”, The Deeper The Damage Will Be, And The Bigger The “Big” Will Be

      By Eric Peters, CIO of One River Asset Management

      “They went big last weekend, which was the right thing to do,” said the Chairman, a veteran of financial crises, the two of us discussing the ongoing bank run, how policy can end it.

      “But the market always tests statements of confidence, whether from companies or the government,” he continued.

      “This week, at the first real test, policymakers mumbled.”

      Treasury Secretary Yellen’s responses to Senator Lankford in Thursday’s Senate hearing gave a glimmer of light to the worst fears of small business owners and savers at America’s non systemically important banks. 

      The administration’s failure to dash these fears for depositors of $2, $5, $10 million has created a two-tier banking system in which the big banks are safe and most others are not.

      “The American people should know that the banking system, which is at the core of our economy, is a safe place for them to keep their money. And this is particularly true for the middle class and small business owners, who generally do not have easy access to treasuries. The idea that their banks are unsafe for their day-to-day operations and needs is absurd.”

      How we got here and how to prevent a repeat is a matter for another day. The fear and potential damage must be stemmed immediately.

      “For regulators and policy makers in times of stress, silence is the reward for good work,” said the Chairman.

      “In 2020, we went big on everything. The times called for it. For example, can you imagine if we had allowed the entire airline industry to be liquidated?”

      The cost of restarting the world’s largest economy with a severely crippled airline industry would have been staggering.

      “So, despite last weekend’s actions, deposits are flowing from small banks to large ones, and deposits at big banks are shifting into treasuries. The decisions that drive these flows are binary and irreversible. These are not tactical portfolio shifts of a percent or two, these are not moves to slightly trim exposure to small banks. These are zero-to-one decisions, all-or-nothing shifts,” said the Chairman.

      “The market is testing whether they will go big again. And the longer it takes them, the deeper the damage, and the more aggressively they will need to go, the bigger the “big” in go big.”

      [ZH: the market is already showing The Fed the way in the short-term interest rate market – one more small token hike and then cut-cut-cut for the next two years!]

      [ZH: Did The Fed just get the message from the market and “go big” enough, with its global swap line plan?]

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 18:20

    • Gold, Stocks, Bonds, & Bitcoin All Higher After Fed, SNB Panic
      Gold, Stocks, Bonds, & Bitcoin All Higher After Fed, SNB Panic

      The market is not yet convinced by this weekend’s actions, but it’s getting there as Michael Hartnett notes:

      “The market stops panicking when central banks start panicking”

      Equity futures are higher, but are fading back…

      Treasury futures opened down in price but have ripped back into the green…

      Gold is holding on to late Friday’s gains…

      And Bitcoin has surged back above $28,000…

      It sure is a land of confusion for now.

      But of course the two biggest things to watch are UBS CDS (which is quoted higher in very quiet early trading)…

      And the pain felt when all of Credit Suisse’s AT1 bonds are marked to zero…

      Brace for more as we expect to see Fed rate-hike expectations collapse even further than they already are…

      “I love the smell of central bank capitulation in the morning.”

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 18:12

    • "True Stories… Could Fuel Hesitancy": Stanford Project Worked To Censor Even True Stories On Social Media
      “True Stories… Could Fuel Hesitancy”: Stanford Project Worked To Censor Even True Stories On Social Media

      Authored by Jonathan Turley,

      While lost in the explosive news about Donald Trump’s expected arrest, journalist Matt Taibbi released new details on previously undisclosed censorship efforts on social media. The latest Twitter Files revealed a breathtaking effort from Stanford’s Virality Project to censor even true stories. After all, the project insisted “true stories … could fuel hesitancy” over taking the vaccine or other measures. The effort included suppressing stories that we now know are legitimate such as natural immunity defenses, the exaggerated value of masks, and questions over vaccine efficacy in preventing second illnesses. The work of the Virality Project to censor even true stories should result in the severance of any connection with Stanford University.

      We have learned of an ever-expanding coalition of groups working with the government and social media to target and censor Americans, including government-funded organizations.

      However, the new files are chilling in the details allegedly showing how the Virality Project labeled even true stories as “anti-vaccine” and, therefore, subject to censorship. These files would suggest that the Project eagerly worked to limit free speech and suppress alternative scientific viewpoints.

      Taibbi describes the Virality Project as “a sweeping, cross-platform effort to monitor billions of social media posts by Stanford University, federal agencies, and a slew of (often state-funded) NGOs.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      He added: “We’ve since learned the Virality Project in 2021 worked with government to launch a pan-industry monitoring plan for Covid-related content. At least six major Internet platforms were ‘onboarded’ to the same JIRA ticketing system, daily sending millions of items for review.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      According to Taibbi, it targeted anyone who did not robotically fall in line with the CDC and media narratives, including targeting postings that shared “Reports of vaccinated individuals contracting Covid-19 anyway,” research on “natural immunity,” suggesting Covid-19 “leaked from a lab,” and even “worrisome jokes.”

      That included evidence that it “knowingly targeted true material and legitimate political opinion, while often being factually wrong itself.”

      The Virality Project warned Twitter that “true stories … could fuel hesitancy,” including stories on “celebrity deaths after vaccine” and the closure of a central New York school due to reports of post-vaccine illness.

      The Project is part of the Cyber Policy Center at Stanford and bills itself as “a joint initiative of the Freeman Spogli Institute for International Studies and Stanford Law School, connects academia, the legal and tech industry and civil society with policymakers around the country to address the most pressing cyber policy concerns.”

      The Center launched the Project as a “a global study aimed at understanding the disinformation dynamics specific to the COVID-19 crisis.”

      As with many disinformation projects, it became a source of its own disinformation in the effort to suppress alternative views.

      It is being funded by Craig Newmark Philanthropies and the Hewlett Foundation.

      On its website, it proclaims: “At the Stanford Internet Observatory our mission is to study the misuse of the internet to cause harm, and to help create policy and technical mitigations to those harms.” It defines its mission to maintain the truth as it sees it:

      “The global COVID-19 crisis has significantly shifted the landscape for mis- and disinformation as the pandemic has become the primary concern of almost every nation on the planet. This has perhaps never happened before; few topics have commanded and sustained attention at a global level simultaneously, or provided such a wealth of opportunities for governments, economically motivated actors, and domestic activists alike to spread malign narratives in service to their interests.”

      What is even more disconcerting is that groups like the Virality Project worked against public health by suppressing such stories that are now considered legitimate from the efficacy of masks to the lab origin theory. It was declaring dissenting scientific views to be dangerous disinformation. Nothing could be more inimical to the academic mission. Yet, Stanford still heralds the work of the Project on its website.

      There is nothing more inherently in conflict with academic values than censorship. Stanford’s association with this censorship effort is disgraceful and should be a matter for faculty action. This is a project that sought to censor true stories that undermined government or media narratives.

      I am not hopeful that Stanford will sever its connection to the Project.  Censorship is now the rage on campuses and the Project is the perfect embodiment of this movement. Cloaking censorship efforts in self-righteous rhetoric, the Project sought to silence those who failed to adhere to a certain orthodoxy, including scientific and public health claims that were later found flawed or wrong. The Project itself is an example of what it called “media and social media capabilities – overt and covert – to spread particular narratives.”

      Stanford should fulfill its pledge in creating the Virality Project in fighting disinformation by eliminating the Virality Project.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 17:55

    • Fed Panics, Announces "Coordinated" Daily US Dollar Swap Lines To Ease Banking Crisis
      Fed Panics, Announces “Coordinated” Daily US Dollar Swap Lines To Ease Banking Crisis

      “The market stops panicking when central banks start panicking”

      In January 2022, just around the time the Fed announced it was launching its most aggressive tightening campaign since Volcker, we warned “remember, every Fed tightening cycle ends in disaster and then, much more Fed easing”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Fast forward to just over a week ago, when the Fed tightening cycle indeed ended in disaster when SIVB became the first (of many) banks to fail, triggering a chain of dominoes that culminated with today’s collapse of Credit Suisse – a systematically important bank with $600BN in assets.

      And then, at 5pm, the easing officially began, because while a bunch of laughable macrotourists were arguing on FinTwit whether last week’s record surge in the Fed’s discount window was QE or wasn’t QE  (answer: it didn’t matter, because as we said, it assured what comes next), the Fed finally capitulated, just as we warned over and over and over that it would…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      … and at exactly 5pm the Fed announced “coordinated central bank action to enhance the provision of U.S. dollar liquidity” by opening daily Dollar Swap lines with all major central banks, in a carbon copy repeat of the Fed’s panicked post-covid crisis policy response playbook.

      The Bank of Canada, the Bank of England, the Bank of Japan, the European Central Bank, the Federal Reserve, and the Swiss National Bank are today announcing a coordinated action to enhance the provision of liquidity via the standing U.S. dollar liquidity swap line arrangements.

      To improve the swap lines’ effectiveness in providing U.S. dollar funding, the central banks currently offering U.S. dollar operations have agreed to increase the frequency of 7-day maturity operations from weekly to daily. These daily operations will commence on Monday, March 20, 2023, and will continue at least through the end of April.

      The network of swap lines among these central banks is a set of available standing facilities and serve as an important liquidity backstop to ease strains in global funding markets, thereby helping to mitigate the effects of such strains on the supply of credit to households and businesses.

      And once the USD swap lines are reopened, the rest of the cavalry follows: rate cuts, QE (the real stuff, not that Discount Window nonsense), etc, etc. In fact, we have already seen a near record surge in reserve injections:

      The Fed may as well formalize it now and at least preserve some confidence in the banking sector, even if it means destroying all confidence left in the “inflation fighting” Fed, with all those whose were in charge handing in their resignation for their catastrophic handling of this bank crisis.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Then again, maybe they should just wait until he Fed hikes its inflation target to 3% or more – something else we predicted…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      … because now that we are back in liquidity injection mode, well, say goodbye to hopes of seeing affordable eggs every again.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 17:34

    • Biden In Touch With Buffett On Bank Crisis
      Biden In Touch With Buffett On Bank Crisis

      What do you call it when an 80-year-old seeks the advice of a 92-year-old?

      Answer: the worst financial crisis since Lehman.TM

      Realizing that Berkshire Hathaway had a near-record $128 billion in cash at the start of the year, more than most countries…

      … Joe Biden, who on Monday lied to the American people that the “our banking system is safe“…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      … appears to have changed his mind and is urgently hoping to recreate the zeitgeist surrounding the infamous Oct 16 “Buy American” NYT op-ed by Warren Buffett.

      … which ended up being memorable but only after the biggest bailout of US banks and capital markets in history and the start of the neverending QR/ZIRP->bust->QE/ZIRP cycle.

      According to Bloomberg, Berkshire’s Warren Buffett has been in touch with senior officials in President Joe Biden’s administration in recent days as the regional banking crisis goes from bad to worse to Savings And Loan 2.0 (if only America had any savings left).

      The buzz of private jet activity centering on Omaha was first reported by Fuzzy Panda who noted that “a large number (>20) of Private Jets landed in Omaha yesterday afternoon” with jets flying from HQs of Regional Banks, Ski Resorts & DC, and prompting the question “Did Buffett just fly all the regional bank CEOs into Omaha & offer a deal to SAVE the banks?”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      For now the answer is unclear, nor is it clear what role, if any, the billionaire investor may play to contain the crisis after the cascading failures of Silicon Valley Bank, Signature Bank and Silvergate.

      Buffett, who will be 100 years old in 2031, has a long history of stepping in to aid banks in crisis, providing funding at daylight robbery terms (10% prefs + warrants), and leveraging his cult investing status to restore confidence in ailing firms. Bank of America won a capital injection from Buffett in 2011 after its stock plunged amid losses tied to subprime mortgages. Buffett also tossed a $5 billion lifeline to Goldman in 2008 to shore up the bank following the Lehman Brothers collapse.

      Meanwhile, Biden’s team, wary of political blowback among progressives, has sought to implement bailouts that are spun as magically not being bailouts and which don’t require direct government spending from taxpayers, including the Federal Reserve’s actions (narrator: of course they require taxpayer backing). Alas, so far Biden’s plan has been a disaster: on Thursday, big US banks voluntarily deposited $30 billion to stabilize First Republic Bank this week, a move regulators described as “most welcome.” On Friday, the stock collapsed another 50%.

      Any investment or intervention from Buffett or other figures would continue that playbook, looking to stem the crisis without direct bailouts…. until of course direct bailouts, rate cuts and QE are inevitable since a cascading wave of defaults among the regional banks would lead to another great depression as small/medium banks account for 50% of US commercial and industrial lending, 60% of residential real estate lending, 80% of commercial real estate lending, and 45% of consumer lending.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      But before we get there, and since we are now following the playbook of the 2008 crisis, expect the SEC to “halt short selling of financial stocks to protect investors and markets”, just like it did 3 days after Lehman collapse sparking the worst banking crisis… until now.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 17:29

    • Liz Warren Makes War On Powell, And How 'Woke' SF Fed Chief Failed On SVB
      Liz Warren Makes War On Powell, And How ‘Woke’ SF Fed Chief Failed On SVB

      Senator Elizabeth Warren (D-MA) says Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell has racked up “an astonishing list of failures,” which contributed to the implosion of Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank, Bloomberg reports.

      “SVB and Signature accumulated risk and made dangerous decisions about how to manage that risk,” said Warren in a Wednesday letter to Powell. “They did so in part because of greed and incompetence – but were allowed to do so under faulty supervision and in a weakened regulatory environment that you helped to create.”

      You owe the public an explanation,” Warren continued, demanding that Powell respond to 11 questions by March 29.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Warren’s letter outlines several efforts to weaken regulations that were implemented following the 2008 financial crisis, which was enabled by lax supervision by the Fed.

      Warren also demanded that Powell recuse himself from an internal investigation by the Fed into regulatory failures concerning SVB – the results of which will be made public by Vice Chair Michael Barr by May 1. Instead, a bipartisan group of lawmakers wants an independent investigation.

      The Fed and other regulators announced emergency measures to help contain the budding crisis, including a new loan program from the central bank that will make is easier for banks to borrow to meet deposit withdrawal demand.

      In her letter, Warren also said Powell supported a 2018 law that exempted mid-sized banks like SVB from the same stringent oversight requirements faced by the biggest banks, a change that she and some other progressives have said contributed to SVB’s demise. Testifying about the bill at the time, Powell said the Fed would still have the ability to regulate mid-size banks if warranted, and that gave them “the tools that we need.” -Bloomberg

      “Make no mistake: your decisions aided and abetted this bank failure, and you bear your share of responsibility for it,” wrote Warren.

      Meanwhile, woke ‘Frisco Fed’ chief Mary Daly has also come under fire. As Paul Sperry writes in the NY Post: “Wokeness has replaced competence and merit across the banking sector, and San Francisco Fed Chief Mary Daly is the poster child of this pernicious trend.”

      A protege of Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen and short-list candidate for Federal Reserve vice chair, Daly was supposed to be supervising Silicon Valley Bank but apparently was too busy playing politics and pushing woke agendas to regulate rogue banks like SVB, the second-biggest bank failure on record.

      Daly had other priorities, including climate change, George Floyd and Black Lives Matter, inequities between blacks and whites, LGBTQ+ rights and a host of other woke social-justice issues that had nothing to do with banking and finance. -NY Post

      According to Daly’s bio, her commitments include “understanding the economic and financial risks of climate change and inequities.”

      Sperry highlights a recent LinkedIn post from Daly, in which she appears ‘sidetracked’ by racial justice, writing “What Black voices have I lifted up? Equity & inclusion begins with me. #GeorgeFloyd.”

      And while Daly has been focused on everything but banking, she was completely oblivious to the warning signs of inflation.

      Two years ago, as inflation was spiraling out of control, she said: “I am not thinking that we have unwanted inflation around the corner. I don’t think that’s a risk.”

      Last year, she denied that the economy was suffering from horrific inflation, saying “That’s not what I see.”

      And in August, Daly – who makes $422,000 per year, said “I don’t feel the pain of inflation anymore.”

      “I’m not immune to gas prices rising, food prices rising,” she continued, adding “But I don’t find myself in a space where I have to make trade-offs, because I have enough, and many, many Americans have enough.”

      From her policy papers, speeches and interviews, it’s clear that Daly thinks the Fed’s core mission isn’t controlling inflation but achieving full employment — and raising interest rates just hurts that goal. Her agenda is more jobs and higher wages for minorities, so sound money is not a priority for her — even though inflation is a huge tax on the working class and especially minorities.

      Until recently, Daly was opposed to the Fed’s hawkish shift to tightening credit to fight inflation. Her bank examiners no doubt shared her dovish mindset and didn’t anticipate rates increasing, which may also explain why alarms weren’t raised at SVB. -NY Post

      Sperry also notes that Daly has zero experience in banking or managing risk. According to her, Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen has been an “important mentor in my life . . . [S]he made my career kind of explode.”

      And now banks under her watch are, ‘kind of imploding.’

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 17:00

    • 'Not QE' As Fed Trapped Between A 'Rock And A Hard Place'
      ‘Not QE’ As Fed Trapped Between A ‘Rock And A Hard Place’

      Authored by Lance Roberts via The Epoch Times,

      “QE” or Quantitative Easing has been the bull’s siren song for the last decade, but will “Not QE” be the same?

      Last week, amid a rash of bank insolvencies, government agencies took action to stem a potential banking crisis. The Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the Treasury, and the Fed issued a Bank Term Lending Program with a $25 billion loan backstop to protect uninsured depositors from the Silicon Valley Bank failure. An orchestrated $30 billion uninsured deposit by 11 major banks into First Republic Bank followed. Those deposits would not occur without Federal Reserve and Treasury assurances.

      The details of the Bank Term Funding Program were described in the Federal Reserve press release.

      “The additional funding will be made available through the creation of a new Bank Term Funding Program (BTFP), offering loans of up to one year in length to banks, savings associations, credit unions, and other eligible depository institutions pledging U.S. Treasuries, agency debt and mortgage-backed securities, and other qualifying assets as collateral. These assets will be valued at par. The BTFP will be an additional source of liquidity against high-quality securities, eliminating an institution’s need to quickly sell those securities in times of stress.

      “With approval of the Treasury Secretary, the Department of the Treasury will make available up to $25 billion from the Exchange Stabilization Fund as a backstop for the BTFP. The Federal Reserve does not anticipate that it will be necessary to draw on these backstop funds.”

      Banks quickly tapped the program, as shown by a $152 billion surge in borrowings from the Federal Reserve. It is the most significant borrowing in one week since the depths of the Financial Crisis.

      (Refinitiv Chart: RealInvestmentAdvice.com, Data: St. Louis Federal Reserve)

      The importance of this program is that it will inject up to $2 Trillion into the financial system, Bloomberg reported.

      “‘The usage of the Fed’s Bank Term Funding Program is likely to be big,’ strategists led by Nikolaos Panigirtzoglou in London wrote in a client note Wednesday. While the largest banks are unlikely to tap the program, the maximum usage envisaged for the facility is close to $2 trillion, which is the par amount of bonds held by US banks outside the five biggest, they said.”

      As Bloomberg notes, major banks like JP Morgan likely will not tap the Feds lending program due to the stigma often attached to such usage. Moreover, there are roughly $3 Trillion in reserves in the U.S. banking system, of which the top five major banks hold a significant portion. However, as I noted last week in “Bank Runs:”

      The Fed caused this problem by aggressively hiking rates which dropped collateral values. Such has left some banks which didn’t hedge their loan/bond portfolios with insufficient collateral to cover the deposits during a ‘bank run.’

      As shown, the rapid increase in rates by the Fed drained bank reserves.

      (Refinitiv Chart: RealInvestmentAdvice.com, Data: St. Louis Federal Reserve)

      The demand by banks for liquidity has now put the Federal Reserve between a rock and a hard place. While the Fed remains adamant in its inflation fight, the BTFP may be the next QE program disguised as Not QE.

      Investor Conditioning

      Classical conditioning (also known as Pavlovian or respondent conditioning) refers to a learning procedure in which a potent stimulus (e.g., food) becomes paired with a previously neutral stimulus (e.g., a bell). Pavlov discovered that when he introduced the neutral stimulus, the dogs would begin to salivate in anticipation of the potent stimulus, even though it was not yet present. This learning process resulted from the psychological “pairing” of the stimuli.

      Such conditioning has happened to investors over the last decade.

      In 2010, then Fed Chairman Ben Bernanke introduced the “neutral stimulus” to the financial markets by adding a “third mandate” to the Fed’s responsibilities—the creation of the “wealth effect.”

      “This approach eased financial conditions in the past and, so far, looks to be effective again. Stock prices rose, and long-term interest rates fell when investors began to anticipate this additional action. Easier financial conditions will promote economic growth. For example, lower mortgage rates will make housing more affordable and allow more homeowners to refinance. Lower corporate bond rates will encourage investment. And higher stock prices will boost consumer wealth and help increase confidence, which can also spur spending. Increased spending will lead to higher incomes and profits that, in a virtuous circle, will further support economic expansion,” Ben Bernanke said in a Washington Post Op-Ed in November 2010.

      Importantly, for conditioning to work, when the “neutral stimulus” is introduced, it must be followed by the “potent stimulus” for the “pairing” to complete. For investors, as the Fed introduced each round of “Quantitative Easing,” that is, the “neutral stimulus,” the stock market rose, that is, the “potent stimulus.”

      As shown, asset prices rose as the Fed expanded its balance sheet.

      (Refinitiv Chart: RealInvestmentAdvice.com, Data: St. Louis Federal Reserve)

      While many suggest that the Fed’s QE programs have no impact on the financial market, the near 87 percent correlation between balance sheet changes and the market would imply otherwise.

      (Refinitiv Chart: RealInvestmentAdvice.com, Data: St. Louis Federal Reserve)

      This is why investors cling to each Fed meeting in anticipation of the “ringing of the bell.”

      In Pavlovian terms, the “pairing is complete.”

      BTFP Is Not QE

      While the BTFP facility is technically Not QE, it does reverse the Fed’s efforts to reduce financial liquidity. The chart below shows that the Fed’s balance sheet has surged since last week, reversing more than six months of previous tightening.

      (Refinitiv Chart: RealInvestmentAdvice.com, Data: St. Louis Federal Reserve)

      This reversal of liquidity is not surprising given the recent rout in the banking sector. J.P. Morgan noted on Friday that U.S. banks lost nearly $550 billion in deposits last week. Panicked investors were transferring funds to major banks from regional banks, which put further stress on already discounted collateral due to the Fed’s rate-hiking campaign.

      “The big picture from the H.4.1 release is that the U.S. banking system induced the Fed to expand its balance sheet and inject $440 billion of reserves in just one week. That large liquidity injection reverses a third of the previous $1.3 trillion of reserve tightening since the end of 2021. Given such a backdrop of elevated banking system liquidity or reserve needs, this naturally raises the question of whether the Fed can continue QT [Quantitative Tightening], similar to 2018/2019.”

      As we have repeatedly discussed, it was only a matter of time before the Fed “broke something.”

      “The economy and the markets (due to the current momentum) can DEFY the laws of financial gravity as interest rates rise. However, as interest rates increase, they act as a “brake” on economic activity. Such is because higher rates NEGATIVELY impact a highly levered economy.”

      (Refinitiv Chart: RealInvestmentAdvice.com, Data: St. Louis Federal Reserve)

      History is clear about the outcome of rate hiking campaigns.

      The question is whether the Fed’s Not QE can fix the problem.

      The Fed Created This

      As noted in this past weekend’s newsletter, the Fed must choose between fighting “inflation” or again bailing out the financial system in the name of “financial stability.”

      Of course, this entire situation is entirely due to the Federal Reserve.

      In October 2020, I wrote an article arguing that Neel Kashkari was wrong and the Fed was indeed creating a “moral hazard” by injecting massive stimulus into the economy following the pandemic. The Oxford Languages definition of moral hazard is: “The lack of incentive to guard against risk where one is protected from its consequences, e.g., by insurance.”

      Unsurprisingly, zero interest rates, $5 trillion in fiscal policy to households, and $120 billion in monthly QE removed all “risk” from owning risk assets. The spike in inflation and speculative risk-taking was the result.

      The “lack of incentive to guard against risk” becomes problematic when monetary, fiscal, and zero-interest-rate policies are reversed.

      Yes, this is all the Fed’s doing.

      However, since the turn of the century, the Fed has been able to repeatedly support financial markets by dropping interest rates and providing monetary accommodation. This was because inflation remained at low levels as deflationary pressures presided.

      (Refinitiv Chart: RealInvestmentAdvice.com, Data: St. Louis Federal Reserve)

      With inflation running at the highest levels since the 80s, the Fed risks creating another inflationary and interest rate spike if they focus on financial stability. However, if they focus on inflation and continue hiking rates, the risk of a further crack in financial stability increases.

      I don’t know which path the Fed will choose, but the markets have little upside. The moral hazard the Fed created in the first place has now come home to roost.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 16:30

    • Leftist Parents Flee Florida As Gender Treatments For Children Made Illegal
      Leftist Parents Flee Florida As Gender Treatments For Children Made Illegal

      It really is a brilliant strategy on the part of conservative states.  As the political left goes further into ideological extremism they become more and more intolerant of restrictions on their behavior, which they view as righteous and sacrosanct.  Zealotry breeds brittleness, meaning, any enforcement of practical and reasonable standards, even those protecting children, will drive leftists insane and make them want to leave.

      The more socially normal a state becomes the less leftists want to live there, and there are a lot of states that would be much happier without them.  Until recently, many state legislators and governors have been too afraid or too uninformed to take action against the invasion of deconstruction philosophies, but this is changing.

      Florida has joined seven other states so far in officially outlawing “gender affirmation treatments” for minors, including hormone blockers and surgeries that could disrupt the natural biological processes of those children for the rest of their lives.  Trans activists have admonished the laws as prejudiced and a violation of their rights, claiming that the treatments are “safe and reversible.”  However, scientists in the field admit that data on the long term consequences of hormone replacement and other therapies is far too limited to say for certain.  In other words, the newest generation of children have become guinea pigs for a baseless experiment in mass de-gendering.

      Red states want nothing to do with it, and leftist parents who gain considerable virtue signal points for having a trans child are so incensed that they are ready to leave for more woke shores.  If they can’t exploit their children to climb the victim status ladder, then they are taking their ball and going somewhere else.   

      The common argument among tans activist groups is that gender affirmation treatments “save lives.”  As noted, there is no long term data to support this claim.  Beyond their appeals to emotion, activists can’t offer any scientific evidence supporting gender fluid theories.  There are many people who would in fact oppose the notion that “trans children” even exist, with far too many factors at play including peer pressure, parental manipulation and school indoctrination.   

      Politically, the leftist ability to impose hormone therapies and gender based surgeries on children would ostensibly lock those children into the woke fold for the rest of their lives.  Take that ability away and the social justice movement loses a primary tool for perpetuating their ideology on the next generation.  The effort to protect kids from gender cultism is indirectly driving further separation of normal Americans from woke leftists, and maybe that’s a good thing. 

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 16:00

    • 'Occupy Wall Street' Redux
      ‘Occupy Wall Street’ Redux

      Authored by MN Gordon via EconomicPrism.com,

      “The bank is something more than men, I tell you.  It’s the monster.  Men made it, but they can’t control it.”

      – John Steinbeck, The Grapes of Wrath

      Negative Carry

      Borrowing short and lending long works mostly well most of the time.  This is how modern banking works.  You may be a customer at a bank.  But you also supply the product.

      In short, a bank will pay you a small percent for the deposits in your checking and savings accounts, which you can withdraw at any time.  This is the borrowing short side of the operation.

      The bank then takes your deposits and invests the money in some longer-term assets, such as loans and bonds that aren’t paid back for years.  Say the bank earns 2 percent on its money while paying depositors a fraction of a percent.  The bank pockets the spread, the net interest margin.  Easy money.

      However, when the Federal Reserve intervenes in the market and presses the federal funds rate to zero and holds it there for 2 years (March 2020 to March 2022), driving yields across the range of maturities to 5,000-year lows, something bad is bound to happen.

      The experience for consumers over the last 24 months has been raging consumer price inflation.  But that’s only a small part of the bad stuff that can happen.

      Because as the Fed jacked up the federal funds rate starting in March 2022, to contain the consumer price inflation of its own making, the yield curve has inverted.  Short term yields are higher than long term yields.  And banks, having borrowed short to lend long, have negative carry.

      Perhaps it would all works out for the banks if depositors stayed put.  But in a world where you can score nearly 5 percent from Treasury Direct – with no brokerage fees – why keep excess deposits in the bank when you only get a fraction of a percent?

      It’s a good question…

      Answering the Call

      Customers at Silicon Valley Bank (SVB) recently answered this question by pulling their deposits en masse.  On March 9, SVB customers withdrew more than $1 million per second for 10 hours straight – totaling $42 billion – before the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) seized the bank and declared it insolvent.

      This, in essence, was an old fashion bank run with a twist.  The digital age pushed the bank run into hyperdrive.

      SVB isn’t the first bank to go bust borrowing short and lending long.  It certainly won’t be the last.  In fact, since SVB failed, Signature Bank has also failed.  In addition, Credit Suisse is now getting a bailout from the Swiss National Bank.  At this rate, any number of other banks could soon be toast.

      Quite frankly, we don’t’ care what banks go bust.  What we’re really interested in is what happens after these banks go bust.  In the case of SVB, a bailout – above and beyond FDIC deposits – is in the works, through the creation of something called the Bank Term Funding Program (BTFP).

      What you need to know about BTFP is that it’s code for socializing losses.  The regulators may say it isn’t a bailout.  The taxpayer isn’t directly paying for it.  Nonetheless, if you – the taxpayer – have a bank account, you will be picking up the tab via surcharges and fees your bank imposes to bailout SVB depositors.  Is that fair?

      Should you have to pick up the tab for California Governor Gavin Newsom’s wineries, billionaire businessman Mark Cuban’s drug company, or any of the other rich elites that failed to appropriately manage their risk?

      On top of that, what will ultimately happen to the remains of SVB or other failed banks?  Will the FDIC sell them off to one of the big banks like Washington Mutual (WaMu) was to JPMorgan Chase in 2008?

      Government bailouts and the consolidation of the banking business does not make banking safer.  Rather it spreads the risk across the whole landscape like mustard seeds on a hillside.  This, in effect, propagates a much larger banking crisis sometime in the future.

      It also propagates civil disorder and social discontent.  And for what?

      When banks merge and consolidate over and over again the implications can be heinous.  To this point, for fun and for free, we’ll take a look back at the quintessential bank failure of the 20th century.

      Where to begin…

      Epic Bank Failure

      In 1820, Salomon Mayer von Rothschild (1774-1855) established his business, S M von Rothschild, Vienna.  Vienna was the capital of the Austrian Empire at the time.

      When S M von Rothschild died in 1855, his son Anselm von Rothchild (1803-1874) founded Credit-Anstalt as K. k. priv. Österreichische Credit-Anstalt für Handel und Gewerbe.  This Rothchild bank became the largest bank in Eastern Europe before World War II.

      Credit-Anstalt held assets and took deposits from all over Europe.  Then, in 1931, it failed at the worst possible time.

      The bank’s failure was a direct result of the United States’ Smoot-Hawley Tariff Act, which raised tariffs on over 20,000 imported goods.  The act crippled Europe’s economy and led investors to redeem all the capital they’d lent to the bank.

      The failure of Credit-Anstalt caused Austria to abandon the gold standard, which set off a series of economic dominoes.  Germany left gold.  Then Great Britain.  And finally, in 1933, so did America.

      The failure of Credit-Anstalt is what really kicked off the Great Depression.  The real story, of course, is not Credit-Anstalt’s collapse.  It’s what let up to its collapse.

      Today, with the Federal Reserve having first compelled banks to stretch for yield in long dated maturities, before then hiking short-term interest rates, banks are being put to an extraordinary test.  Without question, there will be more SVBs in the coming weeks.

      What’s more, a series of bank bailouts and consolidations could be the perfect setup for a very destructive Credit-Anstalt situation.  The BTFP bailout of SVB – and Gavin Newsom – offers a pathway to a mega crisis.

      Here’s why…

      Forced Mergers

      When the Austro-Hungarian Empire collapsed at the end of World War I, Credit-Anstalt continued to offer commercial, investment and savings to customers in both the former empire states as well as Amsterdam, Berlin, Bucharest, Paris, and Sofia.  Its shares were traded on eleven exchanges, including New York.

      Credit-Anstalt became the largest bank in Austria through a series of forced mergers to bailout other Austrian banks that had failed.  These forced mergers may have been expedient.  But they were not intelligent.  That is, they did not always pencil out.

      Moreover, it resulted in the creation of a bank that was larger than the rest of Austria’s banks put together.  It also concentrated the accumulated losses of Austrian industry in a single super bank.

      Over time, Credit-Anstalt’s balance sheet eclipsed the size of the government’s expenditures.  Approximately, 70 percent of Austria’s corporations did business with it.

      In 1925, Credit-Anstalt’s equity was only 15 percent of what it had been in 1914 (at the onset of WWI) and its debt-to-equity ratio rose from 3.64 in 1913 to 5.68 at the end of 1924.  By the end of 1930 it had ballooned to 9.44.

      Part of the increase in the size of the bank came from loans which Credit-Anstalt made to businesses of the former Austro-Hungarian Empire.  To make these loans, Credit-Anstalt borrowed money, primarily from Great Britain and the United States.

      However, the loans from Great Britain and the United States were only on a short-term basis.  Any failure to renew these loans would lead to the demise of the bank.  The effect of the Smoot-Hawley Tariff Act essentially toppled the credit pyramid.

      On May 11, 1931, the bank announced that it had lost more than half of its capital.  This was a criterion under Austrian law by which a bank was declared failed.  The announcement of losses led to a panic and bank runs on Austrian banks.

      Occupy Wall Street Redux

      The crisis that started in Austria and extended to the European continent, continued to Great Britain.  The island nation went off the Gold Standard on September 21, 1931, after its gold reserves shrank from £200 million to £5 million.

      Twenty-five countries soon followed in Britain’s footsteps, depreciating their currency against the U.S. dollar or leaving the gold standard.  By the end of 1931, the Depression (with a capital D) was global.

      FDR took the U.S. off the Gold Standard in April 1933, confiscated the gold of U.S. citizens, and devalued the dollar.  By this, workers, savers, and taxpayers got a raw deal.  They always do.

      For example, during the 2008-09 great financial crisis and bank bailouts, workers, savers, and taxpayers also got a raw deal.  They lost their jobs.  They lost their houses.  They lost their life savings.  Yet the big bankers still got their big bonuses.

      If you recall, these bailouts triggered major social discord where the 99 percent took to the streets to Occupy Wall Street.  The current bailout of SVB depositors – above and beyond FDIC limits – is resurfacing these same strifes.

      California Governor Gavin Newsom’s wineries got a bailout.  Billionaire businessman Mark Cuban’s drug company got a bailout.  Many other Silicon Valley rich elites got a bailout.

      Therefore, shouldn’t students get a bailout of their student loans?  Shouldn’t mortgage and credit card debt be cancelled?  Shouldn’t RIFed Googlers get a bailout so they can keep making big bucks sitting in padded hypnotic meditation chambers?

      These questions are absurd.  But so are the bailouts of SVB’s big depositors and the further consolidation of the banking industry.  What if, like Credit-Anstalt, JPMorgan Chase or Bank of America were to fail?

      These are the grim opportunities that bank bailouts and bank consolidations make available.

      After decades of prolificacy, followed by decades of ambivalence and apathy, America’s headed for complete financial, economic, and societal catastrophe.  You can see it.  You can hear it.  You can feel it.  You can taste it.  You can smell it.

      First stop: Occupy Wall Street Redux.

      In closing, owning physical gold and silver has never been more critical.

      *  *  *

      When things get bad the global elites always channel the discontent of the masses into a great cause.  Is Washington secretly provoking China to attack Taiwan?  Are your finances prepared for such madness?  Answers to these important questions can be found in a unique Special Report.  It’s called, “War in the Strait of Taiwan?  How to Exploit the Trend of Escalating Conflict.”  You can access a copy for less than a penny.

      Tyler Durden
      Sun, 03/19/2023 – 15:30

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 19th March 2023

    • Watchdog Group Launches Investigation Into Biden’s 'Woke Army'
      Watchdog Group Launches Investigation Into Biden’s ‘Woke Army’

      Authored by Savannah Hulsey Pointer via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      The Foundation for Government Accountability (FGA) is launching an investigation into a recent executive order the group called an “unprecedented scheme” they believe violates the democratic process.

      US President Joe Biden discusses his efforts to reduce gun violence at The Boys & Girls Club of West San Gabriel Valley, in Monterey Park, Calif. on Mar. 14, 2023. (JIM WATSON/AFP via Getty Images)

      In a press release, FGA said they are “sounding the alarm” on the “‘woke army’ being assembled inside the federal government,” through Executive Order 14091 (EO), titled “Executive Order Further Advancing Racial Equity and Support for Underserved Communities Through The Federal Government.”

      FGA announced that their investigation will include filing Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) requests targeting the 23 agencies addressed in the Equity EO, including the Departments of State, Justice, Defense, Labor, Transportation, Social Security, Education, and Health and Human Services.

      The group will share the information they gather with Congress, the states, and the American people, according to their press release.

      FGA asserted that the plan (pdf) was developed by a left-wing activist group, and said it was “designed to circumvent the normal, democratic process and instead force their ideology onto Americans.”

      Tarren Bragdon, FGA President and CEO said of the executive order, “These equity teams are a Trojan horse planted in the heart of every federal agency to fundamentally change decision-making across the bureaucracy. Their goal is to continuously and permanently embed Left-wing ideology into every agency action.

      We cannot allow this new ‘woke army’ to force un-American philosophy into all corners of our federal government. They will degrade our nation’s capabilities and effectiveness, while undermining our liberty and security.”

      “We’ve seen the economic devastation over the first two years of the Biden presidency. If radical ideology is ingrained into every policy and regulatory decision at all agencies, the impact on the American people and economy will be widespread, devastating, and impossible to reverse,” Bragdon added.

      Bragdon referenced part of Section 2 of the order, which outlines the requirement that agency heads across the administration ensure they place an “Agency Equity Team” within their agencies to “coordinate the implementation of equity initiatives,” in order to deliver “equitable outcomes” to the American people.

      Stewart Whitson, FGA legal director spoke to the issue, saying “The clock is ticking on President Biden’s term. And the radical forces inside his administration and their partners on the outside know they have limited time to embed their ‘leaders and practitioners’ into every federal agency before they lose power. If successful, this ‘woke army’ will outlast the Biden presidency and become a permanent fixture deeply entrenched in our government.”

      “Through this investigation, FGA is fighting to expose this attempted ideological takeover of our federal agencies, and we won’t stop until we’ve uncovered the truth. We will share the information we uncover with Congress, the states, and the American people so that, together, we can help stop this unconstitutional effort before it’s too late.”

      The White House did not immediately respond to The Epoch Times’s request for comment.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 23:30

    • Visualizing The Largest Cities Throughout History
      Visualizing The Largest Cities Throughout History

      For much of human history, most people did not live in cities.

      As Visual Capitalist’s Pallavi Rao details below, cities – settlements that are densely populated and self-administered – require many specific prerequisites to come into existence. The most crucial, especially for much of human history, is an abundance of food.

      Surplus food production leads to denser populations and allows for people to specialize in other skills that are not associated with basic human survival.

      But that also means that cities usually consume more primary goods than they produce. And their size requires a host of many other services – such as transport and sanitation – that are traditionally expensive to maintain. So maintaining large urban centers, and especially the world’s largest cities, was a monumental task.

      Mapper and history YouTuber Ollie Bye has visualized the seven largest cities in the world since 3,000 BCE. His video covers cities with a minimum population of 10,000 and hints at historical events which led to the establishment, growth, and eventual fall of cities.

      The World’s Largest City Throughout History

      With any historical data, accuracy is always a concern, and urban populations were rough and infrequent estimates up until the Industrial Revolution.

      Bye has used a variety of data sources—including the UN and many research papers—to create the dataset used in the video.

      In some places he also had to rely on his own estimates and criteria to keep the data reasonable and consistent:

      • In early history, some cities didn’t have given population estimates for long periods of time, and had to be equalized or estimated through other sources. For example, Babylon had a population estimate at 1,600 BCE (60,000) and at 1,200 BCE (75,000) but none in the 400 years between.

      • Cities that only briefly climbed above a population of 10,000, or that would have made the largest cities ranking for only a couple of years (and based on uncertain estimates), were not included.

      Here’s a look at the largest city starting from the year 3,000 BCE, with populations listed in millions during the last year of each city’s “reign.” Cities are also listed with the flags of current-day countries in the same location.

      Time Period Largest City Population (Millions) Country
      3000-2501 BCE Uruk 0.08 Iraq 🇮🇶
      2500-2251 BCE Lagash 0.06 Iraq 🇮🇶
      2250-2001 BCE Girsu 0.08 Iraq 🇮🇶
      2000-1751 BCE Isin 0.04 Iraq 🇮🇶
      1750-1251 BCE Babylon 0.06 Iraq 🇮🇶
      1250-1001 BCE Pi-Ramesses 0.16 Egypt 🇪🇬
      1000-601 BCE Thebes 0.12 Egypt 🇪🇬
      600-301 BCE Babylon 0.20 Iraq 🇮🇶
      300-201 BCE Carthage 0.40 Tunisia 🇹🇳
      200 BCE-270 CE Alexandria 0.60 Egypt 🇪🇬
      271-350 CE Rome 0.39 Italy 🇮🇹
      351-500 CE Constantinople 0.49 Turkey 🇹🇷
      501-640 CE Ctesiphon 0.50 Iraq 🇮🇶
      641-644 CE Constantinople 0.40 Turkey 🇹🇷
      645-795 CE Chang’an 0.59 China 🇨🇳
      796-963 CE Baghdad 1.10 Iraq 🇮🇶
      964-975 CE Constantinople 0.32 Turkey 🇹🇷
      976-984 CE Córdoba 0.33 Spain 🇪🇸
      985-1144 CE Bian 0.44 China 🇨🇳
      1145-1199 CE Constantinople 0.24 Turkey 🇹🇷
      1200-1275 CE Lin’an 0.36 China 🇨🇳
      1276-1278 CE Cairo 0.37 Egypt 🇪🇬
      1279-1315 CE Hangzhou 0.43 China 🇨🇳
      1316-1348 CE Cairo 0.50 Egypt 🇪🇬
      1349-1353 CE Hangzhou 0.43 China 🇨🇳
      1344-1380 CE Cairo 0.35 Egypt 🇪🇬
      1381-1394 CE Vijayanagara 0.36 India 🇮🇳
      1395-1426 CE Yingtian 0.50 China 🇨🇳
      1427-1441 CE Vijayanagara 0.44 India 🇮🇳
      1442-1612 CE Beijing 0.70 China 🇨🇳
      1613-1678 CE Constatinople 0.74 Turkey 🇹🇷
      1679-1720 CE Dhaka 0.78 Bangladesh 🇧🇩
      1721-1826 CE Beijing 1.30 China 🇨🇳
      1827-1918 CE London 7.40 UK 🇬🇧
      1919-1954 CE New York 13.20 U.S. 🇺🇸
      1955-Present Tokyo 37.30 Japan 🇯🇵

      Ancient Cities in the Fertile Crescent

      Considered the “cradle of civilization,” the Fertile Crescent in the Middle East was home to all seven of the largest cities in the world in 3,000 BCE.

      The Sumerian city of Uruk (modern-day Iraq), allegedly home to the legendary king Gilgamesh, topped the list with 40,000 people. It was followed by Memphis (Egypt) with 20,000 inhabitants.

      For the next 1,700 years, other Mesopotamian cities in modern-day Iraq and Syria held pole positions, growing steadily and shuffling between themselves as the largest.

      2,250 BCE marked the first time a different Asian city—Mohenjo-Daro (modern-day Pakistan) from the Indus Valley Civilization—found a spot at #4 with 40,000 people.

      The table below is a quick snapshot of the seven largest cities in the world for from 3,000 BCE to 200 CE. Again, populations are listed in millions.

      Rank 3000 BCE 2250 BCE 1250 BCE 200 CE
      1 Uruk (0.04) 🇮🇶 Girsu (0.08) 🇮🇶 Pi-Ramesses (0.16) 🇪🇬 Alexandria (0.60) 🇪🇬
      2 Memphis (0.02) 🇪🇬 Mari (0.05) 🇸🇾 Yin (0.12) 🇨🇳 Pataliputra (0.35) 🇮🇳
      3 Umma (0.02) 🇮🇶 Umma (0.04) 🇮🇶 Thebes (0.08) 🇪🇬 Carthage (0.20) 🇹🇳
      4 Nagar (0.02) 🇸🇾 Mohenjo-daro (0.04) 🇵🇰 Sapinuwa (0.07) 🇹🇷 Luoyang (0.20) 🇨🇳
      5 Lagash (0.02) 🇮🇶 Akkad (0.03) 🇮🇶 Babylon (0.07) 🇮🇶 Seleucia (0.20) 🇮🇶
      6 Larak (0.01) 🇮🇶 Uruk (0.03) 🇮🇶 Hattusa (0.06) 🇹🇷 Pergamon (0.20) 🇹🇷
      7 Eridu (0.01) 🇮🇶 Memphis (0.03) 🇪🇬 Uruk (0.03) 🇮🇶 Taxila (0.10) 🇮🇳

      It wasn’t until 1,250 BCE that the top two spots were taken by cities in different regions: Pi-Ramesses (Egypt) and Yin (China), both with more than 100,000 residents.

      Egyptian cities would continue to be the most populous for the next millennium—briefly interrupted by Carthage and Babylon—until the start of the Common Era. By 30 CE, Alexandria was the largest city in the world, but the top 10 had representatives from the Middle East, Northern Africa, and Asia.

      All Roads Lead to Rome

      One city in Europe meanwhile, was also beginning to see steady growth—Rome.

      It took until halfway through the 3rd century C.E. for Rome to become the most populous city, followed closely still by Alexandria (Egypt). Meanwhile in Iraq, Ctesiphon, the capital of the Sasanian empire was growing rapidly.

      Rank 271 CE 351 CE 501 CE 645 CE
      1 Rome (0.39) 🇮🇹 Constantinople (0.29) 🇹🇷 Ctesiphon (0.41) 🇮🇶 Chang’an (0.38) 🇨🇳
      2 Alexandria (0.37) 🇪🇬 Ctesiphon (0.25) 🇮🇶 Constantinople (0.40) 🇹🇷 Constantinople (0.32) 🇹🇷
      3 Luoyang (0.20) 🇨🇳 Rome (0.24) 🇮🇹 Luoyang (0.20) 🇨🇳 Kanyakubja (0.24) 🇮🇳
      4 Vaishali (0.17) 🇮🇳 Pataliputra (0.22) 🇮🇳 Teotihuacan (0.15) 🇲🇽 Luoyang (0.21) 🇨🇳
      5 Carthage (0.16) 🇹🇳 Luoyang (0.20) 🇨🇳 Jiankang (0.15) 🇨🇳 El Pilar (0.17) 🇧🇿
      6 Teotihuacan (0.14) 🇲🇽 Vaishali (0.16) 🇮🇳 Caracol (0.14) 🇧🇿 Ctesiphon (0.41) 🇮🇶
      7 Antioch (0.12) 🇹🇷 Teotihuacan (0.15) 🇲🇽 Chang’an (0.10) 🇨🇳 Teotihuacan (0.15) 🇲🇽

      Towards the end of the 3rd century, the Roman empire was divided into two, with Constantinople becoming the new capital for the Eastern half. Consequently, it had outgrown Rome by 353 and become the world’s most populous city, and for the next few centuries would reclaim this title time and time again.

      The Largest Cities Reach 1 Million

      In the 9th century, Baghdad became the first city to have 1 million residents (though historians also estimate Rome and the Chinese city of Chang’an may have achieved that figure earlier).

      It would be nearly nine centuries until a city had one million inhabitants again, and Baghdad’s reign didn’t last long. By the 10th century, Bian, the capital of the Northern Song dynasty in China, had become the largest city in the world, with Baghdad suffering from relocations and shifting political power to other cities in the region.

      Rank 850 CE 985 CE 1316 CE 1381 CE
      1 Baghdad (1.00) 🇮🇶 Bian (0.35) 🇨🇳 Cairo (0.44) 🇪🇬 Vijayanagara (0.36) 🇮🇳
      2 Chang’an (0.60) 🇨🇳 Cordoba (0.33) 🇲🇽 Hangzhou (0.43) 🇨🇳 Cairo (0.35) 🇪🇬
      3 Constantinople (0.27) 🇹🇷 Constantinople (0.32) 🇹🇷 Dadu (0.40) 🇨🇳 Paris (0.29) 🇫🇷
      4 Kanyakubja (0.21) 🇮🇳 Angkor (0.18) 🇰🇭 Paris (0.25) 🇫🇷 Yingtian (0.27) 🇨🇳
      5 Luoyang (0.20) 🇨🇳 Baghdad (0.17) 🇮🇶 Kamakura (0.20) 🇯🇵 Hangzhou (0.23) 🇨🇳
      6 Bian (0.17) 🇨🇳 Kyoto (0.15) 🇯🇵 Guangzhou (0.15) 🇨🇳 Beiping (0.15) 🇨🇳
      7 Cordoba (0.16) 🇲🇽 Cairo (0.12) 🇪🇬 Fez (0.14) 🇲🇦 Tabriz (0.14) 🇮🇷

      From the 12th century onwards, Mongol invasions in the Middle East and Central Asia severely limited population growth in the region. European cities too were ravaged in the 14th century, but by plagues instead of marauders.

      For the next few hundred years, Cairo (Egypt), Hangzhou (China), and Vijayanagara (India) would top the list until Beijing took (and mostly held onto) the top spot through the 19th century.

      Industrial Revolution and Rapid Urbanization

      The start of the Industrial Revolution in the UK—spreading to the rest of Europe and later on the U.S.—led to hitherto unseen levels of urban population growth.

      Factories needed labor, which caused mass emigration from the rural countryside to urban centers of growth.

      In 1827, London passed Beijing to become the largest city in the world with 1.3 million residents. Over the next 100 years, its population increased nearly 7 times, remaining the most populous city until the end of World War I, by which time it was overtaken by New York.

      Rank 1442 1851 1919 1955
      1 Beijing (0.51) 🇨🇳 London (2.2) 🇬🇧 New York (7.6) 🇺🇸 Tokyo (13.7) 🇯🇵
      2 Vijayanagara (0.44) 🇮🇳 Beijing (1.6) 🇨🇳 London (7.4) 🇬🇧 New York (13.2) 🇺🇸
      3 Cairo (0.37) 🇪🇬 Paris (1.3) 🇫🇷 Paris (4.7) 🇫🇷 Osaka (8.6) 🇯🇵
      4 Hangzhou (0.24) 🇨🇳 Guangzhou (0.87) 🇨🇳 Tokyo (4.3) 🇯🇵 London (8.2) 🇬🇧
      5 Tabriz (0.21) 🇮🇷 Constantinople (0.71) 🇹🇷 Berlin (3.7) 🇩🇪 Paris (6.7) 🇫🇷
      6 Nanjing (0.18) 🇨🇳 Edo (0.78) 🇯🇵 Chicago (2.9) 🇺🇸 Buenos Aires (5.9) 🇦🇷
      7 Granada (0.15) 🇪🇸 New York (0.56) 🇺🇸 Vienna (1.9) 🇦🇹 Moscow (5.7) 🇷🇺

      From 1920 to 2022, the world population quadrupled thanks to improvements in farming and healthcare, and cities saw rapid growth as well. The beginning of the 20st century saw the top 10 largest cities in the world in the U.S., Europe, and Japan.

      By the 21st century however, growth shifted away to other parts of the world and by 2021, the top seven had cities only from Asia and the Americas.

      Rank 1970 1990 2000 2021
      1 Tokyo (23.2) 🇯🇵 Tokyo (32.7) 🇯🇵 Tokyo (34.3) 🇯🇵 Tokyo (37.3) 🇯🇵
      2 New York (16.1) 🇺🇸 Osaka (18.5) 🇯🇵 Osaka (18.6) 🇯🇵 New Delhi (31.1) 🇮🇳
      3 Osaka (15.2) 🇯🇵 New York (16.2) 🇺🇸 Mexico City (18.4) 🇲🇽 Shanghai (27.7) 🇨🇳
      4 Mexico City (8.8) 🇲🇽 Mexico City (15.9) 🇲🇽 New York (17.8) 🇺🇸 Sao Paulo (22.2) 🇧🇷
      5 Buenos Aires (8.4) 🇦🇷 Sao Paulo (15.0) 🇧🇷 Sao Paulo (17.0) 🇧🇷 Mexico City (21.9) 🇲🇽
      6 Los Angeles (8.3) 🇺🇸 Bombay (12.7) 🇮🇳 Mumbai (16.1) 🇮🇳 Dhaka (21.7) 🇧🇩
      7 Paris (8.2) 🇫🇷 Buenos Aires (11.2) 🇦🇷 New Delhi (15.6) 🇮🇳 Beijing (20.8) 🇨🇳

      Tokyo, which took the top spot in 1954, is the largest city in the world today with a population of 37 million (including the entire metropolitan area).

      It is followed by New Delhi with 31 million, but by 2028, the UN estimates that positions will switch on the leaderboard and New Delhi will overtake Tokyo.

      What Does Population Growth Say About the Past (and Future)?

      The rise and fall of cities through the sands of time can give us insight into the trajectory of civilization growth. As civilizations grow, become richer, and reach their zenith, so too do their cities blossom in tandem.

      For example, of the modern-day seven largest cities in the world, four of them belong to countries with the 10 largest economies in the world.

      Meanwhile, sudden falls in urban population point to turbulence—political instability, wars, natural disasters, or disease.

      Most recently Ukraine’s cities are seeing depopulation as residents flee conflict zones, raising the specter of a demographic crisis for the country should the war continue.

      Thus, tracking the size of urban population can help policymakers forecast future roadblocks to growth, especially when prioritizing sustainable growth for a country.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 23:00

    • 'Conspiracy At Its Height': Fauci Responds To Message Saying He 'Prompted' Anti-Lab Leak Paper
      ‘Conspiracy At Its Height’: Fauci Responds To Message Saying He ‘Prompted’ Anti-Lab Leak Paper

      Authored by Zachary Stieber via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      Dr. Anthony Fauci responded on March 15 to a newly released email that said he was among those who “prompted” work on analyzing how COVID-19 came about, which resulted in a paper that claimed the laboratory origin theory was not credible.

      Dr. Anthony Fauci, former director of the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, on Capitol Hill in Washington on Sept. 14, 2022. (Drew Angerer/Getty Images)

      A special U.S. House of Representatives panel on March 5 released the email, sent by scientist Kristian Andersen in February 2020 to the journal Nature.

      “There has been a lot of speculation, fear mongering, and conspiracies put forward in this space and we thought that bringing some clarity to this discussion might be of interest to Nature,” Andersen wrote at the time. “Prompted by Jeremy Farra[r], Tony Fauci, and Francis Collins, Eddie Holmes, Andrew Rambaut, Bob Garry, Ian Lipkin, and myself have been working through much of the (primarily) genetic data to provide agnostic and scientifically informed hypothesis around the origins of the virus,” Andersen added.

      In another message that had previously been made public, Andersen said the work was “focused on trying to disprove any type of lab theory.”

      Anderson was one of the co-authors of a paper published without peer review in February 2020. Both that version and one later published by Nature Medicine said the analysis shows that “SARS-CoV-2 is not a laboratory construct nor a purposefully manipulated virus.” SARS-CoV-2 causes COVID-19.

      Fauci was asked about the emails on Wednesday during an appearance on NewsNation.

      “Absolutely not,” he said when host Chris Cuomo inquired whether the paper was drafted to disprove the lab origin theory.

      Fauci referenced the secret phone call involving himself, Andersen, and others that took place on Feb. 1, 2020, and involved several experts—including Andersen—saying characteristics of COVID-19 pointed to it being engineered.

      During the phone call on Feb. 1, where very competent evolutionary biologists were going back and forth, and they decided on the phone call, listen, let’s take a little time and go back and really carefully examine those sequences and see if, in fact, there’s anything to that,” Fauci said.

      “They did that and they came to the conclusion that, in fact, it is more likely that it was not something that was engineered, but something that actually escaped from a wet market [in Wuhan, China]. And in order to get it peer reviewed, they wrote a paper to let the peer review system evaluate whether it was valid, and it did and that’s how the paper came about,” Fauci added. “So this idea of saying, write the paper to definitively disprove something is conspiracy at its height. It’s really ridiculous.”

      Grateful for ‘Advice and Leadership’

      According to other emails made public after being acquired through the Freedom of Information Act, Fauci was involved in looking over drafts of the paper before it was published. In one email, Andersen thanked Fauci and several others “for your advice and leadership as we have been working through the SARS-CoV-2 ‘origins’ paper.”

      Thanks for your note. Nice job on the paper,” Fauci responded.

      Fauci’s boss, Dr. Francis Collins, was also thanked. In a later email to Fauci, he said that the lab origin theory was “very destructive” and that he had hoped the paper “would settle this” but that it “probably didn’t get much visibility.”

      “I would not do anything about this right now. It is a shiny object that will go away in times,” Fauci wrote. In April 2020, Fauci cited the paper during an official White House press conference without mentioning his involvement, telling reporters that “a group of highly qualified evolutionary virologists looked at the sequences there and the sequences in bats as they evolve and the mutations that it took to get to the point where it is now is totally consistent with a jump of a species from an animal to a human.”

      For the natural origin theory to be true, a host animal must have passed the virus on to humans. No such animal has been identified.

      Fauci has maintained during recent interviews that he’s kept an open mind as to the origin of COVID-19.

      “If that is true, why did Dr. Fauci tell the American people at a White House briefing televised on April 17, 2020, that COVID-19 was ‘totally consistent’ with a natural origin and never mentioned that half the scientists on a February 1, 2020, conference call thought it was a lab leak,” Rep. Debbie Lesko (R-Ariz.), a member of the special U.S. House panel, the Select Subcommittee on the Coronavirus Pandemic, told The Epoch Times via email.

      That doesn’t sound like someone with an open mind. That sounds like someone misleading the American public,” Lesko added.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 22:30

    • Air Pollution: A Global Health Threat
      Air Pollution: A Global Health Threat

      Air pollution is the greatest environmental health hazard to humankind, leading to over six million deaths a year and an economic cost that equates to over $8 trillion dollars.

      That’s according to the World Air Quality Report 2022 released Tuesday by Swiss air quality technology company IQAir.

      Statista’s Anna Fleck reports that the analysis found that out of a surveyed 131 countries, regions and territories, only 13 met World Health Organization air guidelines of annual PM2.5 concentrations at or below 5 μg/m3 in 2022, many of which were in Oceania.

      The following chart shows how greatly air quality varies globally, with cities such as Pakistan’s Lahore (97.4 μg of PM2.5 particles per m3) and India’s Delhi (92.6) both exceeded WHO guidelines more than 10 times.  At the other end of the spectrum lie cities such as Reykjavik in Iceland (3.3) and Tallinn in Estonia (4.8) which are among the few that meet guidelines. 

      Infographic: Air Pollution: A Global Health Threat | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      Air pollution impacts already vulnerable communities particularly hard, with more than 90 percent of pollution related deaths occurring in low-income and middle-income countries, according to the report. Africa, as well as Central and South Asia were overrepresented for having the highest annual average PM2.5 concentrations weighted by population. This is even including the huge disparities in data availability between countries, with only 19 out of 54 African countries having had sufficient data to be usable in the paper.

      IQAir defines PM2.5 concentration as the amount of fine particulate aerosol particles up to 2.5 microns in diameter. It is one of six major air pollutants commonly used in the classification of air quality and widely considered as the most harmful, in terms of its prevalence in the environment and the impacts it has on health. The latter includes causing and aggravating health conditions such as asthma, cancer, lung illness, heart disease and premature mortality.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 22:00

    • FBI Is Now A 'Weaponized Apparatchik' Of The Presidential Administration: Whistleblower
      FBI Is Now A ‘Weaponized Apparatchik’ Of The Presidential Administration: Whistleblower

      Authored by Samantha Flom and Steve Lance via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      There’s a growing divide between the rank-and-file officers of the FBI and upper management, according to FBI agent-turned-whistleblower Steve Friend, and it’s those at the top who are pushing a political agenda.

      “I spent close to nine years in the FBI, spent a good chunk of my time just keeping my head down and working the cases in front of me,” Friend noted in a March 14 interview with NTD News, The Epoch Times’ sister outlet.

      There are a lot of agents that sort of share that sentiment and just want to drive the mission forward. Unfortunately, there’s a big disconnect between the rank-and-file and the management class, and as you climb that ladder, it’s tending to become more and more political.”

      The evidence, Friend said, could be seen in the bureau’s disparate treatment of pro-life activists—like Mark Houck, whose home was raided by the FBI over an altercation outside of a Planned Parenthood—and pro-abortion activists, like those who protested outside of Supreme Court justices’ homes and were never investigated.

      “I think there’s an argument to be made that the FBI has now just become a weaponized apparatchik of the presidential administration,” he added, holding that public trust in the agency has diminished largely as a result of the perception of political bias.

      FBI special agent Steve Friend in a file image. (Courtesy of Steve Friend)

      Blowing the Whistle

      Friend—now a senior fellow at the Center for Renewing America—previously worked as a special agent in the FBI’s Jacksonville, Florida, office, but was suspended from the agency after he came forward last September with concerns about how the bureau was handling child sexual abuse cases and allegations that cases were being inappropriately assigned.

      Friend had also objected to the FBI’s use of SWAT teams to arrest individuals suspected of committing misdemeanors during the Jan. 6 Capitol breach.

      According to a March 6 letter (pdf) written by whistleblower organization Empower Oversight, Friend was informed in December by the Department of Justice (DOJ) Office of the Inspector General (OIG) that, “after careful consideration,” the OIG had decided against opening an investigation into his allegations.

      However, on March 16, DOJ Assistant Inspector General Sean O’Neill responded that DOJ Inspector General Michael Horowitz “still intends to schedule an interview with Mr. Friend regarding his disclosures.”

      Views on Jan. 6

      Prior to his suspension, Friend was involved in investigations relating to the Jan. 6 Capitol breach—an incident he said could only be fully understood through “radical transparency.”

      “I’m hoping that this slow drip of surveillance footage is just eventually abandoned, and we just get the whole amount of it,” he said, alluding to the recent exposés aired by Fox News’ Tucker Carlson.

      There’s no reason why it should be leaked out slowly because that just gives cannon fodder to both sides to accuse the other of cherry-picking their information.”

      As for his views on the events of that day, Friend said he thought the incident involved a “mixed bag” of people who did some “deplorable and abhorrent” things and should be held accountable and those who were just there to exercise their First Amendment rights.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 21:30

    • Biden In Touch With Buffett On Bank Crisis
      Biden In Touch With Buffett On Bank Crisis

      What do you call it when an 80-year-old seeks the advice of a 92-year-old?

      Answer: the worst financial crisis since Lehman.TM

      Realizing that Berkshire Hathaway had a near-record $128 billion in cash at the start of the year, more than most countries…

      … Joe Biden, who on Monday lied to the American people that the “our banking system is safe“…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      … appears to have changed his mind and is urgently hoping to recreate the zeitgeist surrounding the infamous Oct 16 “Buy American” NYT op-ed by Warren Buffett.

      … which ended up being memorable but only after the biggest bailout of US banks and capital markets in history and the start of the neverending QR/ZIRP->bust->QE/ZIRP cycle.

      According to Bloomberg, Berkshire’s Warren Buffett has been in touch with senior officials in President Joe Biden’s administration in recent days as the regional banking crisis goes from bad to worse to Savings And Loan 2.0 (if only America had any savings left).

      The buzz of private jet activity centering on Omaha was first reported by Fuzzy Panda who noted that “a large number (>20) of Private Jets landed in Omaha yesterday afternoon” with jets flying from HQs of Regional Banks, Ski Resorts & DC, and prompting the question “Did Buffett just fly all the regional bank CEOs into Omaha & offer a deal to SAVE the banks?”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      For now the answer is unclear, nor is it clear what role, if any, the billionaire investor may play to contain the crisis after the cascading failures of Silicon Valley Bank, Signature Bank and Silvergate.

      Buffett, who will be 100 years old in 2031, has a long history of stepping in to aid banks in crisis, providing funding at daylight robbery terms (10% prefs + warrants), and leveraging his cult investing status to restore confidence in ailing firms. Bank of America won a capital injection from Buffett in 2011 after its stock plunged amid losses tied to subprime mortgages. Buffett also tossed a $5 billion lifeline to Goldman in 2008 to shore up the bank following the Lehman Brothers collapse.

      Meanwhile, Biden’s team, wary of political blowback among progressives, has sought to implement bailouts that are spun as magically not being bailouts and which don’t require direct government spending from taxpayers, including the Federal Reserve’s actions (narrator: of course they require taxpayer backing). Alas, so far Biden’s plan has been a disaster: on Thursday, big US banks voluntarily deposited $30 billion to stabilize First Republic Bank this week, a move regulators described as “most welcome.” On Friday, the stock collapsed another 50%.

      Any investment or intervention from Buffett or other figures would continue that playbook, looking to stem the crisis without direct bailouts…. until of course direct bailouts, rate cuts and QE are inevitable since a cascading wave of defaults among the regional banks would lead to another great depression as small/medium banks account for 50% of US commercial and industrial lending, 60% of residential real estate lending, 80% of commercial real estate lending, and 45% of consumer lending.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      But before we get there, and since we are now following the playbook of the 2008 crisis, expect the SEC to “halt short selling of financial stocks to protect investors and markets”, just like it did 3 days after Lehman collapse sparking the worst banking crisis… until now.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 21:00

    • GOP Compromise Unintentionally Creates Universal Firearm Background Checks
      GOP Compromise Unintentionally Creates Universal Firearm Background Checks

      Submitted by Gun Owners of America,

      Remember the Cornyn-Murphy Compromise that Gun Owners of America and our members warned Congress about? We were loud and clear about how this legislation did nothing to end mass public murders and only infringed on gun owners’ rights.

      We attempted to warn elected officials. Nevertheless, Congress rushed to sign gun rights away, including 15 Republican Senators who enabled the passage of the “Bipartisan Safer Communities Act.”

      Well, President Biden just announced that he’ll be using his “regulatory authority” to implement Universal Background Checks thanks to that bill.

      When we told the anti-gunners in Congress how this bill was poison and would just add fuel to the fire for President Biden to go beyond what was written, compromise-hungry swamp monsters didn’t believe us.

      Well, we hate to say, “I told you so,” but that’s exactly what happened. The Biden Administration, by their own admission, is going around Congress to infringe on your rights.

      President Biden wants to use the expanded definition of “engaged in the business” to force you to file a background check for every single time you purchase a firearm.

      According to the White House, the President is directing the Attorney General to move the U.S. as close to universal background checks as possible without additional legislation by supposedly clarifying the statutory definition of who is “engaged in the business” of dealing in firearms, as updated by the Bipartisan Safer Communities Act.

      It seems that Biden would rather harass law-abiding gun owners who sell as few as just one firearm per year than lock up the criminals who are responsible for gun violence.

      For those who are unfamiliar with this fight, President Obama attempted a similar executive order towards the end of his term in 2016. Obama attempted to expand the definition of gun “dealer” to: 

      – Restrict private transfers of firearms under the guise of the so-called loopholes “online and at gun shows.”

      – Prosecute those who sell even as many as one firearm unless they obtain a Federal Firearms License.

      – Punishing this otherwise lawful behavior with “up to five years in prison and fines up to $250,000.”

      While Biden has just announced his executive order, we currently have no specifics on what that will entail. Obama’s executive order gives us a look into the future of what this rulemaking could potentially look like. 

      While the Biden administration may think this move is popular, the support for Universal Background Checks is fake.

      The fact is, most people who are polled in these anti-gun surveys don’t fully understand what a Universal Background Check is, or that they’re actually Universal Registration Checks.

      According to a survey of 1,000 people done by the Crime Prevention Research Center, 86% say they support background checks on all gun sales or transfers, but as soon as they’re asked follow-up questions which explain how this would look as policy, support starts to drop.

      For example, when survey participants were asked a question with context on how the law would affect them, 44% now say they oppose Universal Background Checks, and only 42% say they support them.

      Universal Background Checks don’t stop crime or criminals, instead they limit the ability of law-abiding citizens from being able to innocently transfer firearms to each other.

      The goal of President Biden’s new backdoor universal background check scheme is to turn as many private citizens as possible who sell their guns into FFLs, restricting their ability to conduct private gun transfers without being recorded in the ATF’s illegal national federal registry

      Remember, the ATF already has a database of nearly one billion gun and gun owner records in their West Virginia facility.

      GOA will do everything in our power to defend your gun rights from this infringement. We’ll lobby Congress, participate in any rulemaking, and challenge it in court when it is published and becomes possible.

      *   *   *

      We’ll hold the line for you in Washington. We are No Compromise. Join the Fight Now. 

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 20:30

    • Arab Leaders Offer Syria Billions In Aid, Sanctions Relief If Assad Pushes Back Against Iran
      Arab Leaders Offer Syria Billions In Aid, Sanctions Relief If Assad Pushes Back Against Iran

      Via The Canary,

      Arab leaders are offering Syrian President Bashar al-Assad a deal that includes billions of dollars for reconstruction efforts and a pledge to lobby the west to lift sanctions in exchange for “[asking] Iran to stop expanding its footprint in the nation,” according to Arab and European officials that spoke with the Wall Street Journal.

      Other conditions set by the leaders of the unnamed Arab nations include a pledge from Damascus to engage with opposition and rebel groups, accept Arab troops to “protect returning refugees,” and crack down on the captagon drug trade.

      Image: SANA via AP

      The secret talks reportedly gained momentum following the devastating earthquakes that struck Turkiye and Syria last month, killing 6,000 in the Levantine nation alone.

      Nonetheless, a Syrian government adviser told the WSJ that Assad “has shown no interest in political reform or a willingness to welcome Arab troops.” Western powers have also made little effort to lift crushing sanctions or stop politicizing humanitarian aid deliveries.

      Last month, US State Department spokesman Ned Price urged the international community not to let humanitarian assistance to Syria be accompanied by normalization, stressing: “[Washington’s] position on the Assad regime has not changed.”

      The talks between Damascus and Arab leaders are reportedly backed by Saudi Arabia, which recently agreed to restore ties with Iran in a China-brokered deal. In recent weeks, Saudi officials have called for an end to the isolation of Syria to allow a response to its dire humanitarian crisis.

      “There is a consensus building in the Arab world that the status quo is not tenable. And that means we have to find a way to move beyond that status quo,” Saudi Foreign Minister Prince Faisal bin Farhan Al Saud said earlier this month.

      European and Arab officials also confirmed to the WSJ that Syria’s regional reintegration would be high on the agenda at the next Arab League summit, set to be held later this year in Saudi Arabia. In recent weeks, Jordan and Egypt sent their foreign ministers to Damascus for their first diplomatic visits since the war erupted in 2011.

      Cairo in particular is spearheading a reconciliation plan which proposes restoring relations between Syria and Arab states to pre-2011 levels, returning Syria to the League of Arab States, and negotiating the deployment of joint “Arab forces” on the Syrian-Iraqi border, according to exclusive information made available to The Cradle.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Other Arab nations responsible for fueling the war in its early stages, such as Tunisia,  have announced plans to restore diplomatic ties.

      Even before the earthquake hit, Arab nations had slowly started to rebuild ties with Syria after more than a decade of war and isolation, citing the failure of the US-sponsored war and concerns about Iran’s growing presence in the country.

      Despite these concerns, Iran has welcomed progress between Syria and the Arab world. Iranian Foreign Ministry spokesman Nasser Kanaani called it “a realistic approach” and “a positive step toward Islamic solidarity.”

      Damascus has repeatedly denied “inaccurate reports about Iranian military forces in Syria” and asserts that “the number of Iranian advisors in Syria does not exceed 100.”

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 19:30

    • Stockman On Washington's Panicked Bailout Of Bank Deposits… Here's What Comes Next
      Stockman On Washington’s Panicked Bailout Of Bank Deposits… Here’s What Comes Next

      Authored by David Stockman via InternationalMan.com,

      Why would you throw-in the towel now? We are referring to the Fed’s belated battle against inflation, which evidences few signs of having been successful.

      Yet that’s what the entitled herd on Wall Street is loudly demanding. As usual, they want the stock indexes to start going back up after an extended drought and are using the purported “financial crisis” among smaller banks as the pretext.

      Well, no, there isn’t any preventable crisis in the small banking sector. As we have demonstrated with respect to SVB and Signature Bank, and these are only the tip of the iceberg, the reckless cowboys who were running these institutions put their uninsured depositors at risk, and both should now be getting their just deserts.

      To wit, executive stock options in the sector have plunged or become worthless, and that’s exactly the way capitalism is supposed to work. Likewise, on an honest free market their negligent large depositors should be losing their shirts, too.

      After all, who ever told the latter that they were guaranteed 100 cents on the dollar by Uncle Sam? So it was their job, not the responsibility of the state, to look out for the safety of their money.

      If the American people actually wanted the big boys bailed out, the Congress has had decades since at least the savings and loan crisis back in the 1980s to legislate a safety net for all depositors. But it didn’t for the good reason that 100% deposit guarantees would be a sure-fire recipe for reckless speculation by bankers on the asset-side of their balance sheets; and also because there was no consensus to put taxpayers in harms’ way in behalf of the working cash of Fortune 500 companies, smaller businesses, hedge funds, affluent depositors and an assortment of Silicon Valley VCs, founders, start-ups and billionaires, among countless others of the undeserving.

      And for crying out loud, forget this baloney about the bailouts aren’t costing taxpayers a dime because they are being paid for by the banks via insurance premium payments to the FDIC fund. Well, yes, when the Congress wants to disguise a tax they call it an “insurance premium”, as if its victims had the choice to elect coverage or not. But when $18 trillion of deposits are being assessed in order to bailout careless large depositors who paid no attention to what was happening to their money, then that’s an onerous tax by any other name.

      Accordingly, Washington’s panicked bailout of $9 trillion of uninsured deposits held by big and small companies, hedge funds and affluent customers over the weekend was therefore nothing less than a gift to the undeserving. And now we find out the two banks that have been explicitly funded 100% by Uncle Sam—SVB and Signature Bank—were deep into woke investing and conduct. That makes the bailout by Janet Yellen & Co. especially galling.

      For crying out loud, this is how the poison of wokeness and ESG spread like wild-fire among American businesses in the first place. The latter should have ordinarily been a bulwark of conservative values and common sense, but years of ultra-easy money from the Fed and the precedent of bailout-after-bailout since the 1980s allowed top executives to take their noses off the grindstone of safe and sustainable profitability in favor of a purely political agenda.

      In any event, inflation is still raging and wage workers are still taking it on the chin. During February real wages dropped for the 23rd consecutive month. So the Fed needs to stay on its anti-inflation playbook, come hell or high water. That means it needs to keep raising rates until their after-inflation level is meaningfully positive, which is not yet remotely the case.

      Indeed, unlike Tall Paul Volcker back in the late 1970s, who inherited 10-year Treasury yields at -2.0% and raised them to +10% over the next several years, real interest rates are still deeply underwater as we show below. The cries to stop the rate increases, therefore, are just damn nonsense.

      In fact, in any sane world these are not even “increases”. They are long overdue normalization of interest rates that have been absurdly pinned to the zero bound for upwards of a decade.

      And the Fed most certainly should not throw in the rate increase towel owing to a Wall Street proclaimed “crisis” in the small banking sector. That’s the long-standing wolf cry of the entitled class of speculators decamped in the digital canyons of Wall Street.

      Yes, regional banks were playing fast and loose with depositor money, but even the biggest of these did not amount to a hill of beans in the great scheme of the nation’s $25 trillion GDP. As we showed a few days ago, both the recently departed SVB and Signature Bank each accounted for barely one-half of one percent of the nation’s $30 trillion of banking system assets.

      If a few more local and regional banks need to be closed, therefore, so be it. Sooner or later the piper has to be paid.

      Y/Y Change In Real Hourly Earnings, March 2021 to February 2023

      For want of doubt, here is the pattern of the annual rate of change in the two-year stacked CPI. During the 18 months after January 2021 it soared from 1.9% to 7.1%. Yet notwithstanding the Fed’s purported anti-inflation campaign since March 2022, there has been no meaningful retreat from the June 2022 peak. That is, when you take the “base effects” out if the equation, it is clear that the CPI has been stranded at 40-year high levels at 7.0% ever since.

      Annual Change, Two-Year Stacked CPI:

      • January 2021: 1.9%;

      • June 2021: 2.9%;

      • January 2022: 4.5%;

      • June 2022: 7.1%;

      • July 2022: 6.8%;

      • August 2022: 6.7%;

      • September 2022: 6.8%;

      • October 2022: 7.0%;

      • November 2022:7.0%;

      • December 2022: 6.8%;

      • January 2023: 7.0%;

      • February 2023: 7.0%

      Nor is that the extent of the inflationary warning signs in the February CPI report. For example, plunging used car prices and the rollover of asking rents were supposed to be saving the day, bringing the headline CPI rate rapidly back toward the Fed’s 2.00% target.

      But it’s not happening—-at least in the real world. On the matter of used vehicles there is nothing more authoritative than the Manheim used car auction index. But this real world index is going back up again, even as the green eyershades at the BLS insist that used vehicle prices are still going down.

      Manheim Used Vehicle Index Change Versus CPI Used Vehicle Index

      • One Month (February): +4.3% vs. -2.8%;

      • Three Months: +7.8% vs. -5.3%;

      • Six Months: +2.0% vs. -11.0%

      Eventually, of course, the BLS will make revisions and adjustments to catch-up with the real world, meaning that the purported anti-inflation impact of used car prices will soon turn into a booster shot.

      Likewise, the CPI shelter index for February was up at a near record 0.8% on a M/M basis and 8.1% from last February. As is evident from the chart, this component—which accounts for 24% of the weight in the headline CPI and 40% of the core CPI—is still accelerating, not cooling.

      Change In CPI Shelter Index, Month/Month (Purple) and Year/Year (Black), 2021 to 2023

      As we have previously noted, the argument that “asking rents” fell sharply during the back half of 2022 and that the CPI is therefore mis-reporting rent increases doesn’t wash. That because “asking rents” on new contracts account for just 1/12 of the rental market at best, and the reported numbers from private real estate companies are not seasonally adjusted.

      As is evident in the chart below, rental rates always go down during the fall, and then come roaring back in the spring and early summer. In fact, right on schedule the February report by the Apartment List was back in positive territory.

      In any event, what the CPI shelter index captures is the rolling increase in the total rent roll, not just the new contracts executed during the current month. And that means for the balance of this year at least—even if the overall housing market continues to weaken– average rents will be significantly higher on a year-over-year basis.

      Finally, there was one further component in the February report that makes a mockery of the claim that the CPI is fixing to cliff-dive and that the Fed can therefore take its foot off the neck of the Wall Street gamblers. To wit, upwards of 60% of the CPI is accounted for by services less energy services, and this component was up 7.3% on a Y/Y basis, marking the largest such gain in 41 years!

      So the Fed needs to keep its nose to the anti-inflation grindstone. It is not yet even close to turning the tide.

      Y/Y Change In CPI For Services Less Energy, 2000 to 2023

      As to the matter of imprudently managed banks, isn’t it finally time that all parties concerned – including large depositors – are made to pay the price for their feckless and reckless indifference to financial risk?

      As a reminder, the unfolding of financial markets during 2022 was a screaming wake-up call that mis-matched bank portfolios were a train wreck waiting to happen. After all, last year the 30–year UST tanked by 39.2%, marking the greatest one-year decline since, well, 1754!

      Likewise, the 10–year UST fell by 17.8%, another record vaporization of value. That’s why, of course, unrealized bank portfolio losses went from $15 billion in Q4 2021 to a staggering $650 billion in Q4 2022. And no one was hiding the ball—every dime of these potential losses were reported in the quarterly SEC filings.

      Yet, and yet, bank executives and uninsured depositors sat on their hands because these soaring risks were not running through the income statement and thereby causing bank stock prices to fall even further. The whole theory behind this greatest ever outbreak of benign neglect was that all of the impacted Treasury and Agency securities generating these potential losses would be held to maturity and repaid in full.

      Alas, that predicate was valid only to the extent that uninsured depositors sat on their hands permanently, and that imprudent folks like Peter Thiel and Ken Griffin would never yell “fire in the theater”.

      They did, of course, and then the even greater fools in Washington enacted a $9 trillion deposit guarantee during the course of panicked deliberations in the White House Sunday afternoon.

      So now that $18 trillion worth of US bank deposits have been totally euthanized economically by the geniuses in Washington, how do you stop bank managements from running wild on the asset-side of their balance sheet?

      After all, they have already been making ungodly sums of money by mismatching their balance sheets, and now its Katie-bar-the-door.

      Indeed, the Signature Bank fiasco is a poster boy for the art of minting fake profits off dangerous balance sheets. Not far below the surface we find the same old bank failure culprit: Namely, dirt cheap deposits thanks to the Fed, mismatched with substantially higher yielding but problematic assets.

      Thus, in 2022 Signature Bank earned an average of 3.11% on its $114.3 billion of earning assets, while its cost of funding was just 0.88% on its $103.4 billion of deposits. In dollar terms, the assets generated $3.56 billion of gross income, while the bank paid out just $0.913 billion on its deposits.

      Alas, if this were the widget business the above figures would amount to a sterling gross margin of 74%. And the resulting $2.54 billion of net interest margin wasn’t eaten up by SG&A, either. Net operating expense/fee income amounted to just $700 million, making Signature Bank an apparent goldmine in 2022

      Yet just like that it was gone!

      The reason is that its income statement was way too good to be true. The bank primarily catered to business operations in law, real estate and other professional services. Accordingly, like the case of SVB, fully 90% of its deposits base was not FDIC insured mom and pop savings accounts, but consisted of the working cash balances of its client firms.

      At the same time, $70.2 billion of its $114.3 billion of earning assets were in commercial loans, mortgages and leases, which accounted for $2.80 billion of its $3.56 billion in gross income, owing to an average 4.0% yield on this part of the portfolio.

      So at the heart of the operation was a 4% asset yield matched with a 0.88% deposit cost. And also a highly illiquid, sticky asset book (e.g. taxi medallion loans and low income housing mortgages) matched with deposits which were potentially hot and mobile, should its uninsured depositors ever get nervous and take flight.

      They did, and in a New York minute the Signature Bank profits machine vaporized. And that’s to say nothing of its fixed income book which was drastically underwater owing to last year’s fixed income market bloodbath.

      The only thing missing from Signature Bank’s financial picture is that it was not one of the 30 too-big-to-fail SIFIs (systemically important financial institutions), which were given a backdoor guarantee of uninsured depositors by Dodd-Frank. Then, like JP Morgan, its deposit costs would have been even cheaper and its fake profits even more fulsome.

      As of 6:15 Pm Sunday night, of course, every bank now has the 100% safety net for uninsured deposits. This means that the 5,000 still living banks will have every opportunity to ignore their depositors and play even more artificial and remunerative games by mismatching their assets and liabilities.

      Stated differently, banks have been way the hell too profitable thanks to the Fed’s insane financial repression and the rampant moral hazard of the bank regulatory and deposit insurance schemes. The top half dozen or so SIFI banks have actually booked more than $1 trillion of net income in the last eight years exactly because the geniuses in Washington have back-stopped and drastically cheapened their deposit carry costs.

      The stock answer to all this from Washington and Wall Street alike is not to worry because new powers to the bank regulators will keep the cowboys from gestating more SVBs and Signature Banks.

      Well, here is what Michael Barr, the top bank regulator on the Federal Reserve Board, had to say last Thursday morning when the fire at SVB was already raging:

       “The banks we regulate, in contrast, are well protected from bank runs through a robust array of supervisory requirements.”

      Or, as Elon Musk might have said, funding secured!

      So at the end of the day there is no preventable financial crisis. What there is amounts to a systematic financial travesty that goes back to the hideously low money market regime that the Fed maintained since the eve of the financial crisis back in 2008, coupled with the evil of deposit insurance, both de jure and de facto.

      The implicit policy of the Federal Reserve, as measured by the inflation-adjusted level of its target Fed funds rate, has been to blow-up the banking system by flooding it with dirt cheap deposit costs.

      In fact, during the 180 months since Lehman there have been only seven months when the real rate was positive; and even then it was positive by just a hair as depicted by the blue bars peeking above the zero line in the chart below during early 2019.

      Inflation-Adjusted Federal Funds Rate, 2008-2023

      Likewise, it should be evident by now that deposit insurance has nothing to do with either sound money or a prudent banking industry.

      It has remained in place for decades because it is a social policy-–protection of the little guy—parading as a financial stabilization measure.

      But it doesn’t stabilize—it inherently and egregiously de-stabilizes, as has been implicit in every financial crisis during the last half century.

      So if they want “social policy” for the little guy and the blue-haired ladies, give these folks access to a $250,000 government savings account paying 50 basis points of interest as far as the eye can see. For every one else, let them be the watch-dogs of their own money in the commercial banking system.

      That’s the very predicate of a stable banking system and sustainable free market prosperity.

      *  *  *

      The truth is, we’re on the cusp of an economic crisis that could eclipse anything we’ve seen before. And most people won’t be prepared for what’s coming. That’s exactly why bestselling author Doug Casey and his team just released a free report with all the details on how to survive an economic collapse. Click here to download the PDF now.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 19:00

    • Living In Memphis Might Break Paycheck To Paycheck Cycle
      Living In Memphis Might Break Paycheck To Paycheck Cycle

      Americans have been battered by two years of negative real wage growth as personal savings are depleted while credit card debts jump to record highs. Shelter inflation continues to soar while housing affordability is at its lowest in decades. 

      Homeownership has become unattainable for folks who earn below $100k due to elevated mortgage rates and high home prices, forcing many buyers to stay on the sidelines this spring season. 

      For those with economic mobility and remote work capabilities, a new report via the fintech website SmartAsset shows the top cities where a $100k household income no longer means living from paycheck to paycheck. 

      SmartAsset analyzed the after-tax income of 76 major cities and then adjusted those figures for the cost of living in each place. What they found is $100k might go the furthest in Memphis. 

      Here are the key findings from the report:

      $100K goes furthest in Memphis. The city may be known as the “Home of the Blues,” but Memphis’ low cost of living surely won’t make you sing them. A $100,000 salary is worth more here ($86,444) than in any other city in our study after subtracting taxes and adjusting for the cost of living.

      Texas cities dominate the top 10. Thanks to no state income tax and the low cost of living, the Lone Star State looms large in our study. Seven out of the 10 cities in our top 10 are located in Texas. After deducting taxes and adjusting for the cost of living, a $100,000 salary on average is worth $77,885 across the 10 Texas cities that we analyzed in our study.

      Oklahoma City has the lowest cost of living. A $100,000 goes a long way in the Sooner State’s largest city, considering that the cost of living is only 83.2% of the national average – the lowest out of all 76 cities in our study. A $100,000 salary is worth $84,498 in Oklahoma City after adjusting for the cost of living.

      In New York City, $100K amounts to just $35,791 when you consider taxes and the cost of living. Taxes and cost of living take a big bite out of a $100,000 income in the Big Apple, which ranked last in our analysis. After adjusting for those factors, $100,000 is worth just $35,791.

      And the top ten places in the US where $100k goes the furthest:

      1. Memphis, TN

      A person earning $100,000 per year in Memphis takes home $74,515 after federal and local taxes (the state of Tennessee doesn’t tax earned income). Considering the city has a cost of living that’s almost 14% lower than the national average, those after-tax earnings are actually worth $86,444 when adjusting for the cost of living.

      2. El Paso, TX

      A $100,000 salary in El Paso is worth $84,966 after subtracting taxes and adjusting for the local cost of living. A person who makes $100,000 a year in this West Texas city of over 678,000 residents takes home $74,515 after taxes. El Paso’s cost of living is just 87.7% of the national average.

      3. Oklahoma City, OK

      Someone making $100,000 in Oklahoma City will take home $70,302 after taxes. But thanks to the lowest cost of living in our study, those after-tax earnings are worth considerably more: $84,498.

      4. Corpus Christi, TX

      A $100,00 annual salary is worth $83,443 in Corpus Christi after deducting taxes and adjusting for the local cost of living. Located on the Gulf Coast of Texas, Corpus Christi’s cost of living is 10.7% lower than the national average.

      5. Lubbock, TX

      A person who earns $100,000 per year in Lubbock can expect to take home $74,515 after taxes are deducted from their paychecks. Since the cost of living in Lubbock is just 89.4% of the national average, that person’s take-home pay is actually worth $83,350 after adjusting for the cost of living.

      6. Houston, TX

      Like the other Texas cities in the top 10, a $100,000 salary in Houston is reduced to $74,515 after taxes. Those earnings, however, are worth $81,350 when adjusting for Houston’s cost of living, which is 91.8% of the national average.

      7 (tie). San Antonio, Fort Worth and Arlington, TX

      A $100,000 salary is worth the same amount of money in three Texas cities: San Antonio, Fort Worth and Arlington. Thanks to identical tax treatment and no state income tax, a person earning $100,000 takes home $74,515 in each city. That money is worth $80,124 when you adjust for the cost of living in all three cities, which is 7% lower than the national average.

      10. St. Louis, MO

      St. Louis rounds out the top 10. While taxes reduce a $100,000 salary to $69,531, the city’s low cost of living (87% of the national average) makes those after-tax dollars go even further. As a result, a $100,000 salary in St. Louis is worth $79,921 after subtracting taxes and adjusting for the cost of living.

      One potential solution for those aiming for financial independence and reduced reliance on the government could be a move to one of the ten cities SmartAsset listed. 

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 18:30

    • Stanford Students Demand Journalist Remove Their Names From Stories… After Targeting Other Students By Name
      Stanford Students Demand Journalist Remove Their Names From Stories… After Targeting Other Students By Name

      Authored by Jonathan Turley,

      There is an interesting development in the controversy at Stanford Law School where U.S. Circuit Court Judge Kyle Duncan was shouted down by law students and condemned by a law school dean for discussing his conservative judicial views.

      Student protesters reportedly published the names of students in the Federalist Society online as part of their cancel campaign.

      However, Aaron Sibarium, a journalist for the Washington Free Beacon has said that a board member of the Stanford National Lawyers Guild, sent an email demanding the Free Beacon remove her name and those of other students from their reporting because it is threatening and dangerous.

      Sibarium tweeted that “On Sunday, I identified board members of the Stanford National Lawyers Guild–one of the groups responsible for the posters–who in a public statement described the protest as ‘Stanford Law School at its best.’ A few hours later, the board demanded I redact their names.”

      It was a highly ironic moment to be sure. However, I am more interested in another aspect of the controversy. I wrote earlier about the joint apology letter of Stanford President Marc Tessier-Lavigne and Law School Dean Jenny Martinez. Neither Tessier-Lavigne nor Martinez promise to hold these students accountable or to sanction Steinbach. They merely express regret that “staff members who should have enforced university policies failed to do so, and instead intervened in inappropriate ways that are not aligned with the university’s commitment to free speech.”

      This latest controversy highlights the fact that the identity of some of these students (including those on videotape) who disrupted a speaker at the law school are known to the school.

      In this case, it was a federal appellate judge but we have seen this type of “deplatforming” at other schools.

      These students — and many faculty — voice a twisted view that silencing the free speech of others is a form of free speech.

      A chilling poll was released by 2021 College Free Speech Rankings after questioning a huge body of 37,000 students at 159 top-ranked U.S. colleges and universities. It found that sixty-six percent of college students think shouting down a speaker to stop them from speaking is a legitimate form of free speech.  Another 23 percent believe violence can be used to cancel a speech. That is roughly one out of four supporting violence.

      They are getting these values from faculty members. Many schools have largely purged their ranks of conservative and libertarian faculty. This trend is supported by anti-free speech websites like Above the Law where Editor Joe Patrice defended “predominantly liberal faculties” and argued that hiring a conservative professor is akin to allowing a believer in geocentrism to teach. He also mocked surveys showing that conservative students are fearful of speaking freely in class, dismissing these students as “just… conservatives being sad that everyone else makes fun of them.”

      What is notable is that Martinez did not even pledge to hold students accountable for stopping the speech by Judge Duncan. Yet, that is still more than other law deans. When Professor Josh Blackman was stopped from speaking about “the importance of free speech” at CUNY law school, CUNY Law Dean Mary Lu Bilek insisted that disrupting the speech on free speech was free speech. (Bilek later cancelled herself after using a controversial term in a meeting and resigned).

      At the University of California, Santa Barbara, professors actually rallied around a professor who physically assaulted pro-life advocates and tore down their display.

      These students have been raised from elementary schools to law school in a speech phobic environment where free speech is treated as harmful. That was evident in the disgraceful Stanford event.

      Now, however, they want to be able to target others while objecting to being named themselves. Much like the Yale law students who cancelled an event and then objected to campus police being present, this objection from Stanford law students illustrates the sense of privilege and exceptionalism by many in the anti-free speech movement.

      The focus, however, should not be on the hypocrisy of these students but the passivity of the faculty. Unless students are held accountable for preventing free speech on campus, the apologies from the President and Dean are meaningless.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 18:00

    • CNN Reporter Robbed While Covering "Rampant Street Crime" In San Francisco
      CNN Reporter Robbed While Covering “Rampant Street Crime” In San Francisco

      A CNN reporter fell victim to a ‘smash-and-grab‘ robbery while reporting on San Francisco’s “rampant street crime.” 

      In a series of tweets on Friday, CNN correspondent Kyung Lah described how her rental car’s rear window was smashed within seconds by thieves who then made off with her bags.

      “Got robbed. Again,” Lah wrote. “[CNN producer Jason Kravarik] & I were at city hall in San Francisco to do an interview for @CNN. We had security to watch our rental car + crew car. Thieves did this in under 4 seconds. Security stopped the jerks from stealing other bags. But seriously- this is ridiculous.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Even though Lah hired ‘private security,’ the crooks were able to flee the scene.  

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The irony is that the reporter at the left-leaning news outlet was filming a segment on “rampant street crime” in San Francisco, now considered the “shoplifting capital of America” because of progressive prosecutors who refuse to enforce criminal laws.

      Surging crime, open-air drug dealing, and robberies are a byproduct of failed social justice reforms by progressive politicians, such as George Soros-backed District Attorney Chesa Boudin, who was booted out of office last June by angry voters. 

      Twitter users had fun with this: 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 17:30

    • Rogoff Warns 'Things Are Only Getting Harder For The Fed'
      Rogoff Warns ‘Things Are Only Getting Harder For The Fed’

      Authored by Kenneth Rogoff, op-ed via The Financial Times,

      The Fed’s expansive actions to prevent the Silicon Valley Bank collapse from becoming systemic, followed by the Swiss National Bank’s massive lifeline to troubled Credit Suisse, left little doubt this week that financial leaders are determined to act decisively when fear starts to set in. Let us leave moral hazard for another day.

      But even if risks of a 2023 financial Armageddon have been contained, not all the differences with 2008 are quite so reassuring.

      Back then, inflation was a non-issue and deflation — falling prices — quickly became one. Today, core inflation in the US and Europe is still running hot, and one really has to strain the definition of “transitory” to argue that it is not a problem. Global debt, both public and private, has also skyrocketed. This would not be such an issue if forward looking, long-term real interest rates were to take a deep dive, as they did in the secular stagnation years prior to 2022.

      Unfortunately, however, ultra-low borrowing rates are not something that can be counted on this time around.

      First and foremost, I would argue that if one looks at long-term historical patterns in real interest rates (as Paul Schmelzing, Barbara Rossi and I have), major shocks — for example, the big drop after the 2008 financial crisis — tend to fade over time. There are also structural reasons: for one thing, global debt (public and private) exploded after 2008, partly as an endogenous response to the low rates, partly as a necessary response to the pandemic. Other factors that are pushing up long-term real rates include the massive costs of the green transition and the coming increase in defence expenditure around the world. The rise of populism will presumably help alleviate inequality, but higher taxes will lower trend growth even as higher spending adds to upwards pressure on rates.

      What this means is that even after inflation abates, central banks may need to keep the general level of interest rates higher over the next decade than they did in the last one, just to keep inflation stable.

      Another significant difference between now and post-2008 is the far weaker position of China. Beijing’s fiscal stimulus after the financial crisis played a key role in maintaining global demand, particularly for commodities but also for German manufacturing and European luxury goods. Much of it went into real estate and infrastructure, the country’s massive go-to growth sector.

      Today, however, after years of building at breakneck speed, China is running into the same kinds of diminishing returns as Japan began to experience in the late 1980s (the famous “bridges to nowhere”) and the former Soviet Union saw in the late 1960s. Combine that with over-centralisation of decision-making, extraordinarily adverse demographics, and creeping deglobalisation, and it becomes clear that China will not be able to play such an outsized role in holding up global growth during the next global recession.

      Last, but not least, the 2008 crisis came during a period of relative global peace, which is hardly the case now. The Russian war in Ukraine has been a continuing supply shock that accounts for a significant part of the inflation problem that central banks are now trying to deal with.

      Looking back on the past two weeks of banking stress, we should be thankful that this did not happen sooner. With sharply rising central bank rates, and a troubled underlying economic backdrop, it is inevitable that there will be many business casualties and normally emerging market debtors as well. So far, several low-middle income countries have defaulted, but there are likely to be more to come. Surely there will be other problems besides tech, for example the commercial real estate sector in the US, which is hit by rising interest rates even as major city office occupancy remains only about 50 per cent. Of course the financial system, including lightly regulated “shadow banks,” must be housing some of the losses.

      Advanced economy governments are not all necessarily immune.

      They may have long since “graduated” from sovereign debt crises, but not from partial default through surprise high inflation.

      How should the Federal Reserve weigh all these issues in deciding on its rate policy next week?

      After the banking tremors, it is certainly not going to forge ahead with a 50 basis point (half a per cent) increase as the European Central Bank did on Thursday, surprising markets. But then the ECB is playing catchup to the Fed.

      If nothing else, the optics of once again bailing out the financial sector while tightening the screws on Main Street are not good. Yet, like the ECB, the Fed cannot lightly dismiss persistent core inflation over 5 per cent. Probably, it will opt for a 25 basis point increase if the banking sector seems calm again, but if there are still some jitters it could perfectly well say the direction of travel is still up, but it needs to take a pause.

      It is far easier to hold off political pressures in an era where global interest rate and price pressures are pushing downwards. Not anymore. Those days are over and things are going to get harder for the Fed. The trade-offs it faces next week might only be the start.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 17:00

    • Please Stop With The Raccoon Dogs
      Please Stop With The Raccoon Dogs

      Authored by Alex Berenson via Unreported Truths,

      Last night, The Atlantic – of course it was The Atlantic – had BREAKING NEWS!

      And by BREAKING NEWS I mean yet another migraine-inducing story purporting to show that Sars-Cov-2 emerged naturally, rather than leaking from a lab.

      Before we get to the story, which takes about two seconds to debunk, it’s worth nothing that even Dr. Anthony S. Fauci is in the process of giving up on the natural origins theory. On CNN on Sunday, he claimed that even if Sars-COV-2 escaped from a lab after scientists found it in a cave and transported it for research, he would consider that a naturally occurring outbreak.

      Screenshot

      What?

      I say again, what?

      Assume this version of events is true. It’s not. Chinese scientists were definitely performing “gain-of-function” research on coronaviruses in Wuhan, and the odds are overwhelming that it was one of those viruses that leaked. We know this for several reasons, including that Sars-Cov-2 has certain features that largely do not exist in wild bat coronaviruses but are common in engineered coronaviruses.

      Further, Fauci’s theory makes no sense because if the Chinese had found Sars-COV-2 in a wild bat and transported it, they would have had every reason to go back to the cave where they’d found it the first time and get it again, thus PROVING it was naturally occurring. They’d know exactly where to get it! They wouldn’t have to look. They could have done so immediately (or after a couple of months had passed and they’d destroyed all the evidence that they’d ever found it before).

      But let’s pretend Fauci’s theory makes sense. Let’s say that researchers found Sars-COV-2 in a wild bat, and brought it to a lab, where it leaked.

      How can he, or anyone, call that a “natural occurrence”? The virus was stuck in a cave in a bat, like innumerable other coronaviruses since time immemorial. Where is the evidence it ever would have infected a human, much less caused a worldwide epidemic, had virologists not given it every possible opportunity to do so, by bringing it to the middle of a 10-million-person city and then trying to grow it?

      If SARS-Cov-2 leaked from a lab, that’s a lab leak. Even Tony Fauci can’t spin that reality away.

      But back to the Atlantic. Which breathlessly reported yesterday that we now have genetic evidence that raccoon dogs and the coronavirus were both at the “Huanan Seafood Market” – the live animal market in the middle of Wuhan where some early coronavirus cases were reported – in December 2019.

      “The Strongest Evidence Yet That an Animal Started the Pandemic,” the Atlantic proclaimed.

      Except.

      Hold up.

      WE ALREADY KNEW THAT RACCOON DOGS WERE KEPT AT THE HUANAN SEAFOOD MARKET. We’ve known that for years. And of course we already knew that infected people came to the market; that’s why the people who don’t want to admit that Sars-Cov-2 leaked from a lab keeps proposing it as a source.

      In fact, we went through this very nonsense MORE THAN A YEAR AGO.

      Screenshot

      As The Scientist (who better to tell you about The Science?) wrote about an earlier round of nonsense in February 2022, “one of the studies shows that raccoon dogs were sold in a section of the market where coronavirus samples were detected.”

      Which is more or less precisely what yesterday’s “scoop” said.

      I’ll leave you with this from The New York Times.

      The Times has not exactly been aggressive about covering the potential lab leak, and it followed up on the Atlantic’s piece today with one of its own. But even the Times couldn’t avoid telling the truth, four paragraphs in:

      The jumbling together of genetic material from the virus and the animal does not prove that a raccoon dog itself was infected. And even if a raccoon dog had been infected, it would not be clear that the animal had spread the virus to people. Another animal could have passed the virus to people, or someone infected with the virus could have spread the virus to a raccoon dog.

      Someone infected with a virus?

      Gee, I wonder where they got it? Maybe the giant lab working with bat coronaviruses a couple miles away –

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 16:30

    • How The "Most Anticipated Recession" Is Still Unanticipated
      How The “Most Anticipated Recession” Is Still Unanticipated

      By Dhaval Joshi, chief strategist at BCA Research

      Exactly one year ago today, the US Federal Reserve embarked on the most aggressive tightening cycle in modern history. It comes as no surprise then that the US has just passed two of the three staging posts to recession.

      The first staging post is a housing recession. US residential fixed investment (home building) has slumped by a fifth. This is significant because post-1970 housing recessions have predicted economic recessions with a perfect four out of four success rate: 1974; 1980; 1990; and 2007 (Chart 1).

      The second staging post is bank failures. Banks tend to fail just before recessions begin. Ahead of the recession that began in December 2007, no US bank failed in 2005 or 2006. The first three bank failures happened in February, September, and October of 2007, just before the recession onset.

      Fast forward, and no US bank failed in 2021 or 2022. The first bank failures of this cycle – Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank – have just happened. If history is any guide, the start of bank failures presages an economic recession that is more imminent than many people anticipate (Chart 2).

      To be clear, it is not the direct impact of the housing recession or the bank failures that causes the economic recession. The housing recession and bank failures are simply the early warning signs – the ‘canaries in the coal mine’ – that tell us that high interest rates are killing the economy.

      The US Economy Has Passed Two Staging Posts To Recession. Here’s The Third

      Many economists argue that once a recession is staring you in the face, you can promptly cut interest rates to stop it in its
      tracks. Good luck with that. This is like arguing that once the iceberg was staring you in the face, you could promptly reverse the engines to save the Titanic.

      Interest rates work with a lag. The impact of tightening takes time to be felt. To repeat, the first US rate hike happened exactly a year ago today, but we are seeing the first bank failures now.

      In a downturn, the ‘corrective’ impact of loosening also takes time to be felt. Conversely, the ‘self-reinforcing’ feedback that  accelerates the downturn – like a bank run, or households increasing their precautionary saving in response to higher unemployment – is immediate.

      This makes a recession a non-linear system. Once you’ve passed the point of no return, it is too late to reverse the engines. You cannot avoid the iceberg. In the case of the US economy, once the unemployment rate has increased by 0.5 percent, it has always gone on to increase by well over 2 percent (Chart 3).

      So, the third and final staging post to recession is the US unemployment rate increasing by 0.5 percent. So far, it is up by 0.2 percent.

      How The ‘Most Anticipated Recession Ever’ Is Still Unanticipated

      Is the coming recession the most anticipated ever? The Philly Fed’s latest so-called ‘anxious index’, showed that the proportion of economists expecting the US economy to contract in the second, third, and fourth quarters of 2023 stood at 42 percent, 45 percent, and 41 percent respectively. These are among the most pessimistic readings for any time that a recession hasn’t already begun (Chart 4).

      Still, the proportion of economists predicting a recession is a minority. This is confirmed by the survey’s overall forecast for US GDP that shows no decline through the next four quarters – though admittedly, that was in mid-February before the recent bank failures (Chart 5).

      The absence of a forecasted recession might reflect the bias of economists to sugar-coat their predictions, given their asymmetric incentive structure. For an economist’s standing, the best thing is to be right. But if you are wrong, it is better to miss a recession, than to forecast a recession that does not happen. On this basis, peak pessimism should never increase above the high 40s. Yet it does.

      Once a recession begins, it is no longer taboo to forecast a contraction in the economy. As the sugar-coating of  economists’ forecasts ends, the anxious index can surge to above 70 percent, and forecasts for the economy can collapse. In this important regard, the most anticipated recession is still very unanticipated.

      Interest Rates, Profits, And Crude Oil Are Not Fully Anticipating A Recession

      In the financial markets, the deeply inverted US yield curve means that the bond market is forecasting aggressive rate cuts – around 200 basis points through the next two years. As the Fed only cuts aggressively in a recession, the bond market is anticipating a recession.

      That said, the forecasted pace of cutting, at 25 basis points per quarter, is too low – given that in previous recessions the pace of cutting has been 80-150 basis points per quarter. Meaning, the bond market is not fully anticipating a recession (Chart 6).

      Our February 8th recommendation to buy the December 2024 Fed funds future FFZ24 is panning out very well. The position is in huge profit and a big part of the expected gains have been made. Traders may wish to crystallize those gains, but the rally will end only when the rates curve fully anticipates a recession. Meanwhile, long bonds (10-year and longer maturity) have at least 10 percent price upside.

      What about the stock market? Many people argue that the bear market since early 2022 indicates that the stock market is anticipating a recession. This is wrong. The slump in stocks is mostly due to a slump in valuations, caused by the bear market in bonds.  Profit forecasts have not slumped (Chart 7).

      Based on previous recessions, these profit forecasts are vulnerable to at least a 20 percent downgrade. Mitigating this somewhat, an uplift to bond valuations will boost stock valuations, and limit further downside in the stock market to around 10 percent.

      Bonds have outperformed stocks in every recession of the past 75 years, including the recessions of the inflationary 1970s. But with bonds only now starting to outperform stocks, bonds versus stocks is not yet anticipating a recession.

      Turning to commodities, the oil market is not anticipating a recession either. Crude oil demand tracks world GDP, albeit deflated by 1.6 percent a year due to steady gains in energy efficiency. This means that the 2 percent annual growth forecast for world oil demand through 2023-24 would require world GDP to grow at a 3.6 percent clip through the next two years (Chart 8).

      Yet even a “soft landing” in the US and Europe would cause growth in developed economies to slow to around 1 percent. Meanwhile, China’s outgoing Premier Li Keqiang recently announced China’s GDP target for 2023 at “about 5 percent.” This makes the oil market’s implied forecast for demand growth far too rosy, and in a recession the destruction of oil demand always outweighs any cutbacks to supply.

      Hence, as I explained in Why Oil Is Headed To $55, the crude oil price has a further 25 percent downside.

      To summarise for a 6-12 month investment horizon, bonds have a 10 percent upside, stocks have a 10 percent downside, and crude oil has a 25 percent downside.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 16:00

    • SVB's London Bankers Received Up To $36 Million In Bonuses Days After BoE-Orchestrated Bailout
      SVB’s London Bankers Received Up To $36 Million In Bonuses Days After BoE-Orchestrated Bailout

      Bankers at the London branch of Silicon Valley Bank reportedly received tens of millions of dollars in bonuses just days after the Bank of England orchestrated a rescue package that led to Europe’s largest lender, HSBC, buying the failed bank’s subsidary for just £1, Sky News reports.

      Sources described the bonus pool as “modest”, and said it totalled between £15m and £20m.

      It was unclear on Saturday how much had been awarded to Erin Platts, the UK bank’s chief executive or her senior colleagues.

      One insider said the bonus payments were a signal of HSBC’s confidence in the talent base at its new subsidiary and that the buyer had been keen to honour previously agreed payments in order to help retain key staff.Sky

      What’s more, bonuses were reportedly doled out to US staff just hours before the Santa Clara, California-based bank collapsed. The bank was taken into FDIC ownership, while SVB Financial Group has filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection as it looks to find buyers for their remaining assets.

      The UK arm of (formerly) SVB employs around 700 people. The London branch’s ‘guided demolition’ was coordinated with UK Prime Minister Rishi Sunak, who played a pivotal role in an emergency auction that drew interest from several challenger banks, including the Bank of London and Oaknorth.

      According to insiders, if HSBC hadn’t stepped up, the bonuses wouldn’t have been paid, while another insider pointed out that stock held by senior executives and other employees had been rendered worthless amid the implosion.

      “The UK’s tech sector is genuinely world-leading and of huge importance to the British economy, supporting hundreds of thousands of jobs,” said chancellor Jeremy Hunt. “We have worked urgently to deliver on that promise and find a solution that will provide SVB UK’s customers with confidence.”

      “[This] ensures customer deposits are protected and can bank as normal, with no taxpayer support.”

      The government had been lobbied intensively last weekend by hundreds of tech entrepreneurs about the parlous state of SVB UK.

      They warned of “an existential threat to the UK tech sector”, adding: “The Bank of England’s assessment that SVB going into administration would have limited impact on the UK economy displays a dangerous lack of understanding of the sector and the role it plays in the wider economy, both today and in the future.”

      The founders warned Mr Hunt that the collapse of SVB UK would “cripple the sector and set the ecosystem back 20 years”. -Sky

      “Many businesses will be sent into involuntary liquidation overnight,” were SVB UK not rescued, wrote the entrepreneurs.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 15:30

    • Oil Majors Juggle Cheaper Crude With Lower Emissions
      Oil Majors Juggle Cheaper Crude With Lower Emissions

      By Tsvetana Paraskova of OilPrice.com

      The world’s biggest international oil and gas firms continue to pledge lower-emission operations to supply the world with the hydrocarbons it needs and will need in the future.    Unfortunately for Big Oil, not all basins and areas of production are equal, so companies have focused in recent years on investing in the most prolific operations that yield the most profitable oil with relatively lower emissions than in other locations.    

      To keep investors in the sector, the largest oil firms continue to tout their progress in reducing emissions. But to create additional value for shareholders via higher returns, companies are prioritizing specific basins and resources they believe will yield the cheapest-to-extract oil and natural gas in their portfolios.  

      In the era of ESG investment and the energy crisis following the Russian invasion of Ukraine, Big Oil is now juggling the need to keep producing oil and gas with the imperative to cut emissions if they want to continue to have a license to operate.

      Despite the surge in renewable energy in recent years, the world still relies on fossil fuels for more than 80% of its energy needs.  

      “Strike The Right Balance”

      Policies and companies need to strike the right balance between energy security and ways to cut emissions from oil and gas, ExxonMobil’s chief executive Darren Woods said at the CERAWeek by S&P Global conference last week. 

      “It would be a mistake to abandon any one of those objectives,” Woods added. 

      ExxonMobil targets to grow its Permian production to 1 million barrels per day (bpd) and, at the same time, reach net-zero emissions at its operated unconventional assets in the Permian by 2030. 

      “One of the points in doing that is to demonstrate to the world that we can do both,” Woods at CERAWeek. 

      Exxon is also one the least emission-intensive refiners in the world, the executive added. 

      If Exxon doesn’t make the diesel and gasoline the world needs, someone else – with higher emission intensity operations – will, and there wouldn’t be a net benefit for the world in terms of emissions abatement, Woods noted. 

      There is a recognition of how urgent the issue is and “how enormous the lift is,” he said. The solutions will vary according to the circumstances around the world, Woods said. 

      The other U.S. supermajor, Chevron, said on its Investor Day 2023 last month, “We’re making progress toward our upstream CO2 intensity reduction targets. We continue to prioritize the projects expected to return the largest reduction in carbon emissions cost efficiently.” 

      Chevron looks to advance more than 100 projects this year to lower the carbon intensity of its operations, focusing on energy management, flaring reduction, and methane management, among others. 

      “Our goal on methane is simple – keep it in the pipe.” 

      The New Advantaged Resources

      Very productive fields and newer basins tend to be less emission-intensive per barrel due to the sheer volumes of production and new designs to make extraction in newer fields less carbon-intensive, by electrifying operations, for example, analysts tell The Wall Street Journal.

      In the deepwater U.S. Gulf of Mexico and onshore Saudi Arabia, per-barrel production is among the cheapest and cleanest at the same time because the wells there are very productive, Julie Wilson, research director of global exploration at Wood Mackenzie, told the Journal. 

      Norway also boasts some of the lowest-emission barrels globally. 

      Operators offshore Norway have started to replace gas turbines with electricity from onshore – Norway’s electricity comes predominantly from hydropower – bringing down emissions from the newer oilfields. 

      For example, Phase 2 of the giant Johan Sverdrup oilfield will emit 0.67 kilograms (kg) of CO2 per barrel of produced oil, thanks to power from shore, operator Equinor says. The global average is 15 kg/barrel, according to the Norwegian major.  

      However, “truly advantaged resources, with low breakeven (resilience to low prices) and emissions (sustainability in scope 1 and 2 terms) are anything but plentiful,” Andrew Latham, Vice President, Energy Research at Wood Mackenzie, said in a recent report.  

      “The world is far from the end of the hydrocarbon era,” Latham said. 

      According to WoodMac’s base-case Energy Transition Outlook (ETO), oil demand peaks in 2030, before declining slowly to 94 million barrels per day (bpd) in 2050. Even in the Accelerated Energy Transition (AET) outlook of global net zero by 2050 and achieving the most ambitious targets in the Paris Agreement, oil demand will still be 33 million bpd by 2050.  

      “As things stand, we see enough to satisfy only about half of our base-case oil and gas demand forecast to 2050,” WoodMac’s Latham says.         

      “This problem of ‘peak advantage’ looms ever larger and presents a huge and urgent call to action. As recent supply interruptions serve to remind us, we neglect the upstream at our peril. Both oil and, in particular, gas will continue to need huge and sustained investment.” 

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 15:00

    • The Growing Auto Loan Problem Facing Young Americans
      The Growing Auto Loan Problem Facing Young Americans

      Since the COVID-19 pandemic, Americans have taken on significantly more debt to buy vehicles. This is especially true for Gen Z and Millennials, who the Federal Reserve believes may have borrowed beyond their means.

      In this infographic, Visual Capitalist’s Marcu Lu visualizes data from the Fed’s most recent consumer debt update.

      Aggressive Borrowing

      The first chart in this graphic shows the growth in outstanding car loans between Q2 2020 (start of the pandemic) to Q4 2022 (latest available).

      We can see that Americans under the age of 40 have grown their vehicle-related debt the most. It’s natural for Gen Z (ages 11-26) to have higher growth figures because many of them are buying their first car, but 31% is quite high relatively speaking.

      Part of this can be attributed to today’s inflationary environment, which has pushed used car prices to new highs. Supply chain issues have also resulted in over 30% of new cars being sold above MSRP.

      Because of these rising prices, the Fed reports that the average auto loan is now $24,000, up 41% from 2019’s value of $17,000.

      Spiking Delinquencies

      Interest rates on auto loans are typically fixed, meaning many young Americans were able to take advantage of the low rates seen during the pandemic.

      Despite this, one in five Gen Zs say that their car payments account for over 20% of their after-tax income.

      Shown in the second chart of this infographic, the amount of auto debt transitioning into serious delinquency is much higher for Gen Z and Millennials. Throughout 2022, these generations saw $20 billion in auto debt fall 90+ days behind.

      The outlook for these struggling borrowers is bleak. First there’s inflation, which has pushed up the prices of most consumer goods. This eats into their ability to make car payments.

      Second is rising interest rates, which make credit card debt—another pain point for young borrowers—even more costly. Finally, there’s student loans, which are expected to resume in summer 2023. Payments on student debt have been suspended since the beginning of the COVID-19 pandemic.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 14:30

    • Is Your Bank "Important" Enough To Save? Don't Count On It…
      Is Your Bank “Important” Enough To Save? Don’t Count On It…

      Authored by Mark Jeftovic via BombThrower.com,

      The Elites are bailing out their own banks, not yours

      The systemic banking and financial crisis I’ve been warning about for years has arrived. (In fact, the report I put out in January seems to be playing out in spades).

      The printing of 37 trillion dollars out of thin air over the pandemic widened the wealth inequality gap – and  they followed that up with the most drastic and rapid interest rate hiking cycle in Fed history.

      What did they think was going to happen?

      Now the banks are failing – Silicon Valley Bank went from passing its KPMG audit with flying colours and getting their debt rated “A” by Moody’s  mere weeks ago, to the executives frantically paying themselves bonuses and selling their shares in the hours and days before the bank failed and was taken over by the FDIC.

      98% of the deposits in SVB were uninsured, meaning that those deposits wouldn’t shouldn’t have been covered by FDIC insurance. That means any accounts with balances above $250K were facing the loss of their funds.

      But this is Silicon Valley Bank – this is where the elites place their bets on Silicon Valley unicorns. So we can’t have that.

      In a hastily convened meeting between the FDIC, the Fed and the US Treasury, it was decided that all deposits would be covered, insured or not.

      Crisis averted, right?

      Wrong. It turns out that only SVB and Signature banks would be covered; if any other banks fail, like your bank, your community co-op in your hometown or state, or any other bank in flyover America far away from the Coastal elites – if they get into trouble (because people are moving their money into “protected” banks), then that’s not covered.

      … That’s tough titties for you.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      In a stunning admission, when asked point blank by Rep. James Lankford (R-OK) whether a community bank in his home state of Oklahoma would have uninsured depositors made whole the same way the Silicon Valley Unicorns did, Yellen had to come clean:

      “A bank only gets that treatment if a super-majority of the Fed board, and I, in consultation with the President conclude that failure to protect uninsured depositors would create systemic risk to the banking system”

      In short “not necessarily”.

      While Yellen was bobbing and weaving around the question, Lankford stated it clearly:

      “If you’re a depositor with a Big Bank, preferred by the Fed, you’re fully insured no matter what. If you’re a depositor with a small bank, you aren’t”.

      Once again, the government is picking winners and losers; just like under lockdowns, when they shut down small businesses and forced everybody into Costco and Wal-Mart. 

      “It’s called stakeholder capitalism”, I’ve mused, “and you’re not a stakeholder”.

      Well, this time they’ve blown up the banking system real good – and this time they may not be able to kick the can down the road. 

      They may not even be able to save the “Too Big To Fail” banks by the time this is all over.

      This could be the early innings of the final breakdown of the financial system I’ve been warning about for almost two years, when I released The Crypto Capitalist Manifesto.

      Since then, we’ve been in a crypto-winter, and starting a few months ago I started to sense a thaw.

      In fact, the way things are playing out right now are so closely resembles what I put out in my most recent report, that it’s downright eerie.

      • What to look for in the breakdown of the financial system

      • Why Bitcoin was poised to break out of its slumber (written before it exploded 65% higher year-to-date and became the best performing asset of 2023)

      • What the narrative would be from the establishment shills when it all came unglued, and

      • Which stocks would be the leading sector in the next Bitcoin super-cycle

      It was written in early January and when I compare it to what’s happening now, I kinda scare myself…Read The Bitcoin Bottom Report here.

      *  *  *

      P.S I’ve mentioned previously that after the crypto winter was over, I would be doubling the price of The Bitcoin Capitalist Letter. With Bitcoin up 65% YTD, I think we’re there. When I get back from Costa Rica, I’ll be plugging in the new website and that’s when the price doubles. But you can still lock in the old rate, for life – right here.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 14:00

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 18th March 2023

    • Iran-Saudi Rapprochement Will Deal A Deathblow To The Dollar
      Iran-Saudi Rapprochement Will Deal A Deathblow To The Dollar

      Authored by Andrew Korybko via The Automatic Earth blog,

      Eurasia’s geo-economic integration took a great leap forward as a result of the IranianSaudi rapprochement, which unlocks the Gulf Cooperation Council’s (GCC) trade potential with Russia and China. Its wealthy members can now tap into two series of Iranian-transiting megaprojects in one fell swoop through this deal, with the North-South Transport Corridor (NSTC) connecting them to Russia while the China-Central Asia-West Asia Economic Corridor (CCAWAEC) will do the same vis-à-vis China.

      The bloc’s de facto Saudi leader has been prioritizing a comprehensive economic reform policy known as “Vision 2030” that was introduced by Crown Prince and first-ever Prime Minister Mohammed Bin Salman (MBS) upon his rise to power in 2015. It regrettably stumbled as a result of the disastrous Yemeni War that he’s been waging since that same year, but everything is now back on track and more promising than ever after securing $50 billion worth of investments from China last December.

      The People’s Republic regards Vision 2030 as complementary to its Belt & Road Initiative (BRI) due to MBS’ focus on real-sector investments for preemptively diversifying the Saudi economy away from its presently disproportionate dependence on oil exports. His country’s location at the crossroads of Afro-Eurasia also makes investments there extremely attractive from the perspective of China’s logistical interests, hence its massive commitment to his comprehensive economic reform policy.

      Without last week’s Beijing-brokered deal, China would have had to rely on maritime routes under the control of the powerful US Navy to facilitate the forthcoming explosion in bilateral real-sector trade, but now everything can be conducted much more securely via the Iranian-transiting CCAWAEC. Looking forward, there’s also a theoretical possibility of Chinese energy investments in Iran connecting the Gulf to Central Asia and thenceforth to the People’s Republic, thus fully securing its strategic interests.

      That’s still a far way’s off, if it even happens at all that is, but it nevertheless can’t be ruled out. Saudi Arabia’s desire to join BRICS and the SCO, which are the most influential multipolar organizations in the world right now, could turn this scenario into a reality a lot sooner than even the most optimistic observers might have expected. All of this in and of itself will herald a revolution in geo-economic affairs, and that’s even without Saudi Arabia having yet to throw its full support behind the “petroyuan”.

      Once this major oil exporter begins to sell its resources in non-dollar-denominated currencies like China’s, then the petrodollar upon which the economic-financial aspect of the US’ unipolar hegemony is predicated will be dealt a deathblow. The global systemic transition to multipolarity and the impending trifurcation of International Relations that will precede the final inevitable form of this process would unprecedentedly accelerate once this happens, thus further hastening America’s ongoing demise.

      About those aforementioned processes, they were already made irreversible by the special operation that Russia was forced to commence in defense of its national security red lines in Ukraine after NATO clandestinely crossed them there and subsequently rejected Moscow’s security guarantee requests for politically resolving their resultant security dilemma. Over the past year, the New York Times was forced to admit that not only did the sanctions fail, but even the plot to “isolate” Russia did too.

      These outcomes were largely the result of Russia’s example inspiring the Global South to rise up against neo-colonialism by refusing to comply with the demands placed upon them by the US-led West’s Golden Billion to unilaterally sacrifice their own interests simply to serve that de facto New Cold War bloc’s. India played the leading role in this respect due to its status as the world’s largest developing country, which gave comparatively medium- and smaller-sized ones the confidence to follow in its footsteps.

      That globally significant Great Power, which sits on the South Asian end of the NSTC that transits through Iran en route to Russia, also scaled up its purchases of discounted oil from Moscow to the point where its decades-long strategic partner is nowadays its largest supplier. Of crucial significance to the present analysis, a growing number of its deals are in non-dollar-denominated currencies, which sped up de-dollarization processes to such an extent that even Reuters felt compelled to write about this.

      Considering this newfound financial context, there’s no doubt that upcoming Saudi moves in support of the petroyuan that are taken in coordination with Iran and Russia would catalyze the next natural phase of de-dollarization. Russian-GCC real-sector trade that’ll be carried out via Iran across the NSTC will be conducted in national currencies and thus prepare those three for the moment when they finally decide to deal a deathblow to the petrodollar.

      All in all, it’s not hyperbole to declare that the dollar’s prior dominance is done for as a result of the Iranian-Saudi rapprochement. That Beijing-brokered deal makes this outcome an inevitability unless some subversive black swan event takes place such as a US-backed coup against MBS, though that’s unlikely to happen after he successfully consolidated his power in late 2017. With this in mind, it can confidently be declared that that last week’s development will be seen in hindsight as a game-changer.

      *  *  *

      Support the Automatic Earth via Patreon.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 03/18/2023 – 00:10

    • Will AI Go Rogue?
      Will AI Go Rogue?

      Following this week’s release of GPT-4, OpenAI’s new multimodal model accepting image and text inputs rather than ChatGPT’s text-only prompts, people on social media have been marveling about the new engine’s results in performing a variety of tasks, such as creating a working website based on a simple sketch, outperforming humans in a variety of standardized tests or writing code.

      But, as Statista’s Felix Richter notes, as people are only beginning to understand the capabilities (and limitations) of artificial intelligence models such as ChatGPT and now GPT-4, there’s also growing concern over what the rapid advancements in AI could ultimately lead to.

      “GPT-4 is exciting and scary,” New York Times columnist Kevin Roose wrote, adding that there two kinds of risks involved in AI systems: the good ones, i.e. the ones we anticipate, plan for and try to prevent and the bad ones, i.e. the ones we cannot anticipate.

      “The more time I spend with AI systems like GPT-4,” Roose writes, “the less I’m convinced that we know half of what’s coming.”

      According to Ipsos Global Advisor’s 2023 Predictions, many people seem to share Roose’s reservations with regard to artificial intelligence.

      Infographic: Will AI Go Rogue? | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      According to the survey conducted among 24,471 adults in 34 countries, an average of 27 percent of respondents per country consider it likely that a rogue AI program will cause problems around the world this year, with some countries such as India, Indonesia and China seeing significantly higher degrees of AI angst.

      Interestingly, the share of those expressing their concern over the potential of AI going rogue is virtually unchanged from the previous year.

      Considering the very public leaps the technology has taken over the past few months, it’ll be interesting to see how this changes going forward.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 23:50

    • Macgregor: The Gathering Storm
      Macgregor: The Gathering Storm

      Authored by Douglas Macgregor via TheAmericanConservative.com,

      America’s self-inflicted trouble in Ukraine aggravates our dangerous trouble at home…

      The crisis of American national power has begun. America’s economy is tipping over, and Western financial markets are quietly panicking. Imperiled by rising interest rates, mortgage-backed securities and U.S. Treasuries are losing their value. The market’s proverbial “vibes”—feelings, emotions, beliefs, and psychological penchants—suggest a dark turn is underway inside the American economy.

      American national power is measured as much by American military capability as by economic potential and performance. The growing realization that American and European military-industrial capacity cannot keep up with Ukrainian demands for ammunition and equipment is an ominous signal to send during a proxy war that Washington insists its Ukrainian surrogate is winning.

      Russian economy-of-force operations in southern Ukraine appear to have successfully ground down attacking Ukrainian forces with the minimal expenditure of Russian lives and resources. While Russia’s implementation of attrition warfare worked brilliantly, Russia mobilized its reserves of men and equipment to field a force that is several magnitudes larger and significantly more lethal than it was a year ago.

      Russia’s massive arsenal of artillery systems including rockets, missiles, and drones linked to overhead surveillance platforms converted Ukrainian soldiers fighting to retain the northern edge of the Donbas into pop-up targets. How many Ukrainian soldiers have died is unknown, but one recent estimate wagers between 150,000-200,000 Ukrainians have been killed in action since the war began, while another estimates about 250,000.

      Given the glaring weakness of NATO members’ ground, air, and air defense forces, an unwanted war with Russia could easily bring hundreds of thousands of Russian Troops to the Polish border, NATO’s Eastern Frontier. This is not an outcome Washington promised its European allies, but it’s now a real possibility.

      In contrast to the Soviet Union’s hamfisted and ideologically driven foreign policymaking and execution, contemporary Russia has skillfully cultivated support for its cause in Latin America, Africa, the Middle East, and South Asia. The fact that the West’s economic sanctions damaged the U.S. and European economies while turning the Russian ruble into one of the international system’s strongest currencies has hardly enhanced Washington’s global standing.

      Biden’s policy of forcibly pushing NATO to Russia’s borders forged a strong commonality of security and trade interests between Moscow and Beijing that is attracting strategic partners in South Asia like India, and partners like Brazil in Latin America. The global economic implications for the emerging Russo-Chinese axis and their planned industrial revolution for some 3.9 billion people in the Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO) are profound.

      In sum, Washington’s military strategy to weaken, isolate, or even destroy Russia is a colossal failure and the failure puts Washington’s proxy war with Russia on a truly dangerous path. To press on, undeterred in the face of Ukraine’s descent into oblivion, ignores three metastasizing threats: 1. Persistently high inflation and rising interest rates that signal economic weakness. (The first American bank failure since 2020 is a reminder of U.S. financial fragility.) 2. The threat to stability and prosperity inside European societies already reeling from several waves of unwanted refugees/migrants. 3. The threat of a wider European war.

      Inside presidential administrations, there are always competing factions urging the president to adopt a particular course of action. Observers on the outside seldom know with certainty which faction exerts the most influence, but there are figures in the Biden administration seeking an off-ramp from involvement in Ukraine. Even Secretary of State Antony Blinken, a rabid supporter of the proxy war with Moscow, recognizes that Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky’s demand that the West help him recapture Crimea is a red line for Putin that might lead to a dramatic escalation from Moscow.

      Backing down from the Biden administration’s malignant and asinine demands for a humiliating Russian withdrawal from eastern Ukraine before peace talks can convene is a step Washington refuses to take. Yet it must be taken. The higher interest rates rise, and the more Washington spends at home and abroad to prosecute the war in Ukraine, the closer American society moves toward internal political and social turmoil. These are dangerous conditions for any republic.

      From all the wreckage and confusion of the last two years, there emerges one undeniable truth. Most Americans are right to be distrustful of and dissatisfied with their government. President Biden comes across as a cardboard cut-out, a stand-in for ideological fanatics in his administration, people that see executive power as the means to silence political opposition and retain permanent control of the federal government.

      Americans are not fools. They know that members of Congress flagrantly trade stocks based on inside information, creating conflicts of interest that would land most citizens in jail. They also know that since 1965 Washington led them into a series of failed military interventions that severely weakened American political, economic, and military power.

      Far too many Americans believe they have had no real national leadership since January 21, 2021. It is high time the Biden administration found an off-ramp designed to extricate Washington, D.C., from its proxy Ukrainian war against Russia. It will not be easy. Liberal internationalism or, in its modern guise, “moralizing globalism,” makes prudent diplomacy arduous, but now is the time. In Eastern Europe, the spring rains present both Russian and Ukrainian ground forces with a sea of mud that severely impedes movement. But the Russian High Command is preparing to ensure that when the ground dries and Russian ground forces attack, the operations will achieve an unambiguous decision, making it clear that Washington and its supporters have no chance to rescue the dying regime in Kiev. From then on, negotiations will be extremely difficult, if not impossible.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 23:30

    • 39% Of Americans Can't Sleep
      39% Of Americans Can’t Sleep

      This Friday, March 17, is World Sleep Day, an annual event that aims to raise awareness of the importance of getting a good night’s sleep.

      This year’s campaign tagline is “Sleep is essential for health.”

      As Statista’s Anna Fleck reports, according to a study by the American College of Cardiology, up to 8 percent of deaths from any cause could be attributed to “poor sleep patterns”, while those with healthier sleep habits are less likely to die prematurely.

      Data from Statista Consumer Insights shows that in the United States, 39 percent of respondents said they had suffered from a sleep disorder (problems falling asleep or staying asleep, insomnia, etc.) in the 12 months prior to the survey.

      Infographic: 39% Of Americans Can’t Sleep | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      Italians were among the worst sleepers in the survey at 48 percent reporting a sleep disorder, while India registered a higher share of good sleepers, with only 26 percent suffering from poor sleep.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 23:10

    • VDH: Are We The Byzantines?
      VDH: Are We The Byzantines?

      Authored by Victor Davis Hanson via American Greatness,

      When Constantinople finally fell to the Ottomans on Tuesday, May 29, 1453, the Byzantine Empire and its capital had survived for 1,000 years beyond the fall of the Western Empire at Rome.

      Always outnumbered in a sea of enemies, the Byzantines’ survival had depended on its realist diplomacy of dividing its enemies, avoiding military quagmires, and ensuring constant deterrence.

      Generations of self-sacrifice ensured ample investment for infrastructure. Each generation inherited and improved on singular aqueducts and cisterns, sewer systems, and the most complex and formidable city fortifications in the world.

      Brilliant scientific advancement and engineering gave the empire advantages like swift galleys and flame throwers—an ancient precursor to napalm.

      The law reigned supreme for nearly a millennium after the emperor Justinian codified a prior thousand years of Roman jurisprudence.

      Yet this millennium-old crown jewel of the ancient world that once was home to 800,000 citizens had only 50,000 inhabitants left when it fell. 

      There were only 7,000 defenders on the walls to hold back a huge Turkish army of over 150,000 attackers.

      The Islamic winners took over the once magical city of Constantine and renamed it Istanbul. It had been the home of the renowned Santa Sophia, the largest Christian church in the world for over 900 years. Almost immediately, this “Church of the Holy Wisdom” was converted into the then largest mosque in the Islamic world, with minarets to follow.

      So what happened to the once indomitable city fortress and its empire?

      Christendom had cannibalized itself. Western Catholicism and Eastern Orthodoxy fought endlessly. Westerners often hated each other more than they did their common enemy.

      In the final days of Constantinople, almost no help was sent from Western Europe to the besieged city.

      In fact, 250 years earlier, the Western Franks of the Fourth Crusade had detoured from the Holy Land to storm the supposedly allied Christian City of Constantinople. 

      Then they ransacked the city and hijacked the Byzantine Empire for a half-century. Constantinople never quite recovered.

      The 14 th-century Black Plague killed tens of thousands of Byzantines and scared thousands more into moving out of the cramped city. 

      But the aging and dying empire battled more than the challenges of internal divisions, or an unforeseen but deadly pandemic and the empire’s disastrous responses to it.

      The last generations of Byzantines had inherited a global reputation and standard of living that they themselves no longer earned.

      They neglected their former civic values and fought endless battles over obscure religious texts, doctrines, and vocabulary.

      They did not expand their anemic army and navy. They did not reunite their scattered Greek-speaking empire. They did not properly maintain their once life-giving walls.

      Instead of earning money through their accustomed nonstop trade, they inflated their currency and were forced to melt down the city’s inherited gold and silver fixtures.

      The once canny and shrewd Byzantines grew smug and naïve. Childlessness became common. Most now preferred to live outside of what had become a half-empty, often dirty, and poorly maintained city.

      Meanwhile they underestimated the growing power of the Ottomans who systematically pruned away their empire. By the mid-15th century Islamic armies were ready to exploit fatal Byzantine weaknesses.

      The Sultan Mehmed II grandly announced the Ottomans were now the real, the only world power. Ascendent Ottoman armies would eventually move on to the very gates of Vienna in an effort to rule all the lands of the ancient Roman empire. 

      We should take heed from the last generations of the Byzantines.

      Nowhere is it foreordained that America has a birthright to remain the world’s preeminent civilization.

      An ascendent China seems eerily similar to the Ottomans. Beijing believes that the United States is decadent, undeserving of its affluence, living beyond its means on the fumes of the past—and very soon vulnerable enough to challenge openly.

      Left and Right seem to hate each other more than they do their common enemies.

      Like the Byzantines, Americans gave up defending their own borders, and simply shrugged as millions overran them as they pleased.

      Our once iconic downtowns, like end-stage Constantinople before the fall, are now dirty, half-deserted, dangerous, and dysfunctional.

      America prints rather than makes money, as its banks totter near bankruptcy.

      Americans similarly believe they are invincible without ensuring in reality that they are. Our military is more worried about being woke than deadly.

      Like Byzantines, Americans have become snarky iconoclasts, more eager to tear down art and sculpture that they no longer have the talent to create. 

      Current woke dogma, obscure word fights, and sanctimonious cancel culture are as antithetical to the past generations of World War II as the last generation of Constantinople was to the former great eras of the emperors Constantine, Justinian, Heraclius, and Leo.

      The Byzantines never woke up in time to understand what they had become.

      So far neither have Americans.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 22:50

    • Billionaire Bets On 'New Electric Highways' Across America
      Billionaire Bets On ‘New Electric Highways’ Across America

      John Arnold, a billionaire from Houston, is making a big bet on modernizing the outdated transmission infrastructure in the United States to transport electricity to areas where it is needed, including the distribution of wind and solar energy to towns and cities nationwide for the clean-energy transition. 

      Arnold told Bloomberg he has invested “several hundred million dollars” into Houston-based Grid United, a company he co-founded with transmission line developer Michael Skelly, to purchase land, easements, and the necessary permits for constructing electric highways that can stretch hundreds of miles. 

      Arnold and Skelly are planning long-haul transmission lines across multiple states on private land that might be very difficult to achieve because failing to win over every landowner could quickly scuttle the entire project. 

      “Arnold and Skelly are seeking to break a longstanding challenge in the industry where regulators, utilities, customers and investors are wary of projects that haven’t already secured necessary approvals,” Bloomberg said. 

      Adding transmission capacity to the US grid will be critical for the clean energy transition as more demand due to the electrification of the economy comes into play by the end of the decade. 

      The current state of the nation’s transmission is rather dire. About 70% of the transmission lines are over 25 years old, and this aging infrastructure makes delivering electricity to where it’s needed more challenging. 

      An expanded transmission system will allow for wind, solar, and nuclear power generation (so-called clean energy) to be delivered nationwide more efficiently and help reduce greenhouse gas emissions. President Biden has targeted 100% clean electricity by 2035. 

      “We are trying to break this chicken and egg cycle by acquiring the land position first.

      “We hope this both compresses the timeline and makes it easier to develop a successful project, but it comes with significantly greater financial risk,” Arnold said. 

      Grid United has announced five transmission line projects and has others in the pipeline. Each electric highway costs $1-3 billion and can carry 1.5-3 gigawatts (each gigawatt powers about 200,000 homes). 

      The green transition thus far has had a damaging effect on America’s largest power grid. The swift removal of fossil fuel power generation has outpaced the addition of new capacity, leading to concerns about reliability.

      Given President Biden’s goal to have most new car sales be electric within the next decade, it would be wise to upgrade the country’s transmission infrastructure. However, when it comes to upgrading power generation, there is an increasing need for next-generation nuclear energy that is on-demand power, unlike solar and wind power, which are unreliable.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 22:30

    • ATF Gains Financial Information On Potential Gun Buyers For Warrantless Tracking, Documents Show
      ATF Gains Financial Information On Potential Gun Buyers For Warrantless Tracking, Documents Show

      Authored by Emily Miller via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      The federal government has been using Americans’ income and gun purchases to conduct warrantless tracking and deny Second Amendment rights. Agents from the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives (ATF) gave salary estimates to the Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) as the reason to have people’s firearms purchases monitored.

      A person holds a gun in a file image. (Scott Olson/Getty Images)

      Erich Pratt, senior vice president of Gun Owners of America (GOA), told The Epoch Times that the ATF’s activities “monitoring innocent people” is a serious problem. “Congress needs to rein in this rogue agency by either exercising oversight over it or abolishing the unconstitutional agency altogether,” said Pratt.

      These revelations come from new documents, viewed by The Epoch Times which it received from its Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) lawsuit. The latest production from the FOIA has hundreds of pages—many redacted—showing ATF agents requesting warrantless surveillance by the FBI for lawful reasons such as low salaries, past firearm purchases, and sending “bizarre” messages.

      The Epoch Times exclusively reported in January about the FBI’s secret monitoring service that tracks people by the National Instant Criminal Background Check System (NICS) for gun purchases for mere “potential violations of law.”

      Too Poor to Buy Guns

      According to the documents, a man in Arizona was put into the NICS’s daily monitoring because he has a “reported income” of only $2,839. The ATF agent wrote, “In my experience, someone with this amount of income would not be able to afford 20 firearms.”

      An Asian man in Texas was put on the manual background check because the ATF said he has “no work history” which “could possibly indicate” that he is “straw purchasing.”

      A special agent in Kansas emailed ATF’s liaison at the NICS to flag two purchasers for “potential trafficking.” The agent wrote: “My targets are purchasing an abundance of firearms without a license or known financial means to obtain the product.”

      The FBI’s NICS expert instructed the agent in Kansas on what to include to ensure approval for tracking the suspects. “I would suggest covering the lack of income versus expenditures and also if there is substantial make/model duplication,” wrote the FBI. The ATF agent emailed back with the incomes for each man, acquired by the Kansas Department of Labor.

      All the cases in the documents are related to the ATF investigating dealing firearms without a license and straw purchasing, which is buying guns for people prohibited from owning a firearm.

      Tracking Income

      Gun rights activists say federal law enforcement is missing the mark.

      “The poor usually live in areas with the most crime and thus have a strong need to arm themselves heavily,” Pratt said. “So targeting the indigent is simply another avenue for gun grabbers to implement a backdoor gun ban.

      ATF headquarters will not disclose how it acquired the other suspects’ incomes, employment information, and past gun purchases found in the FOIA forms.

      “We are unable to discuss specific techniques utilized in criminal investigations,” ATF spokesman Erik Longnecker told The Epoch Times. “ATF utilizes a multitude of legal means in our criminal investigations to protect our communities from violent gun crime.”

      Longnecker referred The Epoch Times to the National Tracing Center website for information about “several overt programs such as multiple sales and demand letters that can be helpful in identifying illegal firearms trafficking.”

      Buying Too Many Guns

      A black man in Florida was monitored daily by the FBI for at least 90 days in 2020 because an ATF agent wrote: “Based on my training and experience, I have not seen a legal firearms purchaser purchase approximately 30 firearms in a 120-day window for their personal collection.”

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 22:10

    • White House Rejects Ceasefire In Ukraine As China Mediation Intensifies
      White House Rejects Ceasefire In Ukraine As China Mediation Intensifies

      The White House is already condemning any possible China-brokered peace plan initiative related to Ukraine before it even gets off the ground. Following Beijing confirming on Friday that Chinese President Xi Jinping will travel to Moscow on Monday through Wednesday to hold talks with President Vladimir Putin, the Biden administration is expressing concern and alarm over a potentially ‘bad deal’ for Ukraine.

      White House national security spokesman John Kirby warned that any unconditional ceasefire would only benefit Putin and his forces as this point. This after it’s also been revealed that Xi is expected to hold a phone call with Ukraine’s Zelensky related to China’s 12-point peace plan. “A cease-fire now is… effectively the ratification of Russian conquest,” Kirby said. “And of course, it would be another continued violation of the U.N. Charter.”

      Image source: The Hill/Greg Nash

      The US is worried that China’s diplomatic intervention and peace plan could result in significant territorial concessions

      White House national security spokesperson John Kirby said Friday that an unconditional cease-fire halting Russia’s offensive in Ukraine would legitimize Moscow’s hold on an estimated 17 percent of Ukrainian territory that was taken by force.

      This is chiefly in the east, namely the Donbas region, where Russia has been making gains of late and is poised to take the strategic city of Bakhmut. 

      But Kirby’s preemptively and outright rejecting any possible ceasefire is at odds with prior repeat US statements that it is solely Zelensky’s decision to make. The White House has lately really promoted the idea that it is not in the background making decisions for Kyiv, but that it’s the Zelensky administration exercising its own sovereign choices concerning war strategy. 

      But in this instance of Washington trying to slam the door on Chinese-mediated peace, clearly it puts pressure on Zelensky to do the same. 

      The US may also be alarmed at how open Ukraine appears to be in dealing with China. The Hill notes of the latest positive interaction between China and Ukraine

      Ukrainian Foreign Minister Dmytro Kuleba on Thursday said he spoke with China’s State Councilor and Foreign Minister Qin Gang, where the two discussed “the significance of the principle of territorial integrity” and underscored the importance of Zelensky’s “Peace Formula” to end Russia’s war, which in part calls for Russia to withdraw its troops from all the territory it occupies in Ukraine.

      But from the moment it was unveiled, the US alleged cynical motives behind Beijing’s peace efforts, despite Zelensky hinting he is open to deepened discussion with Chinese leadership.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Kirby in his fresh remarks said that Moscow will use any possible ceasefire to solidify gains. Then Russian forces will “basically be free to use that ceasefire to further entrench its positions in Ukraine,” he stated. 

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 21:50

    • Microsoft Cuts AI Ethics Team As It Invests Billions More Into AI Technology, Report Says
      Microsoft Cuts AI Ethics Team As It Invests Billions More Into AI Technology, Report Says

      Authored by Bill Pan via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      The last remaining members of an ethics and society team within Microsoft’s artificial intelligence (AI) department didn’t survive a recent round of mass layoffs, according to a report.

      Screens displaying the logos of Microsoft and ChatGPT, a conversational artificial intelligence application software developed by OpenAI. (Lionel Bonaventure/AFP via Getty Images)

      The change comes as Microsoft signs a “multi-year, multi-billion-dollar investment” deal with OpenAI, the startup behind AI-powered image and text generators like DALL-E and ChatGPT, and upgrades its Bing search engine and Edge internet browser to incorporate a “new, next-generation OpenAI large language model that is more powerful than ChatGPT.”

      The team, as reported by tech news site Platformer, was tasked to make sure Microsoft’s ethical standards regarding AI were actually reflected in product designs. The team was also reportedly working to identify potential risks posed by integrating OpenAI’s technology into a range of Microsoft products.

      The team was at its peak size of 30 members in 2020, according to the report. Following a reorganization in October 2022, however, only about seven people remained. Microsoft’s corporate vice president of AI, John Montgomery, told Platformer that there was great pressure from chief technology officer Kevin Scott and chief executive Satya Nadella, who wanted to get “the most recent OpenAI models” into customers’ hands as quickly as possible.

      Microsoft still maintains its Office of Responsible AI, which focuses on creating company-wide rules and principles to guide AI development. But employees told Platformer that the ethics and society team was playing a key role in bridging the gap between principles and products.

      Ai-Da Robot, the world’s first ultra-realistic humanoid robot artist, appears at a photo call in a committee room in the House of Lords in London on Oct. 11, 2022. (Rob Pinney/Getty Images)

      Microsoft didn’t respond to a request for comment, but it told Platformer that with the ethics team gone, the overall amount of work dedicated to responsibly has increased.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 21:30

    • Deloitte's Beijing Office Suspended By China Over 'Deficiencies' In Huarong Audit
      Deloitte’s Beijing Office Suspended By China Over ‘Deficiencies’ In Huarong Audit

      The Chinese government suspended operations at the western-linked auditor Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu Ltd.’s Beijing office for three months after finding “deficiencies” in its auditing work for China Huarong Asset Management. 

      According to Bloomberg, the Chinese finance ministry carried out a thorough assessment of Deloitte’s auditing of bad debt manager Huarong. This evaluation included on-site inspections, personnel interviews, a complete review of documentation, and even a hearing.

      The ministry found the big four accounting firm had “serious audit deficiencies” in its work with Huarong between 2014 and 2019. 

      When Huarong delayed the release of its annual report in 2021, it triggered a credit crisis that rippled through Asian markets. The firm eventually revealed a staggering loss for the previous year, necessitating a state-backed bailout from Beijing.

      Deloitte’s Beijing branch was fined 212 million yuan ($30.8 million) for not properly reviewing Huarong’s assets, overlooking compliance approvals on significant investments, and failing to offer a sense of skepticism during the auditing work on the bad debt manager. The auditors missed several risk control failures and distortions in Huarong’s books.

      The suspension and fine of Deloitte’s Beijing office come one month after Chinese authorities reportedly instructed state-owned companies to phase out contracts with western-linked auditors, such as Deloitte, KPMG, EY, and PwC. 

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 21:10

    • 60 Percent Of Americans Say China A Bigger Threat Than Russia: Poll
      60 Percent Of Americans Say China A Bigger Threat Than Russia: Poll

      Authored by Ryan Morgan via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      About 60 percent of Americans surveyed in a new Quinnipiac University Poll have listed China as a bigger threat to the United States over Russia.

      The Chinese regime’s flags and American flags are displayed in a company in Beijing on Aug. 16, 2017. (Wang Zhao/AFP via Getty Images)

      The poll, which was conducted between March 9–13, asked 1,795 American adults about their views on a range of political topics. One question asked respondents to identify who they consider the greatest threat to the United States among the countries of China, Russia, North Korea, Iran, Venezuela, and Cuba.

      A majority of 61 percent viewed China as the biggest threat to the United States, while 22 percent said Russia. Eight percent of respondents said North Korea poses the biggest threat and two percent said Iran. Less than a percent of respondents identified Venezuela or Cuba as the top threat, while three percent of respondents volunteered an unlisted option and four percent said they did not know.

      China was the top concern for respondents across party lines. 79 percent of Republicans, 64 percent of independents, and 47 percent of Democrats selected China as the leading threat to the United States.

      By contrast, 38 percent of Democrats, 18 percent of independents, and 10 percent of Republicans saw Russia as the leading threat.

      The Quinnipiac findings are similar to those from a recent Gallup poll, which showed that 50 percent of U.S. respondents considered China the biggest threat to the United States, compared to 32 percent who said that Russia was the bigger threat. That Gallup poll found even broader negative views of China, with more than eight in ten Americans expressing unfavorable views of the country.

      China and TikTok

      U.S. officials have shared increased concerns over China and its ruling communist party in recent months.

      In February, U.S. officials decried the transit of a Chinese high-altitude balloon over U.S. airspace, alleging the balloon was one of several recent efforts by the Chinese government to spy on the United States.

      U.S. officials have pointed to the popular social media app TikTok as another avenue for Chinese government actors to surveil Americans. TikTok is owned by a Chinese parent company called ByteDance.

      Multiple reports have indicated that TikTok and ByteDance employees can and have accessed U.S. user data from China.

      FBI Director Christopher Wray has also warned that TikTok could be used to conduct influence operations against U.S. citizens, manipulating users’ content to promote views favorable to the ruling Chinese Communist Party (CCP).

      The new Quinnipiac University poll found that a 49 percent plurality of U.S. respondents preferred banning the app in the United States, while 42 percent opposed a ban. Nine percent said they don’t know whether either way where they stand on a ban.

      Views on the proposed TikTok ban differed with respondents political views: 64 percent of Republicans and 50 percent of independents said they support a ban on TikTok. A 51 percent majority of Democrats opposed a ban on the app, while 39 percent supported said they support a ban.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 20:50

    • St. Patrick's Day: 31 Million Americans Claim Irish Ancestry
      St. Patrick’s Day: 31 Million Americans Claim Irish Ancestry

      U.S. President Joe Biden is welcoming Irish Taoiseach Leo Varadkar to the White House today as part of a Saint Patrick’s Day tradition, celebrating the two countries’ strong ties.

      As well as taking part in several St. Patrick’s Day events together, including the taoiseach (prime minister) gifting the U.S president a bowl of shamrock, the two leaders are expected to discuss Biden’s upcoming trip to Ireland and Northern Ireland on the 25th anniversary of the U.S.-brokered Good Friday Agreement.

      The United States and Ireland have long been close allies and economic partners, with a large Irish diaspora living in the U.S.

      In fact, the first ever parade on Saint Patrick’s Day was actually held in the U.S., taking place in New York City in 1762. In 1991, Congress even designated March as Irish-American Heritage Month.

      But how many U.S. citizens can actually claim Irish ancestry?

      Infographic: St. Patrick's Day: 31 Million Americans Claim Irish Ancestry | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      According to data from the U.S. Census Bureau, some 31.5 million Americans claimed Irish ancestry in 2021, accounting for 9.5 percent of the population. German ancestry is ahead, however, with 42.2 million U.S. citizens claiming ancestral links with Europe’s economic powerhouse. In second place comes English ancestry, with a further 31.8 million Americans having historical familial ties with the country.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 20:30

    • Military Recruitment Flatlines As American 'Propensity To Serve' Fades
      Military Recruitment Flatlines As American ‘Propensity To Serve’ Fades

      Authored by John Haughey via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      The United States military is facing recruitment shortfalls with only the Marine Corps and the newly created Space Force meeting 2022 enlistment quotas, an issue that could undermine the Pentagon’s readiness to address the “pacing challenges” posed by the People’s Republic of China and Russia.

      The Times Square military recruiting station displays insignia for each military branch in New York. (Bebeto Matthews/AP Photo)

      The U.S. Army in 2022 missed its recruiting goal by 15,000 active-duty soldiers, or 25 percent of its target, leaving the nation’s largest military force 7 percent smaller than it was two years ago.

      The U.S. Navy came within several dozen of its 2022 enlistment goal but only after lowering its recruiting quota, increasing its oldest enlistment age from 39 to 41, and lowering other standards.

      Recruits run sprints at U.S. Navy boot camp in Great Lakes, Ill. (Spencer Fling/U.S. Navy)

      The U.S. Air Force met its 2022 recruiting goal but, according to Alex Wagner, assistant secretary of the Air Force for Manpower and Reserve Affairs, in 2023 it anticipates it “will miss its recruiting goal for the first since 1999.”

      Wagner was among the eight officials representing the individual military branches and the Department of Defense (DOD) to testify on March 15 before the U.S. Senate Armed Services Committee’s Personnel Subcommittee about issues confronting the military’s 2.1 million active-duty members, the DOD’s 700,000 civilian employees, and their families.

      Today the military faces a recruiting crisis,” Sen. Rick Scott (R-Fla.) said, noting in 2023 it is expected that “the Army and Navy will miss the mark by 10,000 each,” fostering an “unprecedented” challenge that will be the nine-member sub-panels “top priority to fix” in the coming two years.

      Shrinking Recruit Pool

      DOD and service branch officials said the shortfalls are partly attributable to endemic obesity, educational deficiencies, mental health problems, and criminal backgrounds that disqualify more than three-quarters of the nation’s service-eligible population from serving in the military.

      Officials also cited a “historically strong” job market, salaries, housing, access to health care, and the demands of active duty service among factors contributing to the recruitment shortfalls.

      Taking care of military families and individual service members’ needs is “just as much a readiness issue” as having the weapons and equipment to fight, Chair Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.) said.

      Warren cited plans with the Biden administration’s $886.3 billion Fiscal Year 2024 (FY24) budget request to enhance access to health care, child care, and upgrade military family housing all part of a campaign to boost recruitment.

      Among DOD initiatives to improve recruiting is a proposed $40 million marketing campaign that will complement and amplify each of the service branch’s recruitment programs.

      “We need to do a better job of telling our story and marketing ourselves,” Undersecretary of Defense for Personnel and Readiness Henry Cisneros told the panel, noting it was the largest marketing request of this type ever made by the Pentagon separately from the individual service branches.

      A drill instructor corrects recruits on their deficiencies at Marine Corps Recruit Depot Parris Island, S.C., Nov. 16, 2019. (Lance Cpl. Godfrey Ampong/U.S. Marine Corps)

      Sen. Tammy Duckworth (D-Ill.) said her proposed “Enlist Act” would expand recruiting to include childhood arrivals “and other longtime residents who can pass background checks and meet standards” as one way to boost enlistments.

      Sen. Ted Budd (R-N.C.) asked why the Pentagon does not allow service members to work with organizations such as Our Community Salutes.

      Budd also asked Cisneros if the defense department is reaching out to those booted from the military for not complying with the Pentagon’s COVID vaccine mandate.

      That would be a question that would be better answered by the services,” he said, although the Pentagon has made it clear that service members can “apply for an accommodation” and that the services have told members there is a process they can apply to be exempted.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 20:10

    • Arrest Warrant Issued For President Putin By Hague-Based ICC
      Arrest Warrant Issued For President Putin By Hague-Based ICC

      As part of the West’s attempt to ramp up the pressure on President Vladimir Putin, the International Criminal Court (ICC) on Friday issued an arrest warrant for the Russian leader. It’s a largely symbolic step, given detaining Putin remains entirely unenforceable, but is enough to create a firestorm of hyped and breathless headlines.

      Another arrest warrant for a top official was announced simultaneously for Russia’s commissioner for children’s rights Maria Alekseyevna Lvova-Belova. The warrants for both Putin and Lvova-Belova allege severe human rights violations against children, and mark the first formal international charges brought by the ICC against Moscow.

      Street scene in Barcelona, via AFP

      The ICC said in a statement that Putin “is allegedly responsible for the war crime of unlawful deportation of population (children) and that of unlawful transfer of population (children) from occupied areas of Ukraine to the Russian Federation.”

      According to Axios, it stems from allegations that “Russia systematically relocated at least 6,000 children from Ukraine to Russia since the start of the war” – based on findings by a group called Conflict Observatory and their report published in February.

      “Many of the children, who were taken to camps or other facilities, engaged in pro-Russia reeducation efforts, per the report,” Axios details. “Some of the facilities were used for foster care or adoption in Russia and Crimea.”

      But it remains that the warrants are largely merely symbolic. “The ICC is doing its part of work as a court of law,” ICC court president Piotr Hofmanski said. “The judges issued arrest warrants. The execution depends on international cooperation.”

      Given the ICC doesn’t have a police force, any actual attempt to detain Putin would be the decision of a government, so needless to say it could not possibly be enforced. However, it does complicate Putin’s ability to travel to European or other capitals which cooperate with the ICC. This also means it could hinder peace efforts in the scenario Putin might choose to personally engage in negotiations or diplomacy in a European city.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The Kremlin responded quickly to the ICC warrants, with Dmitry Peskov stressing that Russia doesn’t recognize the international court, calling its decisions “legally void.” He blasted the attempt to go after the recognized head of state of Russia as “outrageous and unacceptable.”

      Recent debate at the Hague-based ICC ahead of Friday’s announcement certainly put Washington in an awkward position, with Axios pointing out that “The New York Times reported earlier this month that the Pentagon was blocking the Biden administration from sharing U.S. intelligence with the ICC about Russian war crimes in Ukraine for fear that it could set a precedent for prosecuting Americans.”

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 19:50

    • Japan, South Korea Are Rebuilding Military Ties, With US Backing
      Japan, South Korea Are Rebuilding Military Ties, With US Backing

      Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

      South Korean President Yoon Suk-yeol met with Japanese Prime Minister Fumio Kishida in Japan on Thursday as Tokyo and Seoul seek to thaw relations, an initiative backed by the US as it seeks to rally its allies in the region against China.

      According to Nikkei Asia, the two leaders agreed to bolster cooperation against North Korea and to resume a working-level bilateral security dialogue that has been on a five-year hiatus. Yoon announced the “normalization” of the General Security of Military Information Agreement (GSOMIA), a pact that allows the two countries to share military intelligence.

      Via Reuters

      In 2019, Yoon’s predecessor, Moon Jae-in, said Seoul would not be renewing the GSOMIA in response to new export controls Japan imposed on South Korea. The two countries also announced a trade agreement on Thursday that will lift Japanese export controls.

      The GSOMIA allows the two countries to share information on North Korean missile tests. “I believe the two countries should be able to share information on North Korea’s nuclear missile launches and trajectories, and respond to them,” Yoon said at a press conference following his meeting with Kishida.

      The meeting between Yoon and Kishida marked the first visit between Japanese and South Korean leaders since 2012. “From now on, I would like to open a new chapter in Japan-South Korea relations through frequent visits by both sides that are not tied down by formality,” Kishida said.

      Ties between South Korea and Japan have been strained over the Japanese imperial rule of Korea from 1910 to 1945. The two countries have been working on an agreement to settle a dispute over Korean slave labor during the occupation, although South Korea’s opposition and many others in the country are not happy with a proposal Yoon accepted from Japan.

      Rahm Emanuel, the US ambassador to Japan, welcomed the warming of ties and said North Korea and China won’t be happy about the progress. “Our working together not only on the political front, but on the strategic front, on the deterrence front, is what North Korea is scared about. It’s also what China doesn’t want to see happen,” he told CNN.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      US military leaders expect any future war with China also to involve action from North Korea and want to coordinate more with the Japanese and South Korean militaries. Kishida recently announced Japan is doubling its military budget over the next five years as part of a military buildup specifically aimed at China.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 19:30

    • "The Fed Is Broke" – Gundlach Likes Gold, Fears "Expanding Wars" Most
      “The Fed Is Broke” – Gundlach Likes Gold, Fears “Expanding Wars” Most

      In the past week, DoubleLine CEO and founder Jeffrey Gundlach has had a lot to say as the US banking system collapse and bailout enjoins Europe’s banking crisis leaving central banks’ inflation-fighting plans in question.

      The ECB was clear – hiking 50bps and FTW! – but what will The Fed do?

      The market has dovishly adjusted to the banking crisis overhang(pricing in a peak in rate in May with just one 25bps hike and then cuts for the rest of the year)

      …and the new ‘bond king’ suggests that Powell hikes continue to keep up its inflation-fighting efforts, due to credibility concerns.

      “This is really throwing a wrench in [Fed Chair] Jay Powell’s game plan,” Gundlach said.

      “I wouldn’t do it myself. But what do you do in the context of all this messaging that has happened over the past six months, and then something happens that you think you’ve solved.”

      Ironically adding that, The Fed is doing this with one hand at the same time as enabling inflationary policy with the BTFP on the other:

      “I think that the inflationary policy is back in play with the Federal Reserve … putting money into the system through this lending program.” Gundlach said.

       

      But, in a Twitter Spaces audio chat Thursday with Jennifer Ablan, editor-in-chief of Pensions & Investments, Gundlach warns of an imminent recession – within the next four months – as the yield-curve suddenly steepens

      “In all the past recessions going back for decades, the yield curve starts de-inverting a few months before the recession,” adding that “I think it’s within four months at the most. Almost every indicator is flipped into high probability. The only one that hasn’t is the unemployment rate.”

      But,, the DoubleLine founder pointed out that at 3.6%, the unemployment rate just crossed back above its 12-month moving average…

      Which, historically has been “a reliable indicator you’re on the doorstep” of recession.

      Gundlach called Silicon Valley Bank’s failure “a rate policy collision with stupid accounting rules” for banks, but warned of The Fed’s reaction was inflationary and antithetical to their inflation-fighting stance.

      “By bailing out depositors at SVB, that’s essentially a quantitative easing” by the Fed, he said.

      “Making those depositors whole is about the same as a month or two of reversing quantitative tightening.”

      The stock market is currently in a bear market, he said, and he would sell into any rallies.

      Gundlach predicts the S&P 500 index will trade down to 3,200 and reminded investors that “the goal for 2023 is survival, and losing as little money as possible.”

      What worries the bond king the most may surprise some – spreading geopolitical conflicts:

      “I think expanding wars worries me the most.”

      But he was clear on the biggest financial risk:

      The Fed is broke. The Fed’s balance sheet is negative $1.1 trillion. There’s nothing they can do to fight any problems except for printing money.

      They have nothing left. The Fed used to send money to Treasury. Now Treasury sends money to the Fed.

      We’re at this point in time where we don’t have any road left to kick the can on our mismanagement of finances and monetary policy.”

      His suggestion – buy gold.

      If government spending continues, he predicts “the dollar will collapse under the weight of the deficit.”

      I think gold is a good long-term hold, gold and other real assets with true value, such as land, gold and collectibles.”

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 18:55

    • A Haunting Anniversary – '15 Days To Slow The Spread'
      A Haunting Anniversary – ’15 Days To Slow The Spread’

      Authored by Julie Kelly via AmGreatness.com,

      As we approach the third anniversary of “15 Days to Slow the Spread” there remains no accountability and no assurances that it couldn’t happen again…

      Three years ago this week, our vibrant, noisy country went silent.

      Or, I should say, it was silenced. Businesses didn’t shutter due to a sudden economic crash—although one quickly followed—and highways weren’t empty due to a global fuel shortage. Schools didn’t close because of a nationwide teacher’s strike; parents and children didn’t hunker down in separate rooms of the same house over a nasty family fight.

      No, it was a man-made disaster the likes of which can only be compared to war. On March 16, 2020, President Donald Trump and his Coronavirus Task Force announced the infamous “15 Days to Slow the Spread.” For the first time in modern history, the free world, or so it was considered at the time, resorted to medieval methods to stop the unstoppable transmission of a novel contagion. Had there been enough time to farm a massive supply of leeches, the nation’s top government officials probably would have recommended bloodletting, too.

      “The new recommendations are simple to follow but will have a resounding impact on public health,” the official White House announcement read.

      “While the President leads a nationwide response, bringing together government resources and private-sector ingenuity, every American can help slow the virus’ spread and keep our most high-risk populations safe.

      It is a day, and a decision, that will live in infamy. Trump, of course, is not solely responsible; Drs. Anthony Fauci and Deborah Birx shrewdly won the affection and trust of the American people early on, so any move contrary to their counsel would have created an even bigger crisis in the White House. Prior to the official declaration, Republican governors warned shut downs were imminent. Congressional Republicans with a few exceptions—Rep. Tom Massie (R-Ky.) comes to mind—grasped the devastating impact on the most vulnerable, especially children, the poor, and the elderly. The national news media amplified the untested “mitigation” approach without a shred of skepticism.

      Mario Tama/Getty Images

      “We’re all in this together,” Hollywood insisted. Health care workers made up dances in between posting vicious condemnations aimed at any American who dared to question the scientific basis of indefinite home confinement. Doctors and nurses, in perhaps the cruelest act of all, forced patients to die alone as their loved ones stood helplessly nearby, but all too far away.

      Public health “experts” became international celebrities simply by making up data and forecasting unrealized predictions of doom and death. Local police officers ran joggers off public beaches.

      Carlos Avila Gonzalez/The San Francisco Chronicle via Getty Images

      And it wasn’t just the professional class responsible for the dystopian hellscape.

      Frustrated housewives chased down children who braved hazard-taped neighborhood playgrounds. When mask madness ensued, many of our countrymen built a mask militia of sorts, berating nonusers, or even those wearing their masks “improperly,” in public spaces. Indignant scolds posted their tirades on social media.

      The list goes on and on. And as the pseudoscientific underpinnings—from the “natural” origins of the virus, to the official pronouncements on the effectiveness of social distancing,  mask mandates, and vaccine efficacy—unravels under the weight of evidence, the collateral damage is gradually coming to light.

      American teens remain trapped in an unprecedented mental health crisis, traumatized by months—and in some states, more than a year—of suffering social isolation, virus panic, and lost rites of passage leaving scars for a lifetime. A major study published in January detailed the global scale of the catastrophe.

      “The effect of limited face-to-face instruction is compounded by the pandemic’s consequences for children’s out-of-school learning environment, as well as their mental and physical health,” according to a meta-analysis that reviewed more than two years of data related to school shutdowns.

      “Lockdowns have restricted children’s movement and their ability to play, meet other children and engage in extra-curricular activities. Children’s wellbeing and family relationships have also suffered due to economic uncertainties and conflicting demands of work, care and learning. These negative consequences can be expected to be most pronounced for children from low socio-economic family backgrounds, exacerbating pre-existing educational inequalities.”

      The full toll on children and families will likely never be known. Young adults attempt to navigate a new normal as “working remotely” persists in the white collar world. How can one make new friends or meet a prospective spouse when confined to a studio apartment in Lincoln Park working on accounting spreadsheets four days a week? (A recent college graduate told me how he was so excited during his first few weeks on the job to go into the office and finally meet his virtual co-workers that he picked up donuts to share. When he arrived, no one was there. So he gave the donuts to a homeless man outside the building.)

      Life in most places, on the surface, appears to have returned to normal. Casual conversations often invoke “before COVID” to describe a time before March 2020. But in many respects, the “slow the spread” legacy lives. More than 110,000 restaurants closed permanently; it’s unclear how many have reopened. The service industry operates in constant fear history will repeat itself since no politician or government official has yet to suffer any repercussions for imposing such destructive—and futile—policies. 

      This applies to leaders of both parties. For proof, look no further than the resounding reelection victories of Governors Gretchen Whitmer (D-Mich.) and Mike DeWine (R-Ohio). (Safely reelected and considered a 2024 presidential prospect, should Biden choose not to run, Whitmer recently admitted maybe her harsh policies were “a little more than we needed to do.”)

      And consider, too, the level of hero worship that still exists for Fauci in many quarters.

      The issue promises to be a point of contention during the 2024 Republican presidential primaries. No current candidate has clean hands; in fact, former Vice President Mike Pence, who led the Coronavirus Task Force, arguably is most culpable. Florida Governor Ron DeSantis, undoubtedly one of the first leaders to recognize the futility and damage caused by the lockdowns, nonetheless instituted lockdown measures, supported mask use, and pushed vaccines. 

      In some ways, it’s hard to understand how this all happened.

      None of it would have been possible but for the immediate and unskeptical submission of the overwhelming majority of Americans. Could it happen again? Sadly, the answer is yes.

      Never again? We’ll see.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 18:50

    • Xi To Arrive In Moscow Monday, Ukraine War 'Core Part' Of Talks With Putin
      Xi To Arrive In Moscow Monday, Ukraine War ‘Core Part’ Of Talks With Putin

      The Chinese Foreign Ministry has confirmed in a statement on its website that President Xi Jinping’s much anticipated state visit to Russia will be held from March 20-22, marking the first such in-person visit with President Putin since the Ukraine war started in February 2022.

      The Kremlin at the same time confirmed of the trip that “An exchange of views is also planned in the context of deepening Russian-Chinese cooperation in the international arena,” and that, “A number of important bilateral documents will be signed.” 

      Via Reuters

      Russia has further said the two leaders will discuss “strategic cooperation” – following early last year’s declaration of Beijing and Moscow’s “no-limits partnership”.

      The new Friday Beijing statement also said the war in Ukraine will be top priority, also after acknowledging that a Xi-Zelensky phone call will happen related to the Moscow visit

      China’s Foreign Ministry said the visit will take place from Monday to Wednesday at the invitation of Putin and confirmed that the war in Ukraine would be a core part of the talks.

      “China’s proposition boils down to one sentence, which is to urge peace and promote talks,” foreign ministry spokesman Wang Wenbin said.

      And more on the few details made known thus far, to kick off Monday:

      The two leaders will start Monday with a one-on-one followed by an “informal lunch,” with negotiations set to take place Tuesday, according to Kremlin spokesperson Dmitry Peskov.

      This will be Xi’s first important trip abroad after the 69-year old earlier this month became the longest-serving head of state that Communist China has ever seen going back to 1949, and comes after he already broke precedent in gaining a third term as head of the Chinese Communist party last fall. 

      Russian President Vladimir Putin had been among the first world leaders to congratulate Xi on his third term, and hailed the two countries’ strategic partnership. “Dear friend, please accept sincere congratulations on the occasion of your reelection,” Putin said in a statement published by the Kremlin. “Russia highly values your personal contribution toward the strengthening of ties … and strategic cooperation between our nations,” he had said a week ago.

      “I am certain that working together, we will ensure the development of fruitful Russian-Chinese cooperation in all sorts of different areas,” Putin wrote. “We will continue to coordinate joint work on the most important regional and international issues.”

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 18:30

    • The Fed Just Hijacked American Democracy
      The Fed Just Hijacked American Democracy

      Authored by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

      You know the old joke – “Predictions are hard… especially about the future.”

      And it’s true, nobody has a crystal ball.

      But it’s astonishing to see just how horribly wrong the people in charge can be in their predictions, especially about the very near future.

      You probably remember Joe Biden famously insisted in the summer of 2021 that the Taliban was “highly unlikely” to take over Afghanistan.

      Boy did he turn out to be wrong.

      Only a few weeks later, the Taliban was in control of the entire country… and the world watched in utter astonishment as US military helicopters evacuated embassy personnel from Kabul in one of the most shameful episodes in modern American history.

      Not to be outdone, it appears that the Federal Reserve has just had its own Afghanistan moment.

      It was only Tuesday of last week that the Fed Chairman testified before a committee of concerned senators who thought the Fed may be tightening monetary policy (i.e. raising interest rates) too quickly.

      This was a valid concern; rapid interest rate hikes DO create a LOT of risks. And one of those risks is that asset prices– especially bond prices– plummet in value.

      This risk is particularly problematic for banks because they tend to invest their customer deposits in bonds.

      In fact, now that the Fed has tightened its monetary policy so quickly, banks across the US have more than $600 billion in unrealized losses on their bond portfolios. This is a pretty major problem… because that $600 billion is ultimately YOUR money.

      And it’s not like the Fed doesn’t have access to this information; after all, the Fed supervises nearly EVERY bank in the US financial system.

      And yet last week the Fed Chairman completely rejected this risk, telling worried senators flat out that “nothing about the data suggests to me that we’ve tightened too much. . .”

      In other words, he believed the Fed’s rapid interest rate hikes posed ZERO risk.

      Talk about a terrible prediction; just THREE DAYS LATER, one of the largest banks in the US imploded, multiple bank runs unfolded across the country, the bond market fell into turmoil, and the Fed had to essentially guarantee the entire US banking system in order to restore confidence. (More on that in a moment.)

      The mental image of bank runs in America, just days after the Chairman dismissed any risk, is the Fed’s equivalent of the Afghanistan debacle. It’s shameful.

      But what’s REALLY concerning is the Fed’s response to this panic– their de facto guarantee of the entire US banking system. Because ultimately they just put YOU on the hook for the potential bond losses of every bank in America. I’ll explain–

      After Silicon Valley Bank went bust, the FDIC announced that they will guarantee ALL deposits at the bank.

      This is a departure from the FDIC’s normal pledge to guarantee deposits of up to $250,000, and their decision drew a lot of ire from pundits and politicians across the ideological spectrum. Many people concluded that the FDIC’s pledge was tantamount to a “taxpayer-funded bailout.”

      But that assessment is wrong. Anyone who is intellectually honest and well-informed will easily understand that the FDIC is not funded by taxpayers. The FDIC is funded by charging fees to its member banks.

      So when the FDIC decided to guarantee every depositor at Silicon Valley Bank, including those with balances exceeding $250,000, it means they’re bailing out SVB’s wealthy customers at the expense of big Wall Street banks.

      But most people seem to have missed the real story… because the ACTUAL bailout is coming from the Fed, not the FDIC.

      Despite the Chairman’s terrible prediction in front of the Senate Banking Committee last week, the Fed now seems keenly aware of the risks in the US banking system. They realize that there are LOTS of other banks that are sitting on massive unrealized losses, just like SVB.

      So in order to prevent these banks from going under, the Fed invented a new facility they’re calling the “Bank Term Funding Program”, or BTFP.

      But the BTFP is really just an extraordinary lie designed to make you think that the banking system is safe. They might as well have called it, “Believe This Fiction, People”, and I’ll show you why.

      Whenever people borrow money from banks, we normally have to provide some sort of collateral. Banks make home equity loans using real estate as collateral. They make car loans where the car is collateral. Manufacturing businesses borrow money using factory equipment as collateral.

      Well, banks do the same thing when they borrow money. And sometimes banks will even borrow money from the Federal Reserve. This is actually one of the reasons why the central bank exists– to act as a “lender of last resort” if banks need an emergency loan.

      And when banks borrow money from the Fed, they have to post collateral too.

      Instead of automobiles and houses, though, banks use their financial assets as collateral– specifically their bonds.

      This is actually codified by law (12 CFR 201.108) whereby Congress lists specific assets that the Fed can accept as collateral when making loans to banks. The list is basically different types of bonds.

      But this is the root of the problem. Banks are in financial trouble because their bond portfolios have lost so much value. Some banks (like SVB) are even insolvent because of this.

      So now, through the BTFP, the Fed will now accept banks’ sagging bond portfolios as collateral, but loan the bank MORE money than the bond portfolios are worth.

      Let’s say you’re an insolvent bank that invested, say, $100 billion in bonds. Those bonds are now worth $85 billion, and your bank is about to go under. “NO PROBLEMO!” says the Fed.

      The bank simply posts their bond portfolio (which is only worth $85 billion) as collateral, and the Fed will loan the bank the full $100 billion… as if those losses never occurred.

      It’s a complete lie. Everyone is pretending that the banks haven’t lost any money to give you a false sense of confidence in the financial system. “Believe the Fiction, People.”

      Remember that banks in the US have more than $600 billion in unrealized bond losses right now. And that number will keep increasing if interest rates continue to rise.

      So this means that the Fed has essentially guaranteed that entire $600+ billion. Commercial banks won’t lose a penny— they can now pass their financial risks down to the Federal Reserve.

      This isn’t a bailout… it’s a time bomb.

      We can keep our fingers crossed and hope that this time bomb never explodes. But if it does, the Federal Reserve is going to be looking at hundreds of billions in losses… which would trigger devastating consequences for the US dollar.

      This means that everyone who uses US dollars… including every man, woman, and child in America, is ultimately on the hook for the potential consequences of the BTFP.

      And that’s what is so remarkable about this: the Fed just made this decision all on its own.

      Congress didn’t pass a law. There were no hearings, no judicial oversight, no votes.

      Instead, several unelected bureaucrats who have been consistently wrong got together in a room and decided to guarantee $600+ billion in bank losses… and stick the American people with the consequences.

      This is the same organization that said in February 2021 that there was no inflation.

      The same organization that said in July 2021 that inflation was transitory and would pass in a few months.

      The same organization that said in June 2022 that they finally understand “how little we understand about inflation.”

      The same organization that said THREE DAYS before SVB’s collapse that “nothing about the data” suggested any risks with their policy actions.

      The Fed has been wrong at every critical point over the past few years. And they’ve now unilaterally signed up every single person in America to a $600+ billion bank bailout without so much as a courtesy phone call to Congress.

      This is apparently what Democracy means in America today.

      We’ve all been subjected to endless vitriol over the past few years with people on all sides howling that “Democracy is under attack.”

      Well, we just watched an unelected committee of central bankers hijack democracy and stick the American people with a potential $600+ billion bank bailout.

      *  *  *

      Worried about your savings? Wondering if your bank is next after SVB? You’re not alone. For over a decade, Sovereign Man has seen the writing on the banking wall, and has been warning people about looming crises. The good news? There’s still time to safeguard your savings. Download our brand-new 20-page report entitled “The SVB Collapse: How To Tell If YOUR Bank Is Safe” to discover how you can keep your money safe in a time of sudden banking collapses.

      Tyler Durden
      Fri, 03/17/2023 – 18:10

    Digest powered by RSS Digest